The URL can be used to link to this page

6262C - Construction of Fire Station #4, 3.Statement of Work/ SpecificationsPROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 (Div’s 15-33) FOR Fire Station No. 4 Sherman Drive at Kings Row Denton, Texas ARCHITECT: KIRKPATRICK ARCHITECTURE STUDIO 100 West Mulberry Denton, Texas 76201 940.387.8182 voice Contact: David Robinson david@k-a-studio.com CIVIL ENGINEER:MJ THOMAS ENGINEERING 3973 West Vickery Blvd., Suite 103 Fort Worth, Texas 76107 817.732.9839 voice Contact: Mickey Thomas mickeyt@mjthomaseng.com STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: L.A. FUESS PARTNERS, INC. 3333 Lee Parkway, Suite 300 Dallas, Texas 75219 214.593.1152 voice Contact: Jason Beyer jasonbeyer@lafp.com MEP ENGINEERS: MD ENGINEERING, LLP 500 North Central Expressway, Suite 310 Plano, Texas 75074 469.467.0200 voice Contact: Michael Smith msmith@md-eng.com LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: CHRISTOPHER RUSSELL 5925 La Vista, Suite 3 Dallas, Texas 75206 214.695.7344 voice Contact: Chris Russell chris@christopher-russell.com LIGHTING DESIGNER: EX DESIGN GROUP 326 Howell Street Dallas, Texas 75207 972.360.6490 voice Contact: Victor Menendez victor@exdesigngroup.com DATE: 20 July 2016 (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 DOCUMENT 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000100 Title Page ..............................................................................13 June 2016 000110 Table of Contents ...................................................................13 June 2016 003132 Geotechnical Data ..................................................................13 June 2016 Geotechnical Report for Denton Fire Station No. 4 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary ..............................................................................13 June 2016 012100 Allowances .............................................................................13 June 2016 012200 Unit Prices ..............................................................................13 June 2016 012300 Alternates ..............................................................................13 June 2016 012500 Substitution Procedures .........................................................13 June 2016 012500.13 Substitution Request Form .....................................................13 June 2016 012600 Contract Modification Procedures ..........................................13 June 2016 012900 Payment Procedures ..............................................................13 June 2016 013100 Project Management & Coordination ......................................13 June 2016 013200 Construction Progress Documentation ...................................13 June 2016 013233 Photographic Documentation .................................................13 June 2016 013300 Submittal Procedures .............................................................13 June 2016 013520 LEED Requirements ...............................................................13 June 2016 LEED Credit Checklist Material Reporting Form VOC Reporting Form 014000 Quality Requirements .............................................................13 June 2016 014200 References .............................................................................13 June 2016 014339 Mock-Up Wall Construction ....................................................13 June 2016 015000 Temporary Facilities & Controls .............................................13 June 2016 015639 Temporary Tree & Plant Protection ........................................13 June 2016 015713 Erosion & Sedimentation Control ...........................................13 June 2016 015720 Indoor Air Quality Plan During Construction ...........................13 June 2016 016000 Product Requirements ............................................................13 June 2016 017300 Execution ..............................................................................13 June 2016 017419 Construction Waste Management & Disposal ........................13 June 2016 017700 Closeout Procedures ..............................................................13 June 2016 017823 Operation & Maintenance Data ..............................................13 June 2016 017839 Project Record Documents .....................................................13 June 2016 017900 Demonstration & Training .......................................................13 June 2016 018119 Indoor Air Quality Requirements ............................................13 June 2016 019113 General Commissioning Requirements ..................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024100 Demolition (C) ........................................................................13 June 2016 024116 Structure Demolition ...............................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 031100 Concrete Forming for Civil Work (C) ......................................13 June 2016 031100 Structural Concrete Formwork (S) ..........................................13 June 2016 032000 Concrete Reinforcing for Civil Work (C)..................................13 June 2016 032000 Concrete Reinforcing (S) ........................................................13 June 2016 033000 Cast -In-Place Concrete for Civil Work (C) .............................13 June 2016 033100 Structural Concrete (S) ...........................................................13 June 2016 033536 Polished Concrete Finish-Premium ........................................13 June 2016 036214 Grouting Steel Base Plates (S) ...............................................13 June 2016 NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 042000 Unit Masonry ..........................................................................13 June 2016 047200 Precast Concrete ....................................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 05 - METALS 051200 Structural Steel (S) .................................................................13 June 2016 052123 Steel Joists & Joist Girders (S) ...............................................13 June 2016 053113 Composite Metal Floor Deck & Field Welded Shear Studs (S) ......................................................................13 June 2016 053123 Metal Roof Deck (S) ...............................................................13 June 2016 054000 Structural Light Gage Steel Framing (S).................................13 June 2016 054400 Prefabricated Cold Formed Steel Trusses (S) ........................13 June 2016 055000 Metal Fabrications .................................................................13 June 2016 055120 Prefabricated Steel Stair System ............................................13 June 2016 055213 Pipe & Tube Railings ..............................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry ............................................13 June 2016 061600 Sheathing .............................................................................13 June 2016 061800 Glued-Laminated Structural Wood (S) ...................................13 June 2016 062023 Interior Finish Carpentry .........................................................13 June 2016 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets ......................13 June 2016 066400 Plastic Paneling ......................................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing ......................................................13 June 2016 072100 Thermal Insulation ..................................................................13 June 2016 072600 Under Slab Vapor Barrier .......................................................13 June 2016 072726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers .....................................13 June 2016 072730 SPF Insulation ........................................................................13 June 2016 074100 Metal Roof Panels ..................................................................13 June 2016 076210 Flexible Flashing ....................................................................13 June 2016 077100 Roof Specialties .....................................................................13 June 2016 077253 Snow Guards ..........................................................................13 June 2016 078413 Penetration Firestopping ........................................................13 June 2016 078446 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems ..................................................13 June 2016 079200 Joint Sealants .........................................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ............................................13 June 2016 081416 Flush Wood Doors ..................................................................13 June 2016 083113 Access Doors & Frames .........................................................13 June 2016 083326 Overhead Coiling Grilles.........................................................13 June 2016 083513 Panel Folding Doors ...............................................................13 June 2016 083613 Sectional Doors ......................................................................13 June 2016 084113 Aluminum Framed Entrances & Storefronts ...........................13 June 2016 086250 Tubular Daylighting Device .....................................................13 June 2016 087100 Door Hardware .......................................................................13 June 2016 088000 Glazing ..............................................................................13 June 2016 088300 Mirrors .............................................................................13 June 2016 089119 Fixed Louvers .........................................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing ................................................13 June 2016 092900 Gypsum Board .......................................................................13 June 2016 093013 Ceramic Tiling ........................................................................13 June 2016 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings .......................................................13 June 2016 095429 Wood Panel Ceilings ..............................................................13 June 2016 096240 Sport Flooring .........................................................................13 June 2016 096513 Resilient Base & Accessories .................................................13 June 2016 096516 Resilient Sheet Flooring .........................................................13 June 2016 096813 Tile Carpeting .........................................................................13 June 2016 NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 098116 Acoustical Blanket Insulation ..................................................13 June 2016 099100 Painting ..............................................................................13 June 2016 099450 Decorative Exterior Finish System .........................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101400 Signage ..............................................................................13 June 2016 101453 Traffic Signage (C) .................................................................13 June 2016 102600 Wall & Door Protection ...........................................................13 June 2016 102800 Toilet, Bath & Laundry Accessories ........................................13 June 2016 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets .........................................................13 June 2016 104416 Fire Extinguishers ...................................................................13 June 2016 105510 Turn-Out Gear Lockers...........................................................13 June 2016 107114 Fixed Aluminum Sun Screens ................................................13 June 2016 107516 Ground-Set Flagpoles ..........................................................13 June 2016 109900 Miscellaneous Specialties ......................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 113100 Residential Appliances ...........................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122112 Horizontal Louver Blinds - Aluminum .....................................13 June 2016 122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds – Wood ...........................................13 June 2016 122413 Roller Window Shades ...........................................................13 June 2016 122414 Blackout Window Shades .......................................................13 June 2016 123616 Metal Countertops ..................................................................13 June 2016 123661 Simulated Stone Countertops .................................................13 June 2016 124813 Entrance Floor Mats & Frames ...............................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – not used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT – not used VOLUME 2 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 211000 Fire Protection System ...........................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing ....................................13 June 2016 220523 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping ..............................13 June 2016 220529 Hangers & Supports for Plumbing Piping & Equipment .........13 June 2016 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping & Equipment .....................13 June 2016 220700 Plumbing Insulation ...............................................................13 June 2016 221100 Facility Water Distribution .......................................................13 June 2016 221123 Domestic Water Pumps ..........................................................13 June 2016 221300 Facility Sanitary Sewerage .....................................................13 June 2016 221423 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewers (C) .................................13 June 2016 223436 Commercial Gas Domestic Water Heater ...............................13 June 2016 224200 Commercial Plumbing Fixtures ...............................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC .........................................13 June 2016 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment .............13 June 2016 230529 Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment ..............13 June 2016 230548 Vibration & Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping & Equipment ..............................................................................13 June 2016 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment ..........................13 June 2016 230593 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing for HVAC ..............................13 June 2016 230700 HVAC Insulation ....................................................................13 June 2016 230900 Instrumentation & Control for HVAC .......................................13 June 2016 230993 Sequence of Operation ..........................................................13 June 2016 231123 Facility Natural Gas Piping .....................................................13 June 2016 NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 232300 Refrigerant Piping ...................................................................13 June 2016 233113 Metal Ducts ............................................................................13 June 2016 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators ........................................................13 June 2016 233516 Vehicle Exhaust Removal / Filtration System .........................13 June 2016 233700 Air Outlets & Inlets ..................................................................13 June 2016 234100 Particulate Air Filtration ..........................................................13 June 2016 235400 Heat Generation Equipment ...................................................13 June 2016 238149 Refrigeration Equipment .........................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260500 Common Work Results for Electrical .....................................13 June 2016 260503 Firestopping ............................................................................13 June 2016 260505 Site Electrical ..........................................................................13 June 2016 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables ..............13 June 2016 260526 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems .........................13 June 2016 260529 Hangers & Supports for Electrical Systems ...........................13 June 2016 260533.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems ...............................................13 June 2016 260533.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems ..................................................13 June 2016 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems .......................................13 June 2016 260573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study ................13 June 2016 260593 Electrical Testing ....................................................................13 June 2016 260620 Disconnect Switches ..............................................................13 June 2016 260943 Network Lighting Controls – Lutron Homeworks QS 120 ......13 June 2016 Bill of Materials Load Schedule Wiring Device Installation Panel Wiring 262116 Low Voltage Underground Electrical Service Entrance ..........13 June 2016 262413 Switchboards ..........................................................................13 June 2016 262416 Panelboards ..........................................................................13 June 2016 262716 Electrical Cabinets & Enclosures ............................................13 June 2016 262726 Wiring Devices ......................................................................13 June 2016 263213 Packaged Engine Generator Set ............................................13 June 2016 263623 Automatic Transfer Switch .....................................................13 June 2016 264100 Facility Lightning Protection ...................................................13 June 2016 264300 Surge Protective Devices .......................................................13 June 2016 265564 Telephone Raceway ...............................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS – not used DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System .................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 310000 Earthwork (C) .........................................................................13 June 2016 310513 Soils for Earthwork (C) ...........................................................13 June 2016 310516 Aggregates for Earthwork (C) .................................................13 June 2016 311100 Clearing & Grubbing (C) .........................................................13 June 2016 311400 Site Preparation (C) ................................................................13 June 2016 312333 Trenching & Backfilling (C) .....................................................13 June 2016 313116 Termite Control .......................................................................13 June 2016 313200 Soil Stabilization (C) ...............................................................13 June 2016 313213 Lime Stabilized Subgrade (C) .................................................13 June 2016 314133 Trench Shielding (C) ..............................................................13 June 2016 315000 Excavation Support & Protection ............................................13 June 2016 316329 Drilled Piers (S) ......................................................................13 June 2016 NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321243 Porous Flexible Paving ...........................................................13 June 2016 321313 Concrete Paving (C) ...............................................................13 June 2016 321373 Sealants & Caulkings (C) .......................................................13 June 2016 321713 Parking Bumpers ....................................................................13 June 2016 321723 Pavement Markings (C) ..........................................................13 June 2016 323100 Enclosed Track Industrial Aluminum Cantilever Gate System (C) .....................................................................13 June 2016 323119 Steel Ornamental Fence System (C) ......................................13 June 2016 323129 Wood Fences & Gates ...........................................................13 June 2016 323132 Fences & Vehicular Slide Gate Operators (C) ........................13 June 2016 328400 Irrigation (L) ............................................................................13 June 2016 329119 Finish Grading for Landscape Areas (L) .................................13 June 2016 329200 Turf Establishment (Hydromulch) (L) ......................................13 June 2016 329300 Landscaping (L) ......................................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping (C) ............................................13 June 2016 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 21 1000 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 21 1000 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide a complete fire protection system for the building as specified, as indicated on the drawings, and as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. The drawings show the general arrangement of plumbing, air conditioning, piping, ductwork, and other apparatus. The Contractor shall coordinate this work with all other construction so that there shall be no conflict as to space required. The mechanical and electrical work shall, in general, take precedence over sprinkler work, except where it is absolutely necessary to maintain required coverage. B. Work Included: 1. Complete fire protection sprinkler system with water service provider approved water meter and vault and all piping, valves, and accessories for a complete system. 2. The requirement that the entire fire protection installation shall be as required by and subject to the approval of all approving authorities, shall govern the installation for this project. The drawings are intended as a guide for the system arrangement; omission of specific indication of any item shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing that item if it is required by the approving authorities. 3. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining from the approving authorities, a certificate of approval or other indication of such approval and acceptance by said Authorities. 4. The system shall be hydraulically designed, based on a flow data obtained from local authorities. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and obtaining this information and incorporating it into his bid and the design C. Design Responsibility and Certification: The designer of the fire protection systems shall be responsible for all design, coordination and approval of each system in order to assure compliance with drawings, specifications, codes and authorities having jurisdiction. Drawings, calculations and other supporting evidence of this design shall be provided to be proper reviewing agencies and to the Architect and shall bear appropriate professional certification that the Designer has met the Quality Assurance requirements. Certification shall be indicative that the Designer acknowledges and accepts full design responsibility. Descriptions and limitations set forth in these specifications must be followed unless more stringent requirements are established by the reviewing agency. 1.4 FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA A. Sprinkler systems shall be designed for the densities shown on the drawings. Hydraulic calculations shall be based on simultaneous operation of heads in the designated area plus flows in the standpipes in accordance with NFPA 13. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. The Contractor shall be licensed to sell, install and service the types of systems required by these City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 21 1000 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 specifications. D. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. The designer of the fire protection systems shall be certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) for Automatic Sprinkler System Design, Level III. The installer shall have on their staff a full-time Responsible Managing Employee (RME) licensed by the State Fire Marshall, to install and service fire protection systems. The RME shall assure that each fire protection system as installed meets the standards as provided by the applicable publications referenced herein and the requirements of these specifications. All design submittal documents and shop drawings shall bear the responsible engineers signed and dated seal. E. All parts of fire protection piping systems shall conform to all provisions of Underwriters' Laboratories requirements. All equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories label of approval. F. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from residual pressure water flow test. G. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. H. All aspects of design, securing approval of design and construction, shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standards, including but not limited to NFPA - 10, 13, 14, 20 and 24, and shall conform in all respects to the rules and regulations of the Building Code and Fire Code of the City in which this project is located, all Factory Mutual requirements and all other approving authorities having jurisdiction. I. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and Factory Mutual standards. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as required in Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical Systems. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, and floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. C. Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties, including manufacturer’s catalogue information. Submit performance ratings rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. Submit two of each style of sprinkler head specified D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds requirements specified, and suggested by listed codes. E. Provide certificate of compliance from authority have jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. Underground pipe to the inside of the building shall be cement lined cast iron or PVC Class 150 (SDR 17) with cast iron Class 250 fittings. B. All sprinkler piping within the building shall be per NFPA schedules with approved compatible fittings and valve connections. Piping may be joined by welding, and/or the use of grooved, flanged or threaded joints and connections. C. Piping service entrance shall utilize fittings to minimize floor space for fire riser. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 2.3 Backflow preventers (BFP) shall be reduced pressure type, Febco 825, or approved equal. A BFP shall be installed to isolate all non-potable water requirements from the building domestic water system. (All BFP's shall be installed within the building, unless otherwise dictated by code authorities.) 2.4 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 21 1000 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. At the points designated on the Contract Drawings, install Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) required for fire protection purposes. From a point on the incoming water supply line, this Contractor shall extend water line for fire protection purposes to Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings). B. Wall type Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) shall be equal to Potter Roemer double clapper flush type Siamese connections having threads complying with the requirements of the Fire Department. They shall have proper caps with pin type lugs attached to the body of the Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) with substantial chains. The plate fitting against the building shall have raised letters reading "AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER" or "STANDPIPE". All external surfaces shall be chromium plated polished surfaces or as directed by Architect. C. Sidewalk type Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) shall be equal to Potter Roemer free standing fire department cast brass body and escutcheon. They shall have proper caps with pin type lugs attached to the body of connection with substantial chains. "STANDPIPE" or "AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER" to be cast on head of connection. All external surfaces shall be chromium plated polished surfaces or as directed by Architect. D. Fire department connection shall be Factory Mutual approved. 2.5 VALVES A. Control valves inside buildings shall be listed 175-pound W.O.G. approved indicating type valve. B. Check valves shall be listed, 175-pound W.O.G. horizontal swing check valves or approved equivalent such as wafer check valves. C. Drain and test valves shall be 175-pound W.O.G., bronze threaded globe valves with renewable composition disc. 2.6 WATER FLOW SWITCHES A. Vane-type waterflow detectors shall be installed on the sprinkler mains. Detector shall be designed for mounting on either vertical or horizontal piping, but shall not be mounted in a fitting or within 12 inches of any fitting that changes the direction of water flow, and shall have a sensitivity setting to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds 10 gpm. B. Detector switch mechanisms shall incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retard element with an adjustable range of 0 to 60 second. Switches shall be suitable for operation on 24-volt D.C., and shall be actuated by a vane extended into the waterway of the piping. Detectors shall be of dust tight construction. Detector switch enclosures shall be secured with a tamper proof bolt that requires the use of a special wrench for removal. Vane-type waterflow detectors shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed. The detector shall be furnished and installed under this section and wired completely under Division 26. C. Water flow switches shall be Factory Mutual approved. 2.7 TAMPER SWITCHES A. Tamper switches shall be installed on each valve inside the building. Switches shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve control or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth (1/5) of the distance from its normal position. The mechanism shall be contained in a weather-proof die cast aluminum housing which shall provide a 3/4 inch tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valve. Switch housings shall be furnished in red baked enamel. The switch mechanism shall have a minimum rated capacity of one amp, 125 A.C. - 0.25 amp, 24 volt D.C. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting. Supervisory switches and gate valve switches shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed. Supervisory switches shall be furnished and installed under this section and wired completely under Division 16. B. Tamper switches shall be Factory Mutual approved. 2.8 SIGNS 2.9 Approved enameled metal signs shall be securely attached at all main drains, auxiliary drains, inspectors' test connections and control valves. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 21 1000 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2.10 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Automatic Sprinklers: Sprinkler heads of proper temperature rating shall be installed throughout the building as required by approving authorities. Where furred or finished ceilings occur, the piping shall be installed above the ceilings with the sprinkler heads nippled through the ceiling and set in metal escutcheon plates. Where lay-in ceilings occur, center the sprinkler heads on each tile. Sprinkler heads shall be, in general, provided as follows: Area Served Type Head Trim Fully finished areas defined as having gypsum board and/or lay-in ceilings Fully concealed head with painted cover (color by Architect) Non-finished areas cover Pendant heads, with cage cover where head is less than 7' AFF and in janitor closets. At the Owner's option, the above may be revised per specific building requirements. Contractor shall price per the above but must verify all final requirements with Architect prior to placing orders. Sprinkler Cabinet: One cabinet with spare sprinklers and a head wrench per NFPA. Install as directed by the Architect. B. Provide spare heads equal to one percent (1%) of the total number of heads installed under the Contract, but not less than ten (10). The heads shall be packed in a suitable wall mounted sprinkler cabinet and shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating heads installed. In addition to the spare heads, the Contractor shall provide not less than one special sprinkler head wrench for each type of head. The cabinet shall be located where directed by the Architect. C. Sprinkler Risers: Shall be equipped with a variable pressure alarm valve including retarding chamber, drain valve, standard trim, and gauges. D. Water Alarm: A water motor alarm shall be connected to each alarm valve and shall discharge to a brass alarm gong located on the exterior of the building as directed by the Architect. Alarm gong finish to be selected by the Architect. The alarm valves shall be Underwriters' Laboratories approved, wet type, connected to water supply and indicated on the Shop Drawings. Each alarm valve shall be provided with a circuit closer. Valves shall conform to the equipment of NFPA Standard No. 13, complete with retarding chamber and pressure switch. E. Water Flow Alarm Switch: Provide, where indicated on the Drawings, McDonnell UL approved line size flow switches. See Division 16 for electrical signal connection by others to these flow switches. F. Drains: Shall be piped to the outside of buildings as part of this work, except in locations where a drain is provided by the plumbing design, specifically for sprinkler system use. G. Piping System Valves: Shall be approved for fire protection piping systems and shall be installed as required by the NFPA. H. Air Compressors: riser mounted, oil-less piston type, direct drive, fully automatic with air intake filters. I. Hangers: Shall be installed as required and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories for use in a sprinkler system. J. Fire Pump: The Contractor shall verify the necessity of a fire pump with the requirements of his sprinkler system design. Should pumps be required by the Contractor's design, the Contractor shall coordinate with all other divisions for providing the revisions to any and all systems effected by this addition. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. All pipe trenches shall be dug to a line and the bottom cleaned and shaped to provide support of the pipe through its entire length.For all requirements for above grade or underground fire main, comply with NFPA-24 Private Fire Service Mains. B. Where plastic pipe (PVC) is installed underground, manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly followed in regard to cover and backfilling materials and procedures. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 21 1000 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 3.2 SPRINKLER PIPING A. Install per NFPA-13 and insofar as possible, all sprinkler system mains and branches shall be installed as close as possible below structural concrete slabs. B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient All piping for all systems shall be coordinated with lighting fixtures, air conditioning ducts, piping, air handling units, and all other obstructions to minimize obstructions with other work prior to installation. C. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. D. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. Provide Fire Department test station, piped to drain. E. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated. F. Center heads in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required. G. Apply paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head and cover plates do not receive field paint finish. H. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. 3.3 HANGERS AND SLEEVES A. All hangers shall be installed and spaced in accordance with NFPA No. 13. B. Sleeves shall be set for all pipes passing through concrete floors and masonry walls. C. Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates at all wall penetrations. 3.4 AUXILIARY DRAINS A. Auxiliary drains consisting of plugs or globe valves and plugs where the capacity of a trapped pipe section exceeds 5 gallons, shall be provided to drain all points in the system that cannot be drained back to a main riser. Field conditions may dictate additional drains which could not be determined for bidding purposes which shall be provided as required by NFPA No. 13. 3.5 INSPECTORS' TEST CONNECTIONS A. Furnish and install inspectors' test connections per NFPA NO. 13. 3.6 CONCEALED WORK A. No work shall be concealed unless first inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 3.7 TESTING A. Hydrostatically test entire standpipe system in accordance with NFPA 14 and sprinkler in accordance with NFPA 13. All piping shall be tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and other approving authority and shall be proved tight. Unsatisfactory workmanship shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the above mentioned persons. Defective materials shall be replaced with new materials and the defective materials removed from the premises. B. Provide certificates to the Owner indicating all testing has been appropriately conducted for each fire protection system. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 22 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide complete plumbing systems where shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following summary of work: 1. Furnish and install a complete sanitary waste and vent system as shown on the drawings, described herein and required to provide a complete code compliant system. 2. Furnish and install a complete domestic cold and hot water piping to all plumbing fixtures and equipment as shown on the drawings, described herein and required to provide a complete code compliant system. 3. Other items and services required to complete the systems. B. Any Alternate Proposals are summarized in Division 01 of the Specifications. The Contractor is directed to refer to all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings for this project to determine the exact extent and scope of the various Alternate Proposals as each pertains to the work of all trades. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current U.S. manufacture, free from defects and of the best quality of their respective kinds. B. Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling, or otherwise damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired at the jobsite. C. Furnishing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed as recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. If required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice and supervisory assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of the equipment being installed. D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame-Spread Properties, Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof. E. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. F. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting screws, keys or other rotating parts which are located so that a person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed properly provided with a guard. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. The contractor must support all pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. C. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. D. Codes: Perform all work in accordance with the latest edition of the following codes: 1. State and city building, fire, plumbing and mechanical codes. 2. International Fire Code - 2009 (NMFC) 3. Uniform Mechanical Code - 2006 (NMMC) 4. Uniform Plumbing Code - 2006 (NMPC) 5. National Electrical Code – 2008 (NMEC) 6. Energy Conservation Code 2006 (NMECC) 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. American with Disabilities Act (ADA) 9. ICC/ANSI A117.1 – 2003 Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities. 10. All authorities having jurisdiction. 11. Architectural code review drawing. E. The Contractor shall comply in every respect with all requirements of National Fire Protection Association, local Fire Department regulations and utility company requirements. In no case does this relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with these Specifications and Drawings where specified conditions are of higher quality than the requirements of the above-specified authorities. Where requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more lenient than the requirements of the above authorities having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall make installations in compliance with the requirements of the above authorities with no extra compensation. F. Where conflicts occur between drawings, specifications or code requirements, the most stringent requirement shall take precedence. G. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organizations are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 3. American Gas Association (AGA). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 6. American Society of Refrigeration, Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 7. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). 8. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 11. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA). 12. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). H. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Act are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 1. B. Engineer will not review electronically transmitted submittals. Submit hard copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 1 and 22 submittal requirements. C. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 22. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in the following paragraph. 3. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in a clear and concise format. All substitutions shall be approved in writing by Architect. The Architect’s decision shall be final. 4. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re- submittal. 5. Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that are were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. 6. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by the Architect, shall become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 7. Sign the submittal as an indication of compliance with the contract documents. Any deviations from the contract documents shall be indicated on the submittal prior to signing. Any deviations not indicated shall be cause for rejection and removal of the non-complying equipment at the Contractor’s expense. D. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section include the following: 1. Piping and Accessories Materials: a. Clearly marked up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications for: 1. Piping material proposed for each system. 2. Valves, cocks, and specialties. 3. Flexible connectors for piping. 4. Flanges. b. l/8" scale (minimum) sanitary sewer, storm water, domestic hot and cold water piping shop drawings showing coordinated piping routing and arrangements with all equipment, accessories and system expansion and contraction compensation methods. 2. Vibration Isolation and Sound Control Materials: a. Submit shop drawings showing the structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam bases, and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's submitted data. b. Furnish layouts of templates to be furnished to fabricators of equipment bases, foundations, and other support systems, as needed for coordination of vibration isolation units with other work. c. Submit shop drawings indicating the scope of vibration isolation work, locations of units and flexible connections. Include support isolation points for piping, motor driven equipment, inertia bases, etc. d. Include schedule of isolation units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, the weight supported and resulting deflection of each unit. e. For spring isolation units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness. f. For spring-and-pad type isolation units, show the basis of spring rate selection for the range of loading weights. 3. Mechanical Identification Materials: a. Clearly marked-up product literature or samples showing compliance with specified materials for: 1. Valve tagging. 2. Pipe marking. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 3. Equipment marking. 4. Insulation: a. Manufacturer's certified data on thermal performance. b. Details, when required, of methods to be used in providing for unusual piping expansion and contraction. c. Manufacturer's data on any alternate insulation material of reduced thickness, including pre-insulated pipe. d. Manufacturer's data on all jacketing materials, sealants and fasteners. e. 5. Plumbing Materials: a. Clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications on: 1. Fixtures, carriers and all accessories. 2. Plumbing equipment. 3. Water hammer arresters. 4. Backflow preventers. 5. Trap primers 6. Trapguards 7. Tempering valves. 6. Heating: a. Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: 1. Water Heaters b. Provide all electrical characteristics. 7. Record Documents: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. 8. Operation and Maintenance Data: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. E. Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost plus ten percent (10%). 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The use of manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase "or equal" is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale. B. Submittals for "equal" items shall, where applicable, include the following data that are not necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards. 5. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in Paragraph 6 below. 6. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Architect/ Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Include shop drawings for all piping and ductwork equipment per Paragraph 1.5 Submittals. Organize in a clear and concise format. C. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if: 1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 mechanical, electrical, architectural or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected. D. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten (10) days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be made only by the prime bidders. Manufacturers, distributors, and sub-contractors shall not make proposals to the Architect for substitutions. E. All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts F. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Architect. G. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified effects and meet the approval of the Architect. 1.8 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES AND ROYALTIES A. Procure all permits and licenses necessary for completion of this project and pay all lawful fees required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. All required certificates of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. B. Pay all fees required for the connection of water, and sewer to utility mains, and any meter fees if required. C. Pay any royalty payments required or fees for the use of patented equipment or systems. Defend all law suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner and/or Architect/Engineer harmless from loss as a result of said suits or claims. 1.9 COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of all component parts of the plumbing systems to assure compatibility of all equipment and performance of the integrated systems in accordance with the requirements of the specifications. Should the Contractor consider any part of the specifications or drawings as rendering his acceptance of such responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive, he shall notify the Engineer before submitting his bid, and the bid shall be accompanied by a written statement of any objections or exceptions to the specifications and drawings. B. The size of plumbing equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Fabrication Drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement. C. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions necessitate rearrangement, or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor shall, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect’s review. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B. Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those shown, or rearrange the equipment, he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Architect review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such changes shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space in question. Identify monetary credits proposed or other benefits of the change. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes or openings City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 in the building structure pertaining to his work and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. 1.11 CONNECTIONS FOR OTHERS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall rough in for and make all water, sewer, etc. connections to all fixtures, equipment, machinery, etc., provided by others in accordance with detailed roughing-in Drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, by actual measurements of the equipment connections, or as detailed. B. After the equipment is set in place, this Contractor shall make all final connections and shall provide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc. C. Provide all air gap fittings required, using materials hereinbefore specified. In each service line connected to an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shutoff valve. On each drain not provided with a trap, provide a suitable trap. D. All pipe fittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected to chrome plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match. E. Provide all galvanized sheet metal ductwork, transition pieces, etc., required for a complete installation. Exposed sheet metal shall be paint-grip type. 1.12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide the record documents associated with the work of Division 22 in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Throughout progress of the Division 22 Work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract Documents that apply to work of Division 22. Changes shall include all addendums issued during bidding. Maintain an accurate record of the location of mechanical service lines and outlets and all outside utilities. C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect. D. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. Match the symbology and format of the base documents. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that a future verification of items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. E. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record Documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings 1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries. 3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 6. Maintain the base drawing format and use the same symbology. 7. Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this section. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts 1. In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of ductwork and piping and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final physical arrangement subject to the Architect's approval. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings. 2. Show on the job set of record drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the centerline of each run of items such as all sleeves and piping, etc., below grade, in walls, or in the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact location: a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "Sanitary Sewer" and the like. b. Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item "under slab," "in ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents 1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 2. Provide CAD electronic files in .dwg format using AutoCAD software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer’s standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained. 3. Provide completed record drawings on CD-R and one full size hard copy of each drawing. 4. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of a preliminary draft of the proposed manual or manuals to the Architect for review and comments. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B. Submit specified number copies of the approved manual to the Architect prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Prepare in accordance with the following standards: Format: Size: Paper: Text: Drawings: 8½" x 11" White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Neatly written or printed 11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiber-board covers with binding mechanism concealed inside the manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all binding is subject to the Architect's approval. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet-and-inches, lbs, and cfm. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Architect, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Name and Address of Work Name of Contractor General subject of this manual Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 E. Contents: Include at least the following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual of all emergency information regarding the installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment provided including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor, and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer's bulletins, drawings, and descriptive data, clearly indicating the precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Such other data as required in other sections of these specifications. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warranty all equipment and workmanship for a period of at least one year after date of substantial completion and replace or repair any faulty equipment or installation at no cost to the Owner for such service during this period, all in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. This warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of time. Nor shall it void any rights guaranteed to the Owner by law. C. Warranties shall be in writing in a form satisfactory to the Owner, and shall be delivered to the Owner before final payment is made. D. Upon completion of the work of Division 22, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the mechanical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil and other foreign material and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Milcor (Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Company) manufacturer, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or DW for non- plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of the door is even with the finished surfaces of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be stainless steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 18" x 18" in size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCCESS DOORS A. In fire-rated walls, access door shall be fire rated same as wall. 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from the Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. B. Make written notice to the Architect adequately in advance of each of the following stages of construction: 1. When all rough-in is complete, but not covered. 2. As specified in all Division 22 sections. 3. At the completion of the work of Division 22. C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified requirements, remove the noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with the specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. 3.3 INSTALLATION METHODS City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 9 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. Unless noted otherwise, piping may be run exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets. Piping exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets shall be run tight against the structure, as required by the Architect, allowing for expansion. B. Conceal piping to be installed as hereinbefore specified. C. Piping suspended from the structure shall be adequately and properly supported on hanger rods or clamps as specified in Section 22 0529 “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”. Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. The contractor must support all pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. D. Where space is limited above ceilings, below concrete beams or other concrete projections, piping shall be sleeved through the beam or projection, rather than hung below. Provide sleeves where required and locate where approved by the Architect. E. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and install into position without springing or forcing. All open ends of pipes shall be capped or otherwise closed until the systems are closed with final connections. F. No pipe joints nearer than 12" to a wall, ceiling or floor penetration will be permitted, unless joint is of the welded type. G. Piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to permit proper flow of the contained material. Piping shall be graded for proper drainage. H. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, which take into consideration conditions to be met at the site and in the building. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after approval from the Architect. I. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping and in connections to equipment. J. All piping shall be clean when it is installed; rust and/or dirt shall be removed. K. Screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Threads shall be cut using graphite and oil applied to the pipe only. When threads are cut on pipes, the ends shall be carefully reamed to remove any burrs. Pipe shall be up-ended and hammered to remove all shavings and foreign material, before installing. L. Requirements for assembling joints in cast iron and copper lines are set forth elsewhere in these specifications. For any special materials, consult the manufacturers for the recommended procedures in assembling the joints. M. This Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to all concealed items of the fire suppression system. N. Install roof pipe penetrations through sleeves, and flash with membrane flashing and roofing mastic compatible with roofing system. Roofing Supplier/Contractor shall approve roof penetration and flashing. O. Properly cap or plug all open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of the system. P. Arrangement: 1. All piping shall be run parallel to building lines and shall be arranged so as not to interfere with removal of other equipment or devices nor to block access to doors, windows, manholes or other access openings. 2. Piping shall be arranged so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles. 3. Piping shall be placed and installed so that there will be no interference with the installation of the equipment, ducts, etc. 4. All piping shall be installed to ensure noiseless circulation. 5. All valves and specialties shall be placed to permit easy operation and access. 6. All piping shall be erected and pitched to ensure proper draining. 7. Piping shall be installed so as to avoid liquid or air pockets throughout the piping system. 8. Eccentric reducers with flat side up shall be used wherever changes in pipe size would cause an air trap. 9. Expansion and contraction of piping shall be provided by expansion loops, bends or expansion joints to prevent injury to connections, piping, equipment or the building. Q. Connections for Removal: 1. Install flanged connections, Victaulic couplings, or unions on all bypasses, ahead of all City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 10 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 traps and at all connections to equipment, where shown on the drawings and where required to facilitate convenient removal of equipment. Piping connections to equipment shall include valves to allow isolating equipment for easy removal. R. Sleeves 1. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. Sleeves shall be per Section 22 0548, “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”. S. Plates 1. Provide spring clamp plates (escutcheons) where pipes are exposed in finished locations of the building and run through walls, floors or ceilings. Plates shall be chrome plated brass and shall be set tight on the pipe and to the building surface. T. Flashing 1. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Specifications for flashing requirements. U. For additional installation requirements, refer to individual sections in Division 22. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of Division 1 of these Specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching work. Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. If cutting and patching is required, it shall be performed by trades specializing in that type work. 2. Perform Architect-approved cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of new work and/or repair. a. Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect. Impact-type equipment will not be used except where specifically acceptable to the Architect. b. Openings in precast concrete slabs or walls for pipes, etc., shall be core drilled to exact size. Oversize the hole to allow for link seals, and to deter pipe corrosion condensation from forming. c. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Architect. d. Openings cut through plaster or drywall shall be cut prior to plaster finish coat or texture coat on drywall. Cutting of the finish coat of plaster or texture coat of drywall will not be permitted unless written approval of the Architect is obtained. e. Openings shall be restored and/or repaired as required to replace the cut surface to an "as-new" and/or "as original" condition. Refer to the appropriate section of the specifications for the material involved. 3. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. 4. Provide all core drilling of holes. Where sleeves and/or blockouts are required, they shall be cut or provided at locations required. On completion of this work or as work progresses, make all repairs and do all patching required as a result of work under this Contract. All patching shall be performed in a manner that will restore the surrounding work to its original condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. 5. Assume responsibility for the proper size of all sleeves and/or blockouts in the building structure pertaining to the work and for providing the correct location of pipe sleeves and/or blockouts. 6. No cutting, boring or excavating which will weaken the structure will be permitted. 3.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 22. Relocate City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 11 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 existing utilities unearthed by excavation as directed by the utility service companies affected. 1. Temporary Services for Construction 2. Provide temporary services in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. When any piece of plumbing equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so, providing that he properly supervises the operation, and has the Architect’s written permission to do so. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of substantial completion, whichever occurs first. C. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance certification will be the same date. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 12 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 3.6 DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION A. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the Drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition. The Contractor may, at his discretion, and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated. B. All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. C. When items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the Contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the Drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities which must remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified. 3.7 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them in dry condition until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed. B. Perform excavation and backfilling in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications including trench safety requirements. C. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth, with allowances made for floor slabs, forms, beams, etc. Ground under piping shall be well compacted before piping is installed. 1. Cut the bottom of the trench or excavation to uniform grade so that pipe will bear on undisturbed soil. 2. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6" below pipe, fill with pea gravel and tamp well. 3. Carefully lay out alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Secure approval of proposed route of pipe before any cutting is begun. D. After pipe lines have been inspected, tested and approved, backfill trenches or excavation with material as recommended by the manufacturer of the type of pipe used. E. Backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free from rocks and debris and shall be pneumatically tamped with 6 inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 95 percent as defined by ASTM Designation D698-57T (Proctor Soil Compaction Test). F. Excavated materials not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed from the site. G. Field check and verify the locations of all underground utilities. Avoid disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are damaged, they shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. H. Compact backfill where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such as pavements, walks, lawns, and similar areas, to a condition equal to undisturbed earth, and restore surface of the area to the condition existing prior to the trenching or excavating operation. I. In a lime stabilized area, the lime stabilization shall be fully restored after the excavation is complete. J. Replace concrete, curbs, paving and other surface improvements cut during excavation to their original condition. 3.8 JOBSITE CONDITIONS City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 13 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Include required work to correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of all Division 22 Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the completion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from the weather, the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of the construction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering; the installation of electric heaters in electrical switchgear and similar equipment to prevent moisture damage. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question. C. Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finished floors, step treads, and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building. D. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 3.9 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rust, rain, humidity and dust. B. Do not receive equipment or materials on the jobsite until adequate space has been provided for storage. C. Provide adequate supports for protection from the ground and erect required shelters for items stored in the open. D. Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with tarpaulins or other protective covering. E. Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen, their tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows and other finish surfaces. F. Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work will be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition. 3.10 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate interface with all work. 2. Where pipes or other fire suppression items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and other equipment, include labor and materials required for extensions, offsets and supports to clear the encroachment. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation of the fire suppression system. 4. Coordinate accepted equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with other trades affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes is the responsibility of the Contractor making the change. B. The Mechanical, Electrical, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of standards referenced elsewhere in these specifications, and structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. C. When the mechanical and electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0500 - 14 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. D. The general installation precedence of materials shall be as follows. Note that if an interference is encountered, this shall guide the contractor in the determination of which trade shall be given the "Right-of-Way". Building lines Structural Members Soil and Drain Piping Condensate Drains Vent Piping Supply, Return, and Outside Air Ductwork Exhaust Ductwork Fire Protection Piping Gas Piping Domestic Water (Cold and Hot) Electrical Conduit E. Where items such as diffusers, thermostats, switches, and control panels are not specifically located on the Drawings, locate as determined in the field by the Architect. Where such items are installed without such specific direction, relocate as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Verify all dimensions and distances. No additional compensation will be allowed because of differences between work shown on the Drawings and actual dimensions and distances at the jobsite. 3.11 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Remove all labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from all piping and accessories installed under this Contract. Flush and treat piping systems per Section 23 0953, “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC”. B. A temporary flushing connection shall be arranged for each section of piping. Water required for flushing shall be furnished by the Contractor. All temporary cross connections for flushing and drainage connections shall be furnished, installed and subsequently removed by the Contractor. C. In filling the systems, be sure to vent in such a manner that the control valves cannot backfill, thus causing foreign matter to be introduced into the valve body. 3.12 PAINTING A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to match appearance of original finish. All work shall be subject to approval by Architect. B. All equipment, piping, conduit, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed areas under Divisions 22 of these Specifications and as hereinafter specified shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted according to the following specification. In the event of a conflict between the specifications referenced, the provisions of this specification shall prevail only for Division 22 work. C. Before painting, materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other foreign materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with the steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0523 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 22 0523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Work included: a. Sanitary drain, waste, and vent piping. b. Storm Drain and Subsoil drainage piping. c. Domestic hot and cold water piping. d. Equipment drains and relief valve piping. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500 “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES A. Materials: Bronze, ductile iron, or cast iron per local codes with screwed, Vic-Press 304™, grooved, or flanged ends for steel pipe and Permalynx push-to-connect, grooved, or solder ends for copper pipe. B. Valve locations: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a valve on each branch serving a restroom. 1. Provide a valve on inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment. 2. Provide valves to isolate individual or group of fixtures and equipment on branch runouts from piping mains. This is in addition to valves at each fixture and equipment. 3. Provide interior shut-off and drain valves on each branch to wall hydrant and hose bibb. 4. Provide valves at the base of domestic water pipe risers. 5. Provide valves as indicated and where required to adequately service parts of systems and equipment. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0523 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 6. Provide valves on hot and cold water lines in cell chases 6'-0" above finished floor at each level. C. Gate Valves: Rated for 200 PSIG WOG: 1. 2-1/2" and below – Nibco T-113 for steel pipe and Nibco S-113, for copper pipe, or approved equal. 2. 3" and above – Victaulic Series 771 (cold water service), Nibco F-619 or engineer approved equal. D. Ball Valves: Rated for 200 psig WOG. 1. 2-1/2" and below – Nibco T-595-Y for steel pipe and NVent PL-200 or Nibco S-595-Y for copper pipe or engineer approved equal. E. Check Valves (Domestic Water System): 1. Swing check valve with bronze or composition disc rated for 200 psig WOG. 2. 2-1/2" and below – Nibco T-413-B, NVent PL-510, or engineer approved equal. 3. 3" and above – Nibco F-918-B, Victaulic Series 716, or engineer approved equal. F. Water Balancing Cocks: 1. Provide cocks with memory stop, Dezurik 100 or approved equal. G. Backflow Preventer: 1. Double check valve assembly consisting of two independently operating, spring loaded check valves, two gate valves, and four test cocks for field testing, Wilkins Model 950 or approved equal. 2. Provide reduced pressure type if required by local codes. H. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Provide arrestors sized in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201, permanently sealed, pre-charged to 60 PSIG, suitable for temperatures up to 250 DegF and maximum 350 PSIG working pressure: Model 650 Series as manufactured by Sioux Chief Mfg. Co. or approved equal. a. Provide at each branch run-off to fixtures or as required by manufacturer and PDI Standard WH-201. b. For laundry applications, Series 660-H or approved equal. I. Butterfly Valves: 1. Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate valves on chilled water and hot water heating lines rated to 150 psig: 2" - 12", with stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide full 360-degree circumferential seating, Victaulic Vic-300 MasterSeal™ or " Crane 21-BRZ (21-BRB under 150 Deg. F). 14" - 24" Victaulic Series W706 or Crane 22F-BRZ (22F-BRB under 150 Deg. F) or engineer approved equal as manufactured by Jenkins, Centerline or Victaulic. J. Gauge Cocks and Manual Air Vents: 1. Provide brass, lever handle cock, 1/4" FPT, as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. K. Dielectric Union s or Waterway Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric unions or waterway fittings at all piping connections (except to valves) between dissimilar metals, Watts No. 3000 series, Victaulic Style 47, or engineer approved equal. L. Trap Primers: 1. Trap primer valve shall be factory assembled, prepiped and shall include a bronze ¾” NPT, WOG rated inlet ball valve, a brass ¾” electronic solenoid valve and a type “L” copper manifold with brass compression fittings. Unit shall include a single point power connection at 120/1/60, a manual override switch, 2 amp breakers and geared 24 hour timer with relay and 5 second dwell function. A code approved atmospheric vacuum breaker shall be included for backflow protection. Complete unit shall be provided in a 16 gauge steel box with access door suitable for flush mounting or NEMA 1 rated box with cover for surface mounting. Trap primers shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. a. "Prime-Rite" PT or PTS as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. or approved equal. b. Trap primers shall be provided on all floor sinks and floor drains, except shower drains. Verify with authority having jurisdiction. M. Trap Guards (If approved by local authority having jurisdiction): City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0523 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1. Trap guard shall be manufactured from smooth, soft, flexible, elastomeric PVC material molded into shape of duck's bill, open on top with curl closure at bottom. The design shall allow for wastewater to open and adequately discharge floor drain through its interior and then close and returns to original molded shape after wastewater discharge is complete. Trap guard shall be as manufactured by ProSet Systems, Inc. or pre- approved equal. 2. Trap guard shall meet the following standards: a. ASME A112.6.3. b. NSF/ANSI 14. c. CSA B 79. 3. Prior to ordering trap guard, contractor shall confirm drain manufacturer provided for project to insure proper fit for trap guard. This shall be indicated on the submittal. 2.2 FLANGES A. Flanges shall be 150 pound; A.S.A. forged steel, raised face, weld neck or slip-on. Slip-on flanges shall be welded both inside and outside. B. Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components. Victaulic Style 741 or W45 flange adapter nipple for sizes 14” through 24”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0529 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 22 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Concrete supports for equipment. 3. Sleeving for plumbing equipment. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500 “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Automatic Sprinkler Pipe Supports: NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. Standpipe System Supports: NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Supports, hangers, anchors, guides and supplementary steel shall be provided for horizontal and vertical piping and shall meet or exceed the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. B. Rod sizes noted are minimum sizes. The structural integrity of the supports is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Hangers Supporting and Contacting Brass or Copper: 1. 3" and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. CT-109, copper plated, split-ring hanger with adjusters. 2. 4" and Larger: Grinnell Fig. CT-65, copper plated, clevis hanger with 2 nuts each rod. 3. Isolate copper or brass from ferrous metals with an approved dielectric material. D. Hangers Supporting Insulated Lines: 1. Outside Diameter of Insulation 6" or Smaller and all Ferrous Pipe 3" Diameter and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. 108, malleable iron, split type with adjustable swivel and locknut. 2. Outside Diameter of Insulation 7" and Larger and all Ferrous Pipe Larger than 3" Diameter: Grinnell Fig. 260, malleable iron, clevis hanger with two nuts on each support. E. Protection Shields for Hangers: 1. Galvanized metal shields shall encircle the lower half of the insulation. 2. Provide shields at hangers on domestic hot and cold water pipes on trapeze type hangers. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0529 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 3. Provide rigid insulation at all shields and hangers, extending a minimum of 6" each side of hanger. 4. Shield gauges shall be as follows: U.S.S. Gauge Insulation Diameter (Galvanized) Up to 3" 22 3" thru 6" 16 Above 6" 12 F. Supports for Vertical Riser Piping: 1. Provide Grinnell Fig. 261 double bolt riser clamps at each floor. Bear on structure. 2. At 8 feet o.c., 2-hole rigid clamps. Kindorf channels and C-105 straps. Support from vertical surfaces. 3. Brass or copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. G. Supports for Vertical and Horizontal Piping in Chases and Partitions: 1. Provide securely anchored supports for pipes serving plumbing fixtures and equipment near the area the pipe penetrates the wall. 2. Supports shall be steel plate, angles or unistruts mounted vertically or horizontally with unistrut clamps P2426, P2008 or P1109. 3. Attach supports to wall or floor construction with clip angles, brackets or other approved anchoring devices. 4. Brass and copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. 2.2 INSERTS A. Provide inserts at each hanger as required for concrete support. Avoid interference with concrete reinforcing. B. Inserts to be malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, and lugs for attaching to forms. C. Provide reinforcing as required to support load. D. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.3 HANGER RODS A. Provide steel hanger rods, threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuous threaded. B. Size hanger rods as follows: Pipe Size Rod Diameter 4" & Smaller 3/8" 5" thru 8" 1/2" 10" & 12" 5/8" 14" & 16" 3/4" 2.4 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves where pipes penetrate floors, walls, foundations, fireproofing, etc. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous movement. Provide a bead of sealant in space between pipe and sleeve. Use link-seal to seal between pipe and sleeve for all slab on grade floor penetrations. C. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for all floor and foundation penetrations. Sleeves shall extend minimum of 2" above finished floor and flush with vertical wall surface. 2.5 TRAPEZES A. Trapezes of Kindorf, Elcen or approved equal may be provided where multiple lines run horizontally at the same elevation. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0529 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2.6 CONCRETE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide concrete pad foundations for the support of equipment such as floor-mounted pumps, etc. B. Unless otherwise noted, concrete pads shall be constructed of not less than 3,000 lb. concrete and not less than 4" high and shall extend on all sides a minimum of 8 inches beyond the limits of the mounted equipment. Pads shall be poured in forms built of new-dressed lumber. All corners of the foundations shall be neatly chamfered 3/4" wide by means of sheet metal of triangular wood strips nailed to the form. Reinforce with No. 4 rebar 6" on center. C. Foundation bolts, 3/4" round-hooked, shall be placed in the forms when the concrete is poured, the bolts being correctly located by means of templates. Each bolt shall be set in a sleeve of size to provide 1/2" clearance around bolt. Allow 1" below the equipment bases for alignment and grouting. After grouting, the forms shall be removed and the surface of the foundations shall be hand rubbed with carborundum. D. Foundation pads for equipment located on the exterior of the building shall be provided as indicated. E. Submit shop drawings of concrete pads for review by the Architect. 2.7 STRAP HANGERS A. Under no circumstances will perforated strap iron or wire be acceptable for hangers on this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipe supports shall be designed and installed to avoid interferences with other piping, hangers, ducts, electrical conduit, supports, building structure, equipment, etc. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction. The type of hanger, method of support, location of support, etc., shall be governed in part by this specification. B. Pipe hangers shall be attached to the structure as follows: 1. Poured-in-Place Concrete: Each hanger rod shall be fitted with a nut at its upper end, which nut shall be set into an Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., listed universal concrete insert placed in the formwork before concrete is poured. 2. Steel Bar Joists: Where pipes and loads are supported under bar joists, hanger rods shall be run through the space between the bottom angles and secured with a washer and two nuts. Where larger lines are supported beneath bar joists, hanger rods shall be secured to angle irons of adequate size. Each angle shall span across two or more joists as required to distribute the weight properly and shall be welded to the joists or otherwise permanently affixed thereto. 3. Steel Beams: Pipes and loads supported under steel beams shall be installed using approved beam clamps. 3.2 SPACING A. Cast iron soil pipe shall be supported on hangers spaced no more than pipe length being installed. B. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes according to MSS SP 69 Tables 3 and 4: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 5: Maximum span, 16 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0529 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 11. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 12. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 13. NPS 10: Maximum span, 22 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 14. NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 15. NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 16. NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 17. NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 18. NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1 NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2 NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3 NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4 NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5 NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 6 NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7 NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 8 NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 9 NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. D. Spacing and rod sizes for other piping materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.3 TRAPEZES A. Trapeze members, including suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Install as noted above. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS A. Install any other special foundations, hangers and supports indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere, or required by installation conditions. 3.5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS A. Provide equipment foundations associated with the work in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for all pad or floor mounted equipment. 3.6 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES A. All hangers and supports for fire standpipe systems and fire sprinkler systems shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. approved types. B. Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be provided for all horizontal and vertical piping as per the project specifications. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity of all supports. All structural hanging materials shall have a factor of safety of 5. D. Anchor points and pipe guides as shown on drawings or as required shall be located and constructed to permit the piping system to take up its expansion and contraction freely in opposite directions away from the anchored points. E. Guide points for expansion joints shall be located and constructed wherever required or shown on drawings and at each side of an expansion joint or loop, to permit only free axial movement in piping systems but shall not be further than 3 pipe diameters on each side of joint. Guides for pipe with expansion joints shall be of the roller type securely welded to structural steel. F. Maximum spacing between pipe supports for steel, cast iron, plastic or copper pipe shall be per local code to prevent excessive stress: (This does not apply where there are concentrated loads between supports.) G. Double bolt riser clamps shall be F & S, F & M, Grinnell or approved equal. H. For copper tubing, supports shall be especially designed for copper tubing and shall be of exact O.D. diameter of tubing and shall be copper plated. I. Roller type supports shall be used for pipes subject to axial movement. They shall be braced so that movement occurs in roller rather than support rods. J. Provide miscellaneous steel required for support of pipes other than steel shown on the structural Drawings. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0529 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 K. In general, all piping shall be supported from only structural building members or approved steel inserts embedded in concrete. Where structural members must be increased in strength and/or additional members added to provide for piping support, the mechanical contractor shall include such anticipated costs in his pricing. 3.7 SUPPORT OF VERTICAL RISERS A. Vertical piping shall be installed in such manner that its weight plus the weight of its contents, covering and appurtenances cannot be concentrated at locations on slabs, beams and other structural elements to exceed the carrying capacity of those members as approved by the structural engineer. B. In all cases, the Contractor shall coordinate the riser support design with the Architect. He shall submit drawings showing weights, points of support, and details of support or anchoring for approval. The Architect must approve the proposed method of support before work is started. The Contractor shall bear all responsibility for materials and workmanship described in this section and shall ensure that all hangers and supports are properly installed. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0553 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 22 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Valve tagging 2. Pipe marking 3. Equipment marking C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. Marking system shall conform to ASME 13.1, latest edition and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.261 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVE TAGS A. Provide a tag for each valve in main and branch piping of domestic water piping systems. 1. Tags shall be 1-1/2" diameter of solid brass with blacked filled stamped characters of 1/4" height above and 1/2" height below. 2. Provide 8" long meter seals for use with valve tags. B. Provide a valve chart with a schedule and location plans for all identified equipment, both in a frame with an acrylic cover to be located as directed by the Architect. 2.2 PIPE MARKERS A. Provide pipe markers for pipes that provide 360 degree visibility with ANSI approved color coded background, color of legend in relation to background color, legend letter size, and length of color field. Additionally, direction of flow arrows shall be printed on the same markers, and words shall be repeated and reversed for use with flow in either direction. 1. Each marker shall be formed with a clear acrylic covering suitable for use outdoors. For diameters 3/4" to 6", marker shall be formed in order to snap on and completely surround the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, provide radius formed markers of same material. 2.3 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Plate shall be black with white letters that appear when the plate is engraved. B. Plate material shall be specifically suited for conditions surrounding the equipment. Outdoor equipment shall require special plate material for outdoor use. C. Plate size shall be as required with lettering size appropriate for the information shown but in no City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0553 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 case less than 1/8" high. Lettering style shall match existing facility standards. D. Nomenclature for plates shall be based on the equipment designations shown on the equipment schedules and as approved by the Architect. 2.4 CONCEALED DEVICES A. Operable devices and equipment located above ceilings shall be marked with color coded W. H. Brady "Tack" type markers. 2.5 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide marking system as manufactured by W. H. Brady Company, Seton, Craftmark, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Place all markers and plates in such locations that they are easily read by a person without assuming awkward or hazardous positions. 3.2 VALVE TAGS A. Secure one valve tag to each valve. 3.3 PIPE MARKERS A. For diameters 3/4" to 6", markers shall snap around the pipe, completely surrounding the pipe. Markers shall not require taping or the use of any adhesive material or fasteners to permanently secure them to the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, secure with stainless steel spring fasteners. B. Install sufficient quantities of markers that tracing of pipe systems can be readily accomplished. Install within three feet before and/or after penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, underground or other non-accessible enclosures; at access doors, manholes or other access points which permit view of concealed piping; and when there is a change in direction of the concealed pipe. Locations in major mechanical rooms shall be labeled at a maximum spacing of every 20 feet. Other piping shall have labels at a maximum spacing of every 30 feet and at least once in every area that the pipe passes over or through. Install additional markers where directed by the Architect. 3.4 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Provide engraved plates for all fire suppression equipment. B. Secure all plates with two self-tapping metal screws with round heads. Alternately, plates may be fastened with "pop" rivets provided no cracking or injury occurs to the plate. Plates attached with adhesives shall not be permitted. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PLUMBING INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0700 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 22 0700 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the insulation of the plumbing systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Factory insulated equipment is excluded from this section of the specifications except that the insulating material characteristics shall equal or exceed those of specified materials for similar service. C. Work Included: 1. Piping: a. All above ground and below ground domestic hot and cold water piping. b. All horizontal sanitary drains handling cooling coil condensate. c. All plumbing items requiring insulation due to rules and regulations for the handicapped. D. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Fiberglass Insulation: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas b. Manville c. Certain Teed 2. Urethane Insulation: a. Armstrong (Armalok) b. Thermacor 3. Mastics: a. Benjamin Foster b. Insul-Coustic c. Chicago Mastic d. Childers Products 4. High Temperature Bonding Cements: Ryder Thermocote 5. PVC Fittings: Zeston, Inc. 1.4 GENERAL A. All materials shall be applied by workmen skilled in this trade. Mechanical fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanent construction. Unsightly work shall be cause for rejection. B. Materials will be applied only after all surfaces have been tested and cleaned. C. All material, jacket, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives shall not exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed of 50 in accordance with ASTM Method E84, UL Standard 723 and NFPA Bulletins 255 and 90A. D. Insulation shall be vermin resistant. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PLUMBING INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0700 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 E. Non-compressible insulation material shall be installed at hangers of cold piping to eliminate through metal conductance. F. Sizing, paint, and pipe shield or saddle shall be provided under other sections of Division 22. G. Insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed. H. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be as listed or energy code as adopted by authority having jurisdiction. However, sufficient insulation shall be provided to eliminate condensation on the cold surfaces and to maintain a maximum exterior insulation surface of 125ºF. (OSHA Standard) on the hot surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION A. Pipe Insulation: 1. Above ground-Johns Manville AP-T preformed one-piece fiberglass with reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil jacket. Include vapor barrier where required. a. Use pre-formed PVC fitting covers with fiberglass inserts. Fiberglass shall be same density as pipe insulation. b. Where insulation is exposed to weather, use Manville Flame-Safe ML, or approved equal, Metal-Jacketed Fiberglass pipe insulation. Attachment shall be made by 1/2" 0.020 aluminum bands with approved closure system. 2. Armstrong Armaflex or equal may be used, in thermally equivalent thicknesses, but only for refrigerant suction lines where codes permit. 3. Condensate drain lines shall be insulated from AC unit to indirect waste termination points and first 10'-0" of horizontal drain line at floor drains receiving condensate. Material shall be closed cell type with 3/4" thick molded pipe covering with a density of 7 lbs. thermal conductivity at 0.28 at 75ºF. Do not split the insulation. All joints shall be glued with manufacturer's adhesive. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Water based, polymeric, UL classified lagging adhesive for applying canvas and glass cloth; Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50. B. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, vapor barrier lap and attachment adhesive; Foster 85- 15 or Childers CP-85. C. Same adhesive, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 85-20 or Childers CP-82. D. A rubber based, UL classified, fast setting contact adhesive for adhering flexible cellular insulation; Foster 82-40 or Armstrong 520. 2.3 EXPANSION AND BALL JOINT INSULATION COVERS A. Furnish and install removable and reusable insulation covers. B. Insulation and jacketing material shall be as required for service temperatures. C. Covers shall have hook and loop fasteners and draw cords. 2.4 INSULATION THICKNESS A. Piping insulation thickness based on a maximum k value of 0.23 Btu in/hr ft² F at a mean temperature of 75F. Pipe Sizes System Runouts To 12 ft. Max. 1 1/2 " and Less 1 1/2” Up Domestic hot water 1" 1" 2" City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PLUMBING INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0700 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 Domestic cold water. 1" 1" 1" Horizontal drain bodies. EWC traps and tailpieces. Condensate drain piping. 1" 1" 1" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The installation of all insulation shall be made by experienced craftsmen in a neat, workmanlike manner and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations for service intended, as interpreted by the Architect. B. All adhesives used in conjunction with insulation shall be compatible with the insulation and vapor barrier used and be vermin-proof and mildew resistant. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Insulation shall be the full specified thickness, continuous through walls, floors, ceilings, etc. Reducing thickness or cutting back of insulation to pass obstructions or through sleeves will not be permitted. C. Valve and fitting insulation shall be built up to the thickness of the adjacent pipe insulation or may be factory prefabricated units at the Contractor's option. D. Any painting of pipe insulation shall be accomplished under the Painting Section. After finish painting, any insulation showing splits or other signs of poor workmanship shall be replaced. E. No part of any system shall be insulated until all required tests have been completed. F. All insulation shall be installed so that it does not interfere with the functions of thermometer wells, gage connections and/or cocks, unions, access panels, hand holes, manholes, sight glasses, etc., or obscure serial numbers or other nameplate data. G. Insulation shall be extended to include stiff leg supports as required to prevent sweating. H. Complete vapor barriers to prevent sweating shall be installed on all cold systems and equipment. If a single tape adhesive system or staples are used for closure of the longitudinal lap, a vapor barrier mastic must be used to ensure a vaporproof closure. All edges and abutments shall be sealed, waterproof and vaporproof. Supplier of jacket materials shall certify that the material proposed is approved for use in return air plenums, where applicable. I. Where necessary, the application of insulation shall be arranged to accommodate movement of piping due to thermal expansion and/or contraction. J. Exterior Piping: All pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated when installed exposed to weather, shall be insulated, and wrapped with an 0.016" smooth or corrugated aluminum jacket with proper closure system positioned to shed water to make a waterproof assembly. Fittings shall be insulated with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and mitered to fit properly. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. No portion of this insulation shall be concealed prior to approval by the Architect. K. Below Grade Piping: All pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated, when installed below grade shall be insulated and spirally wrapped with open mesh glass tape embedded in asphaltic mastic and then completely covered with waterproof asphaltic mastic so as to make a waterproof assembly. Fittings shall be insulated with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and mitered to fit properly. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. No portion of this insulation shall be concealed before the Architect has checked and approved same. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PLUMBING INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 0700 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 L. Piping supports shall pass completely around the exterior of the finished insulation. Rigid blocks of insulation material shall be provided at all support points. In addition, sheet metal saddles shall be provided at support points in accordance with the following table: Pipe Size Gauge Metal Saddle Length Up to 2-1/2" 18 6" 3" - 5" 16 10" 6" - 8" 16 14" 10" and Over 16 18" M. Saddles shall cover the bottom of the insulation, and saddle edges shall be hemmed or suitably covered to prevent damage to the insulation material. N. The vapor barrier and finish shall be continuous at all support points. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 1100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 22 1100 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Work included: a. Domestic hot and cold water piping. b. Valves. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping: 1. Piping below grade - 2" and smaller shall be Type K copper with wrought copper fittings; piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be cast iron AWWA class 150 water main with mechanical joint fittings. 2. Piping above grade may be Type L copper with wrought copper fittings. Where pipe sizes reduce, no sharp edged orifice type reducers shall be used in grooved pipe systems. 3. Provide lead-free solder joints for all fittings. 4. Provide lead-free solder joints for all fittings. 2.2 VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES A. Materials: Bronze, ductile iron, or cast iron per local codes with screwed, Vic-Press 304™, grooved, or flanged ends for steel pipe and Permalynx push-to-connect, grooved, or solder ends for copper pipe. B. Valve locations: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a valve on each branch serving a restroom. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 1100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1. Provide a valve on inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment. 2. Provide valves to isolate individual or group of fixtures and equipment on branch runouts from piping mains. This is in addition to valves at each fixture and equipment. 3. Provide interior shut-off and drain valves on each branch to wall hydrant and hose bibb. 4. Provide valves at the base of domestic water pipe risers. 5. Provide valves as indicated and where required to adequately service parts of systems and equipment. 6. Provide valves on hot and cold water lines in cell chases 6'-0" above finished floor at each level. C. Gate Valves: Rated for 200 PSIG WOG: 1. 2-1/2" and below – Nibco T-113 for steel pipe and Nibco S-113, for copper pipe, or approved equal. 2. 3" and above – Victaulic Series 771 (cold water service), Nibco F-619 or engineer approved equal. D. Ball Valves: Rated for 200 psig WOG. 1. 2-1/2" and below – Nibco T-595-Y for steel pipe and NVent PL-200 or Nibco S-595-Y for copper pipe or engineer approved equal. E. Check Valves (Domestic Water System): 1. Swing check valve with bronze or composition disc rated for 200 psig WOG. 2. 2-1/2" and below – Nibco T-413-B, NVent PL-510, or engineer approved equal. 3. 3" and above – Nibco F-918-B, Victaulic Series 716, or engineer approved equal. F. Water Balancing Cocks: 1. Provide cocks with memory stop, Dezurik 100 or approved equal. G. Backflow Preventer: 1. Double check valve assembly consisting of two independently operating, spring loaded check valves, two gate valves, and four test cocks for field testing, Wilkins Model 950 or approved equal. 2. Provide reduced pressure type if required by local codes. H. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Provide arrestors sized in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201, permanently sealed, pre-charged to 60 PSIG, suitable for temperatures up to 250 DegF and maximum 350 PSIG working pressure: Model 650 Series as manufactured by Sioux Chief Mfg. Co. or approved equal. a. Provide at each branch run-off to fixtures or as required by manufacturer and PDI Standard WH-201. b. For laundry applications, Series 660-H or approved equal. I. Butterfly Valves: 1. Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate valves on chilled water and hot water heating lines rated to 150 psig: 2" - 12", with stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide full 360-degree circumferential seating, Victaulic Vic-300 MasterSeal™ or " Crane 21-BRZ (21-BRB under 150 Deg. F). 14" - 24" Victaulic Series W706 or Crane 22F-BRZ (22F-BRB under 150 Deg. F) or engineer approved equal as manufactured by Jenkins, Centerline or Victaulic. J. Gauge Cocks and Manual Air Vents: 1. Provide brass, lever handle cock, 1/4" FPT, as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. K. Dielectric Unions or Waterway Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric unions or waterway fittings at all piping connections (except to valves) between dissimilar metals, Watts No. 3000 series, Victaulic Style 47, or engineer approved equal. L. Trap Primers: 1. Trap primer valve shall be factory assembled, prepiped and shall include a bronze ¾” NPT, WOG rated inlet ball valve, a brass ¾” electronic solenoid valve and a type “L” copper manifold with brass compression fittings. Unit shall include a single point power connection at 120/1/60, a manual override switch, 2 amp breakers and geared 24 hour timer with relay and 5 second dwell function. A code approved atmospheric vacuum breaker shall be included for backflow protection. Complete unit shall be provided in a 16 gauge steel box with access door suitable for flush mounting or NEMA 1 rated box with cover for surface mounting. Trap primers shall be installed per manufacturer’s City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 1100 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 instructions and recommendations. a. "Prime-Rite" PT or PTS as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. or approved equal. b. Trap primers shall be provided on all floor sinks and floor drains, except shower drains. Verify with authority having jurisdiction. M. Trap Guards (If approved by local authority having jurisdiction): 1. Trap guard shall be manufactured from smooth, soft, flexible, elastomeric PVC material molded into shape of duck's bill, open on top with curl closure at bottom. The design shall allow for wastewater to open and adequately discharge floor drain through its interior and then close and returns to original molded shape after wastewater discharge is complete. Trap guard shall be as manufactured by ProSet Systems, Inc. or pre- approved equal. 2. Trap guard shall meet the following standards: a. ASME A112.6.3. b. NSF/ANSI 14. c. CSA B 79. 3. Prior to ordering trap guard, contractor shall confirm drain manufacturer provided for project to insure proper fit for trap guard. This shall be indicated on the submittal. 2.3 FLANGES A. Flanges shall be 150 pound; A.S.A. forged steel, raised face, weld neck or slip-on. Slip-on flanges shall be welded both inside and outside. B. Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components. Victaulic Style 741 or W45 flange adapter nipple for sizes 14” through 24”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents. B. Refer to Section 22 0529, “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for general piping support requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for general installation requirements. Underground Pipe: The bottom of the trench shall be shaped to give substantially uniform support to the lower third of each pipe. Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and in such manner as to form a concentric joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets to flow line. As work progresses, the interior of the pipe shall be cleaned of dirt and foreign materials of any kind. Where cleaning after laying is difficult, a suitable swab or drag shall be kept in the pipe and pulled forward past each joint immediately after joining has been completed. Trenches shall be kept free from water until pipe joining is complete and pipe shall not be laid when condition of trench or weather is unsuitable for such work. At all times when work is not in progress, all open ends of pipe fittings shall be securely closed to the satisfaction of the Architect so that no water, earth or other substance will enter pipe or fittings. B. Erection of Pipe above Grade: Piping shall be properly supported and adequate provisions shall be made for flashing, expansion, contraction, slope and anchorage. All piping shall be cut accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe shall be worked into place without springing and/or forcing, properly clearing all structural elements, finished rooms, windows, doors, and other openings and equipment. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate installation will not be permitted. C. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe will be permitted providing a hydraulic pipe bender is used. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformation will not be acceptable. D. Copper tubing shall be joined by the following method: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 1100 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1. The tubing shall be reamed to remove all burrs from the inside diameter of the pipe. 2. The tubing and fitting shall be sanded or brushed to a uniform bright finish. 3. Apply a paste flux to both tubing and fitting. 4. Fully heat the joined parts and apply solder to the joint. 5. Completely fill the joint with solder, wiping any excess solder outside the joint while still liquid. 6. NVent PermaLynx piping: Prepare copper tube and install in strict accordance with NVENT installation instructions. Pipe ends shall be cleaned, free from indentations, projections, burrs, and foreign matter. Use a tube preparation tool as supplied by NVent to clean and make installation mark. Push copper tube into fittings to installation depth mark, per NVent installation instructions. Keep fittings free of dirt and oil. E. Mitering of pipe to form elbows or notching straight runs to form tees will not be permitted unless shop fabricated by a certified welder. Weldolet or Threadolet fittings may be used in lieu of welding tees. F. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 1123 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 22 1123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all pumps as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work Included 1. In-Line Circulators. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate and performance curves showing pumps meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS A. Shall be centrifugal in-line, all bronze construction, single stage, vertical split case design and shall be capable of being serviced internally without disturbing the piping. The working pressure shall be 175 psig. The impeller shall be of the enclosed type, dynamically and hydraulically balanced, keyed to the shaft and locked down. Provide with mechanical seal and oil lubricated sleeve bearings with readily accessible lubrication port. Pumps shall be coupled to the motor with a spring or resilient type coupling to ensure quiet operation. Provide pumps as manufactured by Grundfoss, Bell and Gossett, Taco, Thrush or Armstrong. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All pumps shall be located as shown or indicated on the drawings and installed as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitations, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 15 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. C. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for testing and start-up. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 1300 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 22 1300 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Work included: a. Sanitary drain, waste, and vent piping. b. Equipment drains and relief valve piping. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Sanitary Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping: 1. Piping underground shall be service weight hub and spigot cast iron pipe and shall extend to above the floor. Joints shall be positive double seal elastomeric compression joints. Compression gaskets shall be in compliance with ASTM C 564. 2. Piping above grade, 1-1/2" or smaller and vent piping, may be threaded galvanized schedule 40 steel or DWV copper. All 2" and larger pipe shall be service weight cast iron hub and spigot conforming to ASTM A 74 or "No Hub" conforming to CISPI 301. 3. Fittings shall be galvanized cast iron drainage fittings for threaded piping, cast iron soil fittings for hub and spigot piping conforming to ASTM A 74 and hubless couplings shall conform to CISPI Standard 310 and shall be listed with NSF International, DWV copper for DWV copper piping. 4. Pipe Manufacturers shall be Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe, or AB&I. 5. Standard Coupling Manufacturers shall be Mission, Tyler, or Anico. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 1300 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 B. Equipment Drains and Relief Valve Piping: 1. All drain piping from air dryers, automatic air vents, pump bases, air handling units, etc., shall be Type L hard drawn copper, not less than connection size. Condensate drains shall be trapped. Extend all equipment drain piping to a suitable drain. 2. All relief valve piping shall be Type L hard drawn copper or schedule 40 steel, not less than valve outlet size. Extend discharge piping to a hub drain or floor receptor as required by local codes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents. B. Refer to Section 22 0529, “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for general piping support requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for general installation requirements. B. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. C. Provide drainage lines with properly specified clean-outs. Locate clean-outs in runs at not more than 75' on center or as required by local codes. Provide clean-outs at base of each soil and waste stack and whenever necessary to make accessible all parts of drainage soil and waste systems whether or not indicated on drawings. Clean-outs located inside detention areas shall have security fasteners. D. Extend clean-outs within chases to near wall and provide access cover compatible with wall construction. E. Provide clean-outs of required size with flashing flange where installed with membrane water proofing. Lubricate threaded clean-out plugs. Provide clearance at clean-out for rodding of drainage system. F. Lubricate threaded clean-out plugs. Provide clearance at clean-out for rodding of drainage system. G. Encase exterior clean-outs in concrete flush with grade. H. Minimum slope of piping shall be in accordance with the following unless otherwise specifically shown on the drawings or specified. Type of Piping or Fluid Conveyed System Component Length for 1" Fall Direction of Fall Sewer, Sanitary through 3” Main or Branch 4 feet Direction of Flow Sewer, Sanitary through 4” and above Main or Branch 8 feet Direction of Flow END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM SEWERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 221423 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 22 1423 - REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM SEWERS AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The work includes the construction of reinforced concrete pipe storm sewers and other miscellaneous drainage structures and appurtenances. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Architect/Engineer in conformance with the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT. B. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for every material unless other noted: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post- consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product unless other noted: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 312333 -Trenching and Backfilling B. Match material requirements under 033000 Reinforced Cast in Place Concrete for Sidewalks and 032000 Concrete Reinforcement PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to the current specifications for reinforced concrete pipe, ASTM Designation C76 of the class shown on the plans. If not otherwise shown on the plans, all reinforced concrete pipes shall be Class Ill. All pipe shall be machine made by a process that will provide for uniform placement of zero slump concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete in the finished product. B. Concrete for Inlets and Appurtenances: Reinforced concrete for inlets shall have a minimum compressive strength at twenty-eight (28) days of 4,000 pounds per square inch and a minimum cement content of five (5) sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete. C. Mortar: Mortar for pipe joints and connections to other drainage structures shall be composed of one (1) part by volume of Portland cement and two (2) parts of sand. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 BEDDING A. All pipe shall receive embedment per the detail on the plans. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavation for storm sewer pipes shall consist of performing all excavation of every description and of whatever substance is encountered to the depth required. All excavated material which is not required for backfill or fill shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. All excavation shall be made by open cut; banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible and, if required, City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 REINFORCED CONCRETE STORM SEWERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 221423 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 shall be properly sheeted and braced. For pipes having an inside diameter of thirty-three (33") inches or less, the trench shall be excavated a minimum of sixteen (16") inches wider than the outside diameter of the pipe. The trench shall be excavated a minimum of sixteen (16") inches wider than the outside diameter of the pipe so that a clear space of not less than eight (8") inches is provided on each side of the pipe. B. Cold Applied, Preformed Plastic Gaskets. These preformed gaskets may be used for sealing tongue and groove concrete pipe sewers. The gasket shall be produced from blends of refined hydrocarbon resins and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert mineral filler and shall contain no solvents, irritating fumes, or obnoxious odors. The gasket joint sealer shall not depend on oxidizing, evaporating, or chemical action for its adhesive or cohesive strength and shall be supplied in extruded rope form of suitable cross section. The gasket joint sealer shall be protected by a removable two piece wrapper designed so that one-half may be removed longitudinally without disturbing the other half to facilitate application. Preformed gaskets shall be Ram-Nek, as manufactured by K T. Snyder Co., Inc. of Houston, Texas, or approved equal. 3.05 BACKFILL A. After the bedding has been prepared and the pipes installed as required, backfill shall be placed in accordance with Section 32 13 13. If the material, when tested, fails to meet the density requirements, the backfill shall be required to be removed and replaced to meet the proper density. B. Backfill shall not be placed until the Architect/Engineer or his representative has observed the trench and authorized the placing of backfill. All debris shall be removed from the trench prior to beginning the backfilling operations. Sheet, shoring and bracing shall be pulled and removed during the progress of the backfilling in such a manner to protect the trench and the pipe. C. Backfilling shall then be brought up to an elevation slightly above the original ground level to allow for subsequent settlement. The top surface of slopes of all backfill shall be neatly graded off in a workmanlike manner, and where select topsoil, sod, or other material is removed and piled separately, such material shall be carefully replaced in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. The top one (1') foot of backfill material shall be of as good quality as the original topsoil which was removed. 3.06 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Inlets: Inlets shall be constructed as shown on the drawings. Excavation shall be made with appropriate equipment with a minimum of interference with adjacent improvements and existing utilities. After installation of inlets, all excavated areas which are not occupied by the inlet shall be backfilled with selected materials from the excavation. The backfill material shall be compacted to not less than ninety-five (95%) percent to one hundred (100%) percent of standard density, in accordance with AASHTO T-99. END OF SECTION 221423 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 3436 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 22 3436 - COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of the heating system as indicated on the drawings and as specified. Provide factory trained start-up service for all equipment. B. Work Included: 1. Condensing Gas Fired Storage Water Heater C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing: The water heater will be listed ETL listed to UL 795 or ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 “Gas Water Heaters” B. ASME Compliance: Water heater shall bear the ASME HLW stamp and be National Board listed. C. Water heaters with full rated input between 199,000 and 300,000 BTU will operate at a minimum 95.3% thermal efficiency at full firing rate when tested to the ANSI Z21.10.3 thermal efficiency test protocol (DOE 10 CFR 431). D. The water heater will comply with current ASHRAE 90.1 requirements. E. Water heater manufacturer certified to the ISO 9001 International Quality System. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties and accessories for each model indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, components, and size of each field connection C. Wiring Diagrams: Detail for wiring power signal, differentiate between manufacture- installed and field-installed wiring D. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include maintenance guide and wiring diagrams. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Storage tank, heating surfaces, and combustion chamber will have a manufacturer’s 15-year warranty (8 years non-prorated, 7 years prorated) covering manufacturing or material defects, waterside or fire side corrosion, leaks, and/or the production of rusty water. Warranties must be directly provided from the water heater manufacturer. Warranties provided by distributors, contractors, sales representatives or third party insurers will not be accepted. B. Burner and all heater parts: 1 year PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDENSING GAS FIRED STORAGE WATER HEATER A. Water heaters will be of the BTU input(s) and storage capacity indicated on the equipment schedule. B. The water heater will be a vertical fire tube, design that is constructed and stamped in accordance with Section IV, Part HLW of the ASME code. Water heater will be National Board Registered for a working pressure of 150 psi and will be pressure tested at 1-1/2 times working pressure. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 3436 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 C. Water heater will be a single-pass, down-fired, fire tube design contained within an integral storage tank. D. Tank, combustion chamber and fire tubes will be unlined. Lined or plated water heaters will not be acceptable. E. Tank, combustion chamber and fire tubes will be constructed from phase-balanced austenitic and ferritic duplex steel with a chemical structure containing a minimum of 21% chromium to prevent corrosion and mill certified per ASTM A 923Methods A to ensure that the product is free of detrimental chemical precipitation that affects corrosion resistance. The material selected shall be tested and certified to pass stress chloride cracking test protocols as defined in ISO 3651-2and ASTM G123 - 00(2005) “Standard Test Method for Evaluating Stress-Corrosion Cracking of Stainless Alloys with Different Nickel Content in Boiling Acidified Sodium Chloride Solution.” F. Tank will be welded utilizing joint designs to minimize volume of weld deposit and heat input. All heat affected zones (HAZ) shall be processed after welding to ensure the HAZ corrosion resistance is consistent with the mill condition base metal chemical composition. Weld procedures (amperage, volts, welding speed, filler metals and shielding gases) utilized shall result in a narrow range of austenite-ferrite microstructure content consistent with phase balanced objectives for welds, HAZ and the base metal. G. All internal and external tank surfaces shall undergo full immersion passivation and pickling processing to meet critical temperature, duration and chemical concentration controls required to complete corrosion resistance restoration of pressure vessel surfaces. Other passivation and pickling methods are not accepted. Immersion passivation and pickling certification documents are required and shall be provided with each product. H. Materials shall meet ASME Section II material requirements and be accepted by NSF 61 for municipal potable water systems. Storage tank materials shall contain more than 80% post-consumer recycled materials and be 100% recyclable. I. All water contacting tank surfaces will be non-porous and exhibit 0% water absorption. J. All tank connections/fittings will be non-ferrous or stainless steel. K. To preserve thermal efficiency, the water heater will not use or require a circulator piped from the hot water outlet to the cold water inlet of the heater for the purpose of temperature control during normal operation. Connection for a building return circulation line will be made to a dedicated hot return fitting at the center of the storage vessel and not the cold inlet piping. Connection to a sidearm tank, if used, will be made to a dedicated hot return fitting at the center of the storage vessel and not the cold inlet piping. L. Finished vessel will not require sacrificial or impressed current anodes and none will be used. Water heaters or sidearm storage tanks that employ anode rods of any type will not be acceptable. M. Combustion will be provided by a premix, fan-assisted surface burner with a gas train meeting UL, ANSI and FM standards for the input specified. N. MASS code requirements for the input specified. O. Burner will be stainless steel. P. Gas train components will capable of self-proportionating gas and air to maintain optimum combustion in response to varying vent pressures. Q. At 199,000 to 399,000 BTU input, the burner will be fixed input. R. Burner NOx emissions will be less than 20 ppm when corrected to 3% oxygen. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMERCIAL GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 3436 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 S. Water heater will be a category IV, condensing appliance and vent through PVC or Polypropylene. Water heater will satisfy requirements for sealed combustion. Vents for inlet air and exhaust can terminate in different pressure zones. T. WATER HEATER TRIM a. As a minimum, the heater will be equipped with the following: i. electronic flame monitoring ii. electronic low water cutoff iii. an immersion operating control iv. an immersion UL listed temperature limiting device v. an ASME- rated temperature and pressure relief valve vi. and options as selected on form PV 8293 U. Operating and safety controls shall meet the requirements of UL 795 and FM V. The water heater shall employ an electronic operating control with digital temperature readout. Operator shall be capable of connecting to a building automation system through serial connection using Modbus RTU protocol. W. Provide heaters as manufactured by PVI, A.O. Smith, or Lochinvar. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters level and plumb in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and referenced standards B. Start up on the unit shall be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. A copy of the startup report shall be provided to the owner and submitted in the O&M Manuals. 3.2 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Prior to operation, the factory start-up representative shall, in the presence of the Architect's representative perform all system and equipment checks as prescribed by the manufacturer in his written start-up procedures. B. The factory start-up representative shall place the equipment in operation and record all start-up data. Three copies of all data shall be given to the Architect. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 4200 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 22 4200 - COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating plumbing system inside the building and to points outside the building as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work Included 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Plumbing accessories. 3. Plumbing equipment. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500, “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. All work shall conform to the requirements of applicable codes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install all plumbing fixtures and equipment as scheduled and shown on drawings. All plumbing fixture brass trim shall be so designed that all wearing parts are to be in a standardized renewable operating unit which can be removed without detaching the supply fixture or faucet proper. The standardized renewable operating units are to be interchangeable with all supply fixtures and faucets. All exposed metal parts of all fixtures, including faucets, waste fittings, waste plugs, strainers, flush valves, traps, supplies, nipples and escutcheons shall be chromium plated brass, unless other materials or finish is specified. Angle stops with S.P.S. brass nipples from wall to stops shall be provided on all water supplies to fixtures. Fixture trim must be that of the fixture manufacturer wherever possible and must bear a permanent impression of the manufacturer. B. Furnish and install all plumbing fixtures specified herein and shown on plans. Kohler and Just fixtures are specified, however, Crane, Elkay or American Standard may be used if they are equal in all respects to those specified. Contractor shall submit on trim as well as fixtures. C. Wall hung fixtures where scheduled on drawings are to be supported by Josam, Wade, Smith or approved equal chair carriers with integral adjustable fittings. D. Floor drains shall be as scheduled and in accordance with ANSI A112.21.1. Provide caulking flange for connection to cast iron pipe, screwed outlets for connection to steel pipe, and side outlet when shown. Provide suitable clamping device and extensions if required, where installed in connection with waterproofing membrane. (Submit detailed shop drawings for these drains). Double drainage pattern floor drains shall have integral seepage pan for embedding in floor construction, and weep holes to provide adequate drainage from pan to drain pipe. In detention areas drains shall have torx head screws with center dimple to secure top. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 4200 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2.2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. Clean-outs 1. Provide drainage lines with properly specified clean-outs. Locate clean-outs in runs at not more than 75' on center or as required by local codes. Provide clean-outs at base of each soil and waste stack and whenever necessary to make accessible all parts of drainage soil and waste systems whether or not indicated on drawings. Extend clean-outs within chases to near wall and provide access cover compatible with wall construction. Provide clean-outs of required size with flashing flange where installed with membrane water proofing. 2. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and vandal proof non-skid cover; Model 4245 as manufactured by JR Smith or approved equal. 3. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Ferrule type with coated cast iron body and round tapered thread bronze cover; Model 4280 as manufactured by JR Smith or approved equal. 4. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Coated cast iron body, round with scoriated cover Model 4025C in service areas, square with bronze foot traffic cover Model 4045C compatible with floor finish in finished floor areas or carpet clean-out cover where required; clean-outs shall be as manufactured by JR Smith or approved equal. 5. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Cast iron body, cast iron plug, and round flat stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; Model 4402 as manufactured by JR Smith or approved equal. 6. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Cast iron tee with threaded plug. Provide bolted stack clean-outs on vertical rainwater leaders. B. Access Boxes (Coordinate all locations with Architect prior to installation): Provide 18 gauge steel frame and door with heavy duty piano hinge and keyed cam-lock. 1. Walls: a. Provide square frame and secured cover with brushed chrome plate finish in tile walls. b. Provide square frame and cover with bonderized prime-coated steel face and lock in walls of other finished rooms. 2. Ceilings: a. Provide square frame and cover with bonderized prime-coated steel face and lock. 3. Floors: a. Provide plain steel frame with plain nickel-bronze scoriated cover. C. Provide cast brass "P" traps on all sanitary branch waste connections from fixtures or equipment not provided with traps. Exposed traps shall be polished brass chromium plated with nipple and set screw escutcheons. Concealed traps may be wrought cast brass. Slip joints not permitted on sewer side of trap. Traps shall correspond to fittings on cast iron soil pipe or steel pipe respectively, and size shall be as required by connected service or fixture, or as scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Review millwork and other related shop drawings for coordination and ADA requirements. Confirm location and size of fixture and/or opening before rough-in and installation. B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough in and finish work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING PIPING A. The plumbing piping system shall be installed as specified in Section 22 1300, “Facility Sanitary Sewerage”. B. Lubricate threaded clean-out plugs. Provide clearance at clean-out for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior clean-outs in concrete flush with grade. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons to make a watertight finished connection. C. Fixture heights will be defined on the Architectural Drawings. Where the mounting heights vary, the City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 22 4200 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 defined heights as shown on the Architectural Drawings shall prevail. Install components level and plumb. D. All fixtures must be securely fastened to the floor or walls by means of inserts or expansion bolts in concrete work, and by means of expansion bolts, toggle bolts or through bolts in masonry work, and by means of framing and screws in frame construction, to the satisfaction of the Architect. E. Drains 1. Contractor shall install all floor and roof drains according to manufacturer's recommendations. Provide and install all flashing and weatherproofing as required. Adjust extension sections on all drains as required for proper height adjustment. 2. All floor drains to be trapped. Connect floor drains to sanitary waste piping as indicated on plans. 3. Each AC equipment drain opening which normally discharges water (such as air conditioning unit drains, overflows, and similar drips and drains) shall be connected to the drain openings by means of an indirect drain or piped down directly over the floor drains which are provided for this purpose. 4. Each water relief valve discharge shall be piped down to 6 inches above floor, but not necessarily over a floor drain or connected to a drain opening, unless otherwise indicated. No drain piping is required from the discharges or drain valves, unless otherwise indicated. 5. All drains, overflow, condensate and relief, to be routed to nearest trapped hub or floor drain if not shown on drawings. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust stops and regulating valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. B. At completion, clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The General Requirements for Mechanical Work are intended to be complementary to the General Requirements of the Construction Contract. B. Work Included: Provide complete mechanical systems where shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following summary of work: 1. Furnish and install a complete gas system as shown on drawings and described herein. 2. Furnish and install a complete heating and air conditioning system as shown on drawings and described herein. 3. Furnish and install a complete ventilation system as shown on drawings and described herein. 4. Furnish and install a complete smoke removal system as shown on drawings and described herein. 5. Other items and services required to complete the systems. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current U.S. manufacture, free from defects and of the best quality of their respective kinds. B. Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling, or otherwise damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired at the jobsite. C. Furnishing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed as recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. If required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice and supervisory assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of the equipment being installed. D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame-Spread Properties, Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof. E. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. F. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting screws, keys or other rotating parts which are located so that a person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed properly provided with a guard. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. The contractor must support all duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. C. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. D. Codes: Perform all work in accordance with the latest edition of the following codes: 1. State and city building, fire, plumbing and mechanical codes. 2. International Fire Code - 2009 (NMFC) 3. Uniform Mechanical Code - 2006 (NMMC) 4. Uniform Plumbing Code - 2006 (NMPC) 5. National Electrical Code – 2008 (NMEC) 6. Energy Conservation Code 2006 (NMECC) 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. American with Disabilities Act (ADA) 9. ICC/ANSI A117.1 – 2003 Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities. 10. All authorities having jurisdiction. 11. Architectural code review drawing. E. The Contractor shall comply in every respect with all requirements of National Fire Protection Association, local Fire Department regulations and utility company requirements. In no case does this relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with these Specifications and Drawings where specified conditions are of higher quality than the requirements of the above-specified authorities. Where requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more lenient than the requirements of the above authorities having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall make installations in compliance with the requirements of the above authorities with no extra compensation. F. Where conflicts occur between drawings, specifications or code requirements, the most stringent requirement shall take precedence. G. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organizations are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 3. American Gas Association (AGA). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 6. American Society of Refrigeration, Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 7. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). 8. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 11. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA). 12. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). H. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Act are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 1. B. Engineer will not review electronically transmitted submittals. Submit hard copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 1, and 23 submittal requirements. C. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 23. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in the following paragraph. 3. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in a clear and concise format. All substitutions shall be approved in writing by Architect. The Architect’s decision shall be final. 4. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re- submittal. 5. Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that are were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. 6. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by the Architect, shall become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 7. Sign the submittal as an indication of compliance with the contract documents. Any deviations from the contract documents shall be indicated on the submittal prior to signing. Any deviations not indicated shall be cause for rejection and removal of the non-complying equipment at the Contractor’s expense. D. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section include the following: 1. Piping and Accessories Materials: a. Clearly marked up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications for: 1) Piping material proposed for each system. 2) Valves, cocks, and specialties. 3) Flexible connectors for piping. 4) Flanges. b. l/8" scale (minimum) gas, and refrigerant piping shop drawings showing coordinated piping routing and arrangements with all equipment, accessories and system expansion and contraction compensation methods. 2. Vibration Isolation and Sound Control Materials: a. Submit shop drawings showing the structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam bases, and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's submitted data. b. Furnish layouts of templates to be furnished to fabricators of equipment bases, foundations, and other support systems, as needed for coordination of vibration isolation units with other work. c. Submit shop drawings indicating the scope of vibration isolation work, locations of units and flexible connections. Include support isolation points for piping, air handling units, inertia bases, etc. d. Include schedule of isolation units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, the weight supported and resulting deflection of each unit. e. For spring isolation units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness. f. For spring-and-pad type isolation units, show the basis of spring rate selection for the range of loading weights. 3. Mechanical Identification Materials: a. Clearly marked-up product literature or samples showing compliance with specified materials for: 1) Valve tagging. 2) Pipe marking. 3) Equipment marking. 4. Insulation: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 a. Manufacturer's certified data on thermal performance. b. Details, when required, of methods to be used in providing for unusual piping expansion and contraction. c. Manufacturer's data on any alternate insulation material of reduced thickness, including pre-insulated pipe. d. Manufacturer's data on all jacketing materials, sealants and fasteners. 5. Heating: a. Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: 1) Flue pipe and accessories. 2) Unit heaters. b. Provide all electrical characteristics. 6. Refrigeration: a. Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: 1) Condensing Units b. Provide all electrical characteristics. 7. Air Handling: a. Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: 1) AHU, factory assembled. 2) Fan coil units. 3) Filters. b. Provide all electrical characteristics. 8. Ventilation Fans and equipment: a. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. b. Product Data: Submittal data for approval for all fans of every description furnished. Fans driven by 5 (five) HP and larger motors shall include the following: 1) Fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. The recommended range of operation shall be stable. 2) Fans shall be capable of operating stably at reduced loads imposed by means of variable speed drives. 3) Data on sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. 4) Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 5) All data on fan accessories. 6) Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 9. Air Distribution Materials: a. Provide clearly marked-up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: 1) Air devices. 2) 1/4" scale ductwork shop drawings for all systems showing equipment locations, detailed data such as bottom of duct elevations, airstream sizes, all duct accessories, and duct construction details showing compliance with SMACNA requirements for the specified duct pressure of each system. 3) Fire dampers, fire and smoke dampers. 10. Testing and Balancing: a. Brief description of test and balance contractor experience. b. Certificate of Qualification from AABC. c. Biographical information of the Registered Professional Engineer and certified Test and Balance Supervisor proposed to manage the project. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 d. List of instruments to be used with latest date of calibration test for each. e. Test and balance reports. 11. Record Documents: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. 12. Operation and Maintenance Data: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. E. Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost plus ten percent (10%). 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with all provisions of Division 1. B. The use of manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase "or equal" is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale. C. Submittals for "equal" items shall, where applicable, include the following data that are not necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards. 5. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in Paragraph 6 below. 6. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Architect/ Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Include shop drawings for all piping and ductwork equipment per Paragraph 1.5 Submittals. Organize in a clear and concise format. D. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if: 1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the mechanical, electrical, architectural or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected. E. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten (10) days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be made only by the prime bidders. Manufacturers, distributors, and sub-contractors shall not make proposals to the Architect for substitutions. F. All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts G. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Architect. H. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified effects and meet the approval of the Architect. 1.8 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES AND ROYALTIES A. Procure all permits and licenses necessary for completion of this project and pay all lawful fees required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. All required certificates of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities shall be obtained and City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 paid for by the Contractor. B. Pay all fees required for the connection of gas to utility mains, and any meter fees if required. C. Pay any royalty payments required or fees for the use of patented equipment or systems. Defend all law suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner and/or Architect/Engineer harmless from loss as a result of said suits or claims. 1.9 COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of all component parts of the mechanical systems to assure compatibility of all equipment and performance of the integrated systems in accordance with the requirements of the specifications. Should the Contractor consider any part of the specifications or drawings as rendering his acceptance of such responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive, he shall notify the Engineer before submitting his bid, and the bid shall be accompanied by a written statement of any objections or exceptions to the specifications and drawings. B. The size of mechanical and electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Fabrication Drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement. C. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions necessitate rearrangement, or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor shall, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect’s review. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B. Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those shown, or rearrange the equipment, he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Architect review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such changes shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space in question. Identify monetary credits proposed or other benefits of the change. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. 1.11 CONNECTIONS FOR OTHERS A. The Mechanical Contractor shall rough in for and make all gas connections to all equipment, machinery, etc., provided by others in accordance with detailed roughing-in Drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, by actual measurements of the equipment connections, or as detailed. B. After the equipment is set in place, this Contractor shall make all final connections and shall provide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc. C. Provide all air gap fittings required, using materials hereinbefore specified. In each service line connected to an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shutoff valve. On each drain not provided with a trap, provide a suitable trap. D. All pipe fittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected to chrome plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match. E. Provide all galvanized sheet metal ductwork, transition pieces, etc., required for a complete installation. Exposed sheet metal shall be paint-grip type. 1.12 LOCATION OF OUTLETS A. Supply and return air outlets in suspended acoustical tile ceilings shall occur symmetrically in tile joints or in the centers of whole tiles. The final determination of the exact location of each outlet and the arrangement to be followed shall be acceptable to the Architect. B. The drawings show the locations of the various outlets and equipment. Exact locations of these outlets and equipment shall be determined by reference to the general construction plans and to City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing-in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with the other trades. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or equipment before installation, without additional cost. C. The Contractor shall install his work complete and in good working order. If any of the requirements of the drawings and specifications are impossible to perform, or if the installation when made in accordance with such requirements will not perform satisfactorily, he shall report same to the Architect for correction. D. No extra compensation will be allowed for extra work or change caused by failure to comply with the above requirements. 1.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide the record documents associated with the work of Division 23 in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Throughout progress of the Division 23 Work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract Documents that apply to work of Division 23. Changes shall include all addendums issued during bidding. Maintain an accurate record of the location of mechanical service lines and outlets and all outside utilities. C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect. D. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. Match the symbology and format of the base documents. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that a future verification of items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. E. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record Documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings 1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries. 3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 6. Maintain the base drawing format and use the same symbology. 7. Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this section. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts 1. In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of ductwork and piping and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final physical arrangement subject to the Architect's approval. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings. 2. Show on the job set of record drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the centerline of each run of items such as all sleeves and piping, etc., below grade, in walls, or in the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact location: a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "Sanitary Sewer" and the like. b. Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item "under slab," "in ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like. c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents 1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 2. Provide CAD electronic files in .dwg format using AutoCAD software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer’s standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained. 3. Provide completed record drawings on CD-R and one full size hard copy of each drawing. 4. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. 1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of a preliminary draft of the proposed manual or manuals to the Architect for review and comments. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B. Submit specified number copies of the approved manual to the Architect prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Prepare in accordance with the following standards: Format: Size: Paper: Text: Drawings: 8½" x 11" White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Neatly written or printed 11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiber-board covers with binding mechanism concealed inside the manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all binding is subject to the Architect's approval. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet-and-inches, lbs, and cfm. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Architect, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Name and Address of Work Name of Contractor General subject of this manual Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 9 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 E. Contents: Include at least the following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual of all emergency information regarding the installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment provided including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor, and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer's bulletins, drawings, and descriptive data, clearly indicating the precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Such other data as required in other sections of these specifications. 1.15 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warranty all equipment and workmanship for a period of one year after date of substantial completion and replace or repair any faulty equipment or installation at no cost to the Owner for such service during this period, all in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. This warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of time. Nor shall it void any rights guaranteed to the Owner by law. C. Warranties shall be in writing in a form satisfactory to the Owner, and shall be delivered to the Owner before final payment is made. D. Upon completion of the work of Division 23, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the mechanical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil and other foreign material and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Milcor (Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Company) manufacturer, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or DW for non- plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of the door is even with the finished surfaces of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be stainless steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 18" x 18" in size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCCESS DOORS A. In fire-rated walls, access door shall be fire rated same as wall. B. In detention areas provide minimum 16 gauge access door with keyed lock approved by Owner. 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from the Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. B. Make written notice to the Architect adequately in advance of each of the following stages of construction: 1. When all rough-in is complete, but not covered. 2. As specified in all Division 23 sections. 3. At the completion of the work of Division 23. C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified requirements, remove the noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with the specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. 3.3 INSTALLATION METHODS City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 10 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. Unless noted otherwise, piping and ductwork may be run exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets. Piping and ductwork exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets shall be run tight against the structure, as required by the Architect, allowing for expansion. B. Conceal piping and ductwork to be installed as hereinbefore specified. C. Piping suspended from the structure shall be adequately and properly supported on hanger rods or clamps as specified in Section 23 0529 “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment”. Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. The contractor must support all duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. D. Where space is limited above ceilings, below concrete beams or other concrete projections, piping shall be sleeved through the beam or projection, rather than hung below. Provide sleeves where required and locate where approved by the Architect. E. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and install into position without springing or forcing. All open ends of pipes shall be capped or otherwise closed until the systems are closed with final connections. F. No pipe joints nearer than 12" to a wall, ceiling or floor penetration will be permitted, unless joint is of the welded type. G. Piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to permit proper flow of the contained material. Piping shall be graded for proper drainage. H. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, which take into consideration conditions to be met at the site and in the building. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after approval from the Architect. I. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping and in connections to equipment. J. All piping shall be clean when it is installed; rust and/or dirt shall be removed. K. Screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Threads shall be cut using graphite and oil applied to the pipe only. When threads are cut on pipes, the ends shall be carefully reamed to remove any burrs. Pipe shall be up-ended and hammered to remove all shavings and foreign material, before installing. L. Requirements for assembling joints in cast iron and copper lines are set forth elsewhere in these specifications. For any special materials, consult the manufacturers for the recommended procedures in assembling the joints. M. This Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to all concealed items of the fire suppression system. N. Install roof pipe penetrations through sleeves, and flash with membrane flashing and roofing mastic compatible with roofing system. Roofing Supplier/Contractor shall approve roof penetration and flashing. O. For additional installation requirements, refer to individual sections in Division 23. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of Division 1 of these Specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching work. Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. If cutting and patching is required, it shall be performed by trades specializing in that type work. 2. Perform Architect-approved cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of new work and/or repair. a. Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect. Impact-type equipment will not be used except where specifically acceptable to the Architect. b. Openings in precast concrete slabs or walls for pipes, etc., shall be core drilled to exact size. Oversize the hole to allow for link seals, and to deter pipe corrosion condensation from forming. c. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 11 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Architect. d. Openings cut through plaster or drywall shall be cut prior to plaster finish coat or texture coat on drywall. Cutting of the finish coat of plaster or texture coat of drywall will not be permitted unless written approval of the Architect is obtained. e. Openings shall be restored and/or repaired as required to replace the cut surface to an "as-new" and/or "as original" condition. Refer to the appropriate section of the specifications for the material involved. 3. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. 4. Provide all core drilling of holes. Where sleeves and/or blockouts are required, they shall be cut or provided at locations required. On completion of this work or as work progresses, make all repairs and do all patching required as a result of work under this Contract. All patching shall be performed in a manner that will restore the surrounding work to its original condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. 5. Assume responsibility for the proper size of all sleeves and/or blockouts in the building structure pertaining to the work and for providing the correct location of pipe sleeves and/or blockouts. 6. No cutting, boring or excavating which will weaken the structure will be permitted. 3.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 21. Relocate existing utilities unearthed by excavation as directed by the utility service companies affected. 1. Temporary Services for Construction 2. Provide temporary services in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. When any piece of fire suppression equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so, providing that he properly supervises the operation, and has the Architect’s written permission to do so. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of substantial completion, whichever occurs first. C. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance certification will be the same date. 3.6 DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION A. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the Drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition. The Contractor may, at his discretion, and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated. B. All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. C. When items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the Contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 12 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 D. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the Drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities which must remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified. 3.7 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them in dry condition until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed. B. Perform excavation and backfilling in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications including trench safety requirements. C. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth, with allowances made for floor slabs, forms, beams, etc. Ground under piping shall be well compacted before piping is installed. D. Backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free from rocks and debris and shall be pneumatically tamped with 6 inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 95 percent as defined by ASTM Designation D698-57T (Proctor Soil Compaction Test). E. Excavated materials not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed from the site. F. Field check and verify the locations of all underground utilities. Avoid disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are damaged, they shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. G. In a lime stabilized area, the lime stabilization shall be fully restored after the excavation is complete. H. Replace concrete, curbs, paving and other surface improvements cut during excavation to their original condition. 3.8 JOBSITE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Include required work to correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of all Division 21 Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the completion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from the weather, the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of the construction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering; the installation of electric heaters in electrical switchgear and similar equipment to prevent moisture damage. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question. C. Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finished floors, step treads, and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building. D. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 3.9 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rust, rain, humidity and dust. B. Do not receive equipment or materials on the jobsite until adequate space has been provided for storage. C. Provide adequate supports for protection from the ground and erect required shelters for items stored in the open. D. Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with tarpaulins or other protective covering. E. Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen, their tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows and other finish surfaces. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 13 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 F. Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work will be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition. 3.10 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate interface with all work. 2. Where pipes or other fire suppression items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and other equipment, include labor and materials required for extensions, offsets and supports to clear the encroachment. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation of the fire suppression system. 4. Coordinate accepted equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with other trades affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes is the responsibility of the Contractor making the change. B. The Mechanical, Electrical, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of standards referenced elsewhere in these specifications, and structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. C. When the mechanical and electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. D. The general installation precedence of materials shall be as follows. Note that if an interference is encountered, this shall guide the contractor in the determination of which trade shall be given the "Right-of-Way". Building lines Structural Members Soil and Drain Piping Condensate Drains Vent Piping Supply, Return, and Outside Air Ductwork Exhaust Ductwork Fire Protection Piping Gas Piping Domestic Water (Cold and Hot) Electrical Conduit E. Where items such as diffusers, thermostats, switches, and control panels are not specifically located on the Drawings, locate as determined in the field by the Architect. Where such items are installed without such specific direction, relocate as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Verify all dimensions and distances. No additional compensation will be allowed because of differences between work shown on the Drawings and actual dimensions and distances at the jobsite. 3.11 PAINTING City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0500 - 14 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to match appearance of original finish. All work shall be subject to approval by Architect. B. All equipment, piping, conduit, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed areas under Divisions 23 of these Specifications and as hereinafter specified shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted according to the following specification. In the event of a conflict between the specifications referenced, the provisions of this specification shall prevail only for Division 23 work. C. Before painting, materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other foreign materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with the steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0513 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and poly-phase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide a shaft grounding ring for motors used in direct-driven VFD motor applications. D. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3600 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. I. Insulation: Class F (non-inverter duty motors). J. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0513 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. 2.6 MOTOR STARTERS A. Provide motor starters as manufactured by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company. 2. Siemens Energy and Automation. 3. Square D Schneider Electric. 4. Cutler Hammer. B. General: 1. Starters furnished as integral parts of factory-assembled, pre-wired equipment shall conform to the requirements of this Section. 2. All controllers shall be provided with a heavy-duty type push-button station, rated for 10 amperes continuous load at 600 volt or less. 3. Enclosures shall be general purpose NEMA Type 1, except that pushbutton stations installed outside the building or otherwise exposed to the weather shall be NEMA Type 3R, dust and weather tight. NEMA Type 4 enclosures shall be provided for surface mounting, except as otherwise indicated. 4. Pushbutton stations for non-interlocking contactors shall be momentary contact type with start button, stop button, and red indicator light. Where required for delayed "seal-in" or where otherwise noted. C. Manual Motor Starters 1. Provide single-phase, horsepower rated manual motor starters, of sizes and ratings indicated. Equip with manually operated quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanisms; and with one-piece melting alloy type thermal units. Starter to become inoperative when thermal unit is removed. Provide starters with double break, silver alloy contacts, visible from both sides of starter, green pilot lights, and switch capable of being padlocked “OFF”. 2. Provide surface mounted starters in NEMA Type 1 or Type 3 enclosure as required. D. Magnetic Motor Starters 1. Provide fused disconnect switches complete with time delay fuses. 2. Provide contactors with three overload relays. 3. 120 volt holding coil. 4. Provide pilot light in cover, green type. 5. Provide reset button, and Hand-Off-Automatic switch behind lockable cover, field convertible to Off/Auto or Start/Stop pushbutton. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0513 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 6. Provide two sets of normally open auxiliary contacts in addition to standard auxiliary holding contacts supplied with each contactor. 7. Provide surface mounted starters in NEMA Type 1 or Type 3 enclosure as required. E. Combinations Motor Starters 1. Provide fused, 3-pole, load break disconnect switches with RK-1 fuses, rotary operating handle, and lock-off facility. 2. Restrict opening of switch enclosure by the use of a defeater screw, unless switch is in the OFF position. 3. Provide contactors with three overload relays. 4. 120 volt holding coil. 5. Provide pilot light in cover, green. 6. Provide reset button, and Hand-Off-Automatic switch behind lockable cover, field convertible to Off/Auto or Start/Stop pushbutton. 7. Provide two sets of normally open auxiliary contacts in addition to standard auxiliary holding contacts supplied with each contactor. 8. Provide control transformer of sufficient capacity to handle operating coil and associated controls. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOTOR STARTERS A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with Division 16 and equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices complying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL, and NEMA standards. B. In finished areas, mount motor protection switches flush and install suitable cover plates. C. Install heaters correlated with full load current of motors provided. D. Set overload devices to suit motors provided. E. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0529 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 0529 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Concrete supports for equipment. 3. Sleeving for mechanical equipment. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500 “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Automatic Sprinkler Pipe Supports: NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. Standpipe System Supports: NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Supports, hangers, anchors, guides and supplementary steel shall be provided for horizontal and vertical piping and shall meet or exceed the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. B. Rod sizes noted are minimum sizes. The structural integrity of the supports is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Hangers Supporting and Contacting Brass or Copper: 1. 3" and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. CT-109, copper plated, split-ring hanger with adjusters. 2. 4" and Larger: Grinnell Fig. CT-65, copper plated, clevis hanger with 2 nuts each rod. 3. Isolate copper or brass from ferrous metals with an approved dielectric material. D. Hangers Supporting Insulated Lines: 1. Outside Diameter of Insulation 6" or Smaller and all Ferrous Pipe 3" Diameter and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. 108, malleable iron, split type with adjustable swivel and locknut. 2. Outside Diameter of Insulation 7" and Larger and all Ferrous Pipe Larger than 3" Diameter: Grinnell Fig. 260, malleable iron, clevis hanger with two nuts on each support. E. Protection Shields for Hangers: 1. Galvanized metal shields shall encircle the lower half of the insulation. 2. Provide shields at hangers on dual and low temperature pipes on trapeze type hangers. 3. Provide rigid insulation at all shields and hangers, extending a minimum of 6" each side of hanger. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0529 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 4. Shield gauges shall be as follows: U.S.S. Gauge Insulation Diameter (Galvanized) Up to 3" 22 3" thru 6" 16 Above 6" 12 F. Supports for Vertical Riser Piping: 1. Provide Grinnell Fig. 261 double bolt riser clamps at each floor. Bear on structure. 2. At 8 feet o.c., 2-hole rigid clamps. Kindorf channels and C-105 straps. Support from vertical surfaces. 3. Brass or copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. G. Supports for Vertical and Horizontal Piping in Chases and Partitions: 1. Provide securely anchored supports for pipes serving plumbing fixtures and equipment near the area the pipe penetrates the wall. 2. Supports shall be steel plate, angles or unistruts mounted vertically or horizontally with unistrut clamps P2426, P2008 or P1109. 3. Attach supports to wall or floor construction with clip angles, brackets or other approved anchoring devices. 4. Brass and copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. 2.2 INSERTS A. Provide inserts at each hanger as required for concrete support. Avoid interference with concrete reinforcing. B. Inserts to be malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, and lugs for attaching to forms. C. Provide reinforcing as required to support load. D. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.3 HANGER RODS A. Provide steel hanger rods, threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuous threaded. B. Size hanger rods as follows: Pipe Size Rod Diameter 4" & Smaller 3/8" 5" thru 8" 1/2" 10" & 12" 5/8" 14" & 16" 3/4" 2.4 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves where pipes penetrate floors, walls, foundations, fireproofing, etc. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous movement. Provide a bead of sealant in space between pipe and sleeve. Use link-seal to seal between pipe and sleeve for all slab on grade floor penetrations. C. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for all floor and foundation penetrations. Sleeves shall extend minimum of 2" above finished floor and flush with vertical wall surface. 2.5 TRAPEZES A. Trapezes of Kindorf, Elcen or approved equal may be provided where multiple lines run horizontally at the same elevation. 2.6 CONCRETE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENT City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0529 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. Provide concrete pad foundations for the support of equipment such as floor-mounted pumps, air handling units, fans, etc. B. Unless otherwise noted, concrete pads shall be constructed of not less than 3,000 lb. concrete and not less than 4" high and shall extend on all sides a minimum of 8 inches beyond the limits of the mounted equipment. Pads shall be poured in forms built of new-dressed lumber. All corners of the foundations shall be neatly chamfered 3/4" wide by means of sheet metal of triangular wood strips nailed to the form. Reinforce with No. 4 rebar 6" on center. C. Foundation bolts, 3/4" round-hooked, shall be placed in the forms when the concrete is poured, the bolts being correctly located by means of templates. Each bolt shall be set in a sleeve of size to provide 1/2" clearance around bolt. Allow 1" below the equipment bases for alignment and grouting. After grouting, the forms shall be removed and the surface of the foundations shall be hand rubbed with carborundum. D. Foundation pads for equipment located on the exterior of the building shall be provided as indicated. E. Submit shop drawings of concrete pads for review by the Architect. 2.7 STRAP HANGERS A. Under no circumstances will perforated strap iron or wire be acceptable for hangers on this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipe supports shall be designed and installed to avoid interferences with other piping, hangers, ducts, electrical conduit, supports, building structure, equipment, etc. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction. The type of hanger, method of support, location of support, etc., shall be governed in part by this specification. B. Pipe hangers shall be attached to the structure as follows: 1. Poured-in-Place Concrete: Each hanger rod shall be fitted with a nut at its upper end, which nut shall be set into an Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., listed universal concrete insert placed in the formwork before concrete is poured. 2. Steel Bar Joists: Where pipes and loads are supported under bar joists, hanger rods shall be run through the space between the bottom angles and secured with a washer and two nuts. Where larger lines are supported beneath bar joists, hanger rods shall be secured to angle irons of adequate size. Each angle shall span across two or more joists as required to distribute the weight properly and shall be welded to the joists or otherwise permanently affixed thereto. 3. Steel Beams: Pipes and loads supported under steel beams shall be installed using approved beam clamps. 3.2 SPACING A. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes according to MSS SP 69 Tables 3 and 4: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 5: Maximum span, 16 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 11. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 12. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0529 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 13. NPS 10: Maximum span, 22 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 14. NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 15. NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 16. NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 17. NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 18. NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. C. Spacing and rod sizes for other piping materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.3 TRAPEZES A. Trapeze members, including suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Install as noted above. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All hangers and supports for fire standpipe systems and fire sprinkler systems shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. approved types. 3.5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS A. Provide equipment foundations associated with the work in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for all pad or floor mounted equipment. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS A. Install any other special foundations, hangers and supports indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere, or required by installation conditions. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0548 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 0548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The extent of vibration isolation work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by the requirements of this section. B. The types of vibration isolation work specified in this section include the following: 1. Support isolation for motor-driven mechanical equipment. 2. Isolation including support isolation for piping risers. 3. Support isolation of piping. 4. Flexible connections for piping at equipment. C. Refer to other sections of these specifications for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets, flexible connections for piping, and other work related to vibration isolation work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Qualification: Provide each type of vibration isolation unit produced by a specialized manufacturer, with not less than 5 years' successful experience in the production of units similar to those for the project. 1. Except as otherwise indicated obtain support isolation units from a single manufacturer. 2. Engage the manufacturer to provide technical supervision of the installation of support isolation units produced by him, and of associated inertia bases (if any). B. Manufacturer: Acceptable vibration isolation support unit manufacturers are as follows: 1. Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. 3. Amber Booth 4. Peabody Kinetics C. Manufacturer Certification: Where vibration isolation support units are indicated for a minimum static deflection, provide manufacturer's certification that units have been tested and comply with the indicated requirements. D. All items of equipment, whether suspended, floor mounted or otherwise supported, which are capable of producing vibration, shall be installed with vibration isolation. The isolation shall prevent the transmission of objectionable noise or vibration to the building structure. E. Submit for approval data showing disturbing frequency, supported weight, static deflection or natural frequency, and calculations supporting same for each isolator. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data, Vibration Isolation: 1. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, detailed drawings, performance characteristics data and installation instructions for each type of unit required. 2. Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness, natural frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment. 3. Where required, include independent test agencies certified report of test results for each type of unit. 4. For spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness. 5. For spring-and-pad-type units show basis of spring-rate selection for range of loading weights. 6. Include performance certifications where required. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0548 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ISOLATION MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS A. Double deflection neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.35". All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom so they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes shall be provided where bolting is required. On equipment such as small vent sets and close coupled pumps, steel rails shall be used above the mountings to compensate for the overhang. B. Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. C. Vibration hangers shall be as described above, but they shall be precompressed to the rated deflection so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be indicated by a scale. D. Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short-circuiting. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring diameters and hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to spring through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have as minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Hangers shall be provided with an eyebolt on the spring end and provision to attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps. E. Vibration isolator shall be steel members welded to height saving brackets to cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. Members shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent strains in the equipment. F. Flexible neoprene connectors shall be used on all equipment as indicated on the drawings. They shall be manufactured of multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene. No steel wire or rings shall be used as pressure reinforcement. Straight connectors shall have two spheres. Neoprene elbows shall have a single sphere forming the corner of the joint itself. Connectors up to and including 2" diameter may have threaded ends. Connectors 2-1/2" and larger shall have floating steel flanges. All connectors shall be rated a minimum of 150 psi at 200 degrees F. All sizes operating at pressures above 100 psi shall employ control cables with end fittings isolated from the anchoring plates by means of 1/2" thick bridge bearing neoprene washer bushings designed for a maximum of 1000 psi. G. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3" and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Lengths shall be as tabulated: Flanges Male Nipples 3 x 14 10 x 26 1/2 x 9 1-1/2 x 13 4 x 15 12 x 28 3/4 x 10 2 x 14 5 x 19 14 x 30 1 x 11 2-1/2 x 18 6 x 20 16 x 32 1-1/4 x 12 8 x 22 H. Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be type BSS. I. Where piping passes through equipment walls, floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator shall be a split seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4" or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0548 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1" past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 degrees F., 10# density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge. J. Isolator pads shall be neoprene waffle rated for 60#/sq. in. K. Pipe Riser Isolators: Provide manufacturer's standard pad-type isolator bonded to steel plate, formed for welding to pipe sleeve extension. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS A. General: Comply with the minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, including the definitions of critical and non-critical locations, for the selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. General: Apply the types of vibration isolation materials and units indicated at the locations shown or scheduled. Selection is Contractor's option where more than one type is indicated. B. Provide Neoprene Pads at the following locations/items of equipment: 1. Where shown on drawings. C. Provide Vibration Isolation Springs for the following items of equipment: 1. Where shown on drawings. D. Provide Spring Isolator, housed at the following items of equipment: 1. Where shown on drawings. E. Provide Isolation Hangers for the following: 1. Piping connected to machinery. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for the installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. 2. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. 3. Remove spacer blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection during shipping or against overloading during installation. 4. Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. 5. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. 6. Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that a minimum of 2" clearance below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed and loaded for operation. 7. Locate isolation hangers as near the overhead support structure as possible. 8. Weld riser isolator units in place as required preventing displacement from loading and operations. 3.4 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe the installation of other work related to vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work; and, after completion of other related work (but before equipment startup), shall furnish a written report to the Contractor listing observed inadequacies for proper operation and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be limited to the following: 1. Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration isolators. 2. Piping connections including flexible connections. 3. Passage of piping which is to be isolated through walls and floors. B. Do not start-up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the vibration isolation Installer. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0553 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Valve tagging 2. Pipe marking 3. Equipment marking C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500, “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. Marking system shall conform to ASME 13.1, latest edition and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.261 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVE TAGS A. Provide a tag for each valve in main and branch piping of natural gas and refrigerant piping systems. 1. Tags shall be 1-1/2" diameter of solid brass with blacked filled stamped characters of 1/4" height above and 1/2" height below. 2. Provide 8" long meter seals for use with valve tags. B. Provide a valve chart with a schedule and location plans for all identified equipment, both in a frame with an acrylic cover to be located as directed by the Architect. 2.2 PIPE MARKERS A. Provide pipe markers for pipes that provide 360 degree visibility with ANSI approved color coded background, color of legend in relation to background color, legend letter size, and length of color field. Additionally, direction of flow arrows shall be printed on the same markers, and words shall be repeated and reversed for use with flow in either direction. 1. Each marker shall be formed with a clear acrylic covering suitable for use outdoors. 2. For diameters 3/4" to 6", marker shall be formed in order to snap on and completely surround the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, provide radius formed markers of same material. 2.3 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Plate shall be black with white letters that appear when the plate is engraved. B. Plate material shall be specifically suited for conditions surrounding the equipment. Outdoor equipment shall require special plate material for outdoor use. C. Plate size shall be as required with lettering size appropriate for the information shown but in no City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0553 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 case less than 1/8" high. Lettering style shall match existing facility standards. D. Nomenclature for plates shall be based on the equipment designations shown on the equipment schedules and as approved by the Architect. 2.4 CONCEALED DEVICES A. Operable devices and equipment located above ceilings shall be marked with color coded W. H. Brady "Tack" type markers. 2.5 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide marking system as manufactured by W. H. Brady Company, Seton, Craftmark, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Place all markers and plates in such locations that they are easily read by a person without assuming awkward or hazardous positions. 3.2 VALVE TAGS A. Secure one valve tag to each valve. 3.3 PIPE MARKERS A. For diameters 3/4" to 6", markers shall snap around the pipe, completely surrounding the pipe. Markers shall not require taping or the use of any adhesive material or fasteners to permanently secure them to the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, secure with stainless steel spring fasteners. B. Install sufficient quantities of markers that tracing of pipe systems can be readily accomplished. Install within three feet before and/or after penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, underground or other non-accessible enclosures; at access doors, manholes or other access points which permit view of concealed piping; and when there is a change in direction of the concealed pipe. Locations in major mechanical rooms shall be labeled at a maximum spacing of every 20 feet. Other piping shall have labels at a maximum spacing of every 30 feet and at least once in every area that the pipe passes over or through. Install additional markers where directed by the Architect. 3.4 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Provide engraved plates for all HVAC equipment and all remote mounted starter/disconnects. B. Secure all plates with two self-tapping metal screws with round heads. Alternately, plates may be fastened with "pop" rivets provided no cracking or injury occurs to the plate. Plates attached with adhesives shall not be permitted. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0593 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Testing and Balancing Agency Qualifications 1. The testing, adjusting, and balancing of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems shall be performed by a technical firm or balancing agency certified in Air and Hydronic TAB and system commissioning by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). The TAB agency shall also employ a permanent full time Registered Professional Engineer on staff with a minimum of five years specialized experience in testing and balancing. The testing and balancing agency shall possess calibrated instruments, qualified engineers, and skilled technicians to perform required tests in accordance with the AABC National Standards. 2. The testing and balancing agency shall be an independent firm separate and distinct from; not to be associated with, or be subsidiary of a firm performing work under other Sections of Division 22 & 23 and shall be under contract directly to the Owner. B. Testing and Balancing Agency Responsibilities 1. Submittals a. Engineer and Technicians Data: Submit proof that the agency, the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified. b. Sample Form: Submit sample forms, proposed for use on this project, for approval. c. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Certified Agency. 2. Review the construction documents, submittal, and shop drawings for balance ability. Submit a list of suggestions or recommendations to the Architect/Engineer for consideration. 3. Perform a job site observation prior to the ceiling installation to verify that ductwork, piping, dampers, valves, and air terminal devices have been installed per the contract documents. Submit in writing to the Architect/Engineer a list of any discrepancies noted. 4. Test, adjust and balance the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in accordance with AABC National Standards for field measurement. 5. Verify the operation, calibration, and set points of all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems controls. 6. Functional performance tests of the control and smoke purge system and its components. 7. Submit in writing to the Architect/Engineer a list of deficiencies for correction by the installing contractor. In the event a deficiency remains after being reported as corrected, the balancing agency may submit an itemized request for its lost time for payment by the installing contractor. All deficiencies that prevent proper T&B work from being completed shall be corrected prior to submittal of the Final T&B Report. 8. Measure and record space temperature readings after occupancy for a period of two consecutive eight hour periods. Make adjustments if necessary to achieve an even temperature distribution. 9. Submit six copies of a certified, bound, typewritten report for approval by the Owner and Architect/Engineer including all test report data, instrument calibration, and schematic drawings of the HVAC layout. 10. Provide preliminary smoke testing and smoke testing for all authorities having jurisdiction. Preliminary smoke testing must be completed in the presence of the architect/engineer and must be completed a minimum of 14 days prior to any smoke tests scheduled for authorities having jurisdiction. Provide all materials required to perform smoke tests. 11. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained. Submit a report of the findings to the Owner and Architect/Engineer. 12. Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from which the initial adjustments were made. At that time, make any necessary modifications to the initial City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0593 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the system for all seasons. Submit a report of the findings to the Owner and Engineer. C. Contractor Responsibilities 1. The Contractor shall provide the T&B firm with copies of all Drawings, Specifications, Shop Drawings, Submittal Data, Up-to-Date Revisions, Change Orders, and other data required for planning, preparation and execution of the T&B work. 2. Coordinate the HVAC installation and start up schedule with the T&B Agency and General Contractor to allow sufficient time prior to the completion date for testing and balancing to be conducted and deficiency items corrected and retested. Provide sufficient personnel and utilities to operate the HVAC systems during normal and overtime hours to meet the completion date and testing and balancing schedule. 3. The Mechanical Contractor shall install all systems complete and provide balancing valves, test plugs, thermometer wells, flow measurement orifices, volume dampers, splitter dampers, etc. necessary for T&B work. All equipment shall be operated at the Contractor’s expense for a minimum of three consecutive days prior to balancing in order to make certain the equipment is free from mechanical defects, runs smoothly and quietly, and performs satisfactorily to meet the requirements set forth in the contract documents. 4. Provide written notification to the T&B agency and General Contractor the systems are ready for balancing. Should the systems not be ready for balancing, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to compensate the T&B Agency for time lost. 5. Correct any deficiency items noted during testing and balancing including controls calibration, installation of balancing devices, sheave replacements, and motor replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide written notification to the Testing and Balancing Agency and General Contractor when systems are ready for retesting. Should the systems not be ready for retesting it shall be the Contractors responsibility to compensate the T&B Agency for time lost. 6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install all valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices in a manner that will leave them accessible and readily adjustable. 7. The Control Contractor shall provide and install the control system, complete with all temperature, pressure and humidity sensors installed and calibrated for accurate control. 8. Perform all tests of plumbing and piping systems and equipment as specified herein and as required to obtain approvals from all authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Provide all instruments, materials and labor to perform the testing and to obtain and record all measurements. 10. The Contractor is to perform duct leakage testing in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual and maintain a log book on site indicating the area tested, date tested, leakage amount, and personnel performing the test. At the end of the project submit a final type written report with the results. The test and balance agency is to be notified one week prior to duct leakage testing and at their option witness the testing to confirm the testing is being performed in accordance with these specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. The balancing agency shall have a complete set of instruments as required by AABC standards. B. Calibration histories for each instrument used for measurement shall be available for examination. Calibration, accuracy, and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with AABC standards. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Equipment, piping, valves, fittings and fixtures shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings and foreign matter that may have accumulated from operation of the system during the test. Any stoppage, discoloration or other damage to the finish, furnishings or parts of the building, due to the Contractor's failure to properly protect such items shall be repaired by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. B. When the work is complete, the water systems shall be adjusted for all required flows. Flush valves and automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation. Hot water heaters shall be City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0593 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 tested for proper operation of all safety and operating controls as recommended by the manufacturer. Demonstrate that supply and recirculation systems are balanced for specified flows and temperatures and as shown on the drawings. C. Sterilization: After pressure tests have been made, the entire domestic water distribution system shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been removed, and shall be sterilized by chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine conforming to Federal Specification BB-C-120 or hypochlorite conforming to Federal Specification 0-C-114, Type II, Grade B, or Federal Specification 0-S-602, Grade A or B. The chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million and shall be introduced into the system in an approved manner. The treatment water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy all non-spore forming bacteria. Except where a shorter period is approved, the retention time shall be at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 ppm of residual chlorine at the extreme end of the system at the end of the retention period. D. All valves and faucets in the system being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than 1.0 ppm. Samples of water shall be taken from several points in the system in properly sterilized containers for bacterial examination. The sterilizing shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of pollution for at least two full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained. 3.2 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM TESTS 1. General: The Test and Balance firm shall test all HVAC equipment and systems and make final adjustments and corrections necessary to place the systems in proper operating condition. 2. After testing and balancing, patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. Air test drilled openings shall be sealed with plastic plugs to allow future access. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier. 3. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices to show final settings. B. Air Distribution Devices: 1. Proportion each air handling unit, damper, register, diffuser and grille so that air distribution will be as scheduled, with tests showing air quantities indicated for each inlet and outlet that do not vary by more than plus or minus 10 percent from those indicated on the drawings. C. Ductwork: 1. The contractor shall perform duct leakage testing on 25% of the supply, return and exhaust ductwork in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Seal any ductwork not meeting the following acceptable leakage rates and retest until test is successful. Duct System Allowable % Leakage Low Pressure Supply 2% @ construction pressure class Low Pres. Return/Exhaust 2% @ construction pressure class Smoke Exhaust 2% @ construction pressure class D. Gas System: 1. The complete gas piping system shall be tested with air at a pressure of fifteen (15) PSI and proved tight at such pressure for twenty-four (24) hours. Test may be done in segments as dictated by construction requirements. Peppermint fumes or soap bubbles shall be used to locate leaks. All tests shall be approved by the local authorities and reviewed by a representative of the Architect before the tests are removed. E. Fan Balancing: 1. Provide proper fan design and balance fans and drives to limit vibration (displacement in mils) at operating speed to the values in the following table unless specified elsewhere. Measure vibration at each fan bearing, in all three planes. FAN VIBRATION CRITERIA Fan RPM (peak-to peak) Mils (in each plane) 500 4.2 800 3.0 1200 2.0 1700 1.5 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0593 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2000 and greater 1.3 3.3 SYSTEM OPERATING TESTS A. After the successful completion of all equipment start-up and test requirements, the following formal testing and balancing shall be performed on the complete mechanical system: 1. Temperature Controls - The balancing agency shall be assisted by the temperature controls contractor in the commissioning of the operation and calibration of all temperature control systems. The following tests are required: a. Verify all controlling devices are calibrated and set for design operating conditions. b. Verify all components are installed and functional. c. Verify the accuracy of each temperature sensor by temperature measurement. d. Check the sequence of operation for all control modes to ensure that they are in accordance with the contract documents. e. Verify that default setpoints are correct if different from the normal operating set points. f. Verify all interlock systems function. g. Perform all system verifications to assure the safety of the system and its components. h. Verify changeover from heating to cooling occurs as specified. i. Calibrate and adjust all thermostats and other controlling devices. j. Replace defective controllers at no cost to the Owner. 2. Mechanical Contractor Responsibility a. Final Operating Test: An operating test shall be performed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner for a period of not less than 8 hours. Should any element of the system not perform properly, the Contractor shall make all required corrections, and the test shall be repeated until successfully performed 3.4 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES A. The balancing agency shall perform the following testing and balancing functions in accordance with the AABC National Standards for TAB. 1. Diffusers and Grilles - Determine air velocity at outlets with a velometer or anemometer and using air device manufacturer's data, calculate the delivery cfm, or determine cubic feet per minute flow with a test hood. 2. Fans - Test supply, return, exhaust fans and adjust fan blower speeds to achieve specified CFM. 3. Current and Voltage - Measure and record motor full load amperage and voltage. Actual amperages higher than nameplate full load amps are not acceptable. Verify heater sizes. 4. Pitot-tube Traverse - Perform a Pitot-tube traverse (minimum of 16 points) on main supply and return ducts to obtain design CFM. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, the summation of the outlets or inlets may be used with an explanation why a traverse was not conducted. 5. Outside Air - Test and adjust system minimum outside air by Pitot-tube traverse. If a Pitot- tube traverse is not practical, the percentage of outside air may be determined by calculations from the return air, outside air, and mixed air temperatures when the temperature differential between the return and outside air is greater than 20oF. 6. Static Pressure - Test and record system static pressures, including entering and leaving static pressures of each fan, coil section, and filter section. For VAV systems, establish and record the minimum operating static pressure setpoint required for the air handling unit to achieve design airflow at the last terminal box in the system. 7. Air Temperature - Take wet bulb and dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering and leaving side of each heating coil. 8. Main Ducts - Adjust main ducts to within design CFM requirements and traverse for total CFM quantities. 9. Branch Ducts - Adjust branch ducts to within design CFM requirements. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one volume damper completely open. 10. Tolerances a. Test and balance each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements. b. Test and balance each fan and air-handling unit to within plus 10% and minus 5% of design requirements. Test and balance units having filters with clean filters in City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0593 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 place. 11. Minimizing Drafts - Adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts in all areas. 12. If inspections or tests reveal defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspections and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Patching of screwed joints or holes shall not be acceptable. 3.5 TEST AND BALANCE REPORT A.. The Final TAB Report shall be typewritten on 8.5 x 11 inch white bond paper, in bound form with an index and tabs to segregate the data into logical sections. The summary shall include information on special testing conditions and results. A listing of the TAB Agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer shall be included. B. The report shall present data entered on AABC standard forms (modified as necessary to include additional data hereinafter required) or pre-approved acceptable equivalent thereof. C. The report shall contain copies of pump curves, fan curves, field test reports and as-built plans (size 11 x 17 inches) of the HVAC systems. D. Include a certification sheet containing the seal and name, corporate address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. E. Include a listing of the instrumentation’s used for the procedures along with the proof of calibration. F. System Identification - Each supply, return, and exhaust opening shall be identified and numbered on reduced plans no larger than 11 x 17 inches to correspond to the numbers used on the report data sheets. G. Air Outlet Test Report Forms - Each grille, diffuser, and register shall be identified as to location (room number) and area served. Record the size, type, and manufacturer of each diffuser, grille, and register. H. Air Handling Unit Test Report Forms - Record the manufacturer, model number and motor nameplate data and all design and manufacturer-rated data including supply, return, and outside airflows, fan rpm, sp, and bhp. Report the following. 1. Total actual CFM by traverse. Include duct traverse form. If not practical, the sum of the outlets may be used, or a combination of each of these procedures. 2. Inlet and outlet static pressures at the fan, coil and filter sections. 3. Actual outside air and return air total CFM. 4. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor. 5. Final RPM of the fan and motor. 6. Fan and motor sheave sizes and center distance. Belt size and quantity. 7. For VAV air handling systems, report the minimum static pressure set point required to achieve design CFM to the last terminal box in the system while maintaining design airflow at the air handler. 8. Coil EAT and LAT (db/wb), EWT, LWT, and air pressure drops. 9. Outside air temperature (DB/WB). I. Fan Test Report Forms - Record the manufacturer, model number, motor nameplate data and all design and manufacturer-rated data. Report the following. 1. Total actual CFM by traverse. Include duct traverse form. If not practical, the sum of the outlets may be used, or a combination of each of these procedures. 2. Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan. 3. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor. 4. Final RPM of the fan and motor. 5. Fan and motor sheave sizes and center distance. Belt size and quantity. J. Pumps Test Forms - Submit pump curve showing design, operating, and no-flow points of operation. Also, record the following items on each pump test form: 1. Manufacturer, size, and serial number. 2. All design and manufacturer's rated data. 3. Pump operating suction and discharge pressure and final total dynamic head and apparent GPM. 4. No flow (pump discharge valve closed) suction and discharge pressure and corresponding total dynamic head. 5. Rated and actual operating current, voltage, RPM, and brake horsepower of each pump motor. 3.6 FINAL JOB MEETING A. At job completion, all Division 21, 22, 23, 26, and 28 representatives shall meet at the job site and shall demonstrate the operation of all equipment and systems. The Architect and Owner shall be advised in writing 10 days prior to the time and date of this inspection. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0593 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 3.7 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION: A. Testing and Balancing Agency 1. At the time of final inspection, the Test and Balance Agency may be required to recheck, in the presence of the Owner's representative, specific and random selections of data, air quantities, and air motion recorded in the Certified Report. 2. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Owner's representative. 3. Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for work forming basis of Certified Report. 4. If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation of 10% or more from that recorded in the Certified Report the report will be rejected, all systems shall be retested, new data recorded, new Certified Report submitted, and new inspection tests made, at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HVAC INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0700 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 0700 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the insulation of the mechanical systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Factory insulated equipment is excluded from this section of the specifications except that the insulating material characteristics shall equal or exceed those of specified materials for similar service. C. Work Included: 1. Piping: a. Cooling coil condensate drain lines. b. Refrigerant suction lines. 2. Ductwork: a. Supply air: 1) Insulate externally with thermal duct wrap. b. Return air: 1) Insulate externally with thermal duct wrap. c. Make-up air duct: 1) Insulated externally. d. All round ductwork exposed to view shall be double wall factory internally insulated with 1" thick glass fiber duct and fittings. D. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500, “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Fiberglass Insulation: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas b. Manville c. Certain Teed 2. Urethane Insulation: a. Armstrong (Armalok) b. Thermacor 3. Mastics: a. Benjamin Foster b. Insul-Coustic c. Chicago Mastic d. Childers Products 4. High Temperature Bonding Cements: Ryder Thermocote 5. PVC Fittings: Zeston, Inc. 1.4 GENERAL City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HVAC INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0700 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. All materials shall be applied by workmen skilled in this trade. Mechanical fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanent construction. Unsightly work shall be cause for rejection. B. Materials will be applied only after all surfaces have been tested and cleaned. C. All material, jacket, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives shall not exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed of 50 in accordance with ASTM Method E84, UL Standard 723 and NFPA Bulletins 255 and 90A. D. Insulation shall be vermin resistant. E. Non-compressible insulation material shall be installed at hangers of cold piping to eliminate through metal conductance. F. Sizing, paint, pipe shield or saddle, and internal duct insulation shall be provided under other sections of Division 23. G. Insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed. H. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be as listed or energy code as adopted by authority having jurisdiction. However, sufficient insulation shall be provided to eliminate condensation on the cold surfaces and to maintain a maximum exterior insulation surface of 125ºF. (OSHA Standard) on the hot surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING SYSTEMS A. Pipe Insulation: 1. Above ground-Johns Manville AP-T preformed one-piece fiberglass with reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil jacket. Include vapor barrier where required. a. Use pre-formed PVC fitting covers with fiberglass inserts. Fiberglass shall be same density as pipe insulation. b. Where insulation is exposed to weather, use Manville Flame-Safe ML, or approved equal, Metal-Jacketed Fiberglass pipe insulation. Attachment shall be made by 1/2" 0.020 aluminum bands with approved closure system. 2. Armstrong Armaflex or equal may be used, in thermally equivalent thicknesses, but only for refrigerant suction lines where codes permit. 3. Condensate drain lines shall be insulated from AC unit to indirect waste termination points and first 10'-0" of horizontal drain line at floor drains receiving condensate. Material shall be closed cell type with 3/4" thick molded pipe covering with a density of 7 lbs. thermal conductivity at 0.28 at 75ºF. Do not split the insulation. All joints shall be glued with manufacturer's adhesive. 2.2 DUCTWORK SYSTEMS A. External insulation for metal ductwork (flexible blanket): Johns Manville Microlite fiberglass duct wrap with FSK reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil facing, conforming to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. B. High velocity ductwork with external insulation shall be insulated with blanket wrap fiberglass insulation, 1-1/2 inches thick, one (1) pound density or minimum thermal resistance of 6.0, complete with scrim kraft jacket. Facing overlapping joints shall be at least two (2) inches and held in place with outward clinching staples on approximately four (4) inch centers. Underside of ducts exceeding 24 inches in diameter shall be spot cemented and finally secured with sheet metal screws and washers. C. High velocity flexible ductwork shall be UL 181, Class I, with rating to meet or exceed NFPA 90A- 90B and reinforced with a perforated sheet metal inner jacket. D. High velocity ductwork located in non-conditioned spaces shall be insulated with 2" thick fiberglass board insulation with vapor barrier jacket. E. Other manufacturers are Certainteed, Knauf, and Owens Corning or approved equal. F. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HVAC INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0700 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. All duct liner products shall avoid air erosion up to velocities of 4,000 feet per minute. G. Solvent-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Water based, polymeric, UL classified lagging adhesive for applying canvas and glass cloth; Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50. B. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, vapor barrier lap and attachment adhesive; Foster 85- 15 or Childers CP-85. C. Same adhesive, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 85-20 or Childers CP-82. D. A rubber based, UL classified, fast setting contact adhesive for adhering flexible cellular insulation; Foster 82-40 or Armstrong 520. 2.4 INSULATION THICKNESS A. Piping insulation thickness based on a maximum k value of 0.23 Btu in/hr ft² F at a mean temperature of 75F. Pipe Sizes System Runout s To 12 ft. Max. 1 1/2 " and Less 1 1/2” Up Refrigerant piping 1" 1" 2" Condensate drain piping 1" 1" 1" B. Exterior Duct Insulation: All supply, return and outside air ductwork, shall be insulation 2" thick, with a minimum installed R value of 6.0. 2.5 DUCT SEALANTS A. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, high velocity duct sealer; Foster 32-14 or 3M EC-800. B. Same sealer, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 30-02. 2.6 EXPANSION AND BALL JOINT INSULATION COVERS A. Furnish and install removable and reusable insulation covers. B. Insulation and jacketing material shall be as required for service temperatures. C. Covers shall have hook and loop fasteners and draw cords. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The installation of all insulation shall be made by experienced craftsmen in a neat, workmanlike manner and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations for service intended, as interpreted by the Architect. B. All adhesives used in conjunction with insulation shall be compatible with the insulation and vapor barrier used and be vermin-proof and mildew resistant. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ductwork: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HVAC INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0700 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1. External Duct Insulation: All external duct shall be installed without sagging or loose fitting sections. Outer jacket shall be sealed with mastic to form a continuous vapor barrier. Install as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2. Flexible fiberglass insulation shall be wrapped around ducts and secured with outward clinching staples. Ducts 24" wide and larger shall have the insulation additionally secured with stick clips on 18" centers or with 4" wide bands of adhesive applied on 18" centers. Insulation shall be lapped a minimum of 4" and all seams and penetrations shall be sealed with an approved mastic reinforced with 3" glass mesh reinforcement. Where insulation terminates, all raw glass shall be sealed to duct. C. Insulation shall be the full specified thickness, continuous through walls, floors, ceilings, etc. Reducing thickness or cutting back of insulation to pass obstructions or through sleeves will not be permitted. D. Valve and fitting insulation shall be built up to the thickness of the adjacent pipe insulation or may be factory prefabricated units at the Contractor's option. E. Any painting of pipe insulation shall be accomplished under the Painting Section. After finish painting, any insulation showing splits or other signs of poor workmanship shall be replaced. F. No part of any system shall be insulated until all required tests have been completed. G. All insulation shall be installed so that it does not interfere with the functions of thermometer wells, gage connections and/or cocks, unions, access panels, hand holes, manholes, sight glasses, etc., or obscure serial numbers or other nameplate data. H. Insulation shall be extended to include stiff leg supports as required to prevent sweating. I. Complete vapor barriers to prevent sweating shall be installed on all cold systems and equipment. If a single tape adhesive system or staples are used for closure of the longitudinal lap, a vapor barrier mastic must be used to ensure a vaporproof closure. All edges and abutments shall be sealed, waterproof and vaporproof. Supplier of jacket materials shall certify that the material proposed is approved for use in return air plenums, where applicable. J. Where necessary, the application of insulation shall be arranged to accommodate movement of piping due to thermal expansion and/or contraction. K. Exterior Piping: All pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated when installed exposed to weather, shall be insulated, and wrapped with an 0.016" smooth or corrugated aluminum jacket with proper closure system positioned to shed water to make a waterproof assembly. Fittings shall be insulated with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and mitered to fit properly. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. No portion of this insulation shall be concealed prior to approval by the Architect. L. Below Grade Piping: All pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated, when installed below grade shall be insulated and spirally wrapped with open mesh glass tape embedded in asphaltic mastic and then completely covered with waterproof asphaltic mastic so as to make a waterproof assembly. Fittings shall be insulated with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and mitered to fit properly. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. No portion of this insulation shall be concealed before the Architect has checked and approved same. M. Piping supports shall pass completely around the exterior of the finished insulation. Rigid blocks of insulation material shall be provided at all support points. In addition, sheet metal saddles shall be provided at support points in accordance with the following table: Pipe Size Gauge Metal Saddle Length Up to 2-1/2" 18 6" 3" - 5" 16 10" 6" - 8" 16 14" 10" and Over 16 18" N. Saddles shall cover the bottom of the insulation, and saddle edges shall be hemmed or suitably covered to prevent damage to the insulation material. O. The vapor barrier and finish shall be continuous at all support points. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HVAC INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0700 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 P. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. 8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2000 fpm or where indicated. 9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation. a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Q. Lined exterior ductwork shall be treated with an acid etch bath and two coats of UV resistant paint. Color shall be approved by Architect. R. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 0900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct digital control. B. I/O: Input/output. C. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing. D. PC: Personal computer. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Comply with the following performance requirements: 1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds. 2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 8 seconds. 3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction. 4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds. 5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other. 6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control. 7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second. 8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows: a. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. b. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. c. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. d. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F. e. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F. f. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent. g. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale. h. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. i. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale. j. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg. k. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg. l. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading. 1.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. See drawings for sequence of operation. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. 1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications. 3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 8. DDC System Hardware: a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations. 9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations. 10. Controlled Systems: a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring. b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction. c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. d. Points list. The points to be indicated shall include but not be limited to the following: 1) Exhaust Fan – Statue (On/Off) 2) Louver – Position (Open/Closed) 3) Split System – Status (Cooling, Heating, Compressor On/Off), Setpoint (Cooling/Heating) 4) Radiant Heater – Status (On/Off), Setpoint (Cooling/Heating) 5) Unit Heaters – Status (On/Off), Setpoint (Cooling/Heating) 6) Fan-Filter Box – Status(On/Off), NO2 Level, CO Level 7) Recirculation Pump – Status (On/Off) 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project. B. The new system installed shall be fully automatic, subject to various types of remote surveillance, routine remote adjustments, remote status, remote alarms, remote data collection for trending/historical files, and other operations as indicated herein, from a new local remote microprocessor-based Local Area Network (LAN), with the local system capable of stand-alone operation. The system shall be capable of being monitored and controlled off site by a Central Work Station located at the Facilities Central Maintenance Office Service Center Owner’s WAN, or Ethernet LAN. The entire system of control and automation at this building shall thus become an integral part of the existing facilities Energy Management (Reliable Controls) System (EMS). C. Bidders are specifically advised that full and effective two-way communication between the new system installed under this contract and the Owner’s existing Reliable Controls Central EMS must be achieved in an approved manner, including whatever may be required in the form of interface hardware and software without effecting or interrupting other system software. Simultaneous on- line communication of this system with the Central EMS is mandatory. D. This system of equipment and software shall be provided and installed by the single local factory trained and authorized sales, installation and service agent of Reliable Controls (Enviromatic Systems). City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. F. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer. B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. 1.9 COORDINATION A. All new controls shall be integrated into the City of Denton’s Enviromatics Building Management System Network. B. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. C. Coordinate equipment with Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. D. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation. E. Coordinate equipment with Panelboards to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices. F. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in "Cast-in-Place Concrete." PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. 2.2 DDC EQUIPMENT A. Software: 1. Application Software: a. I/O capability from operator station. b. System security for each operator via software password and access levels. c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. d. Database creation and support. e. Automatic and manual database save and restore. f. Dynamic color graphic displays with up to [10] <Insert number> screen displays at once. g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and symbols. h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions. i. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs. j. Alarm and event processing. k. Object and property status and control. l. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. m. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following: 1) Current values of all objects. 2) Current alarm summary. 3) Disabled objects. 4) Alarm lockout objects. 5) Logs. n. Custom report development. o. Utility and weather reports. p. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules. q. Maintenance management. 2. Custom Application Software: a. English language oriented. b. Full-screen character editor/programming environment. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with debugging/simulation capability. d. Support conditional statements. e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions. f. Contains predefined time variables. B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, randomaccess memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. 3. Standard Application Programs: a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging. b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy switchover. c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser-water reset, chilled- water reset, and equipment sequencing. d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run- time totalization; and security access. e. Remote communications. f. Maintenance management. g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric). 4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol. C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol. D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers. 1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally open or normally closed operation. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA). City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs. E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following: 1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure. F. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following: 1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz. 2.3 ALARM PANELS A. Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting. Fabricate of 0.06-inch- thick, furniture-quality steel or extruded-aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish. B. Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and test switch, mounted on hinged cover. 1. Alarm Condition: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds. 2. Acknowledge Switch: Horn is silent and indicating light is steady. 3. Second Alarm: Horn sounds and indicating light is steady. 4. Alarm Condition Cleared: System is reset and indicating light is extinguished. 5. Contacts in alarm panel allow remote monitoring by independent alarm company. 2.4 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. B. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element. 1. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output. 2. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. 3. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. c. Thermometer: Concealed. d. Orientation: Vertical. 4. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting plate. 5. Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure, suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of 32 to 120 deg F. 6. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. C. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg. d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg. 2.5 STATUS SENSORS A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg (0 to 1240 Pa). B. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current. C. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2.6 THERMOSTATS A. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor. 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short-cycle protection. 6. Programming based on weekday. 7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following: a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on." 2.7 HUMIDISTATS A. Duct-Mounting Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2-position type with adjustable, 2 percent throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, and single- or double-pole contacts. 2.8 AIRFLOW/TEMPERATURE MEASURING STATIONS WITH TRANSMITTER A. Basis of Design: EBTRON, Inc. B. Duct and Plenum Mounted Airflow Station: Combination of air straightener and multiport, self- averaging pitot tube station. 1. Casing: Galvanized-steel frame. 2. Flow Straightener: Aluminum honeycomb, 3/4-inch parallel cell, 3 inches deep. 3. Each ATMD shall consist of one or more sensor probes and a single, remotely mounted, 32 bit microprocessor-based transmitter capable of independently processing up to 16 independently wired sensor nodes contained in one or more probe assemblies per measurement location. a. Each sensor node shall contain two individually wired, hermetically sealed bead- in-glass thermistors. b. Thermistors shall be mounted in the sensor node using a marine-grade, waterproof epoxy. Thermistor leads shall be protected and not exposed to the environment. Thermistor leads shall not be fastened to the thermistor semiconductor substrate by weld or solder connections. c. The airflow rate at each sensor node shall be equally weighted and arithmetically averaged by the transmitter prior to output. All integrated circuitry shall be temperature rated as ‘industrial-grade’. Submissions containing ‘commercial- grade’ integrated circuitry are not acceptable. d. The temperature at each sensor node shall be arithmetically averaged or velocity weighted and averaged by the transmitter prior to output, either as field- selected by the contractor or user. e. Each transmitter shall have a 16-character alpha-numeric display capable of displaying airflow, temperature, system status, configuration settings and diagnostics. f. Other than the thermistor sensors, no other electronic components shall be located at the sensing node. g. Devices using chip-in-glass, epoxy-coated or diode-case chip thermistors are not acceptable. h. Devices with RJ-45 connections exposed to the environment or having electronic circuitry mounted in or at the sensor node are not acceptable. i. Pitot tubes and arrays are not acceptable. j. Vortex shedding devices are not acceptable. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 4. All Sensor Probes a. Each sensor node, consisting of two thermistor-sensors and their structural housing, shall independently determine the airflow rate and temperature at each measurement point. b. Each sensor node shall be factory calibrated at a minimum of 16 airflow rates and 3 temperatures to standards that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Thermistor sensor calibrations traceable only to temperature standards are not acceptable. c. Airflow accuracy shall be +/-2% of Reading over the entire operating airflow range of not less than 0 to 5,000 fpm (25.4 m/s). d. Devices whose overall performance at the host controller input terminals is the combined accuracy of the transmitter and sensor probes shall demonstrate that the total accuracy meets the performance requirements of this specification throughout the measurement range. e. Temperature accuracy shall be +/-0.14° F (0.08° C) over the entire operating temperature range of -20° F to 160° F (-28.9° C to 71° C). f. The operating humidity range for each sensor probe shall be 0-99% RH (non- condensing). Product design shall consider direct exposure to or emersion in liquid water and temporary exposure shall not damage the sensing elements. g. Each sensor or probe assembly shall not require matching to the transmitter in the field. h. A single manufacturer shall provide both the airflow/temperature measuring probe(s) and transmitter for each measurement location. 5. Duct and Plenum Probes a. Probes shall be constructed of extruded, gold anodized, 6063 aluminum tubes or optionally of Type 316 stainless steel tubes. All internal wires within the tube shall be Kynar coated. PVC insulated conductors are not acceptable. b. The number of individual sensor nodes provided for each rectangular location shall be as follows: 1) Duct or Plenum Area (ft2) <= 1 Total # of Nodes/Location 1 or 2 >1 to <4 4 4 to < 8 6 8 to < 12 8 12 to <16 12 >=16 16 c. The number of individual sensor nodes provided for each round or oval duct location shall approximate the total required for rectangular locations. d. Sensor probe design shall be capable of providing up to 8 sensor nodes per probe. e. The minimum operating airflow range shall be 0 to 5,000 FPM (25.4 m/s) unless otherwise indicated on the plans. f. Each ducted sensor probe shall have an integral, U.L. Listed, plenum rated cable. Cable jackets and conductor insulation shall be FEP, Teflon-FEP or Neoflon-FEP. Cables shall include a terminal plug for connection to the remotely mounted transmitter. All terminal plug interconnecting pins shall be gold plated. PVC jacketed cables or PVC insulated conductors are not acceptable with ducted sensor probes. 6. Transmitters a. The transmitter shall have an integral LCD display capable of simultaneously displaying airflow and temperature. The LCD display shall be capable of displaying individual airflow and temperature readings of each independent sensor node. b. The transmitter shall be capable of field configuration and diagnostics using an on-board pushbutton interface and LCD display. c. The transmitter shall have an on-off power switch and operate on 24 VAC. Isolation transformers shall not be required. 1) The transmitter shall use a switching power supply, fused and protected from transients and power surges. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2) The transmitter shall use “watch-dog” circuitry to assure automatic reset after power disruption, transients and brown-outs. d. All interconnecting pins, headers and connections on the main circuit board, option cards and cable receptacles shall be gold plated. e. The operating temperature range for the transmitter shall be -20° F to 120° F (- 28.9° C to 48.9° C). The transmitter shall be installed at a location that is protected from weather and water. f. The transmitter shall be capable of communicating with other devices using one of the following interface options: 1) Combined linear airflow and temperature analog output signals and one RS-485 network interface. This shall include: Two field selectable 0- 5VDC / 0-10VDC / 4-20mA (4-wire) outputs, fuse protected and electrically isolated from all other circuitry; plus one field selectable network protocol: BACnet-MS/TP, BACnet-ARCNET, Modbus-RTU or Johnson Controls N2-Bus. (a) BACnet devices shall provide analog variables for airflow and temperature containing individual sensor airflow rate and temperature data. 2) 10 Base-T Ethernet: Field selectable BACnet Ethernet, BACnet-IP, Modbus-TCP and TCP/IP (a) Provide dynamic link libraries and VBA functions to interface Ethernet devices to Microsoft Excel for remote monitoring of airflow and temperature using a MS Windows -based PC. 3) LonWorks Free Topology. 4) Data logging capability, using a manually removable and customer- provided USB 2.0 flash drive (a.k.a. memory stick or thumb drive). This option has no other outputs and allows the transmitter to communicate only with the USB interface. Provide PC software or files to allow downloading and interpretation of the logged data. g. The transmitter shall be capable of providing an infra-red interface for manually downloading airflow and temperature data or for uploading transmitter configuration data using a handheld PDA (Palm or Microsoft Windows Mobile operating systems). 1) Provide PDA upload/download software for multiple users. (a) Download software shall be capable of displaying and saving individual sensor airflow rates, the average airflow rate, individual sensor temperatures and the average temperature received from the transmitter. (b) Upload software shall be capable of displaying and saving all setup parameters that can be configured using the on-board pushbutton interface and LCD display. 2) Provide a Microsoft Excel file capable of creating test and balance reports from PDA data files transferred to a Windows based PC. 3) Provide a Microsoft Excel file to create configuration data files that can be transferred from a Windows based PC to a PDA for upload to one or more transmitters. h. The transmitter shall be capable of identifying a ‘damaged’ sensor node, ignore it and continue to operate by correctly averaging the remaining sensor nodes. i. Transmitter shall include the following features: Enhanced Output Integration, Low Airflow Alarm functions for compliance with LEED Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring credit and ASHRAE Standard 189.1 and a Field Calibration Wizard to simplify field setup for adjustments when desired. 7. The ATMD shall carry the CE Mark for European Union shipments, certifying compliance with all applicable compliance testing, regulations and EU directives. 8. The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall review and approve placement and operating airflow rates for each measurement location indicated on the plans. a. A written report shall be submitted to the consulting mechanical engineer if any measurement locations do not meet the manufacturer’s placement requirements. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 9 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2.9 OPERATOR INTERFACE (PERSONAL COMPUTER) A. Operator Interface: Furnish two PC based workstations for the BCS. Each of these workstations shall be able to access all information on the system. These workstations shall reside on the same high-speed network as the Building Controllers. B. Workstation information access shall use the BACnet protocol. Communication shall use the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol. C. Hardware: Each operator workstation and custom programming workstation shall consist of the following: 1. Personal Computer: Furnish IBM compatible Y2K compliant PC's. The CPU shall consist of an Intel Pentium 4, operating at a minimum of 1.7 GHz. A minimum of 2048 megabytes of SDRAM, one 32x CD-RW/DVD drive, one USB 1.0 drive, one USB 2.0 drive, and a 100 giga- byte hard disk with a minimum access time of 12 milliseconds shall be provided. A two- button mouse shall be provided. Furnish all serial, parallel, and network communication ports, and cables for proper system operation. The PC shall have a minimum of a 21" SVGA monitor. 2. Internet Connection: Furnish 10/100 Ethernet LAN, 10/100 Base-T 3. Provide remote access to the system for the Owner and Engineer. Remote terminal (IBM compatible PC) shall be provided by the Owner and/or Engineer. This contractor shall pro- vide all software required (both at the project location and at the remote terminal location(s)) to permit access to the system. Operation of the remote terminal shall be identical to that of the host computer, including graphics. 4. Printers: Each workstation shall have one tractor feed printer for alarms, one laser printer for reports, and all associated cables. Both printers shall be capable of simultaneous printing. a. Tractor Printer: The printer shall be capable of a minimum 160 characters per second operation and be compatible with standard parallel or serial communication. Supply one box of minimum 2000 sheets of printer paper and two printer ribbons or cartridg- es at final completion of project. b. Laser Printer: The printer shall be capable of a minimum of 15 pages per minutes at not less than 1200x1200 dpi and shall be compatible with standard parallel or Ether- net communication. The paper tray shall have the capacity for not less than 250 sheets. Provide one box of minimum 2000 sheets of printer paper and one spare toner cartridge to the owner at final completion of project. 5. BACnet: The workstation shall use the Read (Initiate) and Write (Execute) Services as de- fined in Clauses 15,5 and 15.8, respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 135-95, to communicate with BACnet objects in the internetwork. D. System Software 1. Operating System: Furnish a concurrent multi-tasking operating system. The operating sys- tem also shall support the use of other common software applications that operate under DOS or Microsoft Windows. Examples include Lotus 123, Microsoft Word, Excel, and Para- dox. Acceptable operating systems are Windows 7. 2. System Graphics: The operator workstation software shall be graphically oriented. The sys- tem shall allow of up to 10 graphic screens at once for comparison and monitoring of system status. Provide a method for the operator to easily move between graphic displays and change the size and location of graphic displays on the screen. The system graphics shall be able to be modified while on-line. An operator with the proper password level shall be able to add, delete, or change dynamic objects on a graphic. Dynamic objects shall include analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files. Graphics shall have the abil- ity to show animation by shifting image files based on the status of the object. 3. Custom Graphics: Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of a graphics generation package furnished with the system. The graphics generation package shall be a graphically based system that uses the mouse to create and modify graphics that are saved in industry formats such as PCX, TIFF, and GEM. The graphics generation package shall also provide the capability of capturing or converting graphics from other programs such as Designer or AutoCAD. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 10 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 4. Graphics Library: Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment graphics such as chillers, boilers, Air Handlers, terminals, fan coils, etc. This library also shall include standard symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and duct- work. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation program. E. System Applications: Each workstation shall provide operator interface and off-line storage of system information. Provide the following applications at each workstation: 1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore: Each workstation shall store on the hard disk a copy of the current database of each Building Controller. This database shall be updated whenever a change is made in any system panel. The storage of this data shall be automatic and not require operator intervention. In the event of a database loss in a building manage- ment panel, the first workstation to detect the loss shall automatically restore the data base for that panel. This capability may be disabled by the operator. 2. Manual Database Save and Restore: A system operator with the proper password clearance shall be able to save the database from any system panel. The operator also shall be able to clear a panel database and manually initiate a download of a specified database to any panel in the system. 3. On-Line Help: Provide a context-sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in oper- ating and editing the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be avail- able through the use of hypertext. 4. System Security: Each operator shall be required to log on the system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the functions accessible to viewing and/or changing the each system application, editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity id detected. This auto logoff time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format. 5. System Diagnostics: The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and ontrollers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator. 6. Alarm Processing: Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out of nor- mal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, alarm limit differentials, states, and reactions for each object in the system. 7. Alarm Messages: Alarm messages shall use the English language descriptor for the object in alarm, in such a way that the operator will be able to recognize the source, location, and na- ture of the alarm without relying upon acronyms or other mnemonics. 8. Alarm Reactions: The operator shall be able to determine (by object) what if any actions are to be taken during an alarm. Actions shall include logging, printing, starting programs, dis- playing messages, dialing out to remote stations, paging, providing audible annunciation, or displaying specific system graphics. Each of these actions shall be configurable by work- station and time of day. An object in alarm that has not been acknowledged within an opera- tor specified time period shall be moved to a higher level of priority. The actions for that level will then be followed. 9. Alarm and Event Log: The operator shall be able to view all system alarms and change of states from any location in the system. Events shall be listed chronologically. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms. All that have not been cleared by the operator shall be archived to the hard disk on the workstation. 10. Object and Property Status and Control: Provide a method for the operator to view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system. The status shall be available by menu, on graphics, or through custom programs. 11. Clock Synchronization: The real-time clocks in all building control panels and workstations shall be using the BACnet Time Synchronization service. The system also shall be able to automatically synchronize all system clocks daily from any operator- designated device in the system. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings and standard time, if applicable. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 11 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 12. Reports and Logs: Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select, modify, or create reports. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval, and date. Report data shall be achievable on the hard disk for historical reporting. Provide the ability for the operator to obtain real-time logs of all objects by type or status (e.g., alarm, lockout, normal). Reports and logs shall be stored on the PC hard disk in a format that is readily ac- cessible by other standard software applications, including spreadsheets and word pro- cessing. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer and shall be set to be printed either on operator command or at a specific time each day. 13. Standard Reports: The following standard system reports shall be provided for this project. Provide ability for the Owner to readily customize these reports for this project. a. Electrical Meter Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily electrical con- sumption and peak electrical demand for each building meter. Provide an annual (12-month) summary report showing the monthly electrical consumption and peak demand for each meter. b. Gas Meter Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily natural gas consump- tion for each meter. Provide an annual (12-month) report that shows the monthly consumption for each meter. c. Weather Data Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily minimum, maxi- mum, and average outdoor air temperature--as well as the number of heating and cooling degree days for each day. Provide an annual (12-month) report showing the minimum, maximum, and average outdoor air temperature for the month--as well as the number of heating and cooling degree days for the month. d. Tenant Override Reports: Provide a monthly report showing the daily total time in hours that each tenant has requested after-hours HVAC and lighting services. e. Provide an annual summary report that shows the override usage on a monthly ba- sis. f. All Objects: All system (or sub-system) objects and their current values. g. Alarm Summary: All current alarms (except those in alarm lockout). h. Disabled Objects: All objects that are disabled. i. Alarm Lockout Objects: All objects in alarm lockout (whether manual or automatic). j. Alarm Lockout Objects in Alarm: All objects in alarm lockout that are currently in alarm. k. Logs: (1) Alarm History (2) System Messages (3) System Events (4) Trends F. Workstation Applications Editors: Each PC workstation shall support editing of all system applica- tions. Provide editors for each application at the PC workstation. The applications shall be down- loaded and executed at one or more of the controller panels. 1. Controller: Provide a full-screen editor for each type of application that shall allow the opera- tor to view and change the configuration, name, control parameters, and set points for all controllers. 2. Scheduling: An editor for the scheduling application shall be provided at each workstation. Provide a method of selecting the desired schedule and month. This shall consist of a monthly calendar for each schedule. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clear- ly on the calendar. Provide a method for allowing several related objects to follow a sched- ule. The start and stop times for each object shall be adjustable from this master schedule. Schedules shall be easy to copy to other objects and/or dates. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 12 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 3. Custom Application Programming: Provide the tools to create, modify, and debug custom ap- plication programming. The operator shall be able to create, edit, and download custom pro- grams at the same time that all other system applications are operating. The system shall be fully operable while custom routines are edited, compiled, and downloaded. The program- ming language shall have the following features: a. The language shall be English language oriented, be based on the syntax of BASIC, FORTRAN, C, or PASCAL, and allow for free-form programming (i.e., not column- oriented or "fill in the blanks"). Alternatively, the programming language can be graphically-based using function blocks as long as blocks are available that directly provide the functions listed below, and that custom or compound function blocks can be created. b. A full-screen character editor/programming environment shall be provided. The edi- tor shall be cursor/mouse-driven and allow the user to insert, add, modify, and delete custom programming code. It also shall incorporate word processing features such as cut/paste and find/replace. c. The programming language shall allow independently executing program modules to be developed. Each module shall be able to independently enable and disable other modules. d. The editor/programming environment shall have a debugging/ simulation capability that allows the user to step through the program and observe any intermediate val- ues and/or results. The debugger also shall provide error messages for syntax and execution errors. e. The programming language shall support conditional statements (IF/THEN/ELSE/ELSE-IF) using compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and/or re- lations (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons. f. The programming language shall support floating point arithmetic using the following operators: +, -, /, x, square root, and x-to-the-y-power. The following mathematical functions also shall be provided: natural log, log, trigonometric functions (sine, co- sine, etc.), absolute value, and minimum/maximum value from a list of values. g. The programming language shall have predefined variables that represent time of day, day of the week, month of the year, and the date. Other predefined variables shall provide elapsed time in seconds, minutes, hours, and days. These elapsed time variables shall be able to be reset by the language so that interval timing func- tions can be stopped and started within a program. Values from all of the above var- iables shall be readable by the language so that they can be used in a program for such purposes as IF/THEN comparisons, calculations, etc. h. The language shall be able to read the values of the variables and use them in pro- gramming statement logic, comparisons, and calculations. i. The programming language shall have predefined variables representing the status and results of the System Software, and shall be able to enable, disable, and change the setpoints of the System Software described below. G. Portable Operator's Terminal: Furnish a Portable Operator's Terminal that shall be capable of ac- cessing all system data. This device may be connected to any point on the system network or may be connected directly to any controller for programming, setup, and troubleshooting. This device may be connected to any point on the system network or it may be connected directly to controllers using the BACnet PTP (Point-To-Point) Data Link/Physical layer protocol. The termi- nal shall use the Read (Initiate) and Write (Execute) Services as defined in Clauses 15.5 and 15.8, respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 135-95, to communicate with BACnet objects in the in- ternetwork. The Portable Operator's Terminal shall be an IBM compatible notebook-style PC in- cluding all software and hardware required. The PC shall contain at minimum: 1. 1.2 GHz Pentium 3 Processor 2. 256 Megabytes of RAM 3. 30-Gigabyte Hard Drive 4. 8x CD-RW and 1.44-Megabyte Floppy Disk Drive City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 13 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 5. Internal V.92/56K Modem and 10/100 Ethernet Card 6. Touch-pad or Other Internal Pointing Device PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation. B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified. C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. D. Install automatic dampers according to Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." E. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. F. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." 3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install building wire and cable according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. C. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Calibrating and Adjusting: 1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated. 4. Control System Inputs and Outputs: a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistant source. 5. Flow: a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3- point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span. b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact. 6. Pressure: a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential set at minimum. 7. Temperature: a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source. b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts. 8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed. 9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed. 10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0900 - 14 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures. B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. END OF SECTION 23 0900 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 0993 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 0993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division’s specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Control sequence is hereby defined to mean the manner in which, and methods by which, the controls function. The requirements for each type of operation are specified in this section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. PART 2 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR THE MECHANICAL SYSTEM 2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Each indoor air handling unit shall be controlled by a wall controller as specified and as indicated on the plans. B. Smoke detectors furnished and wired by Division 16 in the supply and return air of the unit shall, upon detection of smoke shall de-energize the supply fan. 2.2 UNIT HEATERS A. A space thermostat shall control the unit heaters. 2.3 EXHAUST FANS A. Exhaust fans serving one room shall start and stop with a motion sensor interlocked with the light fixtures The fans shall run for 5 minutes (adjustable) after the lights turn off. 2.4 BUNKER GEAR VENTILATION FAN A. The fan shall have an HOA switch mounted 48” A.F.F. at a location as directed by the architect and owner. B. In the auto position, the fan shall operate in the following manner. On sensing a RH level above setpoint, the fan shall be energized. The fan shall be de-energized upon sensing an RH level below setpoint. 2.5 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS A. Provide electrical interlocks as listed herein, in other sections of these specifications and as noted in the equipment schedules. B. Electrical interlocks shall be made by means of auxiliary contacts on motor starters or shall be accomplished with separate relays unless indicated otherwise. No motor power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit, unless indicated otherwise. Each separate control power lead serving a starter shall be provided with a disconnecting switch suitably identified and housed, which may be a toggle switch or other suitable disconnecting device, or proper capacity and number of poles. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 11 23 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 11 23 - FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. The natural gas system shall be coordinated with Atmos Energy, contact shall be Mark Mahan (mark.mahan@atmosenergy.com) or 940-380-7475. The contractor shall include any fees associated by the utility company to provide service for the project. C. Work Included: 1. Gas piping. D. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500, “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Gas Piping: 1. Piping below grade - Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-120 with factory fabricated steel fittings, threaded or welded. All buried piping shall be protected against corrosion by a factory applied wrapping, following the recommendations of the local gas company. All field-fabricated joints shall be similarly protected. Non-ferrous pipe with tracer wire may be used if approved by local governing authorities. 2. Underground gas distribution piping may be polyethylene plastic gas pipe SDR 11 conforming to ASTM D 2513 only when approved for use with 5 psi medium pressure distribution by both the Gas Utility Company and local building officials, and shall be listed by IAPMO. a. Plastic pipe shall be buried in its entirety and shall not run under or within any structure and shall be furnished with a copper trace wire. b. Any connection of such plastic pipe to metallic pipe shall be by means of an approved compression coupling with insert. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 11 23 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 c. Joints in such plastic pipe of 1-1/2" and smaller shall be made by an approved Dresser coupling socket weld fitting or compression fitting if approved by local code. Pipe 2" and larger may be joined as described above or by heat fusion method, but all such work shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. d. Meter and regulator risers shall be made with pre-bent factory coated steel piping joined as described in (b) above. Such steel piping shall be at least three (3) feet long on that end joining to the plastic. e. Where plastic pipe joins to building, all exposed pipe shall be steel. All exposed metal on Dresser couplings shall be wrapped and sealed to prevent corrosion. f. Pipe shall be permanently marked at maximum 2 foot intervals with the following minimum information: 1.) Manufacturer's name and the word "Natural Gas" 2.) Material designation 3.) SDR 11 4.) IAPMO listing 3. Piping above grade - Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-120 with threaded black malleable iron fittings. All piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be welded. Welded fittings shall be factory fabricated schedule 40 black steel as manufactured by Tube-Turns or approved equal. 2.2 VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES A. Materials: Bronze, ductile iron, or cast iron per local codes with screwed, Vic-Press 304™, grooved, or flanged ends for steel pipe and Permalynx push-to-connect, grooved, or solder ends for copper pipe. B. Valve locations: 1. Provide a valve on inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment. 2. Provide valves to isolate individual or a group of equipment on branch runouts from piping mains. This is in addition to valves at each fixture and equipment. C. Provide valves as indicated and where required to adequately service parts of systems and equipment. D. Gas Cocks: 1. Cocks on 2" lines and smaller shall be Jenkins 30A or Crane No. 324 or approved equal. 2. Cocks on 2-1/2" line and larger shall be Emco-Nordstrom No. 143 flanged pattern or approved equal. 3. All gas cocks at boilers shall be lubricated plug type. 4. Provide removable handles for all plug cocks. 5. Other special type valves or patterns shall be used where required. E. Gauge Cocks and Manual Air Vents: 1. Provide brass, lever handle cock, 1/4" FPT, as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. F. Dielectric Unions or Waterway Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric unions or waterway fittings at all piping connections (except to valves) between dissimilar metals, Watts No. 3000 series, Victaulic Style 47, or engineer approved equal. 2.3 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Actaris Metering Systems 2. Elster American Meter Company. 3. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. 4. Maxitrol Company. 5. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. B. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 11 23 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 5. Venting: a. Regulators with included approved vent-limiting device (REG 3 and REG 5A) do not require venting to atmosphere provided they are mounted in a ventilated location (e.g. near a gas appliance which also requires placement in a ventilated area). b. Ventilated locations include (but not limited to) mechanical rooms, attics, garages, and basements. c. Vent limiting device: Limit the fuel gas leakage to 2.5 cc per hour in the event of a diaphragm failure. C. Service Regulators 1. Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum with polyurethane top coat. 2. Valve Body: Cast iron. 3. Closing Spring: Steel, zinc plated. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Orifice: Aluminum. 7. Lever: Steel, zinc plated. 8. Vent Screen: Stainless steel. 9. Seal Plug: Die-cast aluminum. 10. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 60 psig. D. Low Pressure Regulators 1. Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum with polyurethane top coat. 2. Valve Body: Cast iron. 3. Closing Spring: Steel, zinc plated. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Orifice: Aluminum. 7. Lever: Steel, zinc plated. 8. Vent Screen: Stainless steel. 9. Seal Plug: Die-cast aluminum. 10. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig. E. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Provided by manufacturer of appliance. Appliance pressure regulator will comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 2. Closing Spring: Steel, zinc plated, interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Steel, zinc plated. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Orifice: Aluminum. 6. Lever: Steel, zinc plated. 7. Vent Screen: Stainless steel. 8. Seal Plug: Die-cast aluminum. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig. 2.4 FLANGES A. Flanges shall be 150 pound; A.S.A. forged steel, raised face, weld neck or slip-on. Slip-on flanges shall be welded both inside and outside. B. Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components. Victaulic Style 741 or W45 flange adapter nipple for sizes 14” through 24”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents. B. Refer to Section 23 0529, “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment” for general piping support requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 23 0500, “Common Work Results for HVAC” for general installation requirements. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 11 23 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 B. Underground Pipe: The bottom of the trench shall be shaped to give substantially uniform support to the lower third of each pipe. Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and in such manner as to form a concentric joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets to flow line. As work progresses, the interior of the pipe shall be cleaned of dirt and foreign materials of any kind. Where cleaning after laying is difficult, a suitable swab or drag shall be kept in the pipe and pulled forward past each joint immediately after joining has been completed. Trenches shall be kept free from water until pipe joining is complete and pipe shall not be laid when condition of trench or weather is unsuitable for such work. At all times when work is not in progress, all open ends of pipe fittings shall be securely closed to the satisfaction of the Architect so that no water, earth or other substance will enter pipe or fittings. C. Erection of Pipe above Grade: Piping shall be properly supported and adequate provisions shall be made for flashing, expansion, contraction, slope and anchorage. All piping shall be cut accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe shall be worked into place without springing and/or forcing, properly clearing all structural elements, finished rooms, windows, doors, and other openings and equipment. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate installation will not be permitted. D. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe will be permitted providing a hydraulic pipe bender is used. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformation will not be acceptable. E. Copper tubing shall be joined by the following method: 1. The tubing shall be reamed to remove all burrs from the inside diameter of the pipe. 2. The tubing and fitting shall be sanded or brushed to a uniform bright finish. 3. Apply a paste flux to both tubing and fitting. 4. Fully heat the joined parts and apply solder to the joint. 5. Completely fill the joint with solder, wiping any excess solder outside the joint while still liquid. F. Mitering of pipe to form elbows or notching straight runs to form tees will not be permitted unless shop fabricated by a certified welder. Weldolet or Threadolet fittings may be used in lieu of welding tees. G. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. H. Gas Piping: 1. All gas piping within the building shall be run exposed or enclosed in a sleeve vented to the outdoors, if required by local codes. 2. All piping shall be run straight without sags or traps and shall be so pitched as to drain back to the riser and from the riser to the system low points. A dirt pocket consisting of a nipple and a cap shall be provided at the bottom of each riser and at all low points of the gas distribution system. Provide access for cleaning of same dirt pocket. 3. Provide connections throughout the system to allow for adequate horizontal and vertical expansion and contraction of piping. 4. Provide a pressure regulator, with relief piping routed to the outdoors, at each gas consuming device or group of devices, where such devices operate at a pressure less than that of the gas supply line. Refer to the drawings for additional regulators and other information. Coordinate required regulators with others furnishing gas burning equipment. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 REFRIGERANT PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 2300 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 2300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Refrigerant piping and accessories. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500, “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer’s certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Seamless ACR copper tubing, Type L, hard drawn with wrought or bronze solder joint fittings. 2.2 VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES A. Materials: Bronze, ductile iron, or cast iron per local codes with screwed, Vic-Press 304™, grooved, or flanged ends for steel pipe and Permalynx push-to-connect, grooved, or solder ends for copper pipe. B. Valve locations: 1. Provide a valve on inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment. 2. Provide valves to isolate individual or a group of equipment on branch runouts from piping mains. This is in addition to valves at each fixture and equipment. 3. Provide valves as indicated and where required to adequately service parts of systems and equipment. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 REFRIGERANT PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 2300 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 C. Refrigerant Valves: 1. Globe and Angle Valves: Forged brass or bronze alloy with packed stem and seal cap. 2. Check Valves: Spring-loaded, forged brass or bronze alloy body with solder connections. 3. Relief Valves: Forged brass bodies with nonferrous corrosion resistant internal working parts. Valves shall be in accordance with ANSI B9.1. 4. Solenoid Valves: Two-position, direct acting or pilot operated type, UL listed, with manual opening stem and constructed for servicing without removal from lines. Valves shall have coil housing, stainless steel enclosing tube, replaceable seat, and proper inlet and outlet connections for the type of pipe containing the valve. D. Dielectric Unions or Waterway Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric unions or waterway fittings at all piping connections (except to valves) between dissimilar metals, Watts No. 3000 series, Victaulic Style 47, or engineer approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents. B. Refer to Section 23 0529, “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment” for general piping support requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 23 0500, “Common Work Results for HVAC” for general installation requirements. B. Underground Pipe: The bottom of the trench shall be shaped to give substantially uniform support to the lower third of each pipe. Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and in such manner as to form a concentric joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets to flow line. As work progresses, the interior of the pipe shall be cleaned of dirt and foreign materials of any kind. Where cleaning after laying is difficult, a suitable swab or drag shall be kept in the pipe and pulled forward past each joint immediately after joining has been completed. Trenches shall be kept free from water until pipe joining is complete and pipe shall not be laid when condition of trench or weather is unsuitable for such work. At all times when work is not in progress, all open ends of pipe fittings shall be securely closed to the satisfaction of the Architect so that no water, earth or other substance will enter pipe or fittings. C. Erection of Pipe above Grade: Piping shall be properly supported and adequate provisions shall be made for flashing, expansion, contraction, slope and anchorage. All piping shall be cut accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe shall be worked into place without springing and/or forcing, properly clearing all structural elements, finished rooms, windows, doors, and other openings and equipment. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate installation will not be permitted. D. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe will be permitted providing a hydraulic pipe bender is used. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformation will not be acceptable. E. Copper tubing shall be joined by the following method: 1. The tubing shall be reamed to remove all burrs from the inside diameter of the pipe. 2. The tubing and fitting shall be sanded or brushed to a uniform bright finish. 3. Apply a paste flux to both tubing and fitting. 4. Fully heat the joined parts and apply solder to the joint. 5. Completely fill the joint with solder, wiping any excess solder outside the joint while still liquid. F. Mitering of pipe to form elbows or notching straight runs to form tees will not be permitted unless shop fabricated by a certified welder. Weldolet or Threadolet fittings may be used in lieu of welding tees. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 REFRIGERANT PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 2300 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 G. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. H. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Refrigerant piping shall not be run concealed in walls or partitions nor underground or under the floor except as indicated on the drawings. Where pipe passes through building structure, pipe joints shall not be concealed, but shall be located where they may be readily inspected. 2. Refrigerant piping shall be brazed with silver solder complying with AWS A5.0 or "Sil-Fos". The inside of tubing and fittings shall be free of flux. The parts to be joined shall be cleaned bright with emery cloth and shall be heated to a temperature slightly greater than the solder flow point, and shall be kept hot until the solder has penetrated the full depth of the fitting. Joints shall be cooled in the air after which flame marks and traces of flux shall be removed. During the brazing operation, the tubing shall be protected from forming an oxide film on the inside by slowly flowing dry nitrogen to expel the air. Installation of the piping shall comply with ANSI B31.5. 3. Refrigerant lines shall be installed so that the gas velocity in the evaporator suction line is sufficient to move the oil along with the gas to the compressor. Where equipment location requires a vertical riser, the line size shall be as shown and installed to provide sufficient gas velocity or a double riser shall be installed as shown on the drawings. The larger riser shall have a trap, of minimum volume, formed by the use of 90 degree and 45 degree ells. The small riser shall be located with its inlet just upstream of the trap and shall connect to the top of the horizontal line. Valves shall not be installed in risers except as shown on the drawings. 4. Refrigerant driers, sight glass liquid and moisture indicators, and strainers shall be provided in refrigerant piping for remote installations when not furnished by the manufacturer as part of the equipment. Driers shall be installed in liquid line with service valves and a valved bypass line which are the same size as liquid line in which the drier is installed. Driers of 50 cubic inches and larger shall be installed with the cover and the full cartridge being easily removable. 5. Sight glass liquid and moisture indicators shall be installed in the liquid line downstream of the drier. Connections shall be the same size as the liquid line in which it is installed, up to 7/8"; 1-1/8" and larger shall have a 1/4" indicator installed in the "By-pass" position. 6. Strainers shall be located close to equipment they are to protect. A strainer shall be provided in the refrigerant liquid supply to expansion valves. Strainers shall be installed with screen down and in direction of flow as indicated on the strainer's body. 7. Refrigerant Charging Valve: A valved refrigerant charging connection shall be provided for each field piped refrigeration system when not provided as part of the condensing unit. The valve shall be located on the reducing outlet of a full size tee in the liquid line, upstream from the refrigerant drier and sight glass moisture indicator. Valves shall be of the seal cap type, 1/2" min. port size. 8. Solenoid valves shall be installed in horizontal lines with the stem vertical and with flow in direction indicated on the valve. If not incorporated as an integral part of the valve, strainers shall be provided upstream of each solenoid valve, with a service valve upstream of the solenoid valve. The solenoid valve shall be disassembled according to the manufacturers' recommendations when brazing the valve into the piping. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 METAL DUCTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 3113 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 3113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all air distribution items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Ductwork. 2. Access Doors. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500, ”Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials and methods meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. Ducts shall be constructed of new-galvanized steel sheets and erected in a first class manner, straight and smooth, with joints neatly finished, anchored securely to the building and free from vibration. B. All ducts penetrating fire walls shall be minimum 26 gauge galvanized steel regardless of SMACNA Standards. C. All elbows shall be curved elbows with a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct. Air turns consisting of curved metal vanes, arranged to permit the air to follow abrupt turns without appreciable turbulence shall be installed in square elbows, only where approved by the engineer. Air turns shall be the manufacturer's standard products, and shall be quiet and free from vibration. D. All ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition, 1998". The duct static pressure rating for this duct shall be two times the external static pressure of the system fan. The requirements for the seal class corresponding to the above static pressure shall be met. E. Longitudinal joints shall be Pittsburgh lock or Acme grooved seam. Side panels greater than 10 inches in depth shall be cross-broken for added stiffness. F. Transverse joints shall be Ductmate, TDC or types fabricated according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static- pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." G. Splitter damper shall have end bearings and consist of a blade constructed of 20 gauge-galvanized steel securely riveted or welded to a square operating rod. The length of the splitter blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the split in the main duct, but in no case less than 12". Multi-blade adjustable pickup shall be as manufactured by Titus Model AG-45 or approved equal with operator adjustable from the duct exterior. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 METAL DUCTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 3113 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 H. Volume dampers shall have end bearings and be multi-blade type with opposed acting blades linked together and controlled by a single operator. Multi-blade dampers shall be not less than No. 16 gauge galvanized steel mounted to plenum or ductwork per SMACNA requirements. I. Regulators shall be stamped galvanized steel, lever type with locking screw mounted on face of ductwork or concealed type with adjustable cover plate as manufactured by Young Regulator Model No. 315 with 2-1/4" diameter cover plate or approved equal. J. Damper quadrants, volume dampers and other duct flow control quadrants shall be as manufactured by Young Regulator or approved equal. K. Cable shall consist of Bowden cable 0.054” stainless steel control wire encapsulated with 1/16” flexible galvanized spiral wire sheath. Control kit shall consist of 270-896 bracket with a 7/8” diameter cold rolled steel zinc plated threaded cap suitable for painting, and 14 gauge steel rack and pinion gear drive converting rotary motion to push-pull motion. Control shafts shall be D-style flatted ¼” diameter with 265 degree rotation providing graduations for positive locking and control, and 1-1/2” linear travel capability. Control kit shall be manually operated using Young Regulator Model 030-12 wrench. Provide a wrench for each cable control system installed. Control kit shall be Young Regulator Model 270-896P with tamper proof screws or prior approval equal. 2.2 KITCHEN GREASE EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. The kitchen grease exhaust ductwork shall be constructed of black steel not less than 16 ga. up to 4 sq. ft. area, 14 ga. above 4 sq. ft. or as required by local codes with continuous grease-tight and water-tight welds at all joints and seams. B. The system shall be so constructed that no grease will become pocketed in any portion thereof and shall slope at not less than that prescribed by local codes, back to the hood. Where permitted by local codes, provide approved duct grease residue trap when minimum slopes are not provided due to restricted clearance. C. Openings in duct shall conform to code requirements and shall be provided for complete and thorough cleaning of duct system. D. Air velocity in the duct shall be not less than 1500 fpm nor more than 2500 fpm. E. Connection to hood shall be made above the finished ceiling unless shown otherwise on the drawings. F. All connections to fans shall be bolted flanged type and shall be gasketed with a resilient gasket not less than 3/8" thick, for fume-tight seal and for vibration absorption. Gasket shall be of a material impervious to grease and be NPFA approved as fire and leak proof. G. All kitchen hood exhaust ducts shall have fire rated duct wrap or enclosure as required to meet all code requirements. Method shall be approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction prior to installation. 2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Core material shall be a PVC Coated Fiberglass reinforced fabric supported by helically wound galvanized steel. The fabric shall be mechanically fastened to the steel helix without the use of adhesive. B. The internal working pressure rating shall be at least as follows with a bursting pressure of at least 2-1/2 times the working pressure. C. The duct shall be rated for a velocity of at least 5500 feet per minute. D. Suitable for operating temperatures of at least 250 degrees F. E. Factory insulate the flexible duct with flexible fiberglass insulation. The R value shall be at least 5.0 at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. (R4.2 not acceptable) F. Cover the insulation with a reinforced aluminum pigmented vapor barrier jacket having a permeance of not greater than 0.05 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, procedure A. G. The ductwork shall be UL 181 listed, Class 1 Air Duct and comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. H. Duct shall be secured with metal bands. I. Duct shall be Flexmaster Type 8M or pre-approved equal 2.4 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors equal to Nailor-Hart Ind., Inc. Series 0800. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 METAL DUCTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 3113 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All ductwork shall be installed as recommended by SMACNA and as shown or indicated on the drawings. Coordinate ductwork with all other trades and elements of the building construction. B. All ductwork accessories shall be provided as specified or shown or indicated on the drawings, install as recommended by SMACNA and the manufacturer. C. Ductwork shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner with ducts generally parallel to structure and tops of ducts as high as possible against building construction. Provide offsets as necessary to avoid obstructions, piping, or structural members. D. Flexible ductwork shall be installed and supported as recommended by SMACNA and the manufacturer. E. At each major branch from a primary rectangular or square trunk duct, and where shown on the drawings, install a splitter damper or multi-blade adjustable air pickup. F. Each individual air supply duct tap shall be equipped with a volume control device for the manual adjustment of airflow in each tap. Face bars, blanks, and equalizing grids shall not be used to regulate airflow. G. Volume dampers shall be installed within ducts or plenums where shown on the drawings and on all supply/return/exhaust taps for balancing of system. H. Round or oval ductwork shall be fastened together with a minimum of three sheet metal screws equally spaced around the perimeter of the duct and taped with an approved duct sealing tape. Ductwork shall be furnished complete with all factory fabricated starting collars, Y shaped branch takeoffs, adjustable elbows, etc. I. Where ducts are in mechanical rooms or unfinished areas, or where dampers occur above lift out ceilings, regulators shall be stamped galvanized steel, lever type with locking screw mounted on face of ductwork. For all other areas, where damper adjustments cannot be accessed through the ceiling, regulators shall be the concealed type with adjustable cover plate. J. For all detention areas and other areas where damper adjustments cannot be accessed through the ceiling, Bowden cable controls shall be used. Damper controller and cable shall be concealed above the ceiling. Control kit shall be imbedded in the ceiling flush with the finished surface. Control kit shall not be located within detention living areas, exact location shall be approved by the architect prior to installation. K. On the inlet and outlet of each piece of air moving equipment, unless noted otherwise, install a flexible connection made with sufficient slack to render it flexible. L. Where air intakes and/or discharges are indicated on the drawings and no air device is indicated, install 1/4" bird screens over each duct opening set in galvanized steel frames and securely attach to the openings. M. Furnish and install 26 gauge galvanized steel counter flashings for all ducts penetrating roofs and for all roof mounted equipment unless directed otherwise by the Architect. N. Provide concentric taps on all connections from the main duct to branch ducts. O. Provide stamped steel access doors at each fire damper, fire and smoke damper, where control devices occur within ductwork, and as indicated on the drawings. Access doors shall be fully insulated where duct is lined internally. Provide with mounting flange, double thickness door with cam latch, gasket and retaining wire. No tools shall be required to open the access door. P. The minimum size of each access door shall be sufficient to provide adequate access for the intended purpose of installation. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 3423 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 3423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary air handling items as shown on the drawings and/or specified. B. Work Included: 1. Fans C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500, “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two sets of belts for each fan, not including the set installed on the fans. Tag sets to identify fan. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. D. Performance Base: Sea level conditions. E. Temperature Limit: Maximum 400 degrees F. F. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas. G. Greenheck, Cook or Penn may be used if they are equal in all respects to those specified. Provide manufacturers accessories as scheduled. Provide extra sheaves and belts if required to meet scheduled performance. H. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 Lb/ft^3). I. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 3423 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2.2 DIRECT DRIVE INLINE: A. Duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans shall be of centrifugal, direct driven in-line type. The fan housing shall be of the square design, constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include square duct mounting collars. B. Fan construction shall include two removable access panels located perpendicular to the motor mounting panel. The access panels must be sufficient size to permit easy access to all interior components. C. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. D. Motors shall be permanently lubricated and carefully matched to the fan loads. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. E. A NEMA 1 disconnect switch shall be provided as standard, except with explosion resistant motors, where disconnects are optional. Factory wiring shall be provided from motor to the handy box. F. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air performance. G. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. 2.3 BELT DRIVE INLINE A. Duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans shall be of centrifugal belt driven in-line type. The fan housing shall be of the square design constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include square duct mounting collars. B. Fan construction shall include two removable access panels located perpendicular to the motor mounting panel. The access panels must be of sufficient size to permit easy access to all interior components. C. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. D. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be mounted out of the airstream. E. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L10) life in excess of 100,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. F. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. G. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for system balancing. A NEMA 1 disconnect switch shall be provided as standard, except with explosion resistant motors, where disconnects are optional. Factory wiring shall be provided from motor to the handy box. H. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air performance. I. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. 2.4 ROOF MOUNTED UPBLAST DIRECT DRIVE A. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. B. The fan housing shall be constructed of heave gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. Windbands shall have a rolled bead for added strength and shall be joined to curbcaps with a leakproof, continuously welded seam. C. Motors shall be mounted out of the airstream on vibration isolators. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of discharge contaminants. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. D. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box within the motor compartment. A conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of electrical wiring. E. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 3423 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 F. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. 2.6 V-BELT DRIVES A. All v-belt drives shall be designed for a minimum of 50% overload. Where more than one belt is required, matched sets shall be used. All belt drives shall be furnished with belt guards. Belts on fans 10hp and over shall be Gates Poly-Chain. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install units with manufacturer recommended clearances for service and maintenance. C. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. D. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. E. Provide fixed sheaves and belts if required to meet design conditions for final air balance. F. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. G. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans where indicated. H. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment". I. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL/FILTRATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 233516 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 232516 – VEHICLE EXHUAST REMOVAL/FILTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all air distribution items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work Included: 1. The air filtration system shall be a totally automatic activated system that also contains a manual override system. The system shall be hands free, to allow emergency personnel to respond to the emergency at hand. The system shall automatically activate when the bay doors open, when apparatus egress and ingress the fire station or by means of several other methods as stated within. The filtration system shall operate for a minimum of twenty (20) minutes to complete station air cleaning. The system shall have the capability to increase this time to a maximum of sixty (60) minutes on an initial activation. Additional manual override switches shall allow for each individual unit to operate on a 24/7 basis as deemed necessary by the end user initiate all units to operate on a predetermined set time; a reset to bypass the timer and terminate activation with a cascading down of units as they turn off. 2. The timer control shall be designed to sequentially start and stop the exhaust capture air filtration units to avoid power surges and contain only UL approved components. The timer control box shall be one hundred (100) percent low voltage (24V max) to eliminate shock hazards to personnel. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500,”Common Work Results for HVAC”. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials and methods meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. The system shall have documented evidence of having been successfully tested to meet regulatory health and safety standards in at least one (1) active Fire/EMS departments. E. The test shall have been conducted under the direction of an independent industrial hygienist. One of the submitted test must show, with no exceptions, as a matter of personnel health and safety, that the system meets and/or surpasses federal regulatory standards for ACGIH, NFPA, BOCA, ASHRAE, EPA, OSHA, PEL (short term), TLV/STEL, and NIOSH. Test parameters shall include VOCs, NO2, SO2, CO, Particulates and Diesel Exhaust Particulates as one of the standards of measurement. The testing shall have been performed by a certified industrial hygienist and shall verify performance standards with the fire apparatus idling in bays, on the tarmac, and entering/exiting bays as would occur during normal station operation 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall be of at least two (2) years on all system parts and labor, excluding filters. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL/FILTRATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 233516 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Basis of Design: AirHAWK Model 3000XL i. No substitutions allowed. B. The filtration equipment shall be delivered and installed as a turnkey system with no requirement for station personnel involvement. The exhaust capture equipment will be self-contained five stage progressive filtration designed system. The system filtration media must be verified by the manufacturer to be capable of capturing vehicle exhaust with a blower and with a motor capable of a delivered volume of 2750 cfm (cubic feet per minute) meeting NFPA and OSHA Standards. C. Clean, filtered air shall be returned to the apparatus bay areas from the rear of the same system. There will be no heat/air loss or air exhausted to the outside atmosphere. The system equipment will not require building structural modifications. Equipment Features: 1. Ceiling suspended design evenly distributing the unit weight. 2. 208-230 single phase 60Hz Power with no less than a 2750 cfm blower driven by 1hp motor. 3. Utilize a horizontal pull-through design for optimum exhaust elimination. 4. Includes MERV 11 pre-filter, dual V-Bank 98% DOP, MERV 16 primary filter, PCO (photo catalytic oxidation) filter section, and a 2 stage Gas Phase carbon blended with potassium permanganate 50/50 filters. 5. Relocation or re-positioning capabilities, not a permanent fixture type system. 6. Access internally sealed filter replacement compartment door utilizing two (2) bolts to ensure safety in filter access and replacement as well as UL guidelines. 7. There shall be 2 compartment doors to access both the component filter section as well as the motor blower section. This will provide easy access in a safe and efficient manner to replace filters or work on the blower/motor components. 8. Red LED filter change indicator to be visible from the floor level. 9. Visible green LED run light. 10. Capable of 24/7 operation 11. Maximum 65db sound level when in operation. 12. Accommodate any vehicle or vehicle arrangement. 13. Accommodate any ceiling height or ceiling construction. 14. Must have rear baffle box to exhaust clean air back into bay areas through a minimum of more than 30 directional ports so as to evenly distribute return clean air and provide a fan sound control system for apparatus bay areas. D. Equipment Activation: The air filtration system shall work in tandem with and include an automatic, hands free, activation system featuring: 1. Operation engineered through a wall mount control panel. 2. No maintenance will be required over the entire life of the system. Excluding filters 3. Housed in a NEMA 4x enclosure complying with UL and CSA specifications. 4. Control Panel to contain a 60-minute timer adjustable to operate in 1-minute increments from 1-60 minutes. 5. Control panel switches to allow individual unit manual bypass opting for 24/7 operation. 6. Control panel to have an external timer Bypass switch for immediate system shutdown. System to automatically reactivate under any normal activation inputs. 7. A photoelectric eye to span up to 200 contiguous feet of bay doors and be able to operate at least seven (6-7) feet off the floor. Doors not in line with other doors or having obstructions with over four (4) feet of wall or barrier protrusions eliminating a clear line of site will require a separate photoelectric eye beam. 8. Apparatus leaving bays must activate all units within the apparatus bay. 9. Control panel engineering to sequentially start filtration units with two (2) second delay to avoid station power surges. 10. Control panel must have the capability to accommodate up to six (6) or ten (10) filtration units per control unit for future system expansion. 11. System shall be able to accept up to three (3) alternate methods of activation including: a. Apparatus ignition activation b. Activation in response to signal from CO/NO2 monitor utilizing ACI Q-5 or equivalent E. Equipment Safety: The system shall include the following safety features: 1. All Control panel control wiring shall be low voltage (24 VAC max) to eliminate electrical hazard. 2. Control panel will house internal visible LED indicators for all “ON” units. 3. All components must be UL registered. 4. Filtration units shall have an integral thermal overload to work in tandem with electrical panel City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL/FILTRATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 233516 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 breakers. 5. Filtration unit blower and wiring to be contained in a single blower box compartment, inaccessible to personnel. 6. System shall be capable of cycling up when turned ON to avoid power surges. 7. Filter tracks to ensure safe filter replacement. F. Equipment Filters: 1. All filtration media shall be separately housed in a self-contained compartment with sealing on the filter door to avoid gas/particulate bypass, tight fit, slide track, filter compartment to eliminate diesel and contaminant bypass of the individual filters. The filter door closure shall contain seals to avoid bypass air. 2. Pre-filter Panel: a. Filter shall be capable of providing a minimum efficiency reporting value of MERV 11 when evaluated under the guideline of ASHRAE Standard 52.2.19. b. Filter shall be no less than 24”x24”x4” (nominal), including frame, incorporating filtration media no less than 26.6 ft2. c. Initial filter airflow resistance shall be maximum 0.25 in w.g. d. Filter airflow capacity at 300 fpm (feet per minute) shall be 1200 cfm. e. Filter airflow capacity at 500 fpm shall be 2000 cfm at 0.25 in w.g. f. Filter frame shall be composed of moisture resistant heavy duty beverage board frame. g. Filter shall be two (2) piece construction with double wall thickness around the outer edge and integral die cut cross member. h. Filter pleats shall have individual die cut fingers. i. Adhesive used shall be highly water repellent and cover the entire inside of the die cut frame. j. Filter pleat supports shall be composed of galvanized steel. k. Filter shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as UL Class 2. l. Filter shall be designed to perform up to six (6) to twenty-four (24) months and longer, based on environmental conditions and use. 3. High Efficiency Particle Filter Second Stage a. No less than 98% DOP MERV 16 ASHRAE rating, V-bank foundation DOP design to encompass a minimum surface of 200 ft2 and capable of removing particulate as small as 0.3µ in size. b. Filter shall be enclosed in a heavy-duty, moisture resistant die cut frame to eliminate warping, cracking, or distortion under normal operation conditions. c. Filter shall have integral pleat separators to provide pleat stabilization. Filter shall not contain aluminum or steel separators in between filter strata of each V bank section. d. Filter shall be effective at 100% relative humidity, turbulent air flow, intermittent exposure to water and repeated fan shutdowns. e. Initial filter airflow resistance at 500 fpm shall be 0.80 in w.g. f. Filter shall be rated to work from 0°F to 180°F. g. Filter shall be able to handle airflow volumes up to 3000 cfm. h. Filter perimeter header shall be secured by standard latches or clamping devices. i. Filter shall be leak free around the entire perimeter. j. Each mini-pleat pack shall be sealed within the heat resistant plastic end panels and galvanized steel support struts. k. Mini-pleats are to be separated by continuous beads of thermo-setting adhesive, not steel separators between mini-pleats. l. Filter shall measure no less than 24”x24”x12” (nominal), including frame and fit snugly into the track. m. Filter cannot be a flat face filter to avoid intense filter blockage. n. Filter shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as UL 900 Class 2. o. Filter shall be designed to perform up to twenty-four (24) to forty-eight (48) months and longer, based on environmental conditions and use. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL/FILTRATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 233516 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 4. Gas Phase Carbon/ potassium permanganate 2 Stage Filter: a. Filter shall contain a minimum of 26 lbs. of carbon blend with potassium permanganate, to include fifty (50) percent active premium grade coconut shell carbon blended with fifty (50) percent potassium permanganate b. Filter frame weight shall be separately calculated. c. Filter shall measure no less than 24”x24”x12” (nominal), including frame. d. Filter shall have V-bank design, not flat face surface, to provide extensive capture, extended life and fit snugly into the track. e. Filter shall ship with an after filter to prevent carbon duct from migrating downstream. f. Filter shall have galvanized steel support struts on both sides of the filter. g. Filter end caps shall be made from resilient ABS plastic. h. The honeycomb panels containing the carbon granules shall be water resistant. i. Non-volatile hot melt glue shall be used to bond the carbon panels, end caps and steel support members. j. Initial filter airflow resistance at 500 fpm shall be 0.38 in w.g. k. Filter cannot show evidence of air pockets between absorbent carbon/potassium permanganate. l. The gas phase filter shall be capable of controlling and eliminating VOCs, chemicals and gas of diesel contamination within the apparatus bays. m. Manufacturer shall provide evidence of facility certification to ISO 9001:2000. n. Filter shall be designed to perform up to twenty-four (24) to forty-eight (48) months and longer, based on environmental conditions and use. 5. Photo Catalytic Oxidation (PCO) Section a Equipped with 2 UV lamps of at least 3 milliwatt / CM². b UV-C 254 nanometers. c. Titanium dioxide Ti02 coated grid with a minimum of 70 square feet of Ti02 covered surface area. d. Converts dangerous carcinogenic substances into harmless substances of CO2 and water vapor. e. Destroys airborne viruses. f. Decontaminates to keep the apparatus bay area environment fresh and healthy. 6. Carbon Monoxide/Nitrogen Dioxide (CO/NO2) Activation: a. The ACI Q-5, or equivalent, shall be integrated into the system for additional safety operation. The CO/NO2 monitor must be connected to the control panel to engage the air filtration units automatically once the gas detector measures unsafe levels of CO and/or NO2 in the apparatus bays. The air filtration units are to operate until these gases are reduced to OSHA acceptable levels. These are two (2) separate monitor sensors. The CO monitor shall be installed within the breathing zone five to six feet from the floor. The NO2 monitor sensor shall be installed a minimum of one to four feet from the ceiling. b. When the sensors are activated, they shall be interlocked to have overhead grilles 152 and 153 to close and overhead sectionals doors 142 and 144 to open half-way till such time that the sensors are no longer activated or 10 minutes, whichever is longer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of the entire vehicle exhaust/air filtration system shall be performed by the successful manufacturer, or approved manufacturer’s qualified installers with experience of a minimum of Ten (10) similar department installations of the same type of equipment. Successful vendor is required to coordinate installation with the project mechanical and electrical contractors. The electrical contractor shall only be responsible for the electrical energy source to each filtration unit which shall be capable of providing the proper voltage and current requirements of the electrical components within the system. The vendor shall provide complete Installation, Operation and Service Instruction Manuals for each installation. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 37 00 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 37 00 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary air handling items as shown on the drawings and/or specified. B. Work Included: 1. Diffusers. 2. Registers/grilles. 3. Louvers. 4. Dryer Vent Box 5. Roof Curbs C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical Systems. 1. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise level. 2. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. C. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. D. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR SUPPLIES AND RETURNS A. Grilles, registers and ceiling outlets shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and shall be provided with sponge rubber or soft felt gaskets. Devices shall be the type, size, capacity, performance, and by the manufacturer scheduled or approved equal. If a manufacturer other than the one scheduled is used, the sizes shown on the Drawings shall be checked for performance, noise level, face velocity, throw, pressure drop, etc., before the submittal is made. Selections shall meet the manufacturer's own published data for the above performance criteria. The throw shall be such that the velocity at the end of the throw in the five foot occupancy zone will be not more than 50 FPM or less than 25 FPM. Noise levels shall not exceed those published in the ASHRAE Guide for the type of space being served (NC level). B. Locations of outlets on Drawings are approximate and shall be coordinated with other trades to make symmetrical patterns and shall be governed by the established pattern of the lighting fixtures or architectural reflected ceiling plan. Where called for on the schedules, the grilles, registers and ceiling outlets shall be provided with deflecting devices and manual damper. These shall be the standard product of the manufacturer, subject to review by the Architect, and equal to brand scheduled. C. All ceiling mounted devices shall be provided with frames compatible with the ceiling type. Coordinate required frame style with architectural reflected ceiling plans. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 37 00 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 D. All adjustable pattern lay-in type-ceiling diffusers shall be adjustable without the use of tools. E. Coordinate air device frame type and color with Architect's room finish schedule to match adjacent surface in which the device will be installed F. All ceiling mounted devices shall have insulated backs. G. Acceptable Manufacturers are Titus, MetalAire, or Price. 2.2 LOUVERS A. Aluminum fixed blade louvers shall be extruded aluminum, stationary storm proof type, with a drain gutter in each blade. Blades and frames shall be minimum 0.1 inch thick with reinforcing bosses and shall be of 6063-T5 alloy. Head, jamb and sill shall be of one piece structural member of 6063-T5 Alloy with integral calking slot and retaining bead. Supports and blades shall have provision for expansion and contraction. All fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum. Louvers shall be free of all scratches, blemishes and defects. Sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings. Louvers shall have a minimum free area of 50% and a maximum pressure drop of 0.02 inches of water at 500 feet per minute air velocity. B. Structural supports shall be provided and designed by the louver manufacturer to carry a windload of not less than thirty-five pounds per square foot (35 psi). C. Provide louvers with removable bird screens, consisting of aluminum frame with mitered corners and 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) diameter 1/2 inch aluminum wire mesh. Bird screen shall be attached to interior of louver with sheet metal screws or clips. D. Provide backdraft dampers adjacent to each wall louver in all cases with exception of louvers that provide the introduction of combustion air. E. Louver finish and color shall be as directed by Architect. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck 2. Ruskin 3. Pottorff 4. NCA 2.3 DRYER VENT BOX A. Dryer vent box shall be a UL listed one hour fire stop device manufactured from a minimum of 22 gauge aluminized steel. Box shall be selected based on wall size and exhaust direction. Dryer vent box shall meet code requirements as a cleanout. Box shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer. Box shall be manufactured by In-O-Vate Technologies, Inc (www.dryerbox.com). 2.4 ROOF CURBS A. Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Curbs are to be fully gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit. Curb gasketing shall be furnished within the control compartment of the rooftop unit to be mounted on the curb immediately before mounting of the rooftop unit. Roof curbs shall be insulated to a value of R-40 and sloped to match roof pitch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers. OBD as part of the diffuser or grille will not be accepted. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 234100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 234100 – PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION (AIRHAWK 1000) INTENT It is the intent of this specification to provide for the purchase, delivery and installation of an AirHAWK 1000 air filtration system as specified. The use of brand name, AirHAWK 1000 is for specification purposes of an acceptable of like kind and quality. The air filtration system shall work to capture, clean and purify the environment within areas such as, communication centers, living spaces day rooms, bunk rooms, kitchen areas, etc. This unit shall be installed above the ceiling/dropped ceiling (plenum) where the afforded space is sufficient to allow for a neat and professional installation. The ductwork shall be installed to give optimum air flow and maximum environment cleaning. Where spacing and facility areas allow, an AirHAWK 1000 can be installed to cover multiple areas, providing required air changes. Additionally, this AirHAWK 1000 filtration system can be used in areas to capture, reduce or eliminate the vehicle exhaust products from the apparatus in addition to contaminants generated by other sources. Contaminants may consist of airborne engine vapors, diesel exhaust, soot, gases, carbon monoxide, nitrous dioxide, and any other gas or diesel exhaust powered equipment located in the bay area. Additional toxins to be captured must include Volatile Organic Compounds, particulate and damaging lung dust. The quantity of units needed will be determined by the cubic footage of each space and in which the environment is to be cleaned with ten air changes per hour, or every six minutes a change of air will occur through the air cleaners. This formula for determining the number of units will be used unless otherwise specified. PRE-FILTER Shall be of a synthetic media multi pleated type 12” X 24” X 4”. Media shall be 100% synthetic fibers. An expanded metal reinforcement shall be laminated to the air heavy side. A heavy duty moisture resistant beverage board shall be used to encase the frame. It shall be rated at MERV 7. PRIMARY FILTER Shall be a MicroMax NHM, MERV 14 HEPA grade air filter with efficiency based upon .3 micron size particle. Self extinguishing adhesive shall bond the media pack to the frame. Size shall be 12” X 24” X 4”. PHOTO-CATALYTIC OXIDATION CHAMBER Photo-Catalytic Oxidation (PCO) is a technology that provides chemical-free oxidation of volatile organic chemicals (VOC’s) and microbes. It changes these chemicals into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water. Developed by Sandia Laboratory and the National Renewable Laboratory and used by the Department of Defense for destroying toxic organic compounds (VOC’s). It utilizes the activation of a catalytic surface with ultra violet UV lamp having spectra less than 254 nanometers (nm). The photo-catalytic oxidation chamber (PCO) shall utilize a grid made of aircraft aluminum honeycomb material with 1/8” cells and 3/4” thick. There shall be 35 square feet of surface area. This grid shall be impregnated with titanium dioxide (TiO2) into the cell area and on the total surface area (35 sq. ft.) of the grid or substrate. This (TiO2) application shall be rugged enough so as not to flake off or deteriorate over time and should be washable (if necessary) with mild soap, Windex and water. This surface area of the grid or catalyst shall be illuminated with one (1) UV lamp with a minimum rating of 3 milliwatts/CM². The lamp shall be UV-C 254 nanometers and have a life expectancy of up to 9000 hours. Shall be a 25¼” X 11½” X 5” component of the filtration package. GAS-PHASE FILTRATION The “1000” is equipped with a carbon filter that is a combination 50/50 blend of activated charcoal and potassium City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 234100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 permanganate on zeolite. Thousands of pores trap and absorb volatile organic compounds (VOC’s). To be 12” X 24” X 2” in size. UNIT CABINET Shall be manufactured with 18-Gauge galvanized steel, measuring 44½” X 25 ¾” X 14” with 10” inlet and outlet collars for attaching ductwork gauge of clenched or welded construction. Door access panels shall be fully hinged for entry to both filter and motor blower compartments. MOTOR BLOWER Shall be direct-drive,; 1/6 H.P., single phase. The 1/6 H.P., 2.8 amps. motors are ball bearing style. MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATION Product shall be manufactured by a manufacturer with a current ISO 9001:2000 certification. This will insure manufacturer employs a high standard that insures quality management and quality control to produce the highest product quality. OPERATIONAL DETAILS A. BLOWER AND MOTOR: The motor must be capable of being removed as a single assembly without having to remove the unit from its mounted location, when, if ever, maintenance is required in these areas. The unit must be able to remain in place during motor / blower service or removal. The blower shall be a 1/6 HP direct-drive permanently lubricated ball-bearing blower capable of processing air at 992 cubic feet per hour. The blower wheel shall be reinforced to provide long, trouble-free service. The motor mounting system shall incorporate a welded ring motor mount, complete assembly, to assure no possible vibration or movement. The blower shall be mounted in the clean-air section of the chassis, down-stream of all filters and the PCO, to provide contamination protection. The blower shall provide thermal over-load protection with automatic reset capability. The fan wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The components shall allow for 115VAC /1/60 Hz operation. The blower shall be capable of 24/7 operation. B. AIR DISTRIBUTION: The system shall contain an air-circulation function to thoroughly mix the facility-air with the cleaned air. The system shall be designed to completely circulate and purify the air within the facility by providing at least 10 complete clean-air exchanges per hour. If more or less air changes are required, calculations will be performed to conform to the requirements and the proper number of units needed will be specified. The air currents shall contain both horizontal and vertical eddy-current components to prevent dead-air pockets of pollution or particulate from forming within the defined areas. WARRANTY All valid bids must include at least a two (2) year written warranty on all system parts, excluding filters, and must include all labor and transportation costs associated with the warranty entitlements. The warranty can be voided when it has been determined that a claim is due to the customer’s negligence or misuse. The warranty will remain in effect only when installations and repairs are performed by a qualified licensed electrician who is contracted by the customer and that ALL instructions depicted in the installation manual are followed. An inspection after installation is completed is required to certify correct installation of all facets of the system. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HEAT GENERATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 5400 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 5400 - HEAT GENERATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of the heating system as indicated on the drawings and as specified. Provide factory trained start-up service for all equipment. B. Work Included 1. Water heaters. 2. Flue pipe. 3. Gas furnaces. 4. Unit heaters C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical Systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GAS WATER HEATERS A. Heater shall be gas fired, with burner type and output as scheduled. Unit efficiency shall be based on flue gas analysis and standby losses shall be per ASHRAE 90 standards or local energy codes, whichever is more stringent. B. Heater shall be in compliance with the applicable provisions and recommendations of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, and be UL listed. C. Heater shall be furnished complete with but not limited to: 1. The outer jacket shall be of baked enamel finish and shall enclose the tank with insulation. 2. ASME temperature and pressure relief valve. 3. High temperature limit switch. 4. Operating controls, to include programmed pre-purge cycle spark ignition flame monitoring and normal burner control shall be by an adjustable operating thermostat. 5. Operating efficiency shall be a minimum of 98%. 6. Tank shall be warranted for 7 years – 4 full, 3 prorated. 7. Heat exchanger shall be warranted for 4 years full. 8. Vent material shall be 4” Schedule 40 CPVC. D. Provide heaters as manufactured by PVI Industries, A.O. Smith, or Aerco. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HEAT GENERATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 5400 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2.2 GAS FIRED FURNACE A. Furnish and install gas fired furnaces in the location and of the capacity shown on the drawings. Furnace section shall be AGA approved. Furnace shall have efficiency rating per ASHRAE 90 standards or local energy codes, whichever is more stringent. B. Fan section shall have forward-curved blades, double-inlet fan mounted on the motor shaft. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings. C. Casing shall be made of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. D. Heat exchanger shall be cold rolled steel and sectional in design. E. Burners shall be aluminized steel and tapered for even gas distribution; ignition shall be accomplished by means of an electronic ignition system. F. Cooling coils, when scheduled, shall be nonferrous construction with mechanically bonded smooth plate fins. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos copper or silver alloy. G. Controls shall include: Gas valve, with 100% automatic main burner and pilot shutoff; fan and limit control, prewired indoor fan relay with transformer; and a low-voltage automatic heating/cooling thermostat. H. Install 1" throwaway filters in units and provide to owner, one complete set of extra filters. I. Furnaces shall be high efficiency and provided with a concentric vent kit. J. Provide units as manufactured by Trane, Carrier, Daikin or York. 2.3 SEPARATED COMBUSTION GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS A. Provide high-efficiency, separated combustion, gas-fired unit heaters of the capacity as shown on the drawings. B. The combustion air supply pipe and flue exhaust pipe shall be run parallel to a factory-supplied vertical vent terminal assembly. The vent terminal assembly shall be arranged to provide preheating of the combustion supply air and to allow a single wall or roof penetration. C. Each unit shall be equipped for use with natural gas. The heat exchanger shall be of 409 stainless steel and include burner air shutters and a stainless steel insert. D. Unit shall have combination redundant gas valve with intermittent spark pilot and electronic flame supervision with timed lockout. Unit shall bear AGA and UL label. E. Units shall have centrifugal blower or propeller fan as scheduled and motor with internal overload and safety fan guard. F. Horizontal and vertical louvers shall be provided for directing air flow. G. The unit must be arranged for ceiling suspension with threaded hanger connections and provided with hanger kits. H. The cabinet shall be constructed of cold-rolled steel and finished with baked-on enamel. I. Provide factory furnished single stage thermostat. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HEAT GENERATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 5400 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 J. All gas-fired unit heaters must bear the AGA label. Provide units as manufactured by Trane, Modine, or Reznor. 2.4 HEATER FLUES A. Flue shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Type B flues shall be double wall with galvanized finish, UL listed as manufactured by Metalbestos or approved equal with AGA approved vent cap, roof flashing and storm collar. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Prior to operation, the factory start-up representative shall, in the presence of the Architect's representative perform all system and equipment checks as prescribed by the manufacturer in his written start-up procedures. B. The factory start-up representative shall place the equipment in operation and record all start-up data. Three copies of all data shall be given to the Architect. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 8149 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 23 8149 - REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating refrigeration and air handling system as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. DX Condensing Unit 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that the equipment meets or exceeds minimum requirements as specified. D. All equipment shall have a minimum EER in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 unless specified otherwise. E. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. F. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC). G. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be factory tested for safety and function. H. All equipment shall be stored protected from weather, extreme temperature, etc. as suggested by the manufacturer. All equipment shall be moved, lifted, etc. as suggested by the manufacturer. 1.4 WARRANTY A. The units shall have a manufacturer’s warranty for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. The units shall have a limited labor warranty for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. The compressor shall have a warranty of six (6) years from date of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 D-X CONDENSING UNIT A. Shall be electric-driven, air-cooled condensing units complete with compressor, sight glass and moisture indicator, cartridge type filter drier, service valves, and copper tube and aluminum fin condensing coil enclosed in a weatherproof cabinet with direct propeller fan. Air discharge shall be vertical. B. Unit shall be furnished with a winter start package. C. Unit shall have the following features: Five-year unconditional warranty on compressor, one-year warranty on other parts, including labor, parts and refrigerant. Crankcase heaters, high and low pressure cut-off switch and automatic reset, positive internal protection for motor against thermal switches and timer for prevention of cycling on compressors. D. Provide a programmable thermostat control package. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 23 8149 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 E. Provide hail guards. F. Units shall be as manufactured by Trane, Carrier, Daikin or York. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed as shown or indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.2 PRODUCT SUPPORT A. Maintain a fully staffed service office within 400 miles (1 day drive) of the job site. Fully staffed means a full time secretary, complete service library, at least 2 factory trained service technicians and the factory recommended spare parts inventory. B. Provide a 24 hour/7 day technical support phone number to factory service office. Support shall be for all components including controls, mechanical components, system operation and alarm codes, etc. C. The Manufacturer or local representative shall maintain a complete parts inventory for all systems that will allow for 24 hour receipt of any necessary part. D. Provide owner/operator and service training both on line and at designated training centers. 3.3 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. The system must be installed by a factory trained contractor. B. Equipment start up shall be by factory trained personnel. The startup shall be attended by the controls contractor and Test and Balance contractor. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0500 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General Requirements for Electrical Work are intended to be complementary to General Requirements of Construction Contract. B. Work Included: Provide complete electrical systems where shown on Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to following summary of Work. 1. Interior and exterior lighting 2. Emergency exit and egress lighting 3. Lighting control system 4. Fire detection and alarm system 5. Telephone raceway system 6. Switchboard and Panelboards 7. Lighting and distribution panelboards 8. Power feeds to mechanical, plumbing and fire protection equipment: a. Provide conduit, wire, disconnect switch, overcurrent and short circuit protection for all equipment, whether shown on the drawings or not, including, motorized dampers, smoke dampers, electric heat trace, power for energy management system, water softening equipment, water treatment systems, air dryers, electric flush valves, electric trap primers, electric solenoids, shower valves, and other miscellaneous equipment. 9. Surge protective devices 10. Occupancy sensors 11. Packaged generator set 12. Automatic transfer switch 13. Electrical service entrance 14. Lighting control system 15. Other items and services required to complete electrical systems 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Division. Ensure that there is a minimum of one journeyman electrician, on job site whenever Division 26 Work is being performed. B. Without additional cost, provide labor and materials as required to complete Work of this Division in accordance with requirements of Governmental Agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. Codes: Electrical and fire alarm work shall conform to requirements and recommendations of the following codes. Refer to the most recent code adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1. National Electrical Code 2. International Energy Code 3. International Fire Code 4. International Building Code 5. Local amendments to the above codes D. Standards: Specifications and Standards of following organizations are by reference made part of these Specifications. Electrical Work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: 1. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 5. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0500 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 6. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 8. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) 9. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) 10. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 11. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13. Radio-Television Manufacturer's Association (RTMA) 14. Reflector Luminaire Manufacturers (RLM) 15. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Requirements and recommendations of latest editions of Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), are by reference made part of these Specifications. Work shall comply with requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Terms furnish, install, and provide are used interchangeably and shall mean to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01. B. Engineer will review electronically transmitted submittals only. Submit copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Divisions 01 and 26 submittal requirements. C. Submittals required of materials and equipment include following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 26. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements. Term "Compliance" is understood to mean that Contractor certifies that submitted equipment meets or exceeds Contract Document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in following paragraph. 3. Identify difference between specified item and proposed item. Explain with enough detail so that it can easily be determined that item complies with functional intent. List the disadvantages or advantages of proposed item versus specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in clear and concise format. Substitutions shall be approved in writing by Engineer. Engineer’s decision shall be final. 4. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review of each submittal and re-submittal. 5. Items of equipment that are not accepted in writing as approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with Contract Documents at Contractor's expense. 6. The manufacturers recommended installation procedures shall become basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on Work. 7. Shop drawings shall consist of detailed drawings with dimensions, schedules, weights, capacities, installation details and pertinent information needed to describe the material or equipment. D. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this Division include following listed items not supplied by Owner. These submittal requirements are intended to be complimentary to requirements that may be listed in individual sections. In event of conflict, more stringent requirement shall apply. 1. Conductors and Cables: a. Submit product data for each specified product. b. Submit tabular list of wire and wiring systems that will be increased in capacity or size to comply with Section 26 0519 and/or similar requirements shown on Drawings. List shall include size shown on Drawings, proposed increase to comply with Section 26 0519, and proposed installed length. 2. Raceways and Boxes: a. Submit product data for surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged- cover enclosures, and cabinets. b. Submit Shop Drawings including layout drawings showing components and wiring for nonstandard boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 3. Wiring Devices: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0500 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 a. Submit product data for each specified product. b. Submit operation and maintenance data for wiring devices, for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in this Section. c. Submit dimension plan for locations of all non-standard devices including but not limited to floor boxes, ceiling boxes, cord reels and welding boxes. 4. Switchboards: a. Submit product data for each product and component specified. b. Submit Shop Drawings for each switchboard including dimensioned plans and elevations, component and device lists, and single-line diagram showing main and branch bus current ratings and short-time and short-circuit ratings of switchboard. c. Submit schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices. d. Submit manufacturer's schematic wiring diagram. e. Submit point-to-point control wiring diagram, differentiating between manufacturer- installed and field-installed wiring. f. Submit qualification data for field-testing organization certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that organization complies with requirements specified in Quality Assurance below. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Engineers and Owners, plus other information specified. g. Submit maintenance data for materials and products, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual as specified in this Section. 5. Grounding: a. Submit product data for grounding rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings. 6. Switchboard/Panelboards: a. Submit product data for each type panelboard, accessory item, and component specified. b. Submit Shop Drawings prepared by the manufacturers including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1; bus configuration and current ratings; short-circuit current rating of panelboard; and features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components. c. Submit typewritten panelboard schedules to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. d. Submit maintenance data for panelboard components, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this Section. Include instructions for testing circuit breakers. 7. Disconnect Switches: a. Submit product data for disconnect switches and specified accessories. 8. Automatic Transfer Switches: a. Submit Shop Drawings or product data for each transfer switch, including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances; conductor entry provisions; gutter space; installed features and devices; and materials lists. b. Submit wiring diagrams, elementary or schematic, differentiating between manufacturer- installed and field-installed wiring. c. Submit operation and maintenance data for each type of product, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this section. Include features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration instructions. d. Submit manufacturer's certificate of compliance to referenced standards and tested short- circuit closing and withstand ratings applicable to protective devices and current ratings. 9. Engine-Generator Set: a. Submit exhaust emissions. Submit prototype test data. b. Submit wiring diagrams for system, showing power and control connections and distinguishing between factory-installed and field-installed wiring. c. Submit product data for products specified in this Section. Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance. Include a dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of the engine generator set, the weatherproof enclosure, sub-base fuel tank and other system components. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0500 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 d. Submit maintenance data for system and components for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this Section. e. Submit detailed operating instructions, covering operation under both normal and emergency conditions and sound test reports. f. Submit certification of torsional vibration compatibility: Conform to NFPA 110. g. Submit factory test reports for units to be shipped for this Project showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements. 10. Motor Controllers: a. Submit product data for specified products. Include dimensions, ratings, and data on features and components. b. Submit maintenance data for products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this Section. 11. Lighting: a. Submit product data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories. b. Submit outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures, including color. c. Submit electrical ratings and photometric data including certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps. d. Submit battery and charger data for emergency lighting units. e. Submit Shop Drawings detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating dimensions, weights, and methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. f. Submit wiring diagrams detailing wiring for control system showing both factory-installed and field-installed wiring for each specific system which differentiates between factory- installed and field-installed wiring. g. Submit maintenance data for fixtures to include in operation and maintenance manual specified in this Section. h. Submit lamp data for each fixture. 12. Fire Alarm System: a. Submit product data for each type of system component specified including dimensioned plans and elevations showing installed features and devices. Include list of materials and nationally recognized testing laboratory-listing data. Submit to Engineer after being reviewed and approved by local authority having jurisdiction. b. Submit wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating clearly between factory- and field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with terminals and interconnections identified. Make diagrams specific to this Project and distinguish between field and factory wiring. c. Submit device address list. d. Submit system operation description covering this specific Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are unacceptable. e. Submit operating instructions for mounting at fire alarm control panel. f. Submit battery hours of operation calculations for loss of normal power operation. g. Submit maintenance data for fire alarm systems to include in operation and maintenance manual specified in this Section. Include data for each type of product, including features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. Include recommendations for spare parts to be stocked at site. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations that carry stock of repair parts for system to be furnished. h. Submit design drawings approved by local authority having jurisdiction. 13. Provide a dimension layout of electrical rooms(s) and elevator equipment room(s) if applicable. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contract Documents list manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by phrase "or equal" are to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference to the scaled drawings. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0500 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 B. Submittals for "equal" items shall include the following data, which is not necessarily required for specified items, which list the manufacturer and catalog number: 1. Performance characteristics 2. Materials 3. Finish 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards 5. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements. Term "compliance" is understood to mean that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the Contract Document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition shall be identified and explained as required in following Paragraph. 6. Identify all differences between the specified item and proposed item. Explain all differences with sufficient detail to permit the Engineer to easily determine that the substituted item complies with the functional intent. List disadvantages and advantages of proposed item versus specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in clear and concise format. Engineer shall approve substitutions in writing. Engineer’s decision shall be final. C. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if: 1. Material or equipment would necessitate alteration of mechanical, electrical, architectural, or structural design 2. Dimensions vary from specified material or equipment so that accessibility or clearances are impaired or Work of other trades is adversely affected D. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted 10 days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, substitutions will not be permitted. Only the prime bidders shall be permitted make proposals for substitutions. E. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. Should substitution be accepted, and should substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for service intended, and within guarantee period, replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, to satisfaction of Engineer and at no cost to Owner. 1.8 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES AND ROYALTIES A. Purchase all necessary permits and licenses necessary for completion of the Work. Pay all lawful fees required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. Required certificates of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities. B. Pay all fees required for connection of utility power and telephone services required for the Work. C. Pay royalty payments or fees required for use of patented equipment or systems. Defend lawsuits or claims for infringement of patent rights and hold Owner and/or Engineer harmless from loss as result of said suits or claims. 1.9 COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of component parts of electrical systems. Assure compatibility of equipment and performance of integrated systems in accordance with requirements of the Construction Documents. Notify the Engineer before submitting a bid should Specifications or Drawings make acceptance of responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive. The bid shall be accompanied by a written statement listing any objections or exceptions to the applicable specification section and/or drawing. 1.10 UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY POWER A. Verify location and capacity of all existing utility services before starting Work. The locations and sizes of electrical lines are shown in accordance with data secured from Owner's survey. The data shown is offered as estimating guide without guarantee of accuracy. B. Pay all utility charges for temporary power. Provide temporary lighting and power required. Install in accordance with OSHA requirements and as described in General Requirements Division 01. 1.11 FLASHINGS, SLEEVES, AND INSERTS A. Furnish and install flashings where conduits pass through outside walls. Flashings shall be properly formed to fit around conduit and shall be caulked, with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation, so as to make watertight seal between conduit and building. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0500 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 B. Unless otherwise specified, install sleeves for each conduit where it may pass through interior walls or floors. Galvanized 22-gage sheet iron sleeves shall be used. Finish flush with each finished wall surface. In pipe chases, the sleeve shall extend 1-1/2 inches above floor slab and shall be watertight. C. Raceways that pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves, unless shown otherwise on drawings. Inside diameter of these sleeves shall be at least 1/2 inch greater than outside diameters of service pipes. After pipes are installed in these sleeves, fill annular space between pipes and sleeves with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation. Completed installation shall be watertight. D. Roof penetrations shall be provided with counter flashings arranged to provide weatherproof installation. E. Penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be done in manner to maintain integrity of fire rating of respective wall, floor, or ceiling. F. Reference Division 7 for additional sealant requirements. Where conflicts occur with the specified requirements, the more stringent shall apply. 1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching in strict accordance with provisions of these Specifications and following: 1. Coordinate Work to minimize cutting and patching. 2. Use adequate number of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work. B. Request for Engineer’s consent: 1. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety, submit a written request to Engineer for permission to proceed with cutting. 2. When conditions of Work or schedule require a change of materials or methods for cutting and patching, notify Engineer and secure written permission to proceed with the work. C. Perform cutting and demolition using methods that will prevent damage to other portions of Work. D. Perform fitting and adjusting to provide a finished installation complying with specified tolerances and finishes. 1.13 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Division will be performed. Work required to correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work shall be included as part of Work of this Division. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 1.14 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings show arrangements of Work. Rearrangement of spaces and equipment will be considered when Project conditions make this necessary and/or materials or equipment can be installed to better advantage. Prior to proceeding with Work, coordinate with various trades to prepare and submit five (5) copies of Drawings of proposed arrangement for Engineer’s review. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review. B. Installation or rearrangement of equipment and space for Contractor’s convenience or to accommodate material or equipment substitutions will be considered. Assume responsibility for rearrangement of equipment and space and have Engineer review change before proceeding with Work. Request for changes shall be accompanied by Shop Drawings of affected equipment and space. Identify proposed monetary credits or other benefits. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review. C. Properly locate and size all required pipe sleeves and slots, holes, or openings in structure. 1.15 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents as follows: 1. Where lighting fixtures and other electrical items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and mechanical or other equipment, provide required supports and wiring to clear encroachment. 2. Install power and control wiring for installation of equipment furnished under Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Furnish disconnect switches and other equipment as required for proper operation of equipment unless equipment is specified to be factory mounted. B. Information on the Drawings and in these Specifications is as accurate as could be secured, but absolute accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings are diagrammatic, and the exact locations, distances, levels, and other conditions shall be governed by actual construction. The drawings and specifications shall be for guidance. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0500 - 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 C. Where receptacle locations are not dimensioned on either the Architectural or Engineering Drawings, the J- box may be located on the nearest stud. When receptacles are dimensioned on the Drawings, Provide a cross brace and mount the receptacle as dimensioned. D. Field-verify measurements. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between Work shown on Drawings and actual site measurements. E. Branch circuit wiring and arrangement of home runs have been designed for maximum economy consistent with adequate sizing and other considerations. Increase size of wiring and wiring systems to accommodate more stringent requirements listed in these Specifications or on Drawings. Install wiring with circuits arranged as shown on Drawings. Deviations shall be approved in advance by Engineer. 1.16 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide Project record documents associated with Work in accordance with provisions of these Specifications. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. B. Throughout progress of the Work, maintain accurate record of all changes in Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications). Changes shall include Addendums issued during bidding and location of electrical service lines, receptacles, and outside utilities. C. Delegate responsibility for maintenance of record documents to one person on Contractor's staff. D. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within record documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other documents where required to show change properly. Match symbology and format of base documents. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future searches for items shown in Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from approved Project record documents. E. Maintain a job set of record documents protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of Work. Transfer all recorded data to final Project record documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings 1. Using erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date entries. 3. Call attention to entry by "cloud" drawn around area or areas affected. 4. In event of overlapping changes, use different colors for overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that changes have occurred. 6. Maintain base drawing format and use the same symbols. 7. Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this Section. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts 1. In some cases on Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, and similar items, are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final physical arrangement, subject to Engineer’s approval. The design of future modifications of facility may require accurate information as to final physical layout of items that are shown only schematically on Drawings. Show by dimension accurate to within one inch, centerline of each run of sleeves and conduit below grade, in walls, or in concrete slab, etc. Surface mounted device indicates exact location: a. Clearly identify item by accurate note (e.g., "Rigid Conduit”). b. Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item “under slab,” “in ceiling plenum,” “exposed,” etc. c. Make identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to Specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents 1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 2. Provide CADD electronic files in dwg Format using AutoCAD Release 2002 or later software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer’s standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD Release 2002 electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained. 3. Provide completed record drawings on CD and one mylar film reproducible of each drawing. 4. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0500 - 8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed manual or manuals to Engineer for review and comments. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review. B. Submit approved manual to Engineer prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Where instruction manuals are required for submittal, they shall be prepared in accordance with the following: Format: Size: Paper: Text: Drawings: 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch White bond, at least 20 pound weight Neatly written or printed 11 inches in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within Manual and provide drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers with binding mechanism concealed inside manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; binding is subject to Engineer’s approval. D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by Engineer, and clearly identified on or through cover with at least following information: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Name and Address of Work Name of Contractor General subject of this manual Space for approval signature of Engineer and approval date[s] E. Contents: Include at least following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near front of Manual, giving immediate information as to location within manual of emergency information regarding installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of equipment involved including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of parts of equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor and other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer's bulletins, cuts, and descriptive data, where pertinent, clearly indicating precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Other data as required in pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 1.18 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS A. Provide equipment foundations in accordance with provisions of these Specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for main switchboard, distribution panelboards, floor-mounted transformers and other equipment that is to be pad- or floor-mounted. Bases shall be 4 inches high above finished floors or grades (unless otherwise noted) and shall protrude 2 inches beyond sides of equipment and shall have exposed chamfered edges. Construct bases from ready-mixed hard rock concrete, ASTM C94, reinforced with #3 Rebars, ASTM A615, Grade 40. Rebars shall be located at 18 inches on center each way. Measurements: Provide measurements in U.S. standard units (e.g., feet, inches, and pounds). Where items may be expected to be measured within 10 years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in "International System of Units" (SI). City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0500 - 9 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 C. Field-verify exact location of outdoor pad mounted equipment with Engineer. Supply necessary fill and grade site to provide natural drainage away from equipment. D. Provide structural concrete foundations for generator, pad mounted transformers and lighting pole bases. 1.19 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from Engineer and Governmental Agencies having jurisdiction B. Make written notice to Engineer adequately in advance of each of following stages of construction: 1. When rough in is complete, but not covered 2. At completion of Work of this Division 3. In underground condition prior to placing backfill, concrete floor slab, and when associated electrical Work is in place C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with specified requirements, remove items from job site and replace them with items complying with specified requirements at no additional cost to Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. D. In Engineer’s presence, test parts of electrical system and prove that items provided under this Division function electrically in required manner. 1.20 SITE VISITS BY FACTORY PERSONNEL A. Pay for travel expenses, living expenses, and miscellaneous expenses associated with site visits of factory personnel to perform on site testing, inspections, and reviews. 1.21 WARRANTY A. Warrant equipment and workmanship for period of one year after date of substantial completion and replace or repair faulty equipment or installation at no cost to Owner for service during this period, in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. Warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of time or void rights guaranteed to Owner by law. C. Warranties shall be in writing in form satisfactory to Owner, and shall be delivered to Owner before final payment is made. 1.22 PROJECT COMPLETION A. Upon completion of Work of this Division, thoroughly clean exposed portions of electrical installation, removing traces of soil, labels, grease, oil, and other foreign material, and using only type cleaner recommended by manufacturer of item being cleaned. B. Thoroughly indoctrinate Owner's operation and maintenance personnel in contents of operations and maintenance manual required to be submitted as part of this Division of these Specifications. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0503 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0503 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows: A. Penetrations for the passage of conduit and other electrical equipment through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. B. Completion of firestop installations to maintain the rating integrity of the barrier penetrated. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Test Requirements: ASTM E-814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops" (July 1997). B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL runs ASTM E-814 under their designation of UL 1479 and publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually. 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices (XHCR) b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV) c. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) C. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174-01 “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops”. D. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments. E. ASTM E-84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. F. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC. (Note to specifier: Retain or delete building codes listed above as applicable). G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code H. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and drawing details. B. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. C. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. D. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly. E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council (September 7, 1994 as may be amended from time to time). 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with Section 1300. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0503 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details when no UL system is available for an application. Engineer judgment must include both project name and contractor’s name that will install firestop system as described in drawing. C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site. 1.7 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacture’s products per specified requirements. A manufacturer’s willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable. B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job-site. C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. E. Do not use damaged or expired materials. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents. B. Scheduling 1. Schedule installation of CAST IN PLACE firestop devices after completion of floor formwork, metal form deck, or composite deck but before placement of concrete. 2. Schedule installation of other firestopping materials after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet. E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. C. Firestopping materials are either “cast-in-place” (integral with concrete placement) or “post installed”. Provide cast-in-place Firestop devices prior to concrete placement. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below: 1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma (800) 879-8000 2. Tremco Sealants & Coatings, Beechwood, Ohio (216) 292-5000 3. 3M Fire Protection Products, St. Paul, Minnesota (612) 736-0203 4. Johns-Manville Firetemp 5. Other manufacturers listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 2.3 MATERIALS A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814 tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance. B. Cast-in place firestop devices are installed prior to concrete placement for use with non-combustible and combustible plastic conduit penetrating concrete floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 680 Cast-In Place Firestop Device City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0503 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2. Hilti CP 681 Tub Box Kit 3. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 C. Sealants or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant 3. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 4. 3M Fire Stop Sealant 2000 5. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 6. Tremco Tremstop Fyre-Sil Sealant 7. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 D. Sealants or caulking materials for use with sheet metal ducts, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 3. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 4. Hilti CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant 5. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 E. Intumescent sealants or caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 3. Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent Firestop Sealant 4. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 F. Intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 3. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick 4. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 5. Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent Firestop Sealant 6. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 G. Non curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 H. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 1 I. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic conduit, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 642 Firestop Collar 2. Hilti CP 643 Firestop Collar 3. 3M Fire Barrier PPD Plastic Pipe Device 4. Hilti CP 645 Wrap Strip 5. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 J. Materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 637 Firestop Mortar 2. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 3. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 4. 3M Firestop Foam 2001 5. 3M Fire Barrier CS-195 Composite Sheet 6. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 K. Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2 L. Provide a firestop system with an "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0503 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. 2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may affect proper adhesion. 3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping. 5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place Firestop Devices with trade responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete. B. Responsible trade to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow for installation of cast-in-place firestop devices without interferences. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through-penetration and construction joint materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. 2. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. C. Inspection of through-penetration firestopping shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 2174, “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops” or other recognized standard. D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop materials and soiling as work progresses. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SITE ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0505 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0505 - SITE ELECTRICAL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of all site electrical work. B. The site electrical work shall include, but not be limited to, the furnishing and installation of necessary materials and making arrangements for: 1. The connection of electrical, telephone, data and cable utilities. 2. Underground conduit. C. Meet with the electric utility company and all other utility provider's representative prior to bidding the project. Review the site plan and the load summary and verify the requirements for providing electric service to the building. Determine what work will be provided by the power company and what work will be performed by the contractor. Obtain copies of appropriate details, standards, and instructions. Utility locations are subject to change during this coordination. All changes must be accounted for in the bid. No additional funds will be provided for failing to coordinate this work. Request the amount of any utility charges to be charged to the project. Include these costs in the bid. D. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical service as directed by the utility company. E. Work Includes, but is not limited to: 1. Furnish and install underground primary trench, for the direct buried primary service conductors. 2. Furnish and install conduits, wires, transformer pads and meeting equipment to provide an electrical service entrance as shown on the drawing and/or specified herein. Coordinate work with the electric utility company, verify all requirements, and install service entrance equipment in exact compliance with utility company and local governmental agency requirements. 3. Arrange with the electric utility company to inspect the work. 4. Include in the bid, all utility company charges and costs related to the installation of the electric service. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products specified under 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 300 B. Service installation standards of the serving utility company(s) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Coordination: The location of the electrical service entrance shall be coordinated with the electric utility company and with all other trades. Provide materials and equipment required to connect the electrical service. B. Materials: Provide materials in accordance with other Sections of these Specifications. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Underground installation of more than one conduit shall be in a “ductbank” arrangement. All conduits shall be laid so joints are staggered. B. Pour a red colored concrete envelope minimum 3" thick over electrical, cable television, and telephone service conduit. C. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings, a full concrete enclosed ductbank with reinforcing rods shall be installed. D. Perform excavation, shoring, backfilling and concrete work in connection with electrical work in accordance with other Divisions of the Specifications. E. All underground conduits shall be sloped away from the building to negate water entering the building through the conduit system. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SITE ELECTRICAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0505 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 F. Provide underground warning tape 6" to 12" below finished surface along entire length of underground conduit or ductbank. Provide a separate length of tape for every 24" in width of ductbank. Interface installation of underground warning tape with backfilling. 3.2 UTILITIES A. The locations, elevations and voltage of electrical lines included within the area of this work are indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications in accordance with information received by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall examine the site and shall verify, to his own satisfaction, the location and elevation of all utilities, and shall adequately inform himself as to their relation to the work. C. The work associated with existing utility lines to be abandoned or removed, shown within the scope of this project, will be arranged by the Owner with the respective utility. D. Existing utility lines not indicated but encountered during construction shall be protected, relocated or capped as directed by the Owner's Representative. All precautions shall be exercised to prevent damage to existing lines not shown, but should work become necessary, it must be authorized prior to execution except in an emergency situation. E. Before beginning excavations of any nature whatsoever, the Contractor shall make an attempt to locate all underground utilities of every nature occurring within the bounds of the area to be excavated. The Contractor shall then proceed with caution in his excavation work so that no utility shall be damaged with a resultant loss of service. F. Should damage result to any utility through the Contractor's negligence or failure to comply with the above directive, he shall be liable for such damage and for all expense incurred in the expeditious repair or replacement of such damaged utilities. G. Repair of damaged utilities shall be to a condition equal to or better than the adjacent undamaged portion of such utility and to the complete satisfaction of the Owner. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0519 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0519 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of conductors as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Wiring connections and terminations, 600 Volt rating and below. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the manufacturer's certifications that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Provide conductors made of soft-drawn, annealed copper with conductivity not less than that of 98% pure copper. B. Building Wire: 1. Thermoplastic-insulated building wire: NEMA WC 5 2. Feeders and branch circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600-volt insulation, THHN/THWN-2 3. Control circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600-volt insulation, THHN/THWN-2 4. Where more than one conductor of the same phase or more than one neutral conductor occurs at the same outlet or junction box, these conductors shall be identifiable from each other by use of stripes or distinguishing markings 5. Type MC and AC cables shall not be used 6. Use the following color code system: 240/120 Volt Systems 208Y/120 Volt Systems 480Y/277 Volt Systems Phase A Black Black Brown Phase B Orange Red Orange Phase C Blue Blue Yellow Neutral White White Gray Ground Green Green Green Switch Purple Purple Purple C. Remote Control and Signal Cable: 1. Control cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper conductor, 300-volt insulation, rated 60-degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0519 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2. Plenum cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper conductor, 300-volt insulation, rated 60-degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a nonmetallic jacket; UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products by the following manufacturers: 1. Rome 2. Cable 3. Pirelli 4. Belden 5. Approved equal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS (LESS THAN 600 VOLTS) A. Install conductor sizes as indicated. Provide No. 10 AWG conductor for the entire circuit length for single-phase, 20-ampere circuits for which the distance from panelboard to the last outlet is more than 100 feet for 120-volt circuits or 200 feet for 277-volt circuits. The minimum wire size shall be 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 18 AWG for control wiring. Remote control wiring shall not be less than 14 AWG for installed lengths of 50 feet or less. Remote control conductors shall be increased one size (per NEC Table 310) for each additional 50 feet of length. Increase the raceway system to accommodate the increased wire size. B. Provide an equal number of conductors of equal size for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable. C. Splice only in junction boxes, outlet boxes, pullboxes, or manholes. D. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. E. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. F. Phasing shall be consistent throughout each installation from the service connection to every device connection and outlet. Where interface is made to an existing system, the existing phasing configuration shall be maintained. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire-pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. B. Support cables above accessible ceilings. Do not rest on ceiling tiles, light fixtures or air devices. Use spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure. Include bridle rings or drive rings. C. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 3.4 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Splice only in accessible boxes or manholes. B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps 8 AWG and smaller. C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. G. Field Testing. Insulation resistance of all feeder conductors served by a protective device rated 200A or higher shall be tested. Each conductor shall have its insulation resistance tested after the installation is completed and all splices, taps and connections are made except connection to or into its source and point (or points) of termination. Insulation resistance of conductors which are to operate at 600 volts or less shall City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0519 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 be tested by using a Biddle Megger of not less than 1000 volts d-c. Insulation resistance of conductors rated at 600 volts shall be free of shorts and grounds and have a minimum resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground of at least 10 megohms. Conductors that do not exceed insulation resistance values listed above shall be removed at Contractor's expense and replaced and test repeated. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests, shall tabulate readings observed, and shall forward copies of the test readings to the Owner in accordance with Section 26 0593. These test reports shall identify each conductor tested, date and time of test and weather conditions. Each test shall be signed by the party making the test. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under applicable provisions of Division 26. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturers recommended values. D. Perform continuity tests on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing of all connections. 3.6 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. All locations: Building wire in raceways. 3.7 600-VOLT INSULATED CONDUCTORS A. Size: Install conductor sizes as indicated. Provide No. 10 AWG conductor for the entire circuit length for single-phase, 20-ampere circuits for which the distance from panelboard to the last outlet is more than 100 feet for 120-volt circuits or 200 feet for 277-volt circuits. B. Home Runs: Except where specifically indicated, provide branch circuit home runs with not more than two different line conductors and a common neutral in a single raceway for 3-wire, single-phase systems, nor more than three different line conductors and a common neutral in a single raceway for 4-wire, 3-phase systems. Use home run circuit numbers as indicated for panelboard connections. C. Where more than one conductor of the same phase or more than one neutral conductor occurs at the same outlet or junction box, these conductors shall be identifiable from each other by use of stripes or distinguishing markings. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0526 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical systems grounding as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Power systems grounding 2. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Engineer with the manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide electrical grounding system indicated with assembly of materials, including but not limited to: 1. Wires and cables 2. Connectors 3. Terminals 4. Ground rods 5. Bonding jumper braid 6. Surge arrestors B. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated. 2.2 CHEMICAL GROUND ROD A. Self-contained ground rod(s) using electrolytically enhanced grounding shall be provided for power system grounding where indicated on the drawings. The ground rod shall operate by hygroscopically extracting moisture from the air to activate the electrolytic process improving performance. The ground rod system shall be UL listed and have been manufactured for a minimum of 10 years. The ground rod system shall be 100% self activating sealed and maintenance free. The system shall not require the addition of chemical or water solutions. B. Electrode unit 1. The copper ground rod shall consist of 2” nominal diameter hollow copper tube with a wall thickness of not less than .083”. The tube shall be permanently capped on the top and bottom. Air breather holes shall be provided in the top of the tube and drainage holes shall be provided in the bottom of the tube for electrolyte drainage into the surrounding soil. Shaft configuration: Straight Shaft Model No: K2-1020CS; UL Listing: 467. 2. The ground rod shall be filled from the factory with non-hazardous Calsolyte to enhance grounding performance. 3. Ground rod shall be twenty feet long for straight (vertical) installation. 4. A stranded 4/0 AWG Cu ground wire shall be Cadwelded to the side of rod for electrode conductor connection. A clamping “U-bolt” with pressure plate on the tip end of the tube shall be provided for testing and temporary connections. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0526 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 C. Ground Access Box 1. Provide a precast concrete box with slots for conduit entrances. Minimum size shall be ten-inch diameter by twelve high. Provide a cast iron, flush traffic rated cover with “breather” slots, XIT model #XB-12. D. Backfill Material 1. Natural volcanic, non-corrosive form of bentonite clay grout backfill material free of polymer sealant. XIT model #LNC. 2. Shall absorb approximately 14 gallons of water per 50# bag for optimal 30% solids density. 3. PH value 8-10 with maximum resistively of 3 ohm-m at 30% solids density. E. Manufacturer: Lyncole XIT Grounding, 3547 Voyager St., Torrance, CA 90503, Phone (800) 962-2610; or approved equal. F. Ground Wire Termination: Exothermic connection to 4/0 conductor. U-bolt with pressure plate provided as test point. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. C. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. Provide bonding jumper around water meter. D. Installation of Chemical Ground Rod 1. Install a supplemental ground rod system in compliance with manufacturer’s instruction or recommendation. 2. Bore minimum 6” diameter hole, 6” deeper than the length of rod to be buried. Insure that the top of the copper chemical ground rod will not come in contact with the metal grate of the protective box or hand-hole cover. 3. Remove sealing tape from leaching holes 4. Place chemical ground rod in hole, so that the top of unit is about 6” below grade. 5. Backfill. 6. Lynconite backfill is specific clay (bentonite clay) included with the system. Mix each 50# backfill grout material with 14 gallons water to form a slurry and pour around chemical ground rod up to “bury to here sticker”. 7. Place protective box in accordance with the drawings 8. Remove sealing tape from the top breather holes to activate. 9. Connect grounding electrode conductor to ground rod pigtail exothermically (Cadweld or Thermoweld). 10. Bury grounding conductor 30” below grade. Cover conductor with a small amount of backfill for protection against corrosion. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Perform fall-of-potential test or alternative in accordance with IEEE Standard 81-1991 on the main grounding electrode or systems. 2. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived neutral points. C. Test Values: 1. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground should be no greater than two ohms. Install additional grounding electrodes, as required, to achieve the specified resistance value. 2. Investigate point-to-point resistance values which exceed 0.5 ohm. Correct deficiencies at no additional cost. Retest to prove compliance D. Provide written certification to the Engineer that the grounding system has been tested and complies with the specified requirements. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0526 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 E. Provide a test report. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0529 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0529 - SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of support systems as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Conduit and equipment supports 2. Fastening hardware 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work in this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificates that confirm materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGERS AND CLAMPS A. Provide supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials indicated, and having the following construction features: 1. Clevis Hangers: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2" diameter hole for round steel rod, approximately 54 pounds per units. 2. Riser Clamps: For supporting 5" rigid metal conduit; black steel; with 2 bolts and nuts, and 4" ears, approximately 510 pounds per 100 units. 3. Reducing Couplings: Steel rod reducing coupling, 1/2" x 5/8", black steel, approximately 16 pounds per 100 units. 4. C-Clamps: Black steel, 1-1/4" x 3/16" stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2", approximately 52 pounds per 100 units. 5. I-Beam Clamps: Black steel, 1-1/4" x 3/16" stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2"; approximately 52 pounds per 100 units. 6. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; approximately 7 pounds per 100 units. 7. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel; 3/4" strap width; and 2-1/8" between center of screw holes. 8. Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2" rod size; galvanized steel; approximately 4 pounds per 100 units. 9. Round Steel Rod: Black steel; 1/2" diameter; approximately 67 pounds per 100 feet. 10. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; black steel; approximately 200 pounds per 100 units. B. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes, and materials indicated, and having the following construction features: 1. Lead Expansion Anchors: 1/2", approximately 38 pounds per 100 units. 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16" x 4"; approximately 5 pounds per 100 units. C. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: 1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0529 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 walls. Construct with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. D. Conduit Cable Supports: Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non-armored type electrical cables in risers; construct for 2" rigid metal conduit; 3-wires, type wire as indicated; construct body of malleable iron casting with hot dip galvanized finish. E. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 16-gage hot dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, with standard green finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U-channel: Fixture hangers Channel hangers End caps Beam clamps Thin wall conduit clamps Wiring stud Rigid conduit clamps Conduit hangers U-bolts 2.2 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gauge; 4" to 6", 16 gauge; over 6", 14 gauge. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, remove burrs. 3. Iron Pipe: Fabricate from cast iron or ductile iron pipe; remove burrs. 4. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs. B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, of one of the following: 1. Dow # 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors, preset inserts, or beam clamps. B. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing indicated. C. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or present inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. D. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. E. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. F. Install freestanding electrical equipment on concrete pads. G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. H. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support surface and flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls. I. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0533.13 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0533.13 - CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating electrical raceway system, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings 2. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings 3. Flexible metal conduit and fittings 4. Non-metallic conduit and fittings 5. Surface-mounted raceway 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Provide metal conduits, tubing, fittings, and couplings of types, grades, sizes, and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings 1. Rigid steel conduit: ANSI C80.1 2. Fittings and conduit bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings 1. EMT: ANSI C80.3 galvanized tubing 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type D. Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings 1. Conduit: FS WW-C-566; steel 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 E. Liquid tight Flexible Conduit and Fittings 1. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 F. Plastic Conduit and Fittings 1. Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3 2.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: Steel or malleable iron. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0533.13 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. Size of conduit shall be as indicated on the drawings or sized for conductor type installed, whichever is larger. Size all conduits in accordance with the NEC. Minimum conduit size shall be ¾ inch. B. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. C. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. D. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating appliances. E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. G. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. F. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2-inches in size. G. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. I. Provide a pull tape for spare empty conduits. The tape shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester tape with distance marking in feet continuous along its length. Furnish T&B or Greenlee products. J. Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints. K. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, provide mechanical firestop fittings with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. Seal opening around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. L. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise route through roof jack with pitch pocket. M. Maximum size conduit in slabs above grade: 3/4 inch. N. Use PVC-coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs longer than 100 feet or in plastic conduit runs, which have more than two bends regardless of length. O. Make joints in accordance with manufacturers’ written instructions. P. Provide plastic warning tape for underground conduit or duct bank installations. Install warning tape directly above conduit one foot below finished grade or as shown on drawings. Q. Sand for intermediate fill around underground conduits shall be washed sand, suitable for concrete or masonry. Reference Section 26 0500 for additional backfill and excavation requirements. 3.3 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Underground installations more than two feet from foundation wall: Rigid steel conduit or Schedule 40 plastic conduit. B. Installations in or under concrete slab, or underground within 2 feet of foundation wall: Rigid steel conduit. C. In slab above grade: Rigid steel conduit. D. Exposed outdoor locations: Rigid steel conduit. E. Wet interior locations: Rigid Steel Conduit. F. Concealed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing. G. Exposed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing. 3.4 CONDUIT IN DETNTION AREAS A. Conduits shall be concealed in CMU walls. B. Conduits shall be concealed in concrete walls and ceilings. C. conduits may be exposed in electric rooms, mechanical rooms and plumbing chases. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0533.16 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0533.16 - BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of outlets, pull and junction boxes as indicated on the Drawings and specified. B. Work included: 1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes 2. Pull and junction boxes 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Engineer with manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements specified in Division 01. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BOXES A. Provide standard, stamped galvanized steel boxes except as hereinafter noted, by Steel City or approved equal. B. Outlet Boxes 1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Cast Boxes: Aluminum or cast ferroalloy, deep type, gasket and cover, threaded hubs. C. Pull and Junction Boxes 1. Sheet metal boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 2. Cast metal boxes for outdoor and wet location installation shall be NEMA 250;, Type 4 and Type 6, flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction boxes, UL listed as rain tight. Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cast Metal Boxes for Underground Installations: NEMA 250 Type 4, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting, UL listed as raintight. Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum box and plain cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 2.2 FLOOR BOXES A. Combination Flush Floor Boxes 1. Where indicated in plan, furnish and install Wiremold/Walker Resource RFB series four compartment floor boxes. 2. Boxes located on the First Floor shall be Cast Iron, with a maximum depth of 3-7/16”. 3. Boxes located on the Second Floor shall be Shallow Stamped Steel, with a maximum depth of 2- 7/16”. PART 3 - EXECUTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0533.16 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 3.1 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. 3.2 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide a minimum 6-inch separation between boxes. Provide a minimum 24-inch separation between boxes in acoustic-rated walls. B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. D. Support boxes securely and independently of conduit. E. Use multiple gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. F. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. G. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. H. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plans. I. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches of recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. J. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. K. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. L. Provide cast outlet boxes in exterior locations and wet locations. 3.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. C. Set underground pull and junction boxes level and flush with finished grade. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0553 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of identification for electrical equipment as shown or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Nameplates and tape labels 2. Wire and cable markers 3. Buried conduit markers 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements in Division 01. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Clothe markers, split sleeve or tubing type. C. Buried Conduit Marker: Continuous printed plastic tape. D. Outdoor Equipment Cables: Manufacturer's Standards 1. Weather and sun resistant 2. Vandal resistant 2.2 EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAYS OVER 600 VOLTS A. Provide “WARNING - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT” signs on all equipment. With 2-inch high lettering, mark exposed raceways containing conductors operating in excess of 600 volts every 100 feet with the words “WARNING - HIGH VOLTAGE”. 2.3 SPECIAL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION A. Special Systems. Brady Series 55200, 2" wide, pipe banding tape or colored conduit. 1. Fire alarm: red 2. Telephone: blue 3. Data/Communications: blue 4. Low voltage controls: black 5. Sound systems: yellow 6. Clock systems: green 2.4 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Lighting and Power Circuit Wire Markers. 1. Sizes #12 through 3/0 AWG. Brady SCN clip-sleeve wire markers. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0553 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2. Sizes 4/0 AWG and larger. Brady HSA heat shrink sleeves, custom printed. 3. Legends. Panel and circuit description; for example "EP1-1", "E1 - 2", "LPA-14". 2.5 EQUIPMENT AND WIRING DEVICE NAMEPLATES A. General: White core laminated plastic. White lettering on black background, same style throughout project. B. Emergency Equipment Nameplates: White lettering on red background. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel self-tapping screws. Use epoxy adhesive only when NEMA enclosure rating is compromised by screws and for wiring device nameplates. D. Switchboard, Motor Control Center, Panelboard, Dry-type Transformer and Control Panel Main Nameplate: 5/8" high block letters. E. Other Nameplates: 3/8" high block or condensed letters. F. Legends: 1. General. Description as indicated on drawings, i.e., "PANEL EP-1", "XFRM ET-1", “TS-1". 2. Voltage. Description of operating voltage, i.e., “120 Volts”, “120/208 Volts”, “208 Volts”, “277/480 Volts”, or “480 Volts”, “Single Phase” or “Three Phase”. 3. Source: Description of source; i.e., "FED FROM PANEL EP-1, CKT. #1". 4. Available fault current and data calculated. G. AIC Rating: Short Circuit current rating, fully rated; i.e., “10,000 Amperes, Fully Rated”, 2.6 PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKER IDENTIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer's standard labels supplied with panelboard. B. AIC Rating: Short circuit current rating, fully rated; i.e. “10,000 Amperes, Fully Rated”. 2.7 EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANEL NAMEPLATES A. White core laminated plastic. White lettering on black background, same style throughout, 3/8" high block or condensed letters. B. Legends: 1. Manufacturer’s Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). 2.8 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATIONS A. Brady B-500 vinyl cloth pre-printed self-adhesive terminal markers. Legends: 1 through 96, A through Z. 2.9 FUSE IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Obtain original label from fuse box or carton or from fuse manufacturer, indicating manufacturer's name, fuse type, voltage and ampere rating. Attach with contact cement. 2.10 GROUND TERMINAL AND BUS IDENTIFICATION A. Type: Green paint or dye, factory applied to terminal and bus. B. Self-Adhesive Label Legend: "Ground", "Ground Bus", "Equipment Ground Bus" or "Isolated Ground Bus." 2.11 EMERGENCY FIXTURE AND OUTLET IDENTIFICATION A. Self-adhesive red vinyl dots, 1/4" diameter. Brady QD-25-RD. 2.12 CONCEALED EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Brady ceiling tacks, 7/8" diameter with 7/16" long point. 1. Electrical equipment: #23255 (orange). 2. Fire alarm equipment: #23252 (red). 2.13 UNDERGROUND DUCT RUNS A. Brady "Identoline" 6" wide over coated polyethylene film 3.5 mils thick, underground warning tapes. 1. Electric line: #91296 (red) 2. Telephone line: #91297 (orange) 3. Customized: Orange a. Fire alarm line b. Communications line c. Data line d. Data/communications line City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0553 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 e. Security line f. CCTV line 2.14 DUCT RUN MARKERS A. General. 1. Construction: Class A concrete. 2. Size: 6 inches square or round, 24 inches long. 45" chamfer on top edges. 3. Markings: Impressed or cast Letter "D" and two arrows. Locate one arrow below letter, pointing to duct run. Locate second arrow at right of letters, pointing parallel to duct run. 4. Marking sizes: V-shaped 1/4" wide at surface and 1/4" deep. 3" long for letter and arrow to right. 2" long for arrow below letter. B. Change of Direction Markers: Angle arrow to right of letter to correspond to angular change of duct run direction. 2.15 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER WARNING SIGN A. Construction: Indoor/outdoor type, plastic or fiber glass, non-corrosive, impervious to weather. B. Legend: "Danger" upper legend, white block letters on red panel on black panel. "High Voltage" lower legend, black condensed block letters on white. C. Manufacturer: Brady, #71565. D. Size: 7 inches high x 10 inches wide. 2.16 GENERATOR WARNING SIGNS A. Construction: Indoor/outdoor type. Plastic or fiber glass, non-corrosive, impervious to weather. B. Legend: "Danger" upper legend white block letters on red panel on black panel. "Warning" middle legend, red block letters on white panel, underlined in red. "This machine is automatically controlled" lower middle legend, black condensed block letters on white panel. "It may start at any time" bottom legend, red block letters on white panel. C. Manufacturer: Brady, #47161. D. Size: 7 inches high x 10 inches wide. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install nameplates, signs and labels, and engraved wall plates parallel to equipment lines. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using stainless steel screws. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. D. Outdoor equipment labels shall be installed by the manufacturer as specified. 3.3 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 3.4 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads served. Letter Height: 1/4 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for distribution and control equipment identification. 3.5 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES A. General: Identify panelboards, dry-type transformers and control panels with nameplates showing descriptions or designations on Drawings. B. Identify disconnect and transfer switches with nameplates describing loads served and panelboard circuit controlling load. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0553 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 C. Identify conduits, connected to pull and junction boxes, with nameplates describing the complete circuit number of the conductors contained in each conduit. D. Identify receptacles, where the nominal voltage between contact pairs is greater than 150 volts, with nameplates describing the complete circuit number, voltage, and phases. E. Identify wall switches, where the equipment served is not in sight of the wall switch, with nameplates describing the equipment served by the wall switches. F. Locations. 1. Switchboards, Motor Control Centers, Distribution Panelboards. Locate main nameplate in center over top wiring gutter. Locate individual nameplates for switches and starters centrally on device doors. Locate individual nameplates adjacent and to the side of circuit breakers. 2. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards. Locate main nameplate in center of cover approximately 2" down from top of panel. 3. Dry-type transformers. In middle of front cover panel. 4. Receptacles and Wall Switches. On wall directly above device plate. 5. Other equipment: In middle near top of equipment. 3.6 PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKER IDENTIFICATIONS A. General. Attach numbered identification to each panelboard circuit breaker in space provided by manufacturer. B. Sequence. Arrange numbering to correspond to panelboard pole positions. For two pole breakers, number according to the upper pole only. For three pole breakers, number according to middle pole only. For multiple breakers occupying poles on both left and right side, number according to left side only. C. Numbering Convention. Number poles from top to bottom. Utilize consecutive odd numbers for left side and consecutive even numbers for right side. D. Separate Sub-feed Breakers. Number with last number of panelboard sequence. E. Circuit Directory. Prepare a neatly typed circuit directory behind clear heat resistant plastic in a metal frame attached to the inside of the door for each panelboard. Identify circuits by equipment served and by room numbers where room numbers exist. Indicate spares and spaces with light, erasable pencil marking. An adhesive mounted directory pocket is not acceptable. 3.7 BURIED CONDUIT OR DIRECT BURIED CABLE IDENTIFICATION A. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. B. Provide tape with printing of "Buried Electrical Conduit" or other similar warning. Install directly above buried conduit or cable one half the distance to conduit below finished grade. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0573 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The purpose and intent of this study is to: 1. Verify that protective equipment and components are applied within their nameplate ratings. 2. Determine settings for the adjustable protective devices to protect system components and maximize system reliability. 3. Identify changes in the utility company protective devices that may be necessary for proper application and protection. B. The study shall include the electrical distribution system as described as follows: 1. Utility overcurrent devices 2. The 120/208-volt distribution to include all main protective devices C. One-Line Diagrams 1. Prepare a one-line diagram of the power system. This diagram shall identify all components considered in the study, and the ratings of all power devices. (This includes, but is not limited to: transformers, circuit breakers, relays, fuses, busses, and cables). Reference numbers shall be used on the diagram related to key items in the report. ANSI device function numbers shall be used to designate protective relays. 2. Provide electronic CADD files for the one-line diagram in *.dwg format using AutoCAD 2002 or later software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer’s standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD Release 2002 or later electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. D. Short Circuit Study 1. A Short Circuit Study shall be performed which shows the momentary and interrupting fault duties on each bus shown on the single-line diagram. A computer shall be used to perform calculations for three-phase faults. In addition, an impedance listing shall be prepared showing bus-to-bus impedance values reduced to a common MVA base reference to a single line diagram for ease in reviewing data. 2. Study each fault-interrupting device related to the calculated duty, and verify that devices are applied within published ratings. Recommend changes when appropriate. E. Coordination Study 1. Perform a comprehensive, protective device coordination study including all devices identified on the single-line diagram. Using a practical compromise between protection of electrical equipment and coordination of devices “downstream”, provide setting for all adjustable protective devices shown on the diagram. 2. Study the application of devices versus system needs and verify the new devices that are needed for adequate protection. 3. Prepare hand drafted and/or computer generated time/current coordination curves to illustrate the protection and coordination achieved with the recommended settings of protective devices. These curves shall reflect the following (where applicable): a. Appropriate NEC protection points b. Appropriate ANSI protection points for transformers and other equipment c. Magnetizing inrush points of transformers d. One-line diagram of the system identifying the device plotted e. Short circuit current levels used for coordination f. Motor starting curves g. Cable damage curves 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The study shall be conducted by a studies organization with three or more years’ experience on this type of study. The studies organization shall have three or more engineers experienced in studies work who are City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0573 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 available to share opinions related to significant recommendations. The organization shall have proven computer programs for making three-phase fault duty calculations. B. A listing of previous study jobs completed and resumes of three studies engineers shall be available for review. A previous study report shall be available for review to illustrate the type of report that will be supplied. C. The study work shall be conducted under the applicable standards of the American Nation Standards Institute (ANSI) and the National Electric Code (NEC). Specifically the following standards shall apply: 1. ANSI – C37.010 – Latest Revision: Standard Application Guide for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers 2. ANSI – C37.5 – Latest Revision: Calculation of Fault Currents for Application of Power Circuit Breakers Rated on a Total Current Basis 3. ANSI-C37.13 – Latest Revision: Low-voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers (600 Volt Insulation Class). 4. IEEE Standard 141 – Latest Revision Also known as the IEEE Red Book. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide as required by the General Provisions in Division 01, copies of a draft and final report, which shall contain the following information: 1. An executive summary that identifies any significant problems and recommendations for any corrections. 2. Technical discussion that details the calculation methodology used to develop the one line diagram and perform the Short Circuit Study and the Coordination Study work. The intent will be to provide the reader with an understanding of the techniques used to develop the study results and the basis for key decisions. 3. A tabulation of all protective devices identified on the one-line diagram, which their ratings compared with respective fault duty as calculated in the study. 4. A tabulation of all the settings recommended on all adjustable protective devices with references to the single-line diagram and to coordination curves. 5. Copies of all time/current coordination curves developed in the study. Curves shall be 11 X 17” format, folded to accommodate the 8 ½ X 11 Report format. 6. The analysis that leads to specific recommendations included in the executive summary. 7. The single-line diagram of the system studied, including all ratings, identifications described and AutoCAD drawing files. 8. Copies of all short circuit calculations referenced to the single-line diagram and the impedance listings. B. The Final and Draft Reports shall be prepared using the following format: Format: Size: Paper: Text: Drawings: 8½" x 11" White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Typewritten or printed 11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers with 3-ring binding mechanism concealed inside the manual. All binding is subject to the Owner’s Representative's approval. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet-and-inches, lbs., and cfm. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0573 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Engineer, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS STUDY a. Owner’s Name b. Project Title c. Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date 2. Contents: Include at least the following: a. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual. b. Such other data as required in pertinent sections of these specifications. C. Submit as required by the General Provisions in Division 01, copies of a Draft Report to the engineer with the equipment shop drawings. Revise the report as required to accommodate the Engineer’s comments. D. Submit as required by the General Provisions in Division 01, copies of the Final Report within 30 calendar days after approval of the Draft Report. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ELECTRICAL TESTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0593 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0593 - ELECTRICAL TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, tools and services necessary for or incidental to the testing and inspecting of each new system and each new item of equipment provided or installed under this Division of the Specifications. B. Tests and inspections for each new system and each new item of equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. C. Acceptance Tests shall be performed within twenty-four hours of receipt of equipment and shall prove that electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer’s tolerances and is acceptable for installation. D. Field tests shall prove that the equipment is installed in accordance with the design drawings and specifications and the manufacturer’s instructions. E. Upon completion of tests and inspections specified, attach a label to each service device. Labels shall indicate the test date and test company. F. Work Included: 1. Wire and cable (600 Volts and below) 2. Motor starters 3. Switchboards 4. Transformers 5. Automatic transfer switch 6. Life safety systems 7. Ballasts 8. Emergency battery packs 9. Grounding G. Engage the services of a recognized testing laboratory with more than five (5) years of experience and certified by the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) for the purpose of performing the inspections and tests specified. The testing laboratory shall perform tests and inspections designated to be performed by the Testing Laboratory (TL). All other Inspectors and Tests may be performed by the Contractor’s qualified personnel. The testing laboratory’s responsibility shall include the following: 1. Notification of the Engineer prior to the start of testing. 2. Specifying the power requirements for each test site. 3. Providing sufficient protective barriers and warning signs to conduct tests and inspections safely. 4. Reporting any material or workmanship found to be defective during tests and inspections to the Engineer. 5. Implementation of the final settings and adjustments on the electrical equipment in accordance with the values specified in the coordination study. 6. Maintaining written records of tests. Comply with the submittal requirements specified in this section. 7. Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply label to tested components indicating results, person responsible and date. 8. Acceptable Testing Laboratories a. Southwest Energy Systems, LLC b. Shermco Industries c. ABB Service Engineering d. General Electric Service Engineering e. Square D Services H. Engage the services of the manufacturer’s service organization to perform the tests and inspections, as specified. 1.3 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY - CONTRACTOR City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ELECTRICAL TESTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0593 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. Perform routine insulation resistance, continuity, and rotation tests for new distribution and utilization equipment as specified prior to, and in addition to, the tests specified to be performed by the testing laboratory. Responsibility shall include the following: 1. Supply a suitable source of power to the testing laboratory or the manufacturer’s representative at each site. Notify the testing laboratory or the manufacturer’s representative when equipment becomes available for acceptance tests. 2. Coordinate the work to expedite the project scheduling. 3. Provide a complete set of electrical drawings and specifications, and pertinent change orders to the testing laboratory and the manufacturer’s representative. 4. Maintain records of all tests and inspections performed and assemble all information required to comply with the submittal requirements specified in this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide two (2) bound copies of a draft and final report, which shall contain the following information: 1. An executive summary which identifies any significant problems encountered and corrective actions. 2. A tabulation of all life safety system test results and certification including field measurements. 3. A tabulation of all cable test data. 4. Copies of all system certifications. B. The Final and Draft Reports shall be prepared using the following format: Format: Size: Paper: Text: Drawings: 8½" x 11" White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Typewritten or printed 11" in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers with 3-ring binding mechanism concealed inside the manual. All binding is subject to the Owner’s Representative's approval. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet-and-inches, lbs., and cfm. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). 1. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Engineer, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: a. Electrical Testing Adjusting and Balancing b. Owner’s Name c. Project Title d. Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date 2. Contents: Include at least the following: a. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual. b. Such other data as required in pertinent sections of these specifications. C. Submit two (2) copies of a Draft Report to the engineer. Revise the report as required to accommodate the Engineer’s comments. D. Submit four (4) copies of the Final Report within 30 calendar days after approval of the Draft Report. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ELECTRICAL TESTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0593 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1.5 TEST INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION A. The testing laboratory shall maintain test instruments, which have been calibrated within rated accuracy. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on the test equipment. B. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule: 1. Field instruments – 6 months maximum. 2. Laboratory instruments – 12 months. 3. Leased specialty equipment – 12 months. 1.6 SAFETY PRACTICES A. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following requirements: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 – OSHA. 2. “Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations,” as published by the National Safety Council. 3. Applicable safety operating procedures of the governing authorities. 4. Division 26 specifications. B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized, except where otherwise specifically required. C. Power circuits shall have conductors shorted to ground by a hot-line grounded device approved for that purpose. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to Owner, provide labor and materials as required to complete the Work of this Section in accordance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that the test equipment meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 – PRODUCTS – (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES – ACCEPTANCE AND FIELD TESTS A. Perform each test and inspection until acceptable results are obtained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, unless otherwise specified. B. Perform the following tests and inspections for each system and item of equipment as applicable, unless otherwise specified: 1. Inspect for physical damage and defective materials or installation work. Inspect for proper physical, electrical and mechanical conditions (materials and installation work). 2. Inspect equipment and systems for compliance with requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Compare equipment nameplate information with the latest one-line diagrams. Verify that connections and terminations are in accordance with the one-line diagrams. 3. Check tightness of cable connections and bolted bus joints by calibrated torque wrench method. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels. Place a mark on each tightened bolt to ensure completeness. C. Promptly report any discrepancies or unsatisfactory conditions determined by test or inspection. D. Perform insulation resistance tests for each applicable system and item of equipment. Do not perform this test on solid-state devices. Note: In some cases terminated cables cannot be tested unless disconnected from the end devices. 1. Apply test voltages as follows: Voltage Rating Test Voltage 150 – 600 V 1000 V 601 – 5000 V 2500 V 5001 V & higher 5000 V 2. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than the manufacturers recommended minimum, or less than a value equal to kV+1 in megohms. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ELECTRICAL TESTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0593 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 E. Overpotential tests shall not proceed until resistance tests are satisfactorily performed. Perform overpotential tests for each system and item of equipment as specified. 3.2 CABLES (600 VOLTS AND LESS) – FIELD TESTING A. Inspect for shield grounding, cable support and termination. B. Check visible cable bends against ICEA and manufacturer’s minimum allowable bending radius. C. Inspect for fireproofing in common cable areas. D. Where cables are terminated through window type cable trays, make an inspection to verify that neutrals and grounds are properly terminated for normal operation of protective devices. E. Perform insulation resistance tests on each cable with respect to ground and adjacent cables. Record test results. F. Perform continuity tests to confirm proper cable connections. 3.3 SWITCHBOARDS – FIELD TESTING A. At the completion of the work the switchboard shall be field tested in the presence of the Engineer. Tests shall be conducted by the service organization of the manufacturer. B. Tests shall include the following: C. Operation of each disconnecting means under load. D. Operation of all metering equipment. E. The manufacturer shall observe all cable bracing both incoming and outgoing and certify that same is provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. The ground fault system shall be set by the testing laboratory at the level specified by the approved coordination study. Each system shall be tested by checking coordination between ground fault and phase to ground fault of a 1P-20 ampere lighting branch circuit. G. Bus joints shall be re-torqued in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Submit certification. 3.4 SOLID STATE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS – 600 VOLTS AND LESS – FIELD TESTING A. Perform insulation resistance tests from each pole-to-ground, from pole-to-pole, and across open contracts of each phase. Test values shall not be less than 50 meg-ohms. Record final test results. B. Utilize primary current injection method to verify the following settings are in accordance with the coordination study. 1. Minimum pickup current of trip devices, where possible 2. Long time delay, using 300% pickup current 3. Short time pickup and short time delay 4. Instantaneous pickup current 5. Ground fault pickup current and time delay C. Verify trip unit reset characteristics. D. Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground fault and under voltage relays, to insure operation of shunt trip devices. E. Where charging motors are used, electrically operate circuit breaker to verify performance of limit switches. 3.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (600 VOLTS AND LESS) – FIELD TESTING A. The testing lab shall check each circuit breaker for proper mounting, conductor size and feeder designation. B. Operate circuit breaker to insure smooth operation. C. Open unsealed breakers and check internal components for tightness, when applicable. The testing lab shall measure contact resistance in micro-ohms for devices with full load ampere. ratings larger than 400 amperes. Investigate deviations greater than 50%, as compared to adjacent poles and similar breakers. 3.6 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (Primary Rated 600 Volts) A. Within five (5) days after delivery to the work site and prior to installation, perform the following field tests and inspections: 1. Compare transformer and accessories nameplate information with the specification and report any discrepancies. 2. Inspect transformer and accessories and report installation or shipping damage, loose material, shipping blocks or contamination. Correct deficiencies. 3. Check operation of access covers. Correct deficiencies. 4. Check air circulation for proper operation. Correct deficiencies. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ELECTRICAL TESTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0593 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 3.7 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. Set the timers and test the start generator function. B. Open the circuit breaker in the main switchboard serving the ATS and verify proper starting and load transfer of the ATS. 3.8 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS – FIELD TESTING A. The Testing Lab shall perform all work. B. Verify proper operation of grounding and shorting devices. C. Electrically confirm transformer polarity. D. Verify connection at secondary current transformer leads by applying low current to leads and check for current contribution at applicable devices. E. Confirm transformer ratio. F. Verify connection of secondary power transformer and control transformer leads by applying low voltage to leads and check for voltage contribution at applicable devices. G. Check power transformer secondary load with secondary voltage and current measurements to insure that load is less than the wattage of power transformer. 3.9 METERS – FIELD TESTING The Testing Laboratory shall perform all work. A. Check calibration of meters at five (5) points. Use full-scale instruments having precision not more than 50% of meter being tested. Apply test values, record data and plot curves from 0 to full-scale reading. 1. Zero sequence system is grounded upstream from sensor 2. Ground strap systems are grounded through sensing device 3. Ground connection is made ahead of neutral disconnect link B. Verify that control power transformer capacity is adequate for system C. Manually operate monitor panels to test sequences for: 1. Trip test 2. No trip test 3. Non-automatic reset D. Insure control circuit has switchable fuse device with current limiting fuses. E. Measure system neutral insulation resistance to insure no shunt ground paths exist. Remove neutral-to- ground disconnect link, and measure neutral insulation resistance, and then replace link. System neutral insulation shall be one (1) meg-ohm or greater. Record test results 3.10 GROUNDING SYSTEMS – FIELD TESTING All work shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory. A. Perform ground continuity tests between main ground system and equipment frames, and between main ground system and system neutral and/or derived neutral points. Make test by passing a minimum 10-amp DC current between the ground reference system and the ground point to be tested. Measure voltage drop and calculate resistance by voltage drop method. B. Submit in a letter indicating the ohmic resistance of the service grounds and a statement that the grounding system is free of all defects, stray currents, shorts, etc. C. Perform fall of potential tests on the main ground electrode system. The main ground electrode system resistance-to-ground shall be no greater than five (5) ohms. D. Record final test results. 3.11 STARTERS A. Motor Controllers: 1. Submit with certification in tabular form a complete listing of all motors on the project for which motor controllers have been furnished. Include on this listing the nameplate full load amperes of each motor and the size overload heaters installed in each motor controller. B. Motors: 1. Test all motors under load and verify that motor rotation is correct C. Chillers: 1. Verify proper functioning of the wye-delta starter 2. While the chiller is fully loaded, measure and record volts, amps, power factor of all three phases 3.12 SURGE ARRESTORS – FIELD TESTING City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ELECTRICAL TESTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0593 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 The Testing Laboratory shall perform all work. A. Verify integrity of ground and discharge counter connections. B. Perform a 60-hertz spark-over test. Record test results. C. Perform a radio influence voltage test. Record test results. D. Perform an insulation power factor test. Record test results. E. Perform ground continuity test to ground grid system. Record test results. 3.13 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS A. All wiring must be inspected and tested to insure that there are no grounds, opens or shorts. The minimum allowable resistance between any two conductors or between conductors and ground is ten (10) megohms as measured with a 500 volt megger after all conduit, conductors, detector bases, etc., have been installed, but before the detector devices are plugged into the bases or end-of-line devices installed. B. Perform all electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment manufacturer's form. A checkout report is to be prepared by the technician and submitted in triplicate, one copy of which will be registered with the equipment manufacturer. The report is to include, but not be limited to: 1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired 2. Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms to these specifications 3. Tests of individual zones as applicable 4. Serial numbers, locations by zone and model number for each installed detector 5. Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization detector as measured in place 6. Response time of detectors C. Submit a certified report indicating the following: 1. 4 of the FACP 3.14 BALLASTS A. Submit manufacturer's certification that ballasts and transformers for discharge type lamps comply with the latest C.B.M. specifications which have been issued. 3.15 EMERGENCY BATTERY PACKS A. Each emergency battery pack shall be shown to operate satisfactorily. This shall be accomplished by the use of the unit mounted test switch as one test. The second test shall be the interruption of power to the unit. B. Quartz standby lamps in H.I.D. luminaires shall be tested to show proper operation by testing as listed above. 3.16 CALIBRATION A. Calibrate and adjust all components requiring same as directed, in accordance with manufacturer's procedures and recommendations or as required, for the following categories of equipment: 1. Transformer taps 2. Lighting fixtures (lamp positions, reflector positions, etc., as required) 3. Motor starters 4. Generator Controls and synchronization B. Provide overloads in all motor starters, in accordance with motor nameplate data and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.17 RE-TESTING A. Correct deficiencies and re-test. Verify by re-tests that specified requirements are met. B. Notify the Architect/Engineer seven (7) days prior to the testing dates. Should the Architect/Engineer elect not to witness a specific test a statement of certification shall be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer for his approval. C. Conduct tests at a time agreeable to the Architect/Engineer. Provide premium labor as necessary. D. Products which are found defective or do not pass such tests shall be removed and replaced. Tests shall be repeated. E. Arrange for and conduct all test and inspections required by the authorities having jurisdiction. Pay all fees for testing and inspection. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0620 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 0620 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 26. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of disconnect switches as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Circuit disconnects 2. Motor disconnects 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Reference Division 01 and Section 26 0500 for detailed requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide disconnect switches manufactured by one of the following: 1. General Electric Company 2. Siemens Energy and Automation 3. Square D Schneider Electric 4. Eaton, Cutler Hammer 2.2 HEAVY-DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; fusible type, rated 600 volts, and incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches; construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is pad lockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. Provide NEMA Type 3R enclosures at exterior equipment. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Motor and circuit disconnects shall have an Underwriters' Laboratory label. B. Single Phase Disconnect Switches: Two pole toggle switch equal to Square D Type F with thermal overloads in appropriate enclosure. C. Three Phase Motor Disconnect Switches: 3 pole heavy duty 250 or 600 volt as required in NEMA Type 1 or 3 enclosures as indicated and as required. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 0620 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 D. Enclosures 1. Normal indoor locations – heavy duty NEMA 1 2. Outdoor or wet locations – heavy duty NEMA 3R PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -1 13 June 2016 SECTION 260943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON HOMEWORKS QS 120 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lighting control system and associated components: 1. Power panels. 2. Power interfaces. 3. Lighting control system processor. 4. Centralized lighting control system software. 5. Keypads. 6. Dimmers and switches. 7. Low-voltage control interfaces. 8. Wired sensors. 9. Wireless sensors. 10. Accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 12 2413 - Roller Window Shades - Motorized roller window shades, for interface with lighting control system. B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems Identification products and requirements. C. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices 1. Finish requirements for wall controls specified in this section. 2. Accessory receptacles and wall plates, to match lighting controls specified in this section. D. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting Luminaries and associated components, for interface with lighting control system. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; Consolidated-2002. B. ANSI/ESD S20.20 - Protection of Electrical and Electronic Parts, Assemblies and Equipment (Excluding Electrically Initiated Explosive Devices); 2007. C. ASTM D4674 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposed to Indoor Office Environments; 2010. D. IEC 60929 - AC and/or DC-Supplied Electronic Control Gear for Tubular Fluorescent Lamps - Performance Requirements; 2011. E. IEC 61000-4-2 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-2: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test; 2008. F. IEC 61000-4-5 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-5: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Surge Immunity Test; 2008. G. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (R2008). H. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems-Requirements; 2008. I. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. J. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. K. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2005). L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. M. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 94 - Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. S. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -2 13 June 2016 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of sensors and wall controls with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate the placement of wall controls with actual installed door swings. 3. Where motorized window treatments are to be controlled by the lighting control system provided under this section, coordinate the work with other trades to provide compatible products. 4. Coordinate the work to provide luminaires and lamps compatible with the lighting controls to be installed. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting with lighting control system commissioner prior to commencing work as part of manufacturer's standard startup services. Commissioner to review with installer: 1. Low voltage wiring requirements. 2. Separation of power and low voltage/data wiring. 3. Wire labeling. 4. HomeWorks Processor locations and installation. 5. Control locations. 6. Load circuit wiring. 7. Network wiring requirements. 8. Connections to other equipment and other Lutron equipment. 9. Installer responsibilities. 10. Power panel locations. C. Sequencing: 1. Do not install sensors and wall controls until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: Include detailed motion detection coverage range diagrams. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide load schedule indicating actual connected load, load type, and voltage per circuit, circuits and their respective control zones, circuits that are on emergency, and capacity, phase, and corresponding circuit numbers. 2. Provide schematic system riser diagram indicating component interconnections. Include requirements for interface with other systems. 3. Wall Controls: a. Show available color and finish selections. b. Provide one sample for each product [proposed for substitution upon request]. 4. Sensors: Provide one sample for each product proposed for substitution upon request. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. LEED Commissioning Documentation; Lutron LSC-LEED-DOC: Include manufacturer's enhanced documentation detailing start-up procedures and functional tests performed along with test results. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control system components. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on lighting control system operation, equipment programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. H. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. I. Maintenance contracts. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Company with not less than 10 years of experience manufacturing lighting control systems of similar complexity to specified system. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -3 13 June 2016 2. Registered to ISO 9001, including in-house engineering for product design activities. 3. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented in accordance with warranty. D. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized service representative. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation. 1. System Requirements - Lutron, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: 1) Lighting Control System Components, Except Those Listed Below: Between 0 and 40 degrees C (32 and 104 degrees F). 2) Fluorescent Electronic Dimming Ballasts: Between 10 and 60 degrees C (50 and 140 degrees F). b. Relative Humidity: Less than 90 percent, non-condensing. c. Protect against accumulation or infiltration of dust. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty; 1. Lutron 8-Year Silver Level Limited Parts Warranty, with Lutron Start-Up: a. First Two Years: 1) 100 percent replacement parts coverage, 100 percent manufacturer labor coverage to troubleshoot and diagnose a lighting issue. 2) First-available on-site or remote response time. b. Years 3-5: 50 percent replacement parts coverage, no manufacturer labor coverage. c. Years 6-8: 25 percent replacement parts coverage, no manufacturer labor coverage. d. Telephone Technical Support: Available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, excluding manufacturer holidays. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; HomeWorks QS; www.lutron.com. Lighting commissioning and programming by Ex Design Group www.exdesigngroup.com or Equal B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Products by listed manufacturers are subject to compliance with specified requirements and prior approval of Architect C. Substitutions: 1. All proposed substitutions clearly delineated as such must be submitted in writing for approval by Architect a minimum of 15 working days prior to the bid date and must be made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a review of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis. 2. Any proposed substitutions to be reviewed by Architect at Contractor's expense at a rate of $200 per hour 3. By using pre-approved substitutions, Contractor accepts responsibility and associated costs for all required modifications to related equipment and wiring. Provide complete engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with deviations from the original design highlighted in an alternate color for review and approval by Architect prior to rough-in. D. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier. 2.2 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL), CE, CTIC, or CCC as suitable for the purpose indicated; listed to UL 916 where applicable. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated. C. Shade Control Requirements: 1. Capable of operating shades independently, without use of external group controllers. 2. Capable of controlling shade speed for tracking within plus or minus 3.17 mm (0.125 inch) throughout entire travel. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -4 13 June 2016 3. Provide 10 year power failure memory for preset stops, open and close limits, shade grouping and sub grouping and system configuration. 4. Capable of synchronizing multiple shade electronic drive units of the same size to start, stop and move in unison. 5. Capable of controlling any shade electronic drive unit via keypads and contact closure inputs without separate group controller. 6. Capable of operating any group or sub group of shade electronic drive units within subsystem via keypads and interfaces. 7. Capable of one-touch control of shades via keypad, lighting control, or handheld remote. 8. Capable of stopping shades within accuracy of 3.17 mm (0.125 inch)at any point between open and close limits. 9. Capable of storing up to 250programmable stop points, including open, close, and any other position. 10. Capable of recalling presets via keypad, contact closure input, infrared receiver, lighting management system software, or other lighting control system interface. 11. Capable of programming shade open and close limits from shade electronic drive unit, lighting control, keypad, handheld remote, or software. D. Design lighting control equipment for 10 year operational life while operating continually at any temperature in an ambient temperature range of 0 degrees C (32 degrees F) to 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity. E. Electrostatic Discharge Tolerance: Design and test equipment to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2. F. Dimming and Switching (Relay) Equipment: 1. Designed so that electrolytic capacitors operate at least 20 degrees C (36 degrees F) below the capacitor's maximum temperature rating when the device is under fully loaded conditions at maximum rated temperature. 2. Inrush Tolerance: a. Utilize load-handling thyristors (SCRs and triacs), field effect transistors (FETs) and isolated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) with maximum current rating at least two times the rated operating current of the dimmer/relay. b. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times the operating current without impacting lifetime of the dimmer/relay. 3. Surge Tolerance: a. Panels: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 3,000 amps according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEC 61000-4-5 without impairment to performance. b. Other Power Handling Devices: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 200 amps according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment to performance. 4. Power Failure Recovery: When power is interrupted and subsequently restored, within 3 seconds lights to automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or full off) as prior to power interruption. 5. Dimming Requirements: a. Line Noise Tolerance: Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for incoming line voltage variations including changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus 2 percent change in RMS voltage per cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz change in frequency per second), dynamic harmonics, and line noise. 1) Systems not providing integral cycle-by-cycle compensation to include external power conditioning equipment as part of dimming system. b. Incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds. c. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply. d. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manner. Dimmers with visible steps are not acceptable. e. Load Types: 1) Assign a load type to each dimmer that will provide a proper dimming curve for the specific light source to be controlled. 2) Provide capability of being field-configured to have load types assigned per circuit. f. Minimum and Maximum Light Levels: User adjustable on a circuit-by-circuit basis. g. Line Voltage Dimmers: 1) Dimmers for Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) Transformers: (a) Provide circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC waveform to input of magnetic low voltage transformers per UL 1472. (b) Dimmers using unipolar load current devices (such as FETs or SCRs) to include DC current protection in the event of a single device failure. 2) Dimmers for Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Transformers: Operate transformers via City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -5 13 June 2016 reverse phase control. Alternately, forward phase control dimming may be used if dimming equipment manufacturer has recommended specific ELV transformers being provided. 3) Dimmers for Neon and Cold Cathode Transformers: (a) Magnetic Transformers: Listed for use with normal (low) power factor magnetic transformers. (b) Electronic Transformers: Must be supported by the ballast equipment manufacturer for control of specific ballasts being provided. h. Low Voltage Dimming Modules: 1) Coordination Between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage Relay: Capable of being electronically linked to a single zone. 2) Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling the following light sources: (a) 0-10V analog voltage signal. (1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929. (2) Sink current according to IEC 60929. (3) Source current. (b) 10-0V reverse analog voltage signal. (c) PWM per IEC 60929. G. Device Finishes: 1. Wall Controls: White, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Color Variation in Same Product Family: Maximum delta E of 1, CIE L*a*b color units. 3. Visible Parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request. H. Interface with Existing Work. 2.3 POWER PANELS A. Provide power panels with configurations as indicated on the drawings. B. General Requirements: 1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment where applicable. 2. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means. 3. Shipped with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position by means of jumper bar inserted between input and load terminals. Jumpers to carry full rated load current and be reusable at any time. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker. 4. Provided with branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a dedicated feed- through type panel or otherwise indicated on the drawings. 5. Branch Circuit Breakers: a. Listed to UL 489 as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits. b. Provided with visual trip indicator. c. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating as indicated. d. Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature protection. Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to have integral thermal protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient temperature is above rating of panel. e. Equipped with provision for tag-out/lock-out devices to secure circuit breakers in off position when servicing loads. f. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other panel components. g. Listed as switch duty (SWD) so that loads can be switched on and off by breakers. 6. Provide panels with listed short circuit current rating as indicated on the drawings] [not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings 7. Diagnostics and Service: a. Replacing dimmer/relay does not require re-programming of system or processor. b. Include diagnostic LEDs for dimmers/relays to verify proper operation and assist in system troubleshooting. c. Include tiered control scheme for dealing with component failure that minimizes loss of control for occupant. 1) If lighting control system fails, lights to remain at current level. Panel processor provides local control of lights until system is repaired. 2) If panel processor fails, lights to remain at current level. Circuit breakers can be used to turn lights off or to full light output, allowing non-dim control of lights until panel processor is repaired. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -6 13 June 2016 3) If dimmer fails, factory-installed mechanical bypass jumpers to allow each dimmer to be mechanically bypassed. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker. C. HomeWorks QS Modular Panels: Delivered and installed as a listed factory-assembled panel. 1. Provide surface-mounted unless otherwise indicated. 2. Unless otherwise indicated or required, utilize multiple load type 16 A or 13A feed continuous- use listed dimming/switching modules. 3. For switching only circuits, utilize 1,000,000 cycle relays. 4. For loads requiring 0-10V or PWM control, utilize compatible multiple load type low voltage dimming modules. 2.4 FLUORESCENT ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLASTS A. General Requirements: 1. Designed for 10 year operational life while operating with a case temperature range of 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) to 75 degrees C (167 degrees F) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity. 2. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2. 3. Designed so that electrolytic capacitors operate at least 20 degrees C (36 degrees F) below the capacitor's maximum temperature rating when the ballast is under fully loaded conditions and case temperature is 75 degrees C (167 degrees F). 4. Lamp Starting Method: Programmed rapid start. 5. Current Crest Factor (CCF): Less than 1.7. 6. Comply with ANSI C82.11 and list and label as complying with UL 935. 7. Designed to not interfere with infrared devices operating at frequencies between 38 kHz and 42 kHz. 8. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with ANSI/ESD S20.20. 9. Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient. 10. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10 percent line voltage input. 11. Actively prevent overheating in T5-HO linear fluorescent lamp applications. 12. Ballasts to track evenly across multiple lamp lengths and all light levels. 13. Comply with IEC 61347-2-3 as applicable. B. 3-Wire Control: 1. Provide integral fault protection to prevent ballast failure in the event of a mis-wire. C. Digital Control: 1. Monitor and report lamp and ballast status. 2. Lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption. 3. Each ballast responds independently to: a. Up to 32 occupant sensors. b. Up to 64 personal control inputs. 4. Unique internal reference number visibly displayed on ballast cover. 5. Averages two independent daylight harvesting inputs internally. 6. Responds to digital load shed command. (Example: If light output is at 30 percent and a load shed command of 10 percent is received, the ballast automatically sets the maximum light output at 90 percent and lowers current light output by three percent to 27 percent). D. Product(s): 1. 3-Wire Control, One Percent Dimming; Lutron Hi-lume: a. Dimming Range: 100 percent to one percent relative light output for T4 compact and T5- HO lamps. b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V according to IEEE C41.2 without impairment of performance. c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent. 2. 3-Wire and Digital Control, One Percent Dimming; Lutron Hi-lume 3D: a. Dimming Range: 100 percent to less than one percent relative light output for T8, T5 and T5HO, and five percent relative light output for T5 twin-tube lamps. b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V according to IEEE C41.2 without impairment of performance. c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent. 3. 3-Wire and Digital Control, Ten Percent Dimming; Lutron EcoSystem: a. Dimming Range: 100 to ten percent relative light output for T8, T5, T5HO, and T5 twin- tube, and five percent relative light output for T4 compact lamps. b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 4,000 V according to IEEE C41.2 without impairment of performance. c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 15 percent. d. Digital Control: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -7 13 June 2016 1) Connect without interface (except for T4 compact lamp ballasts) to: (a) Occupancy sensors. 2) Provide a 20V DC source to power connected sensors. 3) Generate digital communication commands to distribute ballast and sensor data on the digital bus. 4. Digital Control, One Percent Dimming; Lutron EcoSystem H-Series: a. Dimming Range: 100 to less than one percent relative light output for T8, and one percent relative light output for T5 and T5HO lamps. b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 4,000 V according to IEEE C41.2 without impairment of performance. c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent. 5. 2-Wire Control; Lutron Tu-Wire: a. Dimming Range: 100 to five percent relative light output for T4 compact and T8 lamps. b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V according to IEEE C41.2 without impairment of performance. c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent. 2.5 LED DRIVERS A. Product: Lutron Hi-lume A-Series. B. General Requirements: 1. Designed for 10 year operational life while operating at maximum case temperature and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity. 2. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2. 3. Designed so that electrolytic capacitors operate at least 20 degrees C (36 degrees F) below the capacitor's maximum temperature rating when the ballast is under fully loaded conditions and under maximum case temperature. 4. UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 5. Comply with IEC 61347-2-13 as applicable. 6. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 4,000 V according to IEEE C41.2 without impairment of performance. 7. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with ANSI/ESD S20.20. 8. Class A sound rating; Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient. 9. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10 percent line voltage input. 10. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent; comply with ANSI C82.11. 11. Drivers to track evenly across multiple lamp lengths and all light levels. 12. Constant Current Drivers: a. Support from 200 mA to 2.1 A (in 10 mA steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists. b. Support LED arrays up to 40W or 50 W (710 mA to 1.05 A in 10 mA steps). 13. Constant Voltage Drivers: a. Support from 10 V to 40 V (in 0.5 V steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists. b. Support LED arrays up to 40W. 14. Configuration tool available to optimize the following for LED fixtures: a. Light level. b. Efficacy. c. Thermal performance. C. 3-Wire Control: 1. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output. 2. Provide integral fault protection to prevent driver failure in the event of a mis-wire. 3. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 60 Hz. D. Digital Control: 1. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output. 2. Lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption. 3. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 60 Hz. 4. Each driver responds independently to: a. Up to 32 occupant sensors. 5. Responds to digital load shed command. (Example: If light output is at 30 percent and a load shed command of 10 percent is received, the ballast automatically sets the maximum light output at 90 percent and lowers current light output by three percent to 27 percent). E. Forward Phase Control (Neutral Wire Required): 1. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output. 2.6 POWER INTERFACES A. Provide power interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -8 13 June 2016 B. General Requirements: 1. Phase independent of control input. 2. Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 508. 3. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply. 4. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of system or processor. C. Product(s): 1. Lutron NGRX-PB Power Booster. 2. Lutron NGRX-FDBI 3-Wire Fluorescent Power Modules. 3. Lutron NGRX-ELVI ELV Interface 4. Lutron GRX-TVI Ten Volt Interface. 5. LUT-LBX Synthetic Minimum Load. 2.7 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PROCESSOR A. Product: Lutron Model HQP6-2 HomeWorks QS Processor. B. Integrates control station devices, power panels, shades, and external inputs into single customizable, multiple failsafe lighting control system, operable manually or automatically. C. UL, CE, CTIC, CCC listed as applicable. D. Multiple processor systems to operate under single database. E. Capable of interfacing to other equipment by means of RS 232, contact closure interface, IR interface, or TCP/IP communication over network. F. Minimum accuracy of plus/minus 1 minute per year under all operating conditions. Systems that rely on external computer for time clock functions are not acceptable. G. Full internal battery backup capable of storing all system memory for minimum of 1 year without power and automatically returning system to its previous state. H. Capable of running automatically (time clock function is retained) and manually (via all wall stations). I. Processor has LED indicators to display diagnostic information to aid in system set-up and troubleshooting: 1. Confirm proper system communication. 2. Indicate wiring errors between processor and control devices. J. Software can be upgraded via a local computer, network connection, or remotely. K. Lighting control database can be extracted from processor. L. Processor can communicate to radio frequency lighting control components. M. Ethernet and RS232 Capabilities: 1. Provide access to: a. Scene selections. b. Fade zone to a level. c. Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower. d. Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower. e. Enable/disable time clock. f. Setting of time clock. g. Enable/disable wall station. h. Simulate wall station button press. i. Reading/setting of system variables. j. Provide status monitoring through button feedback and scene-status updates. k. Control shades, fans, and/or HVAC. l. Trigger contact closure inputs and/or outputs. m. Enable/disable system Vacation Mode or Green Mode 2. Ethernet: Provide ability to communicate by means of TCP/IP over Ethernet to Lighting Control System Processor by means of user-supplied PC or digital audiovisual equipment. Control to be located within 300 feet (100 m) of Ethernet source. 2.8 CENTRALIZED LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. Operates on personal computer (PC) running Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 8. B. Commissioner to provide one line product updates. C. Allows user in real time (instant changes and feedback to/from the lighting control system) to monitor and control all aspects of lighting control system. D. Allows operation on remote client machines over TCP/IP connection; operation by means of simple URL's. E. Allows user to monitor and control: 1. Current zone intensities. 2. Status of scenes. 3. Enabled/disabled state for the time clocks. 4. Enabled/disabled state for control station devices. F. Allows user to create and utilize virtual control station devices. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -9 13 June 2016 G. Allows for remote control of physical control station devices. H. Includes on-screen report capabilities to provide diagnostic information. I. Provides communication status between all power panels, processors, and control station devices to verify that connections are sound. J. Provides for light level intensity values of selected zones over time period. K. Downloads database to processor(s). L. Defines, programs, modifies, and updates lighting control system database. M. Allows user to: 1. Define following within desired space: a. Zones. b. Scenes. c. Time clock. d. Control station devices. e. Switching and dimming panels. f. Switch legs. 2. Define time clocks. 3. Define device functionality as indicated in subsequent sections. 4. Create sequences that can run for specified number of times or until cancelled by user. 5. Lighting levels to fade smoothly between scenes at time intervals of 0 to 4 hours. 6. Define time clock schedules that can be single or periodic events based on absolute time or time relative to sunrise/sunset. N. Allows user in real time to recall, redefine, and save zone intensities for selected scene. O. Real time scene programming software operable on dedicated computer attached to wired or wireless network. User to supply wireless network for wireless operability. P. Conditional Logic Programming: A desired button action is dependent upon a separate system device, variable state, sequence state, or time. Q. Time clocks: 1. Allows up to 32,000 events to be programmed to occur without user intervention at specified times during the day in relation to sunrise/sunset. Sunrise and sunset times to be calculated by specifying the latitude and longitude of the location of the system. 2. Accurate to plus/minus one minute per year (specified as during data retention time). R. Vacation Mode: 1. Software randomly turns on and off pre-selected zones. S. System integration via IR, CCI, CCO RS232, and/or Ethernet. T. HomeControl+ Control App via Apple or Android Device: 1. Adjust light and shade levels. 2. Control system keypads including button feedback and raise/lower controls. 3. Edit time clock events. 4. Adjust temperature settings and schedules. 5. Edit the light and shade levels programmed to keypad buttons and time clock events in real time. 6. Change the Grafik Eye scene that is activated by a keypad button or time clock event in real time. 2.9 RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) REPEATERS A. Product: Lutron Model HQR-REP HomeWorks QS Hybrid Repeater. B. Provide RF repeaters as indicated or as required to facilitate wireless communication between processor and all wireless devices provided. C. Communications: Furnished with provisions for both wired low-voltage and wireless (RF) communication links. 1. Wired Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link. 2. Wireless Communications: Communicates directly to compatible RF devices and other RF repeaters through use of a radio frequency communications link; RF range of 30 feet (9 m) between repeater and devices and 18 m (60 feet) between repeaters. D. Provides wireless communication capability for lighting control system processors via wired communication link. E. Extends wireless communication range via connection of up to four total repeaters per communications link. F. Must not interfere with devices operating at 2.4GHz. 2.10 KEYPADS A. Provide keypads with configuration as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated. B. Lutron HomeWorks QS Keypads: 1. General Requirements: a. Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -10 13 June 2016 b. Functionality: 1) Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate. 2) LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the button press was properly processed or LEDs to turn off if the button press was not processed. 3) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. 4) Replacement of units does not require reprogramming. c. Buttons/Engraving: 1) Engrave keypad buttons or provide adhesive button labels as indicated on the drawings to be selected by Architect 2) Utilize backlighting for buttons and associated engraving to provide readability under all light conditions. d. Software Configuration: 1) Customizable keypad button functionality: (a) Buttons can be programmed to perform single defined action. (b) Buttons can be programmed to performed defined action on press and defined action on release. (c) Buttons can be programmed to perform automatic sequence of defined actions. (d) Buttons can be programmed to perform cycle dim. (e) Capable of deactivating select wall stations to prevent accidental changes to light levels. e. Keypad LEDs to support logic that defines when it is illuminated: 1) Scene logic (logic is true when all zones are at defined levels). 2) Room logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on). 3) Pathway (logic is true when all zones are on). f. Keypad backlighting adjustable to desired brightness. 2. Lutron HomeWorks QS Wired seeTouch Designer Insert Style Keypads: a. Power: Class 2 (low voltage). b. Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link. c. Mounting: Wallbox or low-voltage mounting bracket; provide wallplates with concealed mounting hardware. d. Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color, configuration, and engraving using field-changeable replacement kits. e. Contact Closure Interface: Provide two contact closure inputs on back of unit which provide independent functions from front buttons; accepts both momentary and maintained contact closures. f. Provide integral infrared receiver for personal control where indicated g. Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against wire reversals and shorts. h. Finish: As specified for wall controls in "Device Finishes" under LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS article above. C. Lutron HomeWorks QS Architrave 1. Power: Class 2 (low voltage). 2. Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link. 3. Mounting: Wallbox or low-voltage mounting bracket; provide wall plates with concealed mounting hardware. 4. Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color, configuration, and engraving using field- changeable replacement kits. 5. Contact Closure Interface: Provide two contact closure inputs on back of unit which provide independent functions from front buttons; accepts both momentary and maintained contact closures. 6. Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against wire reversals and shorts. 7. Finish: [As specified for wall controls in "Device Finishes" under LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS article above. D. Lutron HomeWorks QS RF seeTouch Tabletop Keypads: a. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings b. Power: Furnished with provisions for both battery operation and plug-in connection to standard 120 VAC receptacle via supplied DC adapter. c. Communications: Communicates directly to compatible RF receiving devices through use of a radio frequency communications link; does not require communication wiring; RF range of 30 feet (9 m). d. Mounting: Suitable for use as a tabletop or handheld remote; provide accessory bracket for optional wall-mounting. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -11 13 June 2016 e. Design keypads to shut off after a short period of inactivity when operating on battery power. 1) "Wake-Up Only": Single button press to "wake-up" keypad and show status; subsequent press to activate button. f. Finish: As indicated on drawing. E. Lutron HomeWorks QS Dynamic Keypads: 1. Power: Class 2 (low voltage); provide accessory power supply with connection to230V VAC, 60 Hz for units not connected to wired communications link. 2. Communications: a. Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link. 3. Utilizes capacitive touch interface with customizable on-screen buttons for single point control of multiple systems: a. Lights: Control and monitor lighting scenes or individual lights in multiple areas. b. Shades: Control and monitor individual or groups of shades/draperies in multiple areas. c. Temperature: View the current temperature and adjust set point, system mode, and schedule. d. Audio/Video: Access basic controls of A/V equipment by integrating with a third-party A/V control processor. e. Energy: View current energy saving mode and adjust "Green" button settings. f. Favorites: Quickly access most frequently used system functions. 4. Furnished with three backlit hard buttons for frequently used lighting functions. 5. Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. 6. Mounting: Wall-mounted with supplied mounting frame. 7. Finish: To be selected by Architect. F. Lutron Pico Wireless (Radio Frequency) Controls: 1. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings 2. Power: Battery-operated with minimum ten-year battery life; does not require external power packs or power wiring. 3. Communications: Communicates directly to compatible RF receiving devices through use of a radio frequency communications link; does not require communication wiring; RF range of 9 m (30 feet). 4. Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. 5. Button Programming: a. Single action. b. Toggle. 6. Mounting: a. Suitable for use as a handheld remote. b. Suitable for use as a tabletop remote (with accessory pedestal). c. Provide accessory bracket for optional wall-mounting. d. Suitable for wall-mounting directly under a wall plate (with accessory wall plate adapter); provide wall plates with concealed mounting hardware. e. Suitable for car visor mounting (with accessory visor clip). 7. Finish: As indicated on drawings 2.11 DIN RAILPOWER MODULES A. General Requirements: 1. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means. 2. Mounting: DIN Rail. 3. Connects to HomeWorks QS Processor via RS485. 4. Emergency Contact Closure Input: a. Turn all zones to programmed levels during emergency state via direct contact closure input. b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state. c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared. 5. Capable of being controlled via wireless sensors and controls. B. Switching DIN Rail Power Module: 1. Product: LQNE-4S10-D 2. Mechanical: a. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means. b. DIN Rail mounted c. Switching: 1) Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive lighting loads. 3. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of up to 10 amps, of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent ballast, electronic fluorescent ballast, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low-voltage and neon/cold cathode loads). 4. Connects to HomeWorks QS Processor via RS485. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -12 13 June 2016 5. Emergency Contact Closure Input a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input. b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state. c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared. C. 0-10V DIN Rail Power Module: 1. Product: LQSE-4T10-D 2. Meet the following requirements: 3. Some electronic dimming ballasts require: a. A switching circuit to apply or remove power to/from the ballast. b. A low voltage control signal for intensity information. 4. Dimming control must coordinate both of these items. a. Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay: Capable of being electronically linked to single zone. 5. IEC 60929 is a standard for electronic fluorescent ballasts, and is used by other lighting equipment controlled by low voltage signals including LED drivers and low voltage controlled neon. It defines specific methods for 0-10V, pulse width modulation (PWM), and Digitally Addressable Lighting Interface (DALI). 6. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources: a. 0-10V analog voltage signal. b. Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929. c. Sink current via IEC 60929. 7. Mechanical: a. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means. 8. DIN Rail mounted 9. Switching: a. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive lighting loads. 10. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of up to 10 amps, of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent ballast, electronic fluorescent ballast, HID, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low-voltage and neon/cold cathode loads). 11. Connects to HomeWorks QS Processor via RS485. 12. Emergency Contact Closure Input a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input. b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state. c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared. D. EcoSystem Digital Fixture DIN Rail Power Module 1. Product: LQSE-2ECO-D 2. Mechanical: a. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means. 3. Supports one or two independent links of up to 64 ballasts per link. 4. DIN rail mounted 5. Connects to HomeWorks QS Processor via RS485. E. Phase Adaptive DIN Rail Power Module 1. Product: LQSE-4A-D 2. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones of incandescent, halogen electronic low voltage, magnetic low voltage or neon/cold cathode lighting loads per zone of light control a. Zone 1 has a capacity of 800W (800VA for magnetic loads) b. Zone 2-4 have a capacity of 500W (500VA for magnetic loads) 3. DIN rail mounted 4. Connects to HomeWorks QS Processor via RS485. 5. Emergency Contact Closure Input a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input from security system or fire alarm system. b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state. c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared. F. Motor Control DIN Rail Power Module 1. Product: LQSE-CI-4M-D 2. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled AC raise/lower outputs from one common AC feed. 3. DIN rail mounted 4. Connects to HomeWorks QS Processor via RS485. 2.12 LUTRON GRAFIK EYE QS A. Provide main units with configuration and quantity of zones as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -13 13 June 2016 B. Communications: Furnished with provisions for both wired low-voltage and wireless (RF) communication links. 1. Wired Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link. 2. Wireless Communications: Communicates directly to compatible RF receiving devices through use of a radio frequency communications link; RF range of 9 m (30 feet). C. Finish: As specified for wall controls in "Device Finishes" under LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS article above D. Engrave units with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the drawings to be selected by Architect E. Localized multi-zone control (LEDs and raise/lower buttons) used in applications where localized adjustability in the lighting or shade level is desired. F. Preset Lighting Control with Zone Override: 1. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone. 2. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply. 3. Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display. 4. Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading. 5. Integral wide angle infrared receiver. 6. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory. G. Preset Shade Control with Zone Override: 1. Preset expandable shade control: Provide up to three columns of shade control. 2. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory. 2.13 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES A. Provide low-voltage control interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated. B. Contact Closure Interface: 1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-IO. 2. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact closures. 3. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or pulsed outputs. C. DMX Interface: 1. Product: Lutron Model QSM-CI-DMX. 2. Provide ability to: a. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 lighting channel. b. Map a single zone intensity to three DMX512 channels for RGB/CMY color control. c. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 integration channel. d. Smoothly transition from one color to another in a cross fade. e. Automatically sequence through a variety of colors. f. Download, program, and customize a color wheel for each unit. D. Wallbox Input Closure Interface: 1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-CI-WCI 2. Mounts in wall box behind contact closure keypad to provide interface for up to eight contact closure inputs. 3. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact closures. E. Sensor Modules: 1. Products: a. Lutron Model QSM2-4W-C: Both wired and wireless inputs. b. Lutron Model QSMX-4W-C: Wired inputs only. c. Lutron Model QSM2-XW-C: Wireless inputs only. 2. Wired modules provide inputs for up to (4) wired occupancy sensors. 3. Wireless Modules: a. Provide wireless communication inputs for: 1) Occupancy sensors. 2) Wireless controller. b. RF Range: 18 m (60 feet) line-of-sight or 9 m (30 feet) through typical construction materials. c. RF Frequency: 434MHz or 868 MHz; operates in FCC governed frequency spectrum for periodic operation as required; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted. 4. Communicate sensor information to wired low-voltage digital link for use by compatible devices. 2.14 WIRELESS SENSORS A. General Requirements: 1. Operational life of 10 years without the need to replace batteries when installed per manufacturer's instructions. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -14 13 June 2016 2. Communicates directly to compatible RF receiving devices through use of a radio frequency communications link. 3. Does not require external power packs, power wiring, or communication wiring. 4. Capable of being placed in test mode to verify correct operation from the face of the unit. 5. RF Range to RF repeater: 9 m (30 feet) through typical construction materials. 6. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for Class B application. B. Wireless Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: 1. General Requirements: a. Provides a clearly visible method of indication to verify that motion is being detected during testing and that the unit is communicating to compatible RF receiving devices. b. Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and residue build- up. c. Sensing Mechanism: Passive infrared coupled with technology for sensing fine motions. Signal processing technology detects fine-motion passive infrared (PIR) signals without the need to change the sensor's sensitivity threshold. d. Provide optional, readily accessible, user-adjustable controls for timeout, automatic/manual-on, and sensitivity. e. Turns off lighting after reasonable and adjustable time delay once the last person to occupy the space vacates a room or area. Provide adjustable timeout settings of 1, 5, 15, and 30 minutes on the sensor; up to 300 minutes in software. f. Capable of turning dimmer's lighting load on to an optional locked preset level selectable by the user. Locked preset range to be selectable on the dimmer from 1 percent to 100 percent. g. Capable of triggering shade presets and temperature set points. h. Color: White. i. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions for both temporary and permanent mounting. j. Provide temporary mounting means to allow user to check proper performance and relocate as needed before permanently mounting sensor. Temporary mounting method to be design for easy, damage-free removal. k. Sensor lens to illuminate during test mode when motion is detected to allow installer to verify coverage prior to permanent mounting. l. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: 1) Provide surface mounting bracket compatible with drywall, plaster, wood, concrete, and compressed fiber ceilings. 2) Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas. m. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Provide wall or corner mounting brackets compatible with drywall and plaster walls. 2. Wireless Combination Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: a. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor (automatic-on and automatic-off), an occupancy sensor with low light feature (automatic- on when less than one footcandle of ambient light available and automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and automatic-off). b. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor (automatic- on and automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and automatic-off). c. Product(s): 1) Lutron Model LFR#-OCR2B-P-WH: Ceiling-mounted occupancy/vacancy sensor; coverage from 30.2 sq m (324 square feet) to 62.4 sq m(676 square feet) depending on ceiling height from 2.4 to 3.7 m (8 to 12 feet); 360 degree field of view. 2) Lutron Model LFR#-OWLB-P-WH: Wall-mounted occupancy/vacancy sensor; minor motion coverage of 139.4 sq m(1500 square feet) and major motion coverage of 278.7 sq m(3000 square feet) with mounting height of 1.6 to 2.4 m (6 to 8 feet); 180 degree field of view. 3) Lutron Model LFR#-OKLB-P-WH: Corner-mounted occupancy/vacancy sensor; minor motion coverage of 113.8 sq m (1225 square feet) and major motion coverage of 232.3 sq m (2500 square feet) with mounting height of 1.6 to 2.4 m (6 to 8 feet); 90 degree field of view. 4) Lutron Model LFR#-OHLB-P-WH: Hallway occupancy/vacancy sensor; major motion coverage of up to 45.7 m (150 feet) with mounting height of 1.6 to 2.4 m (6 to 8 feet); narrow field of view. 2.15 ACCESSORIES A. Tamper Proof Covers: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -15 13 June 2016 1. Locking covers for preset control units and wall stations: Reversible to allow lock to be located on either side of control. 2. Compatible with IR controls. 3. Does not reduce specified IR range by more than 50 percent of its original specification. 2.16 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Lutron Standard Factory Testing: 1. Perform full-function factory testing on all completed assemblies. Statistical sampling is not acceptable. 2. Perform full-function factory testing on 100 percent of all ballasts. 3. Perform factory audit burn-in of all dimming assemblies and panels at 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) at full load for two hours. 4. Perform factory burn-in of 100 percent of all ballasts at 40 degrees C (104 degrees F). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that ratings and configurations of system components are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive system components. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Define each dimmer/relay load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions. C. Mount exterior daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight. D. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn- in. E. Lamp Lead Lengths: Do not exceed 0.9 m (3 feet) for T4 4-pin compact and T5 BIAX lamps and 2.1 m (7 feet) for T5, T5-HO, T8 U-bend, and T8 linear fluorescent lamps. F. Identify system components in accordance with Section 26 0553. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See article "SYSTEM STARTUP" below for requirements related to testing and inspection. B. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract documents. 3.4 ON-SITE SYSTEM START-UP A. Provide services of a manufacturer's certified field service engineer to perform system startup 1. Manufacturer’s certified field service engineer shall be as listed below, or as approved through the substitution process a. EX Design Group; Victor Menendez, 214.402.4324 B. Lutron Start‐up Services includes: 1. Manufacturer's certified field service engineer to conduct minimum of four site visits to ensure proper system installation and operation. 2. Conduct first visit to review requirements with installer as specified in Part 1 under "Administrative Requirements". 3. Conduct second site visit upon completion of lighting control system to perform system startup and verify proper operation: a. This is one visit between the hours of 7 AM and 5 PM on a Monday through Friday that is not an observed Manufacturer’s certified field service engineer holiday. b. This visit may require multiple days depending on the size of the system. c. Manufacturer's certified field service engineer requires ten (10) business days’ notice to schedule a start‐up date. Shorter notices may incur expedite fees. d. All terminations will be done by the installing agency. A person from the installing agency must be present for the start‐up. This person should be familiar with the installation of the system. 4. Conduct third site visit to train Owner's representative on system capabilities, operation, and maintenance, as specified in Part 3 under "Closeout Activities". 5. Conduct fourth site visit to optimization system visit with end user. a. This visit is coordinated by the electrical contractor or end user to optimize the system performance to specific project details. b. Perform Aim and Focus Visit as specified Part 3 under “Adjusting.” City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -16 13 June 2016 C. System start‐up includes: 1. Verification that the system is installed according to Manufacturer’s certified field service engineer and product specifications. 2. Panels should be energized in by‐pass mode, fully lamped and tested prior to site visit. 3. Load circuits are checked for shorts and overloads and bypass jumpers are removed. 4. Programming the dimming/switching panels to include: a. Panel addressing b. Proper load types as installed in field or as per approved submittal drawings. As installed conditions take precedence. This system may have modular components and if loads differ from design additional / different equipment may be required. c. Circuit to zone assignment as per approved submittal drawings. If no zoning information exists prior to start‐up, programming will be done according to written instructions from end user or end user’s representative, contractor, or will be set up based on the field technician’s past experience in that order of priority. d. Set light levels and fade times on controls as per approved submittal drawings. If no information is provided, test scenes will be set to 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% and default fade times will be set to 3 seconds. e. Program emergency function per the installation guide for the system. This may not be applicable for every system. D. Programming the wall controls / interfaces includes: 1. Control addressing. 2. Verify proper wiring and operation of control link. 3. Set up controls to function as per approved submittal drawings. If no control functionality is included, controls will be programmed according to written instructions from end user or end user’s representative, contractor, or will be set up based on the field technician’s past experience in that order or priority. 4. Test all buttons to assure proper operation. 5. Occupancy sensor a. Verification of proper installation and operation. b. Unless otherwise noted, a rough calibration will be performed at system start‐up. Final calibration is the responsibility of the end user since it is very dependent on furniture placement, HVAC operation and space usage. 6. Photocell a. Verification of proper installation and operation. b. Unless otherwise noted a rough calibration will be performed at system start-up. Final calibration is the responsibility of the end user since it is very dependent on furniture placement, window treatments, outside weather conditions and space usage. 7. Daylight Sensor a. Verification of proper installation and operation. 8. Time clock set up a. Manufacturer’s certified field service engineer will set up the system location, daylight savings and time of day preparation for event programming. b. Manufacturer’s certified field service engineer will set up time clock events as per the approved submittal drawings or written instructions from end user or end user’s representative, or contractor in that order of priority. c. In lieu of instructions, the time clock will not be programmed. E. Items not included in standard on‐site start‐up: 1. Programming or any other changes that are requested to be performed counter to the approved submittal drawings must be approved in writing via the proper channels. 2. Reprogramming of any functions after initial programming and sign‐off. F. End user training on overall system operation: 1. Start‐up of the system does not typically include a separate visit for training of the end user. 2. It is the responsibility of the person scheduling the start‐up to ensure the appropriate end users are present for system training. 3. Additional charges will apply if a separate visit is required for training the end user. 4. Video media is not provided by Manufacturer’s certified field service engineer for training sessions. This may be provided by “others” for turnover to the end user or job site documentation. 5. System demonstration and sign‐off by the end user. G. Typical training agenda: 1. Installation verification 2. Wiring verification – power and low voltage 3. Energizing the low voltage and enabling dimming for the system 4. Verification of lighting loads City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio Issue for Construction NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 260943 -17 13 June 2016 5. System programming 6. Training H. Typical Training Visit Agenda: 1. Review system with end user (control location and function). 2. Discuss system model numbers. 3. Discuss zone, scene and fade rate. 4. Review main controller functions a. How to set a scene b. How to adjust fade rate c. How to make a temporary scene d. How to set light loads e. How to change light levels 5. Special save modes and when to use each 6. Review all accessory controls functions a. How to address accessory controls b. Programming scenes for accessory controls 7. Review dimmer panel(s) as applicable a. Spare dimmer modules 8. Load schedule 9. Troubleshooting the system 10. Preventive maintenance 11. Liaison software (if applicable) 12. Time clock options a. Real Time b. Astronomic NOTE: All topics may not be relevant to every system. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Aim and Focus Visit; Lutron LSC-AF-VISIT: Lighting control manufacturer to visit site to conduct meeting with Lighting Designer to make required lighting adjustments to the system for conformance with original design intent. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. 3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: 1. On-Site Walkthrough; to provide on-site demonstration of system functionality to commissioning agent . B. Training: 1. Include services of manufacturer's certified field service engineer to perform on-site training of Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of lighting control system as part of standard system start-up services. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations. 3.9 MAINTENANCE A. System Optimization Visit; Lutron : Lighting control system commissioner to visit site six months after system start-up to evaluate system usage and discuss opportunities to make efficiency improvements that will fit with the current use of the facility. 1. Include services of manufacturer's certified field service engineer to perform on-site training of Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of lighting control system as part of standard system start-up services. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2116 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 2116 - LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical service from the utility company transformer location to the main switchboard as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Furnish and install conduits, wires, and metering equipment to provide an additional electrical service entrance as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Coordinate work with the electric utility company, verify all requirements, and install service entrance equipment in exact compliance with utility company and local governmental agency requirements. 2. Arrange with the electric utility company to inspect the work and include all utility charges and costs related to the installation of the electric service. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Underground service entrance. B. System Voltage: 208/120Y volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METERING EQUIPMENT A. All metering shall be furnished and/or installed, as directed by the electric utility company. Install equipment and furnish current transformer cabinet as required at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.2 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Provide the excavation and backfill of conduit trench for primary and secondary conduits. Arrange with the electric utility to inspect the conduits before backfilling the trench. Correct all deficiencies B. Conduit elbows shall be factory manufactured, rigid galvanized steel conduit, 24 inch minimum long radius, sweep bends. Apply corrosion protective tape, half lapped, to elbows. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install service-entrance equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that service-entrance equipment fulfills all requirements. Comply with applicable installation requirements of NEC and NEMA standards. B. Coordinate with other work, including utility company wiring, as necessary to interface installation of service-entrance equipment work with other work. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SWITCHBOARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2413 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 2413 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, where indicated, a free-standing, dead-front type low voltage distribution switchboard, utilizing group mounted circuit protective devices as specified herein, and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The low voltage distribution switchboards and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable following standards: 1. NEMA PB-2 2. UL Standard 891 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Front view elevation 3. Floor plan 4. Top view 5. Single line 6. Schematic diagram 7. Nameplate schedule 8. Component list 9. Conduit entry/exit locations 10. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 1. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 1. Cable terminal sizes 2. Product data sheets B. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Busway connection 2. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies 3. Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies 4. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations C. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.04, and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process 2. Wiring diagrams 3. Certified production test reports 4. Installation information 5. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details as specified 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. D. Provide Seismic tested equipment as follows: 1. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all applicable seismic requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) for zone 4 application. Guidelines for City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SWITCHBOARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2413 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The test response spectrum shall be based upon a 5% minimum damping factor, IBC: a peak of 2.45g’s (3.2-11 Hz), and a ZPA of 0.98g’s applied at the base of the equipment. The tests shall fully envelop this response spectrum for all equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The low-voltage switchboard shall be UL labeled. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped and shall include instruction leaflets, instruction bulletins and renewal parts lists where applicable, for the complete assembly and each major component. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer B. General Electric C. Siemens Energy and Automation D. Square D Schneider Electric The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date. 2.2 RATINGS A. The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short-circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault current of (65,000) amperes symmetrical at rated voltage. B. Voltage rating to be as indicated on the drawings. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Switchboard shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt-on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure. B. All sections of the switchboard shall be front and rear aligned with depth as shown on the drawings. All protective devices shall be group mounted. Devices shall be front removable and load connections front accessible. C. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means. D. The switchboard shall be equal to Cutler-Hammer type Pow-R-Line C utilizing the components herein specified and as shown on the drawings. E. The switchboard shall be suitable for use as service entrance equipment and be labeled in accordance with UL requirements. 2.4 BUS A. All bus bars shall be silver-plated copper. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on NEMA standard temperature rise criteria of 65 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient (outside the enclosure). B. Provide a full capacity neutral bus where a neutral bus is indicated on the drawings. C. A copper ground bus (minimum 1/4 x 2 inch) shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. D. All hardware used on conductors shall be high-tensile strength and zinc-plated. All bus joints shall be provided with conical spring-type washers. E. Wiring/Terminations F. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall be furnished as required. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SWITCHBOARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2413 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer’s wiring diagrams. G. Mechanical-type terminals shall be provided for all line and load terminations suitable for copper or aluminum cable rated for 75 degrees C of the size as indicated on the drawings. H. Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main grounding conductor. Additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. I. All control wire shall be type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Insulated locking spade terminals shall be provided for all control connections, except where saddle type terminals are provided integral to a device. All current transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to conveniently accessible short- circuit terminal blocks before connecting to any other device. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. Provide wire markers at each end of all control wiring. 2.5 FEEDER PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Individually mounted molded case circuit breakers with adjustable electronic trip. 2.6 TRIP UNITS A. Electronic RMS trip with the following features; 1. Adjustable long time pick-up 2. Adjustable short time pick-up 3. Adjustable long delay time 4. Adjustable short delay time 5. Adjustable instantaneous pick-up 6. Adjustable ground fault pick-up 7. Adjustable ground fault delay time 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Control power transformers with primary and secondary protection shall be provided, as indicated on the drawings, or as required for proper operation of the equipment. Control power transformers shall have adequate capacity to supply power to the transformer cooling fans. B. Each section of the switchboard shall be provided with a space heater thermostatically controlled. Power for the space heaters shall be obtained from a control power transformer within the switchboard. Supply voltage shall be 120 volts AC. 2.8 UTILITY METERING A. Where indicated on the drawings, furnish a barrier to separate the utility metering compartment complete with hinged sealable door. Bus work shall include provisions for mounting utility company current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by the utility company. Provide service entrance label and provide necessary applicable service entrance features per NEC and local code requirements. 2.9 CUSTOMER METERING A. Where indicated on the drawings, provide a separate customer metering compartment with a front facing hinged door and include the following: B. Current transformers for each meter. Current transformers shall be wired to shorting-type terminal blocks. C. Potential transformers including primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means for metering as shown on the drawings. D. Microprocessor-Based Metering System PXM 2270. 2.10 ENCLOSURES A. Outdoor NEMA 3R Enclosure 1. Outdoor enclosure shall be non-walk-in and meet applicable NEMA 3R UL requirements 2. Enclosure shall have flat roof 3. Outer sections shall be the same widths as indoor structures, except each end of the outdoor assembly shall have an end trim 4. The enclosure shall be provided with bolt-on rear covers for each section 5. Doors shall have provisions for padlocking 6. Ventilating openings shall be provided complete with replaceable fiber glass air filters. 7. Provide space heaters thermostatically controlled for each structure with adequate wattage to prevent the accumulation of moisture City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SWITCHBOARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2413 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 8. Power for space heaters, lights and receptacles shall be obtained from a control power transformer within the switchboard. Supply voltage shall be 120 volts AC 2.11 NAMEPLATES A. Engraved nameplates, mounted on the face of the assembly, shall be furnished for all main and feeder circuits as indicated on the drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black characters on white background. Characters shall be 3/16-inch high, minimum. Nameplates shall give item designation and circuit number as well as frame ampere size and appropriate trip rating. Furnish master nameplate giving switchboard designation, voltage ampere rating, short-circuit rating, manufacturer’s name, general order number, and item number. B. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer’s wiring diagrams. C. Finish - All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchboard shall be ANSI 61 light gray. 2.12 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES A. Provide surge suppression device as specified in Section 26 4300. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. 1. The switchboard shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and tested at the factory. After assembly, the complete switchboard will be tested for operation under simulated service conditions to ensure the accuracy of the wiring and the functioning of all equipment. The main circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 2200 volts for one (1) minute between live parts and ground, and between opposite polarities. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 1500 volts for one (1) minute between live parts and ground B. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports. 3.2 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION A. A certified test report of all standard production tests shall be provided to the Engineer. 3.3 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to five (5) owner’s representatives for one normal workday at a job site location determined by the owner. B. A manufacturer’s qualified representative shall conduct the training session. The training program shall consist of instruction on operation of the assembly, circuit breakers, and major components within the assembly. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer’s instructions, contract drawings and National Electrical Code. B. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being moved into installation position and bolted directly to Contractor supplied floor sills to be set level in concrete per manufacturer’s recommendations or without the use of floor sills provided the floor is level to 1/8 inch per 3- foot distance in any direction]. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the Contractor. 3.5 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS A. The Contractor shall perform field adjustments of the protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with the approved short-circuit study, protective device evaluation study and protective device coordination study. B. Necessary field settings of devices, adjustments and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish conformance with an approved short circuit and protective device coordination study shall be carried out by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PANELBOARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2416 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical panelboards as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included 1. Power distribution panelboards 2. Lighting and branch circuit panelboards 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Reference Division 01 and Section 26 0500 for detailed requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Panelboards shall be manufactured by one of the following: 1. Siemens Energy and Automation 2. General Electric Company 3. Square D Schneider Electric 4. Eaton Corporation 2.2 PANELBOARDS (GENERAL) A. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall be so labeled, rated for intended voltage and current characteristics as scheduled. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated. B. Cabinets for panelboards shall be by NEC gauge sheet steel having steel doors and trim to conform to the cabinet mounting. The trim on cabinets shall be made adjustable with the door. Door shall be mounted with heavy concealed hinges. C. Cabinets shall have wiring space top, bottom and both sides in accordance with the National Electrical Code, but no less than 4-inches wide, with standard knockouts. D. Provide a clear, plastic-covered, typed directory card and cardholder on the inside of each door. Key locks alike, and provide Owner with not less than 5 keys. Finish shall be gray enamel over a rust inhibitor, except cans may be galvanized. E. Multisection panels shall be same height and depth. F. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled, and shall consist of rigid frame supporting the rectangular bus, mains, neutral and ground bars. Bussing shall be sized in accordance with UL Standards, braced throughout to conform to industry standards governing short circuit stresses in panelboards, and arranged for sequence phasing throughout. Bussing shall be tinned copper. G. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction, full size neutral, unless otherwise scheduled, with suitable lug for each outgoing circuit requiring a neutral connection. Provide ground bus with suitable lugs for each branch circuit ground conductor. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PANELBOARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2416 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 H. Terminals for feeder conductors, branch circuit devices and neutrals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductors specified. I. Interiors shall be designed such that circuit protective devices may be changed, replaced, or additional circuits added without disturbing adjacent units and without machining, drilling or tapping. In no case shall the width of panelboard enclosure be less than 20-inches. Branch circuit breakers shall be bolt-in type. J. Enclosures 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located 2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose 3. Outdoor or vault locations - NEMA 3R 2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for copper conductors. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98% conductivity, and with full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. B. Provide bolt-in type heavy-duty molded-case branch circuit breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare un-insulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards. C. On multisection and split-bus panels, the lugs and bus on each and every section shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral, ground bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus bars (rather than series) where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable. 2.4 LIGHTING AND BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and arrangements shown; with anti-burn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper conductors. B. Equip with copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bar, with bolt-in type heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single-pole circuit breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Interrupting rating shall be in excess of the available fault current at the panel in accordance with UL listings for sizes involved, but no less than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. Provide common trip on multi-pole circuit breakers. C. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards. D. On multi-section and split-bus panels, the lugs and bus on each and every section shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral, ground bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus bars (rather than series) where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable. 2.5 INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Individually mounted circuit breakers shall be molded case, capacity as indicated, in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted. Breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break thermal magnetic common trip type, ambient compensated with trip-free handle and have interrupting rating in accordance with UL listings for sizes required, but not less than 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical, and conform to requirements of NEMA Standard Publication No. AB1-1969. Each unit shall have insulated neutral and/or ground terminal of proper size, where indicated. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper cables. B. Enclosures 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or brackets 2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose 3. Outdoor or vault locations - NEMA 3R C. Circuit breakers shall be of same manufacturer as panelboards. 2.6 PANELBOARD ACCESSORIES City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PANELBOARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2416 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. Provide panelboard accessories and devices as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. C. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. Provide cross channels at top and bottom in stud walls to support panels. D. Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures. E. Prepare and affix typewritten directory to inside cover of panelboard indicating loads controlled by each circuit. F. Install wall-mounted panelboards a maximum of 6 feet 6 inches above finish floor to top of panel. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2716 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 2716 - ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical cabinets and enclosures as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Hinged cover enclosures 2. Cabinets 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide manufacturer's certificates that confirm the materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements specified in Division 01. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Type: 1. Indoor locations - NEMA Type 1 2. Outdoor locations - NEMA Type 3R B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray enamel finish. C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush vandal-resistant latch operable by key. Make keys interchangeable with new enclosures of the same voltage and use. D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gage steel, manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.2 CABINETS A. Cabinet Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable end walls, 24 inches wide 10 inches deep. Provide ¾- inch-thick, plywood backboard painted matte white, for mounting terminal blocks. B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, surface type with concealed trim clamps, screw cover front concealed hinge and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard; finish in gray baked enamel. C. Provide identification label. Reference Section 26 0553. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop assembled enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6. B. Provide knockouts on enclosures. C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosures. PART 3 - EXECUTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2716 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb, and anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures. C. Install trim plumb, minimum 6'-6" from finished grade or floor to top of enclosure. END OF SECTION . City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 WIRING DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2726 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide labor, material, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of wiring devices, including related systems and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 01 for products specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The wiring devices specified herein shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed according to the latest version of the following standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) WD-1 2. Federal Specification (FS) WC-596 3. Federal Specification (FS) WS-896 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) B. All wiring devices shall be UL listed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Digital switches: Acuity Controls or equal by Lutron, Leviton or Douglas Controls B. Conventional wiring devices: Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton or Cooper. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. General 1. Receptacles shall be standard style as indicated herein. They shall be constructed of high-impact resistant thermoplastic material with a nylon face and thermoplastic back body, white color. Unless noted otherwise, they shall be 2-pole, 3-wire with a green equipment ground screw or an automatic grounding system attached to the strap. 2. Receptacle color shall be ivory unless noted otherwise. B. Specification Grade 1. Specification Grade receptacles shall be standard style. The face shall be constructed of a high- impact resistant thermoplastic. The contacts shall be a triple wipe, T-slot, one-piece copper alloy design. The device shall have a green ground screw or an automatic grounding system attached to the strap. The device shall be 20-ampere, 125-volts, NEMA configuration 5-20R, back and side-wired. C. Special purpose receptacles shall be of the specific NEMA configuration indicated on the Drawings. D. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) 1. GFCI receptacles shall be a feed-through type wired for single receptacle protection thus not affecting receptacles downstream on the same circuit. They shall be UL rated Class 1 with 5-milliampere ground fault trip level and a 20-ampere feed-through rating. GFCI receptacles shall be NEMA configuration 5-20R. E. Isolated Ground (IG) 1. Isolated ground receptacles shall be standard style. The contacts shall be a triple wipe, T-slot, one- piece copper alloy design. The ground contacts shall be isolated from the mounting strap and conduit system. The device shall have a green ground screw that totally isolates the grounding contacts, and it shall require that the insulated ground conductor run uninterrupted to the neutral at the service entrance. The device shall also have an automatic grounding system and center rivet attached to the mounting strap allowing the use of a metal wall plate. The device shall carry an identifying triangle on the face to signify Isolated Ground. The device shall be 20-ampere, 125-volts, NEMA configuration 5- 20R, back and side-wired, orange. 2.3 SWITCHES (REFER TO SECTION 26 0923) A. Digital Switch . City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 WIRING DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 2726 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1. Provide a Rocker Digital Switch by Lighting Control and Design 2. Switch shall be 100% digital 3. Switch shall have designer style controls 4. Switch shall be capable of controlling switching, dimming and preset scenes. 5. Switch shall be capable with the digital network lighting control system. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Wall plates shall be provided for all switches, receptacles, blanks, telephone and special purpose outlets. The wall plates shall be of suitable configuration for the device for which it is to cover with color matched mounting screws. Color of the wall plates shall match the device, unless noted otherwise. B. Weatherproof: Wiring devices in wet and damp locations shall be installed with a hinged metal outlet cover/enclosure clearly marked “Suitable for Wet Locations While in Use” and “UL Listed”. There shall be a gasket between the cover/enclosure and the mounting surface, and between the hinged cover and mounting plate/base to assure proper seal. The cover/enclosure shall employ stainless steel mounting hardware and be constructed of impact resistant polycarbonate. The cover/enclosure shall be specification grade as manufactured by Pass and Seymour or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Each wiring device shall be mounted in a metallic outlet box. In general, devices in finished spaces shall be flush mounted and devices in unfinished spaces, i.e. mechanical and electrical equipment rooms shall be surface mounted. Verify the requirements of all spaces with the Architect. B. Wall Plates 1. Each device shall have a cover plate appropriate for the application. 2. Cover plates shall be installed true and plumb with building lines, mortar joints and architectural features. 3. Adjacent devices shall be mounted under a common cover plate suitable for the application. C. Mount receptacles and special systems outlets above finish floor to the device centerline, unless noted or required otherwise. D. Place conductor under wiring device screw terminals and draw up snugly. E. Mount switches above finish floor to the device centerline and 6" from a door strike, unless noted or required otherwise. F. Grounding continuity shall be maintained between devices and metallic raceway system in addition to the green equipment grounding conductor run with circuit conductors. Care shall be taken when installing receptacles having an isolated ground pole so as to not bond the equipment ground conductor to the conduit system. G. Wire each receptacle using correct polarity (i.e., neutral to neutral terminal, etc.). H. Mount receptacles throughout the project with ground pole at the top of the configuration when mounted vertically, on the right when horizontally mounted. I. All exterior wiring devices shall be provided with a weatherproof cover/enclosure. Exterior receptacles shall be GFCI type. J. De-rate dimmer capacity as required by the manufacturer if side sections are removed. K. Run separate neutral wire for each phase of a three phase system when dimmers are installed on multiple phases and for each dimmer when multiple dimmers are installed on the same phase. L. Receptacles located in secure areas shall be GFCI type. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 3213 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 3213 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other sections of Division 26. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a completed diesel package engine generator set as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Engine/Alternator 2. Controls 3. Exhaust equipment 4. Sub base fuel tank 5. Equipment concrete pad 6. Level 2 sound attenuation weather enclosure 7. Remote electric fuel gauge 8. Remote monitoring/annunciation panel 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Engineer, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. Provide the Engineer with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide emergency standby power system for supply of power in event of failure of normal supply, consisting of an air cooled, natural gas engine directly coupled to an AC generator complete with fittings, connections, auxiliaries, control panels, safety devices, and meters necessary a for complete operating system. B. Provide fully automatic operation. C. System shall be capable of delivering rated kW at sea level and shall be capable of delivering rated kVA at installed location after consideration of applicable de-rating factors. Refer to Drawings for ratings. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The Engine/Generator set shall conform to the National Electrical Code and the applicable inspection authority. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified. Where Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. has established standards for such materials, provide only materials bearing the City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 3213 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 UL label. B. Provide an emergency generator system that has been prototype tested, factory built, production tested, site tested, of the latest commercial design, together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans and drawings, and specifications herein. C. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, along with all applicable local codes and regulations. D. All equipment shall be new, of current production of a national firm that manufactures the generator and controls, and assembles the standby generator sets as a matched unit so that there is one-source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a local representative with factory-trained servicemen. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. GENERAC (by WPI) or approved equivalent. B. KOHLER Power C. Caterpillar D. Approved equal 2.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal shall include prototype test certification and specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied, schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number, each required interconnection between the generator set, the transfer switch, and the remote annunciation panel. 2.4 TESTING A. Testing: To assure that the equipment has been designed and built to the highest reliability and quality standards, the manufacturer and local representative shall be responsible for three separate tests: design prototype tests, final production tests, and site tests. B. Design Prototype Tests: Components of the emergency system such as the engine/generator set, transfer switch, and accessories shall not be subjected to prototype tests. Similar design prototypes and preproduction models, which will not be sold, shall have been used for the tests. Prototype test programs shall include the requirements of NFPA 110 and the following: 1. Maximum power (kW) 2. Maximum motor starting (kVA) at 10%, 20% and 35% instantaneous voltage dips 3. Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and by resistance method per NEMA MG1-22.40 and 16.40 4. Governor speed regulation under steady-state and transient conditions 5. Voltage regulation and generator transient response 6. Fuel consumption at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load 7. Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influence factor 8. Three-phase short circuit tests 9. Alternator cooling air flow 10. Torsional analysis testing to verify that the generator set is free of harmful torsional stresses 11. Endurance testing C. Final Production Tests: Each generator set shall be tested under varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place. Tests shall include: 1. Single-step load pickup 2. Transient and steady-state governing 3. Safety shutdown device testing 4. Voltage regulation 5. Rated power 6. Maximum power 7. A certified test record will be sent prior to shipment D. Site Tests: An installation check, start-up test, and building load test shall be performed by the manufacturer's local representative. The engineer, regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified of the time and date of the site test. The tests shall include: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 3213 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1. Fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze shall be checked for conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations, under the environmental conditions present and expected 2. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to cranking the engine. These shall include: block heaters, battery charger, alternator, generator strip heaters, remote annunciator panels, remote fuel gauge, etc. 3. Start up under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, cooling airflow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage, and phase rotation 4. Automatic start-up by means of simulated power outage to test remote-automatic starting, transfer of the load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjusted for proper system coordination. Engine coolant temperature, oil pressure, and battery charge level along with generator voltage, amperes, and frequency shall be monitored throughout the test. An external load bank shall be connected to the system load where building load is unavailable to load the generator to the nameplate kW rating. The generator shall be operated with the load bank for one (1) hour of continuous operation. The system shall then be tested with building load to include operation of the Smoke Management System 5. Provide a written record of the test, complete with date, time, list of witnesses present, a description of each test and the data taken. The report shall be submitted to the Engineer for review 2.5 WARRANTY & MAINTENANCE A. The emergency generator system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for 1 year or 2,000 hours, whichever occurs first, from the date of the site start-up. Optional 2-year and 5-year warranties shall be available upon request. B. Service Contract: The engine-generator distributor shall furnish factory trained personnel and maintain a 24-hour parts and service capability, and show, at time of submittal, that they are regularly engaged in a maintenance contract program to semi-annually inspect and test-run the engine to perform manufacturers recommended preventative maintenance service on the equipment furnished. This service contract shall be provided at no additional charge for a period of two (2) years from date of substantial completion. At the Owner's option, the service contract shall be renewable on a year-to-year basis, thereafter, with costs being paid by the Owner. 2.6 GENERATOR A. Generator Capacity: as scheduled on the Drawings, 60 Hz 120/208Y Volts, 3-phase, 4 wire. B. Rotative Speed: 1,800 rpm. C. Total harmonic distortion – less than 3%. D. Telephone influence factor – (TIF) less than 50. E. Insulation – Class H. F. Exciter: "Brushless" exciter with solid-state revolving SCR Field protected by surge protective devices. Directly coupled with plus or minus 2 percent regulation from no load to full load. G. Terminal Box: Provide terminal box for generator and exciter leads. H. Remove neutral point of generator from frame grounding. Grounding provision shall be available for field connection. There shall be separate terminations for both the generator center connection and the generator ground. 2.7 CONTROLLER A. Set-mounted controller capable of facing right, left, or rear, shall be vibration isolated on the generator enclosure. The controller shall be capable of being remote-mounted. The microprocessor control board shall be moisture proof and capable of operation from -40ºC to 85ºC. Relays will only be acceptable in high-current circuits. B. Circuitry shall be of plug-in design for quick replacement. Controller shall be equipped to accept a plug-in device capable of allowing maintenance personnel to test controller performance without operating the engine. The controller shall include: 1. Fused DC circuit 2. Complete 2-wire start/stop control, which shall operate on closure of a remote contact 3. Speed sensing system and a second independent starter motor disengagement system City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 3213 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 shall protect against starter engagement with a moving flywheel. Battery charging alternator voltage will not be acceptable for this purpose 4. The starting system shall be designed for restarting in the event of a false engine start, by permitting the engine to completely stop and then re-engage the starter 5. Cranking cycler with 15-second ON and OFF cranking period. 6. Over crank protection designed to open the cranking circuit after 75 seconds when the engine fails to start 7. Circuitry to shut down the engine when signal for high coolant temperature, low coolant level, low oil pressure, or overspeed is received 8. Engine cool down timer factory set at 5 minutes to permit unloaded running of the standby set after transfer of the load to normal 9. 3-position (AUTOMATIC-OFF-TEST) selector switch. In the TEST position, the engine shall start and run regardless of the position of the remote starting contacts. In the Automatic position, the engine shall start when contacts in the remote control circuit close and stop 5 minutes after those contacts open. In the OFF position, the engine shall not start even though the remote start contacts close. This position shall also provide for immediate shutdown in case of an emergency. Reset of any fault shall also be accomplished by putting the switch to the OFF position. 10. Light emitting diode (LED) indicating lights to signal: a. Not-in-Auto (flashing Red) b. Over crank (Red) c. Emergency Stop (Red) d. High engine temperature (Red) e. Over speed (Red) f. Low oil pressure (Red) g. Air damper (Red) h. Battery charger malfunction (Red) i. Low battery voltage (Red) j. Low fuel (Red) k. Auxiliary pre-alarm (Yellow) l. Auxiliary fault (Red) m. System ready (Green) n. Pre-alarm high engine temperature (Yellow) o. Pre-alarm low oil pressure (Yellow) p. Low coolant temperature (Red) q. Test button for indicating lights r. Alarm horn with silencer switch per NFPA 110 s. Terminals shall be provided for each signal in a to r above, plus additional terminals for common fault and common pre-alarm 2.8 INSTRUMENT PANEL A. An instrument panel shall include: 1. Dual range voltmeter 3 1/2-inch, +/- 2% accuracy 2. Dual range ammeter 3 1/2-inch, +/- 2% accuracy 3. Voltmeter-ammeter phase-selector switch 4. Lights to indicate high or low meter scale 5. Direct reading pointer-type frequency meter 3 1/2-inch, 0.5% accuracy, 45 to 65 Hz scale 6. Light emitting diode (panel illuminating lights 7. Battery charging voltmeter 8. Coolant temperature gauge 9. Oil pressure gauge 10. Running time meter 11. Voltage adjust rheostat 2.9 ACCESSORIES The following accessories shall be installed and wired to a power source: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 3213 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. Block heater, (select size as required), 120-Volt AC. Thermostatically controlled and sized to maintain engine coolant at proper temperature to meet requirements of NFPA-110 regulation. B. Generator strip heater, 120-Volt, single-phase. C. Overvoltage protection will shut down the unit after 1 second of 15% or more overvoltage. On-line equipment requiring faster shutdown shall have its own overvoltage protection. D. Weather housings shall be constructed of rugged steel, cleaned, phosphated, and electrocoat painted inside and out with rust inhibiting primer and exterior coat of the manufacturer's standard color. Side panels will be lockable and easily removed for servicing. Top-mounted exhaust silencer with rain shield over the exhaust opening. A battery box heater shall be included. 2.10 ACCESSORIES The following accessories shall be shipped loose: A. Battery rack, battery cables, 12-volt lead-antimony batteries capable of delivering the manufacturer's recommended minimum cold-cranking Amps required at 0ºF, per SAE Standard J- 537, shall be supplied. B. 10-Ampere automatic float and equalize battery charger with +/- 1% constant voltage regulation from no load to full load over +/-10% AC input line variation, current limited during engine cranking and short circuit conditions, temperature compensated for ambient from -40ºC to +60ºC, 5% accurate voltmeter and ammeter, fused, reverse polarity and transient protected. Alarm circuit board to meet the requirements of NFPA 110 for low battery voltage, high battery voltage, and battery charger malfunction. C. Gas-proof, seamless, stainless steel, flexible exhaust bellows with threaded NPT connection. The engine exhaust silencer shall be coated to be temperature and rust resistance with integral condensate drain, rated for critical application. Exhaust noise shall be suitable for a residential environment. 2.11 ADDITONAL FEATURES A. Provide unit with integral circuit breaker. B. Generator shall be 2/3 pitch. C. Provide a failure relay to shutdown the generator set if the alternator field voltage is lost. D. Provide a resettable exciter field circuit breaker mounted on the AC control panel to protect the alternator from overheating in the event of excessive exciter field current. Provide auxiliary contacts connected in a manner to shutdown the engine in the event that the circuit breaker trips. E. Provide differential current CT's (current transformers) 3-phase, appropriate for the size of the generator set. F. Provide a paralleling VAR/PF controller to regulate exciter field current for constant generator set power factor or reactive power. G. The generator set shall be capable of starting motor loads of 100 kVA inrush, with a maximum voltage dip of 10%. H. Vibration isolators shall be provided between the engine-generator and heavy-duty steel base, or between the base and the floor. 2.12 ENGINE A. Capacity: 10 percent overload for one hour operating on natural gas at an ambient temperature of 90 degrees. B. Governor: Electronic isochronous type governor with a steady-state speed regulation band of less than 1% under constant loading conditions. Speed regulation three cycles maximum from no load to full load with two second maximum recovery to steady state. Governor shall be a Barber Coleman type governor or equal. C. Immersion Heater: Located in cooling jacket complete with thermostat for 120-volt operation. D. Accessories: Provide replaceable type oil filters, dry type air cleaners, automatic choke, lubricating oils, greases and coolant. E. Electric fuel transfer pump capable of lifting fuel 6 feet, fuel filters electric solenoid fuel shut-off valve, and a fuel distribution system. F. 35-Ampere minimum automatic battery charging alternator with solid-state voltage regulation. G. Positive displacement, full pressure lubrication oil pump, cartridge oil filters, dipstick, and oil drain. H. Dry-type replaceable air cleaner elements for heavy-duty application. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 3213 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 Note: Engines requiring glow plugs will not be acceptable. 2.13 COOLING EQUIPMENT A. Unit mounted radiator, blower fan, water pump, thermostat, and radiator duct flange shall properly cool the engine in (105°F/125°C) ambient with up to 0.5 inches H2O static pressure on the fan. B. Coolant: Glycol base anti-freeze good to -40 ºF (-40 ºC). 2.14 EXHAUST EQUIPMENT A. Residential and Muffler and Piping: Critical type, completely sealed, metal primed finish. Refer to plans for additional requirements. B. Connection: Provide flexible connection from manifold to muffler C. Provide thermal insulation on exposed exhaust piping. D. 2.15 FUEL TANK A. Provide a double wall sub-base fuel tank with integral leak detectors. B. Provide fuel tank capacity to run the generator set for at least 24 hours at full load. 2.16 FABRICATION A. Mount on common steel rail base. B. Provide steel spring vibration isolators between rail base and concrete base. C. Provide semi-flexible couplings between generator and engine and protective guards over moving parts. D. Machine enamel finish color shall be ANSI 61. 2.17 SOUND ATTENUATING WEATHER ENCLOSURE A. Generator set housing shall be provided factory-assembled to generator set base and radiator cowling. Housing shall provide ample airflow for generator set operation at rated load in the ambient conditions previously specified. The housing shall have hinged side-access doors and rear control door. All doors shall be lockable. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturer’s standard color using a two-step electro coating paint process, or equal meeting the performance requirements specified below. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. The painting process shall result in a coating which meets the following requirements: 1. Primer thickness, 0.5-2.0 mils. Top coat thickness, 0.8-1.2 mils 2. Gloss, per ASTM D523-89, 80% plus or minus 5%. Gloss retention after one year shall exceed 50% 3. Crosshatch adhesion, per ASTM D3359-93, 4B-5B 4. Impact resistance, per ASTM D2794-93, 120-160 inch-pounds 5. Salt Spray, per ASTM B117-90, 1000+ hours 6. Humidity, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours 7. Water Soak, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours 8. Color selected by architect B. Painting of hoses, clamps, wiring harnesses, and other non-metallic service parts shall not be acceptable. Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant, and designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for normal installation or service work. C. The enclosure shall include hinged doors for access to both sides of the engine and alternator, and the control equipment. Key-locking and pad lockable door latches shall be provided for all doors. Door hinges shall be stainless steel. D. The enclosure shall be provided with an exhaust silencer that is mounted inside of the enclosure, and allows the generator set package to meet specified sound level requirements. Silencer and exhaust shall include a rain cap and rain shield. E. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturer’s ANSI 61 color. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. F. Painting of hoses, clamps, wiring harnesses, and other non-metallic service parts shall not be acceptable. Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant, and designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for normal installation or service work. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 3213 - 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2.18 TOOLS A. Provide tools required for normal maintenance of unit in metal box complete with lock and keys. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide a concrete base designed for the complete unit including fuel tank and fuel. Coordinate installation with concrete pad, fuel supply and other equipment to provide an efficient and well- coordinated layout. B. A registered structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of Texas shall design and seal the concrete base shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install unit complete and make operational. 3.3 WIRING AND CONNECTIONS A. Provide conduit, wiring and connections required and recommended by unit supplier. B. Provide power to control panel, block heaters, and battery charger. C. Verify that the neutral and ground conductors are bonded together at the generator. D. Verify that all accessories shipped loose have been properly installed and wired. E. Verify that the alternator has been connected to the battery. F. 3.4 FLUIDS A. Fill the engine crankcase with the type and quantity of oil specified by the manufacturer. B. Fill the cooling system with coolant as directed by the manufacturer. C. 3.5 TESTING A. Perform load tests as specified in Part 2 of this Section. 3.6 GROUNDING A. If a 4 pole transfer switch is utilized with the generator, provide a ground rod at the generator and bond the neutral to the ground. B. If a 3 pole transfer switch is utilized with the generator, provide a ground rod at the generator but DO NOT bond the neutral to the ground. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 3623 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 3623 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of complete automatic transfer switches as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Automatic transfer switch 2. Equipment concrete pads 3. Conduits to package generator set 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Engineer, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. Provide the Engineer with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. General Automatic Transfer Switch: Electrically operated, 3 pole with fourth neutral pole, mechanically held and obtaining control and transfer power from the source to which it is being transferred. Switch shall be front accessible. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Generac HTS or approved equal. C. Refer to project drawings for specifications on the sizes and types of transfer switch equipment, number of poles and ratings. All transfer switch equipment and accessories shall be UL listed and labeled, tested per UL Standard 1008, and CSA approved. D. Provide the following features in addition to automatic transfer function: 1. Flush mounted display panel with LED indicators to indicate switch position and source availability 2. 3 position test switch: Fast Test, Auto, and Normal Test 3. Signal before transfer contacts 4. Standby accept voltage: 85-95% 5. Standby accept frequency: 85-95% 6. Nominal voltage: 1 volt increments 7. Allowable deviation of utility: 1-100% 8. Engine warm-up time: 1-300 seconds 9. Minimum run time: 5-60 minutes 10. Return to utility timer: 1-30 minutes 11. Engine cool down timer: 1-30 minutes 12. Signal before transfer timer: 1-30 seconds 13. Transfer type: In phase Time Delay neutral 14. Phase Difference for In Phase monitor: -7 +0 degrees 15. One additional normally open contact on both normal and emergency relays 16. SPDT auxiliary contacts E. Enclosure: Mounted in separate NEMA 1 enclosure. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 3623 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 WARRANTY AND SERVICE A. The transfer switch manufacturer shall maintain a factory-trained, factory direct, field service organization, available on a 24-hour call basis. B. Provide 5-year warranty and warranty documentation to owner. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. All power conductors shall be terminated directly without looping or crossing. B. All conductors shall be marked with permanent wire markers. C. The manufacturer's authorized service representative shall provide the following services prior and subsequent to placing the switches in operation: 1. All clearances and contact pressures shall be verified for proper operation prior to testing 2. Adjust all time delay settings and provide verification by test. Provide record of settings to owner or owner's representative subsequent to start up 3.3 WIRING AND CONNECTIONS A. Provide conduit, wiring and connections required and recommended by unit supplier. 3.4 TESTING A. Perform load tests as specified. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 4100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 4100 - FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The following specifications and standards of the latest issue form a part of this specification. 1. Lightning Protection Institute 2. Installation Standard, LPI 175 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 4. Installation Requirements, LPI 175 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) 6. National Fire Protection Association 7. Lightning Protection Code, NFPA 780 B. All materials tested by Underwriter's Laboratories shall bear their labels A, B and C for materials and installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements and standards for lightning protection systems of the LPI, UL, NFPA, and NEC. Upon completion, application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for inspection and certification. In addition, the Lightning Protection Institute certified system shall be delivered to the owner ensuring that the concealed components have also been monitored during job progress. D. The system to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. The equipment shall be UL listed and properly UL labeled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's data on lightning protection systems and components. B. Shop Drawings - Submit dimensioned layout drawings of lightning protection system equipment and components, including conductor routing and connections. C. UL Certificate - Provide Owner with UL Master Label for overall system which is suitable for fastening to building for display. Comply with UL 96A, "Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lightning protection components of one of the following (for each type of component): 1. Advanced Lightning Technology 2. East Coast Lightning Equipment 3. Harger Lightning Protection 4. Robbins Lightning Protection 5. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 6. National Lightning Protection Corporation 2.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 4100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 A. Standard - All equipment used this installation shall be UL listed and properly labeled. All equipment shall be new, and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted industry standards and LPI, UL, NFPA, and NEC code requirements. B. Lighting Protection Equipment - All materials shall be copper and bronze and of the size, weight, and construction to suit the application and used in accordance with LPI, UL, and NFPA code requirements. Class 1 components may be utilized on roof levels 75 feet and below in height. Class II size components are required for roof levels over 75 feet in height. Bolt type connectors and splicers shall be utilized on Class I and Class II structures. Pressure squeeze clamps are not acceptable. All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel to prevent corrosion. C. Aluminum Components - Aluminum materials may not be used except on roof that utilize aluminum roofing components. On aluminum metal roofs or where aluminum parapet caps exist, the entire roof lightning protection equipment shall utilize aluminum components to insure compatibility. However, the downleads and grounding are to utilize copper with the bimetal transition occurring at the through roof assembly with and approved bimetal through roof assembly. Lead coating is not acceptable as a bimetal transition. D. Materials below grade to 18" above grade: Copper, except ground rods to be stainless steel. E. Air Terminals: 1. Point: Solid copper, 12" height x 3/8" diameter F. Fasteners and Attachments: Same material as air terminals. G. Main Conductors: Copper cable, minimum weight 187.5 lbs/1,000 ft; minimum wire size No.17 AWAG (Class I) H. Secondary Conductors: Copper cable; minimum 13 strand No. 17 AWG. I. Fasteners: 1. Same material as conductor 2. Galvanized fasteners not acceptable J. Connectors and Disconnectors 1. Compression type designed to withstand 2,000 lbs. pull 2. Exothermic Welding Type, below grade and in non-accessible areas K. Ground Electrodes: 10 ft. stainless steel rods 3/4" diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installation company that is a UL listed, a member of the Lightning Protection Institute, United Lightning Protection Association qualified and an employer of Certified Master Installers of lightning protection systems. A Certified Master Installer shall directly supervise the work. B. All equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. The system shall consist of a complete conductor network at the roof and include air terminals, connectors, splicers, bonds, copper downleads, and proper terminals. C. Air Terminals: Install in plumb position securely fastened to withstand overturning. D. Conductors: 1. Fastening: a. Fasten conductors to building at 3 feet maximum intervals b. On masonry, set fasteners in brick, block or stone, but not in mortar joints E. Conductor Runs: 1. Bend to radii greater than 8 inches 2. Limit angle of turns to 90 degrees 3. Route horizontal conductors around obstructions in horizontal plane 4. Route connectors in horizontal or vertical planes only 5. Install roof conductors concealed under roofing system F. Connect conductor to metal bodies of inductance located within 6 feet by secondary conductor. G. Ground: Extend minimum of 10 ft into earth. H. Install conductors under roof and out of sight. 3.2 COORDINATION A. The lightning protection installer will work with other trades to insure a correct, neat and unobtrusive installation. B. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to assure a sound bond to the main water service and the main electrical service ground bar and to assure interconnection with other ground systems. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 4100 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 C. Install approved SPD’s on power service. 3.3 COMPLETION A. Upon completion of the installation, the lightning protection installer shall secure and deliver to the Owner the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Master Label certification and the Lightning Protection Institute Certified System certification. The system will not be accepted without the UL Master Label plate and the LPI certificate. 3.4 PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Building Maintenance Personnel Training: Train Owner's building maintenance personnel in procedures for testing and determining resistance-to-ground values of lightning protection system. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 4300 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 4300 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section includes Surge Protective Devices (SPD) for low-voltage power equipment (1000Vac and less). B. Work under this section consists of furnishing all materials necessary for the execution and complete installation of Surge Protective Devices (SPD). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/REFERENCE STANDARDS The SPD surge protection system shall be designed and manufactured, and where appropriate, listed to the following standards: A. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 1. UL1449 3rd Edition: Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 2. UL1283 5th Edition: Electromagnetic Interference Filters 3. UL796 9th Edition: Printed Wiring Boards 4. UL67 11th Edition: UL Standard for Safety for Panelboards B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 1. C62.41.1: 2002 IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits 2. C62.41.2: 2002 IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 3. C62.45: 2002 IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low- Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 4. C62.62: 2000 IEEE Standard Test Specifications for Surge Protective Devices for Low Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 5. C62.72: 2007 IEEE Guide for the Application of Surge Protective Devices for Low Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC) E. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA F. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) G. MIL-STD 220A 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Service Conditions: The Surge Protective Device (SPD) shall be rated for continuous operation under the following conditions: 1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): 115% to 125% of the nominal operating voltage 2. Operating Temperature: 0C to 60C 3. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95%, non-condensing 4. Operating Altitude: 0 feet to 12,000 feet 1.5 LOCATIONS A. See the electrical One Line Diagram for Surge Protective Device (SPD) unit locations. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. The specified equipment is based upon THOR SYSTEMS as supplied by Critical Site Solutions, Irving, Texas. Listed substitutions shall conform to the specifications in its entirety. Complete documentation including literature, drawings and specification review shall be provided. 2.2 GENERAL A. The following are the general requirements of the SPD products: 1. Nomenclatures used herein are intended to indicate product type and configuration of equipment required. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 4300 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 2. UL1449 3rd Edition Listed and must bear the 3rd Edition mark. 3. UL1283 5th Edition Listed. 4. The Surge Protective Device (SPD) shall be a stand alone configuration. Systems that must be integral to the switchgear will not be considered. 5. The surge protection system shall provide effective high-energy Transient Voltage Suppression and attenuate high frequency electrical noise. 6. All suppression systems must be permanently connected, parallel designs. Series suppression elements are not acceptable. 7. Short Circuit Current Rating of 100kAIC without the need for fuses or breakers external to the SPD. NEC Article 285.6 requires test data confirming the specified short circuit carrying capability (AIC rating) is provided. 8. All SPD units shall be provided with an auxiliary dry contact (Form C) actuated by any single suppression module including N-G failure for connection to a Building Automation System. 9. All SPD units shall be from the same manufacturer. 10. SPD modules shall be configured to isolate individual suppression component failures without causing total loss of surge protection in that mode. 11. Surge protection or filtering component failures or fuse openings are not permissible during UL1449 3rd Edition Nominal Discharge testing. 12. SPD designs using a single fuse to protect two (2) or more surge paths are not acceptable. 13. Overcurrent protection limiting the 100% rated surge protection is not acceptable. 14. Fuse links or printed circuit board trace fusing are not acceptable. 15. The SPD shall provide redundant parallel copper bus structure and/or low impedance traces, which are 100% surge rated top and bottom of printed circuit board to reduce suppression path impedance. 16. All printed circuit boards are heavy copper double-sided plated through and meet the requirements of UL796 including those for Direct Support applications, as indicated by a Delta symbol on the circuit board. 17. Hybrid three-tier design utilizing: a. Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistors (TpMOVs) featuring: 1) “Fail-safe” design technology with integrated thermal apparatus that monitors the status providing local physical indication of the metal oxide disk has built-in dielectric (arc shield) protection and remote indication by an integral N.O micro- switch 2) The TpMOV eliminates the requirement of internal or external fuses (which would limit surge protection capability) for the surge protection components, while providing a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 100,000 Amps b. Silicon Avalanche Diodes (SADs) supplying the most ideal suppression element and very fast reaction time; rated 15,000 Watts each and provided L-N and L-G. c. Filter capacitors to suppress EMI/RFI electrical noise. 1) All products shall be provided with high strand count, high frequency/low impedance wire 2) Products which are encapsulated in an epoxy resin compound or any other compound of similar form are not acceptable 2.3 MODULAR DESIGN (with Individual Replaceable “Per Mode” Modules) A. The TSri Modular Series is a full three-tier hybrid design featuring Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistors (TpMOVs), Silicon Avalanche Diodes (SADs), and Sinewave Tracking Filter Capacitors. B. The TSri Series has the ability to be upgraded in the field. C. Configured for the voltage configuration as shown on plans. D. A modular hybrid design utilizing the following UL Recognized components: 1. Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistors (TpMOVs) utilizing “fail-safe” technology. (Systems using fuse links or printed circuit board trace fusing are not acceptable.) 2. Silicon Avalanche Diodes (SADs) are provided L-N and L-G mode. 3. EMI/RFI Filter Capacitors which are UL1283 Listed providing electrical noise attenuation E. Each module is voltage keyed by color, by numerical identification, and coordinating pin and sleeve to assure correct assembly field replacement. F. The modular design is available for the complete range of surge ratings (50 through 300), featuring a full complement surge rating on each field replaceable module. G. Modes of Protection: The SPD system shall provide surge protection in all possible modes (L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G). Each replaceable module must provide the uncompromising ability to deliver full surge current rating from 50kA to 300kA per mode. H. The internal SPD/TVSS connection method is an Internal Fused Disconnect or Surge Rated Disconnect or Distribution Block. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 4300 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 I. The replaceable module must be an individual module (one [1] module per mode). Each system must provide a spare module. Modular designs with only a single module or surge brick are not acceptable. J. Each individual module features a green LED indicating the individual module has all surge protection devices active. If any single component is taken off-line, the green LED will turn off and a red LED will illuminate, providing individual module as well as total system status indication. K. Monitoring Options: Select the appropriate monitoring system from the table below: SPD Monitoring Options Modular Products Monitoring Type Feature Descriptions Type 1 Provides: • Solid State Status Indication Lights • Audible Alarm with Alarm Silence sounds in event of a protection mode failure Form C Contacts for remote monitor Type 2 Provides: • Surge Counter (microprocessor-based with 8 levels of sensitivity providing programmable adjustment of the Counter trigger level) • Audible Alarm with Silence (Ack) button; includes Enable button Form C Contacts for remote monitor L. Provide the SPD in a NEMA 4 enclosure not exceeding 20”H x 16”W x 8”D in size. M. Each replaceable module shall bolt directly to a low impedance solid copper bus structure. Modular systems with plug-in component modules are not acceptable. N. Each SPD system shall be supplied with one (1) field replaceable module. O. The Modular SPD system is supplied with UL1283 Listed EMI/RFI noise filtering having an electrical noise attenuation of 36 to 44dB in the range of 50 kHz to 100MHz as defined by MIL-STD-220A test procedures. P. The TSri Series SPD system offers an Extended Filter, UL1283 Listed, having an electrical noise attenuation of 45 to 50dB in the range of 50 kHz to 100MHz as defined by MIL-STD-220A test procedures. Q. The let-through voltage test results used to obtain the UL1449 3rd Edition Voltage Performance Ratings “VPR” (6kV, 3000 Amps, 8/20µs waveform) must not exceed the UL assigned values listed in the following table: 3000A Voltage Let-Through Ratings Modular Products Voltage Rating L-N L-G N-G L-L 208/120 Vac 800 700 600 1200 480/277 Vac 1200 1200 1000 1800 Note: Ratings in the above chart were recorded with Fused Disconnects in place. R. The let-through voltage test results based on the previous UL1449 2nd Edition (issue date August 1996) Suppression Voltage Rating “SVR” (6kV; 500 Amps; 8/20µs waveform) must not exceed the UL assigned values listed in the following table: 500A Voltage Let-Through Ratings Modular Products Voltage Rating L-N L-G N-G L-L 208/120 Vac 400 400 400 700 480/277 Vac 700 800 800 900 Note: Ratings in the above chart were recorded with Fused Disconnects in place. S. The Modular systems’ surge current ratings shall be based on the electrical system ampacity listed in the following table. Note: The “per phase” value derived by adding the L-N mode and the L-G mode. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 4300 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SPD Applications Modular Systems Electrical System Ampacity @ SPD Install Point Surge Protection (kA) Per Mode Per Phase 2500 – 6000A 300 600 1200 – 2000A 250 500 600 – 1000A 200 400 225 – 400A 150 300 125 – 225A 100 200 T. Approved Manufacturer: The following MODULAR SPD models are acceptable, subject to conformance with indicated requirements: THOR SYSTEMS - TSr Product Series. Example: Model TSri300Fx 3Y4 M202; Replaceable Module; 300kA per Mode (600 per Phase); 480/277Vac, 3 Phase Wye; Fused Disconnect Switch; Type 2 Monitor (LED indication, Audible Alarm, Surge Counter); Form C Contact; Extended EFI/RFI Filter. 2.4 PERFORMANCE A. Provide a Test Report from a recognized independent testing laboratory (NETA or NRTL) verifying the COMPLETE suppressor (including all necessary fusing, disconnects, monitoring systems, etc.) can survive published current rating on a per mode basis using the IEEE C62.41, 8/20µs waveform. Note that test data on individual module is not acceptable. B. Provide a COMPLETE documentation package per the requirements of NEMA LS1-1992 C. The SPD shall be capable of surviving the UL 1449 3rd Edition Nominal Discharge Test. The repetitive surge current capacity shall be tested utilizing an 8x20µs, 20kA short circuit test waveform (as defined by ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition – 2009, IEEE C62.41.2 – 2002 and IEEE C62.45 – 2002). Surges shall be applied in three (3) groups of five (5) surges. Within one (1) second after the application of each surge, the specified MCOV shall be applied for sixty (60) seconds (+15 seconds). After each group of five (5) surges, the sample shall rest for thirty (30) minutes. After the 15th surge, the MCOV shall be reapplied for at least fifteen (15) minutes. During and following this test there shall be no opening of any supplementary protective devices either internal or external to the device. D. The SPD must provide superior surge protection performance with the ability to deliver 100% rated surge capacity. E. The Surge protection system must be rated and marked with a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 100kAic without the need for external fuses or breakers. The use of Overcurrent protection that limits the specified surge currents is not acceptable. 2.5 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards. B. All surge protective devices, subassemblies, and components are to be 100% tested and certified by the manufacturer to meet their published performance parameters. 2.6 WARRANTY A. All Surge Protective Devices (SPD), associated hardware, and supporting components shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, under normal use and in accordance with the instructions provided, for a period of five (5) years. B. Any component or subassembly contained within the surge protection system that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the five (5) year warranty period, shall be replaced by the manufacturer. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. This section covers the execution and commissioning of the Surge Protective Device/Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (SPD) required on this project. B. Technical assistance shall be provided by the manufacturer through the efforts of a factory representative or a local distributor and via a factory staffed, THOR SYSTEMS’ toll-free technical hotline (1.877.298.1100) and website (www.ThorSystems.us). C. Verify absence of damage. D. The unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. All local and national codes must be observed. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 4300 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 WARNING! Failure to confirm voltage can result in serious damage, injury, or even death. E. The unit shall be installed of the same voltage rating as the intended protected equipment. F. The location of the field-mounted SPD shall allow adequate clearances for maintenance. G. Lead Length: The mounting of the SPD shall ensure the connecting leads are as short (recommend one [1] meter or less) and straight (no sharp bends) as reasonably possible. H. The SPD shall be marked with a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) and shall not be installed at a point on the system where the available fault current is in excess of that rating per the National Electric Code, Article 285, Section 6. I. Panel Extension Kits shall be factory mounted on the panelboard and tested at the SPD manufacturer’s facility and shipped complete to the jobsite. The engineer may allow field mounting of the SPD extension assembly. J. THOR SYSTEMS’ representatives are committed to assuring proper installation guidelines are followed by the commissioning of each individual SPD and verification of proper grounding, including Ground resistance measurement and the recording of the resistance readings, which will be forwarded to the facilities manager with a completed Commissioning Report. K. System Commissioning. Upon completion of the installation of the Surge Protective Device (SPD) a factory- authorized service representative shall provide product commissioning services. These services shall include but are not limited to the following: 1. Before energizing the SPD verify the SPD is correct as specified: manufacturer, product series, and model number. a. All voltage modes including L-L (Line-to-Line), L-G (Line-to-Ground), L-N (Line-to- Neutral), and N-G (Neutral-to-Ground) shall be measured and verified against the unit voltage ratings. b. Continuity measurements shall be made between the Neutral and Ground connections to verify the Neutral-to-Ground bond. c. Use a calibrated Ground resistance meter to measure the Ground resistance of the Ground wire connected to each individual SPD unit. Record the Ground reading in unit documentation. NOTE: The preferred reading is less than 5 Ohms. A Ground system measuring above 10 ohms needs to be evaluated. 2. Energize the SPD: a. All voltage modes including L-L (Line-to-Line), L-G (Line-to-Ground), L-N (Line-to- Neutral), and N-G (Neutral-to-Ground) shall be measured at the unit terminals and again verified against the unit voltage ratings. b. All indicating LEDs shall be illuminated Green. The factory shall be contacted in the event of any illuminated Red LEDs. c. Monitoring functions shall be checked (if applicable) for correct operation and verification of sensitivity setting. Upon energizing the SPD: 1) The Yellow ACTIVE SURGE LED should turn On, then Off 2) The Green STATUS and Yellow ENABLE LEDs should turn On 3) When the Green and Yellow LEDs turn on, the Counter should display a sensitivity setting of SEN3, which is the factory default setting. The display setting should change to 0000 4) The Audible Alarm should sound on fault. ACK silences alarm. Note: The Alarm should be in the Enabled status unless the customer has requested the alarm not sound d. Results of the System Commissioning shall be on a standard Commissioning Report which is submitted upon completion to the facilities manager. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TELEPHONE RACEWAY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 26 5564 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 26 5564 - TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 26. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a completed telephone raceway system as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Conduit 2. Outlet boxes 3. Pull and junction boxes 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Conduit, terminal boards, and outlets to form empty raceway system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Where telephone outlets are shown in plan, provide a single gang box with ¾” EMT to the telephone terminal board complete with nylon pull cord. B. Make conduit provisions for switching of telephone outlets located within the dorm rooms. The switch panel shall be located in the control room. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Place “TELEPHONE” label on pull and junction boxes. B. Provide a nylon pull cord in each telephone conduit run. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 28 3111 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 SECTION 28 3111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-alarm control unit 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes 3. System smoke detectors 4. Heat detectors 5. Notification appliances 6. Remote annunciator 7. Addressable interface device 8. Digital alarm communicator transmitter 9. System printer 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LED: Light-emitting diode. B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. B. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery-size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram. 7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits. C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 28 3111 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction and include the following: 1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. 3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following: a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals. 5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician. C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL. F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company. 1.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Comply with UL 864. B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years. C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. 1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 28 3111 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 1.10 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION A. Refer to the following section for Product Options and Substitutions. 1. Section 01 6200 – Product Options: Product options and substitutions-Substitutions Permitted. 2. Section 01 6213 – Product Substitution Procedures: Substitution Procedures during bidding and after bidding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the following: 1. GE Infrastructure; a unit of General Electric Company. 2. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company. 3. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 4. Silent Knight; a Honeywell company. 2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Record events in the system memory. 5. Record events by the system printer. C. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. D. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer. 2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: 1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL. a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer. 2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status. a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting. b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device. 3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment. B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 2 line(s) of 40 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 28 3111 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style D. b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z. c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 2. d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit. 2. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B. a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style B. b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style X. c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 1. d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit. 3. Serial Interfaces: Two RS-232 ports for printers. D. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a horn. E. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station. F. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events. G. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source. 1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power supply module rating. H. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium I. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be two-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status b. Device type City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 28 3111 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 c. Present average value d. Present sensitivity selected e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.) 2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. C. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. D. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white 2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. 1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1 B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals. 2.8 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL. B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal. C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following: 1. Verification that both telephone lines are available 2. Programming device 3. LED display 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit D. Digital data transmission shall include the following: 1. Address of the alarm-initiating device 2. Address of the supervisory signal 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device 4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power 5. Low battery 6. Abnormal test signal 7. Communication bus failure City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 28 3111 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station 2.9 SYSTEM PRINTER A. Printer shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL as an integral part of fire-alarm system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment. B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. C. Smoke-Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing 2. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet 3. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72 4. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening 5. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture D. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound. E. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. F. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. G. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. H. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. I. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. J. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 28 3111 - 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 MDE Project No. 16755 a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter. b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310000 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 310000 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Excavating, filling, backfilling, grading, and compacting of earth at the site. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 003132 - Geotechnical Data 2. Section 014500 - Quality Control 3. Section 312513 - Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 4. Section 311400 - Site Preparation 5. Section 321823 - Trenching and Backfilling 6. Section 314133 - Trench Shielding 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM D 698-78 Tests Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5-lb. Rammer and 12-in. Drop. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 013323 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. Submit material analysis results of existing and imported (if required) topsoil from a testing laboratory indicating compliance with these specifications. Any topsoil delivered to the site which does not comply with the approved sample shall be re-tested at the Contractor’s expense and replaced. B. Test Reports: 1. Submit copies of test reports in accordance with Section 014500 - Quality Control. 2. Submit copies of test reports for select fill material. No select fill material, if required, shall be delivered to the site until after the tests have been made and test reports confirmed. 3. Compaction Tests: Submit copies of compaction test reports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory Control: Select fill material and imported topsoil, if required, shall be inspected and tested by an independent testing laboratory. Testing laboratory shall make tests for the soil from the selected source to determine that it meets the specified requirements for select fill and imported topsoil. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Sheeting: Shore and sheet excavations to protect utilities and to prevent cave-in. Maintain sheeting secure until permanent construction is in place. Remove sheeting as excavations are backfilled. B. Drainage: Provide for adequate surface drainage during construction to keep the site free of surface water without creating a nuisance in adjacent areas and in accordance with the erosion control plan. C. Pumping: Keep the excavations free of water at all times by pumping or other means. This shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of the cause, source, or nature of the water. D. Protection: 1. Property: Protect adjoining property, including improvements outside the limits of the work. Protect walks, curbs, and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. 2. Trees: Protect tops, trunks, and roots of trees on the site which are to remain. Box or fence trees vulnerable to damage during construction. Remove interfering branches with care and cover scars with tree paint. Do not permit fires, storage of materials or excavation within the branch spread of trees to remain. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310000 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. Topsoil on the paving site areas shall be stripped, cleaned of grass, roots and debris to a depth of between 6" and stockpiled for later use. Provide soil amendments to existing topsoil per 2.0.1 A.2.B and C or import topsoil. Contractor shall stabilize the top soil mound per the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. 2. Import topsoil, as required. a. Contractor shall haul and place imported topsoil obtained from the off-site sources as necessary to construct the topsoil layer and various other details of the construction drawings. All costs related to such imported topsoil fill will be included in the contract price, and no additional or separate payment for imported fill will be due to Contractor. b. Topsoil shall be secured from an approved off-site location. It shall be: 1) Natural, fertile, friable agricultural soil, having characteristics of representative productive soils in the vicinity, and obtained from naturally well-drained areas. 2) Topsoil shall not be excessively acid or alkaline nor contain toxic substances. 3) Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall be reasonably free from clay lumps, stone, stumps, roots, live plants, or similar substances one inch or more in diameter, debris, or other objects which might be a hindrance to planting operations. 4) Topsoil shall be free from Johnson grass (Sorgum halepense), nut grass (Cyperus rotundus), and objectionable weeds. c. The soil texture shall be classified as loam or sandy loam according to the “soil triangle” published by the United States Agriculture Department and the following Criteria: 1) Sand (2.0 to 0.05 mm dia.)(No. 10 sieve): Loam 25-50%; Sandy Loam 45-85%. 2) Silt (0.05 to 0.002 mm dia.)(No. 270 sieve): Loam 30-50%; Sandy Loam less than 50%. 3) Clay (smaller than 0.002 mm dia.)(Hydrometer Analysis): Sandy Loam less than 50%. 4) Natural organic content: Not less than 1.5%. 5) pH of Soil: Not more than 7.6. 6) Soil texture shall be determined by utilizing processes as prescribed in ASTM D 422 using the No. 10 and No. 270 sieves and a hydrometer analysis. 3. Unsuitable Materials: Topsoil or unclassified fill will be declared as “unsuitable” by the Landscape Architect, Geotechnical Engineer or Civil Engineer if, in his opinion, any of the following conditions or matter and articles are present to a degree that is judged detrimental to the proposed use of the material: 1) Moisture. 2) Decayed or un-decayed vegetation. 3) Hardpan clay, heavy clay, or clay balls. 4) Rubbish. 5) Construction rubble. 6) Sand or gravel. 7) Rocks, cobbles, or boulders. 8) Cementitious matter. 9) Foreign matter of any kind. 10) Spoils from piers. 4. Unsuitable materials shall be disposed of as “waste” as specified in Section 311400 and 311100. 5. Wet Material: If fill material is unsatisfactory for use as embankment solely because of high moisture content, the Architect may grant the Contractor permission to process the material to reduce the moisture content to a usable optimum condition. B. Unselected Earth Fill: Clean, sandy soil free of organic matter and refuse, roots, clay lumps and rocks larger than 2". City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310000 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Granular Fill: Clean gravel or crushed rock graded to produce a mixture passing 1-¾” sieve and retained on ¼” sieve. Granular fill for areas to be covered with membrane waterproofing shall be clean pea gravel graded no larger than ¾”. D. Free-Draining Fill: Coarse sand of sand gravel mixture with less than 12% passing a No. 200 sieve, and a Plasticity Index less than 4. E. Filter Fabric Protective Membrane: The geomembrane filter fabric shall consist of a minimum 4-mils thick polyethylene (impermeable) film with a layer of nonwoven needle-punched polyester or polypropylene fabric bonded to one side. Fabric-film-fabric laminate being furnished shall consist of fabric fused or heat-sealed or otherwise bonded film so as to form an integral geomembrane. Filter fabric shall be able to withstand normal handling and placement at material temperatures from 20ºF. To 145ºF. without endangering the serviceability of the material in the intended application. If the filter fabric evidences delamination, such delamination shall serve as grounds for rejection. Filter fabric shall be mildew, abrasion and puncture resistant and suitable for long term burial in the presence of water or moisture in the intended construction application. Product/manufacturer. Petromat MB: Phillips fibers Corp. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove grass, weeds, roots and other vegetation from areas to be excavated, filled and graded. Fill stump holes and like small excavations with suitable material placed in lifts and thoroughly tamped. B. Scarify the subgrade soil in place to a depth of 6 inches and compact to between 95 and 100 percent of Standard Density, at or above optimum moisture content, in accordance with ASTM D 698. C. Install filter fabric in prepared subgrade soil in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Filter fabric joints at the end of each roll and on adjacent rolls shall be overlapped a minimum of 6". Before subsequent rolls of fabric are place, an application of sealant shall be placed along the edge and end of the in-place roll, which is to be overlapped. Sealant shall be applied at the rate of 35-40 linear feet per gallon to develop an approximately 3-inch wide drool centered about 4" from the edge of the in-place fabric. Then within 5-15 minutes, depending upon the ambient temperature, the next roll of moisture barrier fabric shall be placed overlapping the in-place roll by 6". Immediately after placing the overlapping fabric, the overlap seam area shall be rolled with a heavy roller to force the asphalt into the overlapping fabric. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. Allow space for the construction of forms. Excavate as required regardless of the condition or type of material encountered. 1. Cut areas accurately to the indicated cross-sections and grades. Take care to prevent excavation below the grades indicated. Any bottoms and slopes that are undercut shall be backfilled with earth fill and compacted. 2. Finish the excavating required for graded areas to a tolerance of 0.10 foot above or below the rough grade. 3. Remove underground obstructions except for piping and conduit which shall be handles as specified in Section 311100. 3.03 WASTING A. Surplus excavated material not suitable or required for embankment fill and backfill shall be wasted off site in a legal matter. 3.04 FILL AND BACKFILL A. Filling: Construct compacted fills to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. 1. Complete stripping and wasting operations in advance of fill construction. 2. Deposit and mix fill material in horizontal layers not more than 8" deep, loose measurement. Manipulate each layer until the material is uniformly mixed and pulverized. a. Fill material layers shall be reduced to not more than 4” deep for structure backfill compactors or small self-propelled compactors. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310000 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Fill material shall have a moisture content at or slightly above the optimum, to achieve specified compaction. If fill is too wet, dry by aeration to achieve desired moisture content. If fell is too dry, add water and mix in by blading and discing to achieve desired moisture content. 4. Exercise care to prevent movement or breakage or walls, trenches, and pipe during filling and compaction. Place fill near such items by means of light equipment and tamp with pneumatic or hand tampers. B. Backfilling: Construct compacted fill against and around concrete beams below finish grade. 1. Do not backfill until underground construction has been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed, and the excavations cleaned of trash and debris. 2. Do not backfill against beams until all of the permanent structural concrete supports and bracing members are in place or until adequate shoring has been erected to prevent displacement and deflection of the beams under horizontal load. Exercise care in the placing and compacting of backfill so as not to damage the structure in any way. 3. Bring backfill to required grades by depositing material in horizontal layers not more than 8" deep, loose measurement. a. Fill material layers shall be reduced to not more than 4” deep for structure backfill compactors or small self-propelled compactors. 3.05 COMPACTION A. Compact each layer of earth fill and backfill thoroughly and evenly until there is no evidence of further compaction and a solid and uniform density is secured. 1. Equipment for compacting shall be sheepsfoot and rubber tired rollers or other compactors capable of obtaining the required density. Compact the fill with power tampers and by hand in areas not accessible to rollers. 2. Compact each layer of fill to the density listed below as a function of the location. The required density in each case is indicated as a percentage of the maximum dry unit weight determined using the standard compaction test ASTM D 698. 3. Compact fill to the density listed below at a moisture content per the geotechnical report. a. Material under paving 95 to 100%. b. Material under lawn areas 85 to 90%. c. Material adjacent to retaining walls 93 to 98%. 3.06 FINE GRADING A. All fine grading and corresponding construction shall be performed as specified herein, and the complete work shall conform to the required lines, grades, and cross sections of the plans. 1. The maximum allowable deviation from the required finished grades of a line or plane shall be a slope (gradient) of plus or minus 0.5% in a horizontal dimension of 8' maximum. This shall be field tested by using an 8' long straight edge. If the surface has a deviation of more than ¼” above or below the midpoint of the straight edge when its ends rest on high or low points, the finished grade will be unsatisfactory and shall be immediately corrected. B. Road and Parking Lot Subgrade: Fine grading of the concrete road and parking lot subgrade shall be performed after final mixing and compaction of the lime treated is satisfactorily performed. Fine grading may be executed with a combination of a light roller and road grader. See Specification Section 313200. C. Concrete Walks: Fine grading of concrete walk subgrades shall be scarified to a 6" depth and recompacted to 95% of ASTM D 698 at a moisture content between - 1% and +4%. D. Athletic Fields (if shown on plans): Fine grading of the athletic fields shall be performed as a final step after placing imported topsoil and mixing of the soil amendments. 1. Topsoil shall first be placed and compacted to normal density, minimum 90% of Tex-113- E Density shall be graded to within 0.02 foot of finished grade. 2. Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a survey for grade verification at the following intervals: a. Top of native material. b. Top of rough grade. c. Finished grade. Elevations provided shall have an accuracy of 0.01’. 3. Fine grading shall be executed over all athletic field playing areas by the placement and use of final grade stakes or “blue tops” as directed on the grading plan. Final grade City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310000 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 stakes shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 50' along the exact contour lines as dimensioned on the grading plan. The stakes will be driven to the exact even foot elevation of the contour and will then be painted a bright color on top or be marked with a brightly colored plastic attachment. 4. Fine grading will then be executed with any or all of the following machinery; road grader, tractor box blade, discing machinery, weighted spike harrow, and weighted drags. Bulldozer blades or front end loader buckets are not acceptable devices for fine grading operations. 5. The use of a watering truck to moisten dried and hardened areas may be necessary. 6. It is anticipated that some areas will be loosened and pulverized with discing machinery and will then be recompacted to normal density before fine grading. 7. Satisfactorily fine graded areas shall be true in plane, even in gradient (slope), uniform in surface texture, free of rocks greater than ½” in diameter, and of normal compaction. Areas of loose granular soil pockets interspersed with over-compacted soils are not acceptable. Fine graded areas shall promote complete surface drainage, be ready for turfgrass planting, and assure playability. E. Timing 1. Fine grading will not begin until all underground utilities are complete, in place, tested to be working properly, and properly backfilled. Fine grading should not be attempted until construction which involves heavy vehicles is complete or nearly complete. Such vehicles cause rutting and over-compaction. 2. After fine grading is accomplished, it shall be the contractor’s responsibility to protect all the fine graded areas from vehicular traffic or other disruptive activities. Damages to the fine graded surfaces will be restored to a satisfactory condition as prescribed herein until the job is finished and accepted. F. Site Grading: Shape and finish earthwork to bring the site to the finish grades and elevations shown on the drawings. 1. Establish grades by means of grade stakes placed at corners of units, at abrupt changes of grade, and elsewhere as may be required. 2. Rough grade for walks, paving, and site improvements to the subgrade elevations required. Soft and unstable material which will not readily compact when rolled or tamped shall be removed and the resulting depressions filled with stable material and re- compacted. 3. Finish grade to the finish contours and spot grades shown. Extend cuts and fills to feather out beyond the last finish contour or spot grade shown. Grade to uniform levels and slopes between points for which elevations are given, round off abrupt changes in elevation, and finish off smoothly. Finish grades shall slope away from the building in all directions to assure proper drainage, minimum of 2%. G. Grading Around Trees: Where grading is required within the branch spread of trees that are to remain, perform the work as follows: 1. When trenching occurs, the tree roots shall not be cut but the trench shall be tunneled under or around the roots by hand digging. 2. When the existing grade at a tree is below the new finished grade, and fill not exceeding 6" is required, clean washed gravel graded from 1" to 2" size shall be placed directly around the tree trunk. The gravel shall extend out from trunk on all sides a minimum of 18" and finish approximately 2" above the finished grade at the tree. Install gravel before earth fill is placed. 3. Trees in areas where the new finished grade is to be lowered shall have regrading work done by hand to elevation as indicated. Existing grades immediately surrounding the trunk shall not be altered except at the direction of the Architect. 3.07 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Prior to placing topsoil, scarify subgrade to a depth of 6". Following scarification, topsoil shall be spread in one lift. The in place depth of the topsoil at the pay field shall be 6”. Topsoil shall be compacted to the approximate density of undisturbed soil. Provide topsoil to comply with Section 2.01. If there is insufficient stockpiled topsoil from on-site sources to complete the work, bring in topsoil from off-site sources as needed (topsoil for athletic fields shall be imported). After topsoil has been placed, blade, roll lightly, and rake as required to comply with 3.08, B below. B. After placement of topsoil, Contractor shall eliminate all low or hollow places that would allow water to stand or pond during rainfall or during operation of lawn irrigation systems. The area shall be free of all natural debris and shall also be free of all clods and rocks which are ¾” in size or larger. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310000 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Tests: Field density testing of the select fill material under the paving and at perimeter grade beam shall be performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make one in place density test for each 5,000 sq. ft. of area per lift, but in no case less than two tests, and one test per 100 linear feet of backfill area adjacent to grade beams, to insure that the specified density is obtained. B. Compaction Tests: Field density testing of fill material shall be performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make one in place density test for each 5,000 sq. ft. of area per lift, but in no case less than two tests, and one test per 100 linear feet of backfill area adjacent to grade beams, to insure that the specified density is obtained. C. Provide “As Built” survey of all areas for verification of grades and acceptance by Engineer. Contractor shall provide a CAD drawing of the survey by a State of Texas Licensed Surveyor. Survey shots shall include point location, description, elevation, and shall be on the same coordinate plane as the original project. END OF SECTION 310000 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310513 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 310513 - SOILS FOR EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED This section of the specifications describes the various classes of Earth Fill. All of the classes of Earth Fill contained in this specification may not be used on this project. The classes of Earth Fill used on this project are shown on the drawings or specified in other sections of the specifications. This specification section does not include specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill. Specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill are included in other sections of the specifications and/or shown on the drawings. 1.02 STANDARDS Soil materials shall be classified into the appropriate class of Earth Fill shown below according to ASTM D- 2487 “Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes” or other appropriate methods as designated by the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS; CLASSIFICATIONS A. CLASS 1 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH material with a liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 25, and a minimum of 60% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. B. CLASS 2 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH and CL materials with a coefficient of permeability less than or equal to 1.0 x 10 -7 cm/sec, a liquid limit greater than or equal to 30, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 15, and more than 50% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. C. CLASS 3 EARTH FILL: Consist of any materials classified as CH, CL, SM, SP, SP-SM, SC, and GC, which have a minimum plasticity index of 4, which are free of organic materials. D. CLASS 4 EARTH FILL: Consist of materials which are classified as SP, SM, SC, CL, OR dual classifications thereof, which have a liquid limit less than or equal to 30 and a plasticity index of a minimum of 6 and a maximum of 15, which are free of organic materials and have a maximum particle size of 2 inches. E. CLASS 5 EARTH FILL: Consist of materials classified as SP or SP-SM which have a plasticity index less than or equal to 4 and a maximum of 12% passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. (Class 6 through Class 11 reserved) F. CLASS 12 EARTH FILL: Consist of soils suitable for topsoil which are relatively free of stones or other objectionable debris, which have sufficient humus content to readily support vegetative growth. The suitability of soils for topsoil shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. END OF SECTION 310513 (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310516 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 310516 - AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED This section of the specifications describes the various classes of Aggregate Fill. All of the classes of Aggregate Fill contained in this specification may not be used on this project. The classes of Aggregate Fill used on this project are shown on the drawings or specified in other sections of the specifications. This specification section does not include installation. Installation of Aggregate Fill is included in other sections of the specifications and/or on the drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Match material requirements under 033000 Reinforced Cast in Place Concrete for Sidewalks and 032000 Concrete Reinforcement. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE CLASSIFICATION TESTING A. CONTRACTOR TESTING 1. Arrange and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample and test proposed Aggregate Fill materials. 2. Submit the test results to the Engineer and obtain approval prior to providing Aggregate Fill. B. OWNER TESTING The Owner shall arrange and pay for additional testing on the Aggregate Fill after delivery to the project site as determined necessary by the Engineer. C. CONTAMINATION CERTIFICATION 1. Obtain a written, notarized certification from the Supplier of each proposed Aggregate Fill source stating that to the best of the Supplier’s knowledge and belief there has never been contamination of the source with hazardous or toxic materials. 2. Submit these certifications to the Engineer prior to proceeding to furnish Aggregate Fill to the site. The lack of such certification on a potential Aggregate Fill source shall be cause for rejection of that source 1.04 STANDARDS Aggregate Fill shall be classified into the appropriate class listed below according to ASTM testing procedures as specified for the various classes. American Society for Testing Materials standards: ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C88 Test Method for soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate ASTM C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregates ASTM C131 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C535 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM D448 Classification for Standard sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS; CLASSIFICATIONS A. Regional Materials: Provide product that meets the definition as of a “regional material,” as defined in Section 013520, for 100% of the product by weight. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310516 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Recycled Content: Provide products with an average recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 60 percent. C. CLASS I AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 57: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 95 - 100 1/2" 25 - 60 No.4 0 - 10 No. 8 0 - 5 D. CLASS 2 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM Method C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 67: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1" 100 3/4" 90 - 100 3/8" 20 - 55 No.4 0 - 10 No.8 0 - 5 E. CLASS 3 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 7: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/4" 100 1/2" 90 - 100 3/8" 40 - 70 No.4 0 - 15 No.8 0 - 5 F. CLASS 4 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM Method C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 467: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 2" 100 1-1/2" 95 - 100 3/4" 35 - 70 3/8" 10 - 30 No. 4 0 - 5 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310516 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 G. CLASS 5 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 357: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 2-1/2" 100 2" 95 - 100 1'' 35 – 70 1/2" 10 - 30 No. 4 0 - 5 H. CLASS 6 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 1: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 4" 100 3 - 1/2" 90 - 100 2 - 1/2" 25 - 60 1 - 1/2" 0 - 15 3/4" 0 - 5 I. CLASS 7 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 6: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1" 100 3/4" 90 - 100 1/2" 20 - 55 3/8" 0 - 15 No.4 0 - 5 J. CLASS & AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D448, size number 56: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 90 - 100 3/4" 40 - 85 1/2" 10 - 40 3/8" 0 - 15 No. 4 0 - 5 K. CLASS 9 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of washed and screened gravel and natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones complying with the requirements of ASTM C33, "Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates", except that the gradation shall be as follows: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1/2" 100 3/8" 95 - 100 No. 4 80 - 95 No. 8 65 – 85 No. 16 50 – 75 No. 30 25 – 60 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310516 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 No. 50 10 – 30 No. 100 0 - 10 Class 9 Aggregate Fill shall have not more than 45% passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve of those shown above, and its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. L. CLASS 10 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of washed and screened natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones complying with the requirements and tests of “Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates”, ASTM C33. The gradation as included in ASTM C33 is as follows: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/8” 100 No. 4 95-100 No. 8 80-100 No. 16 50-85 No. 30 25-60 No. 50 10-30 No. 100 2-10 Class 10 Aggregate Fill shall have not more than 45% passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve of those shown above, and its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. M. CLASS 11 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-3/4" 100 7/8" 65 - 90 3/8" 50 - 70 No.4 35 - 55 No.40 15 - 30 No.100 0 - 12 (Wet Sieve Method) N. CLASS 12 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2” 100 1" 85 - 100 3/4" 60 - 95 3/8" 50 - 80 No.4 40 - 65 No.16 20 - 40 No.100 0 - 12 (Wet Sieve Method) O. CLASS 13 AGGREGATE FILL: Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and shall meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-3/4" 100 7/8" 65 - 90 3/8" 50 - 70 No. 4 35 - 55 No. 40 15 - 30 No. 100 0 - 3 (Wet Sieve Method) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 310516 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 P. CLASS 14 AGGREGATE FILL. Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable material and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or C535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 85 - 100 3/4" 60 - 95 3/8" 50 - 80 No.4 40 - 65 No. 16 20 - 40 No.100 0 - 3 (Wet Sieve Method) Q. CLASS 15 AGGREGATE FILL. Consist of durable particles of silica sand, washed clean chemically inert, and packaged by the Supplier. The material shall meet applicable regulatory requirements for monitor well filter pack. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and shall meet the following gradation requirements. Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing No.20 98 - 100 No.40 0 - 2 END OF SECTION 310516 (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 311100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 311100 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform operations in connection with clearing, grubbing, and disposal of cleared and grubbed materials. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE; DEFINITIONS A. CLEARING: Clearing is defined as the removal of trees, shrubs, bushes, and other organic matter at or above original ground level. B. GRUBBING: Grubbing is defined as the removal of stumps, roots, boards, logs, and other organic matter found at or above ground level. PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not Used] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Mark areas to be cleared and grubbed prior to commencing clearing operations. Engineer shall approve clearing and grubbing limits prior to commencement of clearing operations. B. Trees and shrubs outside of the clearing limits, which are within 10' of the clearing limits, shall be clearly marked to avoid damage during clearing and grubbing operations. C. Remove trees and brush outside the clearing limits, but within the immediate vicinity of the work, upon receipt of approval by the Engineer, when the trees or brush interfere with or retard the progress of construction operations. D. Clearly mark trees and shrubs within the clearing limits, which are to remain, and protect the trees and shrubs from damage during the clearing and grubbing operations. E. The clearing limits shall not extend beyond the project limits. F. Establish the clearing limits as follows: 1. Embankments plus 10' beyond the top of the excavation. 2. Excavations plus 5' beyond the top of the excavation. 3. Concrete structures plus 10' beyond the edge of the footing. 4. New roadways and new parking areas plus 5' beyond the edge of pavement. 5. Retaining walls plus 10' beyond the edge of the footing unless otherwise shown. 6. Underground utility trench top width plus 8'. G. Establish the grubbing as follows: 1. Embankments plus 2' beyond the toe of the embankment. 2. Concrete structures plus 2' beyond the edge of the footing. 3. New roadways and new parking areas plus 1' beyond the edge of pavement. 4. Retaining walls plus 2' beyond the edge of the footing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. CLEARING Clearing shall consist of the felling, cutting up, and the satisfactory disposal of trees and other vegetation, together with the down timber, snags, brush, rubbish, fences, and debris occurring within the area to be cleared. B. GRUBBING 1. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps and roots larger than 1" in diameter. 2. Extend grubbing to the depth indicated below: In the case of multiple construction items, the greater depth shall apply. a) Footings - 18" below the bottom of the footing. b) Walks - 12" below the bottom of the walk. c) Roads and Taxiways - 18" below the bottom of the subgrade. d) Parking Areas - 12" below the bottom of the subgrade. e) Runways - 24" below the bottom of the subgrade. f) Embankments - 24" below existing ground. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 311100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 g) Concrete Structures - 18" below the bottom of the concrete. h) Retaining Walls - 18" below the bottom of the footing. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL BURNING NOT PERMITTED Completely remove timber, logs, roots, brush, rotten wood, and other refuse from the Owner’s property. Disposal of materials in streams shall not be permitted and no materials shall be piled in stream channels or in areas where it might be washed away by floods. Timber within the area to be cleared shall become the property of the Contractor, and the Contractor may cut, trim, hew, saw, or otherwise dress felled timber within the limits of the Owner’s property, provided timber and waster material is disposed of in a satisfactory manner. Materials shall be removed from the site daily, unless permission is granted by the Engineer to store the materials for longer periods. END OF SECTION 311100 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SITE PREPARATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 311400 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 311400 - SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Clearing the site of vegetation, site improvements and obstructions to make way for new work. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Contractor shall visit the site and verify the nature and extent of clearing work required. B. Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of adjoining property and improvements outside the limits of the work. Protect paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. Take precautions to prevent injury to trees which are to remain. PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not used] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE A. Clearing: 1. Remove trees, shrubs and other vegetation from within the area of the site where shown on the drawings. Grub out roots to a depth of at least 18 inches below natural grade. 2. Dig out and remove buried obstructions to a depth of 24" below natural grade or 24" below the intended excavation elevation, whichever is lower. 3. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, trees with calipers greater than 3" shall not be cleared (removed). B. Pavement Removal Bituminous and concrete pavements shall be removed to neatly sawed edges. Saw cuts shall be made full depth. If a saw cut in concrete pavement falls within 3' of an existing score joint, construction joint, saw joint, cold join, expansion joint, or edge, the concrete shall be removed to that joint or edge. All saw cuts shall be parallel and/or perpendicular to the line of existing pavement. If an edge of a cut is damaged subsequent to saw cutting, the concrete shall again be sawed to a neat, straight line for the purpose of removing the damaged area. C. Disposal: 1. Clean up and remove from the site existing stumps, logs, broken paving rubble, and trash. 2. Clean up and remove from the site the stumps, logs, broken paving, rubble and debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing operations. 3. Material to be wasted shall be legally disposed of off-site. 4. Burning of combustible materials on the site will not be permitted. 5. Remove and dispose of excess soil off site in a legal manner. No extra pay. 3.02 BACKFILLING A. All holes, cavities, and depressions in the ground caused by site preparation operations will be backfilled and tamped to normal compaction and will be graded to prevent ponding of water and to promote drainage. In areas that are to be immediately excavated, the Architect/Engineer may permit holes, etc., to remain open. 3.03 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PRACTICES A. During the progress of the work, the contractor shall maintain existing storm water erosion and silt control measures in place at the site and shall provide additional erosion control barriers, silt fences, and other techniques in accordance with best management practices. Refer to Section 31 23 00 for additional requirements and land disturbance permit requirements. END OF SECTION 311400 (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 312333 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 312333 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipments and incidentals necessary to perform operations in trenching, pipe bedding, backfilling, clearing, grubbing and site preparation, handling, storage, transportation and disposal of excavated material; pumping and dewatering, preparation of subgrades, protection of adjacent property; fills, grading; and other appurtenant work. Trenching, backfilling, and pipe embedment procedures shall be in full compliance with Section 31 41 33, Trench Shielding. Earth removed from excavations and which is not required for backfill shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own expense, unless arrangements arc made with the Owner through his representative to allow disposal on site. If permitted, the Contractor shall dump and spread excess earth in a manner agreed upon by the Contractor and the Owner Excavation, other than trench excavation and embankment fills are not part of this specification section 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE CLASSIFICATION A. Excavations shall include material of whatever nature encountered, including but not limited to clays, sands, gravels, conglomeritic boulders, weathered clay shales, rock, debris and abandoned existing structures. Excavation and trenching shall include the removal and subsequent handling of materials excavated or otherwise handled in the performance of the work. B. Bidders must satisfy themselves as to the actual existing subsurface conditions prior to the submittal of a proposal to complete the proposed work. C. Trench excavation shall consist of excavation to the lines and grades indicated, required for installation of the pipe, pipe bedding, backfill, and to accommodate trench safety systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with SECTION 013323 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and SECTION 012300 – Alternates, Submittals and shall include: 1. Sieve analysis on embedment materials. 2. Test results indicating soil resistivity for embedment material used on metal pipe. 1.04 STANDARDS The following publications, referred to hereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto: ASTM D-48 “Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction" ASTM D-698 "Moisture-Density Relationship of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 -Ib Rammer and 12 Inch Drop" ASTM D-1556 "Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method" ASTM D-2487 "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" ASTM D-2922 "Density of Soil and Soil - Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods" ASTM D-3017 "Moisture Content of Soil and Soil - Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods" ASTM D-4253 "Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a Vibratory Table" ASTM D-4254 "Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculations of Relative Density" Any other testing required by these specifications and not specifically referenced to a standard shall be performed under ASTM or other appropriate standards as designated by the Engineer. Reference herein or on the drawings to soil classifications shall be understood to be according to ASTM D-2487, "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" unless indicated otherwise. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Excavated materials to be used for backfill may be deposited in stockpiles at points convenient for re- handling the material during the backfilling process. The location of stockpiles shall be within the limits of construction easements or public right-of-way. The location of stockpiles is subject to the approval of the Owner or the Owner's representative. Keep drainage channels clear of stockpiled materials. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 312333 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS Place no embedment or backfill material during freezing weather or upon frozen subgrades or previously placed frozen embedment or backfill materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CONCRETE FOR BACKFILL, BLOCKING, CRADLING AND ENCASEMENT. Unless other strength requirements arc designated, concrete used shall be 3,500 psi as specified in Section 033000, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. B. CLASS 1 EARTH FILL: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH material with a liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 25, and a minimum of 60% passing the No. 200 sieve, which arc free of organic materials C. CLASS 3 EARTH FILL- Consist of any materials classified as CH, CL, SM, SP, SP-SM, SC, and GC, which have a minimum plasticity index of 4, which are free of organic materials. D. CLASS 12 EARTH FILL: Consist of soils suitable for topsoil which are relatively free of stones or other objectionable debris, which have sufficient humus content to readily support vegetative growth. The suitability of soils for topsoil shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. E. CLASS 2 AGGREGATE FILL: [For Reinforced Concrete or Concrete Cylinder Pipe] Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM Method C-13 1 or C-535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C-88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D-448, size number 67: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1" 100 3/4" 90 - 100 3/8" 20 - 55 No. 4 0 - 10 No. 8 0 - 5 F. CLASS 3 AGGREGATE FILL: [For Iron, Cast Iron, or Corrugated Metal Pipe] Consist of durable particles of crushed stone free of silt, clay, or other unsuitable materials and have a percentage of wear of not more than 40% when tested in accordance with ASTM C-131 or C-535. When material is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C-88, Sodium Sulfate Solution, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 12%. The source of the material shall be approved by the Engineer and meet the following gradation in accordance with ASTM D-448, size number 7: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/4" 100 ½" 90 - 100 3/8" 40 - 70 No. 4 0 - 15 No. 8 0 - 5 G. CLASS 10 AGGREGATE FILL: or Iron-reinforced Concrete, Vitrified Clay, PVC, Fiberglass, or Asbestos Cement Pipe] Consist of washed and screened natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones complying with the requirements and tests of "Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates", ASTM C-33. The gradation as included in ASTM C-33 is as follows: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 8" 00 No. 4 95 - 100 No .8 80 - 100 No. 16 50 - 85 No. 30 25 - 60 No. 50 10-30 No. 100 2-10 Class 10 Aggregate Fill shall have not more than 45°/O passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve of those shown above, and its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C-125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 312333 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 H. CEMENT: Type I Portland Cement 2.02 MIXES; SAND-CEMENT BACKFILL [OR EMBEDMENT] A. A minimum sand and cement mixture of 27 parts sand and 2 parts cement will be required. Fine Sand 1 Cubic Yard Cement 1 Bag (Minimum) Water Optimum Moisture B. Sand shall be free of any cohesive material and shall meet the following gradation and plasticity index requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1" 100 ½" 95 - 100 No. 40 80 - 100 Plasticity Index 10 Maximum Liquid Limit 25 or less 2.03 FABRICATIONS [Not Used] 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS [Not Used] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. SITE 1. Clear sites of logs, trees, roots, brush, tree trimmings and other objectionable materials and debris which are to be occupied by pipe trenches, and grub stumps. Designate material not salvaged for reuse as surface material as spoiled and dispose of material in accordance with Paragraph E - DISPOSAL OF SPOIL MATERIAL, of this section. 2. Do not remove trees outside of the required working area unless their removal is authorized in writing by the Engineer and with the approval of the local governing authority. Adequately protect the trees left standing from permanent damage by construction operations. Standing trees may be trimmed where necessary to facilitate construction, but only with written authorization from the Engineer. B. DEWATERING 1. Provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of surface and ground water entering the excavations, trenches, or other parts of the work. Keep each excavation dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the proposed pipe is installed. Maintain the proper procedures necessary to protect against damage to the proposed work from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other water related causes. 2. Dewater excavations which extend down to or below ground water elevation by lowering and keeping the ground water level a minimum of 2-feet below the bottom of the excavation. 3. Divert surface water or otherwise prevent water from entering excavated areas to the fullest extent possible without causing damage to adjacent property. 4. Provide and maintain any piping or conduit necessary to facilitate drainage. Do not alter area drainage patterns to the extent that adjacent property and landowners become threatened with localized flooding and/or water damage. Should such a situation occur, the Contractor shall be responsible for repairing the damage at no additional cost to the Owner. C. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES 1. Prior to the start of construction, communicate with the local representatives of utilities companies, including but limited to oil, gas, telephone, and communications companies, as well as, local water and sewer utilities operating in the location of the proposed construction area. Seek the utility companies assistance in locating existing facilities to avoid conflicts during construction. The location, number, depth, and owner of utilities indicated are for information purposes only, and all utilities and structures may not be shown or may not be in the location shown. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 312333 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Where construction endangers adjacent structures, utilities, embankments and/or roadways, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, carefully support and protect such structures so that no damage occurs throughout the construction process. In case damage should occur, the Contractor shall be responsible for restoring the damaged structure to a condition acceptable to the Owner of that structure and shall bear all cost of such reparations. 3. Repair or replace damaged street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, fences, drainage structures, or other such facilities to the satisfaction of the Owner. Structures shall be returned to a condition equal to or better than the original condition and of same or better material and quality. D. BLASTING Blasting shall not be allowed in any instance. E. DISPOSAL OF SPOIL MATERIAL 1. Suitable material from excavations which meets the requirements for pipe backfill material as indicated, except stripping excavation, may be reused. Designate the remaining excavated materials as spoiled material and dispose of material off the site in accordance with all applicable laws, ordinances, and codes. Contractor shall be responsible for the storage, transportation, and deposition of spoiled material and shall be responsible for acquiring the necessary permits, and the payment of fees and duties at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. No burning of materials shall be permitted on the site. 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. GENERAL The trenches shall be excavated to the alignment and depth indicated or as necessary for the proper installation of the pipe and appurtenances. Brace and dewater the trench if necessary so that the workmen may work therein safely and efficiently. Any specific requirement listed in Part 3.00 EXECUTION may be modified as necessary to meet OSHA requirements. However, if trench widths are wider than indicated, the Contractor shall be responsible for determining the proper class of embedment and piping and the installation. B. TRENCH WIDTH The trench widths shall be as shown on the drawings. C. PIPE FOUNDATION SUBGRADE 1. Excavate the trench to an even grade to permit the installation of the pipe so that the full length of the pipe barrel is supported on the proper depth of bedding material. The entire foundation subgrade area in the bottom of the excavations shall be firm, stable material, and the material shall not be disturbed below required grade except as described in this specification. Where the character of the subgrade material is such that proper subgrade cannot be obtained at the elevation indicated, deepen the excavation to a satisfactory subgrade material 2. Remove the material until a firm, stable, and uniform bearing is reached and the subgrade brought back to the required grade with the specified bedding material compacted in place or with lean concrete material. The expense of replacing any unsatisfactory subgrade shall be borne by the Contractor. D. CORRECTING FAULTY GRADE Should any part of the trench be excavated below required grade, correct the trench with bedding material, thoroughly compacted, or with lean concrete, at no additional compensation to the Contractor. E. CARE OF SURFACE MATERIAL FOR REUSE If local conditions permit reuse, keep surface material suitable for reuse separate from the general excavation material. F. TRENCHING METHODS The use of any suitable trench digging machinery is permitted except in places where such operations may cause damage, above or below ground, in which case, employ hand methods. G. PIPE CLEARANCE IN ROCK Remove ledge rock, rock fragments, shale, or other rock to provide proper clearance for bedding materials. Provide adequate clearance for properly jointing pipe laid in rock trenches at bell holes. 3.03 BACKFILL A. BEDDING WITHING PIPE ZONE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 312333 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. CONCRETE CRADLE, ENCASEMENT OR CONCRETE ARCH Where indicated, install in the pipe in concrete cradle, encasement, or concrete arch. Take precautions to prevent pipe movement or deflection during construction. Where pipes are placed below structures, completely encase pipes in 1,500 psi concrete, and extend up to bottom of structure. 2. CONCRETE BLOCKING Place blocking to rest against firm undisturbed trench walls. The supporting area for each block shall be at least as great as that indicated and shall be sufficient to withstand the thrust, including water hammer, which may develop. Each block shall rest on a firm undisturbed foundation of trench sides and bottom. B. AGGREGATE FILL BEDDING 1. After the trench has been cut to the depths indicated, bring up the bedding layer to a point slightly above grade in maximum 4" lifts and uniformly compact to the density indicated. Form bell holes and scoop out a trough to grade so that the pipe is uniformly supported by the embedment material. Lay and joint the pipe. Bring up the embedment material in maximum 4" lifts on either side of the pipe to the elevation above the pipe shown on the plans. Uniformly compact the pipe as indicated. 2. After moisture is gone from the embedment material, place and compact the remaining backfill by tampering or other appropriate methods. Water jetting shall not be permitted. C. COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS 1. Compact earth fill an adhesive aggregate fill in maximum 4" lifts with pneumatic rollers or power hand tampers and make a minimum of eight (8) passes. 2. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill in maximum 4" lifts with vibratory rollers or vibratory plate power hand compactors and make a minimum of eight (8) passes. 3. The acceptability of the compaction equipment shall be based upon the results of a test section. 4. Compact earth fill and cohesive aggregate fill to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698, Standard Proctor. 5. Compact earth fill Class 1 and 2 at a moisture content within minus 0 to plus 5 percentage points of the optimum moisture content. Compact the remaining classes of earth fill and cohesive aggregate fill at a moisture content within minus 2 to plus 5 percentage points of optimum moisture content. The moisture ranges listed above are minimum and maximum limits. A tighter moisture range within these limits may be required to consistently achieve the specified density. 6. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill on which it is not practical to control the density by “Proctor” methods to a minimum of 75% of relative density as determined by ASTM D- 4253 and D-4254, or at the discretion of the Engineer, by a field compaction mold method correlated to ASTM D-4253 and D-4254. 7. Compact cohesionless aggregate fill at moisture content within a range that accommodates consistent placement and compaction to the minimum relative density specified above. 8. The Owner will arrange and pay for density and moisture testing. The testing frequency and methods shall be as requested by the Engineer. The Engineer may waive testing requirements on cohesionless bedding where testing is not practical because of limited space between the pipe and trench walls, however, the minimum number of passes of the compaction equipment specified above shall be achieved. 3.04 FINISHING A. Grade and rake areas smooth and even which do not receive any type of paved surface, to allow drainage to drain away from the structures and toward the roads and streets or the natural drainage course. Break up large clods of earth and remove rocks, trash and debris near the surface. B. Finish the top portion of backfill beneath established sodded (lawn) areas with not less than 6" of topsoil corresponding to, or better than, that underlying adjoining sodded areas. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compact backfill and appropriate embedment material to a minimum of 95% of maximum density at a moisture content of 0 to + 5% of optimum for backfill and at optimum for sand-cement embedment as determined by ASTM D-698-78 (Standard Proctor), B. Make periodic tests of compaction for conformance with this section by an approved testing laboratory selected and paid for by the Owner. Contractor shall pay for re-testing until acceptable City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 312333 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 test results are obtained. 3.06 CLEAN AND ADJUST Remove surplus pipeline materials, tools, rubbish and temporary structures and leave the construction site clean, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION 312333 Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TERMITE CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 313116 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soil treatment with termiticide. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of termite control product. 1. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For termite control products, from manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA-Registered Label. B. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor. b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75. c. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; . d. Syngenta; . 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TERMITE CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 313116 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SOIL STABILIZATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 313200 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 313200 - SOIL STABILIZATION - (LIME) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: In-place lime treatment to stabilize the subgrade under concrete paving. (Base Bid). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014500 - Quality Control 2. Section 312300 - Earthwork (Site) 3. Section 321313 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving and Curbs 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM D 698 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3). B. TSDHPT - Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Texas Dept. of Highways and Public Transportation, as amended. C. NCTCOG - North Central Texas Council of Governments Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lime Stabilization for Concrete Paving (Base Bid): 1. Hydrated Lime: Type A (dry): Per TSDHPT Item 264-2 2. Lime should meet the requirements of Items 2.5.2 and 2.5.3 in the North Central Texas Council of Governments Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. B. Soil: Upper 6" of the material in-place after the subgrade has been established, compacted, and shaped. C. Lime: Hydrated lime made from “high-calcium” type limestone with an unhydrated lime content not exceeding 7.0% by weight and a “free” water content not exceeding 4% by weight. Waste lime will not be acceptable. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Distributor truck or tank equipped with agitator to maintain a uniform mixture of lime and water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The use of lime soil stabilization (BASE BID) or cement soil stabilization (UNIT PRICE) shall be at the direction of the Independent Testing Laboratory engineer in the field. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Insure that surfaces have been brought to approximate rough grades (plus or minus 0.10 feet). Loosen and pulverize soil to a depth of 6" below bottom of designated paving areas, including a distance of 18-inches outside perimeter of paving. B. The percentages of lime indicated in this specification section are for bidding purposes only. Prior to beginning any soil stabilization, the contractor shall verify with the Geotech the amount and type of soil stabilization material to be used. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SOIL STABILIZATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 313200 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.03 PERFORMANCE - PAVING SUBGRADE A. General: It is the primary requirement to secure a completed 8" deep subgrade of treated material containing a uniform lime mixture, free of loose areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent paving and slabs to achieve a soils Plasticity Index of not greater than 15. Construction methods and equipment shall comply to NCTCOG Items 4.6. B. Scarification: Excavate and scarify the material to be treated down to the secondary grade (proposed bottom of lime treatment). Wet or unstable material below the secondary grade shall be corrected by scarifying, adding lime and compacting to uniform stability. Then spread the excavated and scarified material to the desired cross section. Full depth of treatment shall be 6" and full width shall be the entire area to be paved between points and lines located one foot beyond pavement edges. C. Placing Lime: Add lime to the scarified material in an amount equal to 7.0% by dry weight measurement, of 6" depth of compacted subgrade. Apply lime mixed with water to form a slurry. Spread lime only on that area where mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. D. Mixing: Mix the soil and lime thoroughly with suitable road mixers or other approved equipment until a homogeneous, friable mixture is obtained free from clods and lumps. Aerate or sprinkle the mixture as necessary to secure the optimum moisture content. Necessary optimum moisture content shall be the range of moisture between optimum and 4 percent greater than optimum. E. Curing: Allow the mixture to cure for a period of from 48 to 72 hours. During the curing period keep the material moist. F. Final Mixing: After the required curing time, mix the material uniformly with a rotary mixer to reduce the size of the particles so that 100% will pass a 1-3/4' sieve and 60% will pass a No. 4 sieve. Lime-soil mixture pH shall be 12.4 or greater. If not possible to attain 12.4, maximum pH attainable shall be validated by laboratory test for soil being treated. G. Compacting: Sprinkle the mixture as required and compact by rolling and tamping to a minimum of 95% standard density, ASTM D 698, at -2% to 4% optimum moisture content. Correct irregularities and weak spots by scarifying, adding or removing material, and re-shaping and re-compacting. Maintain the surface of the subgrade smooth, free from undulations and ruts, and to the established lines and grades. H. Surface Moisture: Keep the surface of the compacted subgrade moist by sprinkling until such time as the paving is placed. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Tests: Field density of the completed stabilized subgrade under paving shall be performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. The Laboratory shall make one density test for each 5000 sq. ft. of subgrade to insure that the specified density is obtained. END OF SECTION 313200 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 313213 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 313213 - LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidental necessary to treat subgrade by pulverization, add lime, mix, and compact the mixed material to the density required, in conformity with the lines, grades, and typical section as indicated 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE; AMOUNT OF LIME The percent of lime to be used shall be as indicated on the plans for the depth of subgrade treatment specified. Tests performed shall be in accordance with Texas Highway Dept. test method No 121-E but in no case less than five (5%) percent by weight applied. 1.03 SUSTAINABLE SUBMITTALS Regional material data. Provide for each product unless other noted: A. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. B. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. C. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1 04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety ASTM C-25 "Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Limestone, Quicklime and Hydrated Lime" ASTM C-l10 "Methods for Physical Testing of Quicklime, Hydrated Lime, and Limestone" Texas Highway Department Test Method No 121-E 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE [Not Used] 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS [Not Used] 1.07 OPTIONS [Not Used] 1.08 GUARANTEES [Not Used] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS; HYDRATED LIME A. Provide product that meets the definition as of a “regional material,” as defined in Section 013520. B. TYPE A, HYDRATED LIME Hydrated Lime shall consist of a dry powder obtained by treating, quicklime with enough water to satisfy its chemical affinity for water under the conditions of its hydration. This material is to consist essentially of calcium hydroxide or a mixture of calcium hydroxide and a small allowable percentage of calcium oxide, magnesium oxide and magnesium hydroxide (1, 2, and 3 are determined by procedures given in ASTM C-25) 1. Calcium and magnesium oxides Min. 90% 2. Carbon dioxide: If sampled at place of manufacture Max. 5% If sampled at any other place Max. 7% 3. Non-hydrated lime content, per cent by weight: CaO Max. 5% The percent by weight of residue retained shall conform to the following requirements, as determined by procedures given in ASTM C-110: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 313213 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 Residue retained on a No. 6 (3360-micron) sieve: None Residue retained on a No. 10 (2000-micron) sieve: Max 1.0% Residue retained on a No. 30 (590-micron) sieve: Max 2.5% Specifications for Type A applies specifically to the normal hydrate of lime made from “high- calcium” type limestone. Hydrated lime for stabilization purposes shall be applied, as provided in the governing specifications, as a dry powder or mixed with water to form a slurry. C. TYPE B, COMMERCIAL LIME SLURRY Type B, Commercial Lime Slurry, shall be a pumpable suspension of solids in water. The water or liquid portion of the slurry shall not contain dissolved material in sufficient quantity and/or nature injurious or objectionable for the purpose intended. The solids portion of the mixture, when considered on the basis of “solids content”, shall consist principally of hydrated lime of a quality and fineness sufficient to meet the following requirements as to chemical composition and residue. 1. Chemical Composition: The “solids content” of the lime slurry shall consist of a minimum of ninety (90) per cent by weight of calcium and magnesium oxides. 2. Residue: The per cent by weight of residue retained in the ”solids content” of lime slurry shall conform to the following requirements: Residue retained on No. 6 (3360-micron) sieve: Max. 0.0% Residue retained on No. 10 (2000-micron) sieve: Max. 1.0% Residue retained on No. 30 (590-micron) sieve: Max. 2.5% Type B, Commercial Lime Slurry, shall conform to one (1) of the following two (2) grades: Grade 1: The “Dry Solids Content” shall be at least thirty-one (31) percent by weight of the slurry Grade 2: The “Dry Solids Content” shall be at least thirty-five (35) per cent by weight of the slurry. When Type B, Commercial Lime Slurry, is specified, the Contractor shall select, prior to construction, the grade to be used and shall notify the Engineer in writing before changing from one grade to another. 2.02 MIXES; LIME SLURRY The approximate mix for lime slurry is one (1) ton of lime to 533 gallons of water which gives a 31 percent lime solution, and (1) ton of lime to 445 gallons of water which gives a 35 percent solution. 2.03 FABRICATIONS (Not Used) 2.04 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS (Not Used) 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. Machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper prosecution of the work shall be on the project prior to the beginning of construction operations. B. Maintain the machinery, tools, and equipment used in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. It is a primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth, and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. Regulate the sequence of work, use the proper amount of lime, maintain the work, and rework the courses as necessary to meet the above requirements. B. Prior to beginning any lime treatment, construct and shape the road bed to conform to the typical sections, lines, and grades as indicated on the plans or as established by the Engineer. 3.02 TREATMENT OF SUBGRADE A. TREATMENT Excavate material to be treated to the secondary grade (proposed bottom of lime treatment) and remove or windrow to expose the secondary grade. Correct any wet or unstable materials below the secondary grade by scarifying, adding lime, and compacting until it is of uniform stability. Spread the excavated material to the desired cross-section. If the Contractor elects to use a cutting or pulverizing machine that will remove the subgrade material accurately to the secondary City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 313213 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 grade, and pulverize the material at the same time, he will not be required to expose the secondary grade or windrow the material. However, the Contractor shall be required to roll the subgrade before using the pulverizing machine and correct any soft areas that this rolling may reveal. This method will be permitted only where a machine is provided which will insure that the material is cut uniformly to the proper depth and which has cutters that will place the secondary grade to a smooth surface over the entire width of the cut. The machine shall be of such design that a visible indication is given at all times that the machine is cutting to the proper depth. B. APPLICATION 1. Spread lime slurry only on that area on which the mixing operation can be completed the same working day. 2. Accomplish the application and mixing of lime with the materials by the method hereinafter described as “Slurry Placing”, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. C. SLURRY PLACING 1. METHOD a) Mix lime with water in trucks for approved distributors and apply as a thin water suspension or slurry. Apply Type B, Commercial Lime Slurry, with a lime percentage not less than that applicable for the grade used. The distribution of lime at the rate shown on the plans shall be attained by successive passes over a measured surface of roadway until the proper moisture and lime content have been secured. The distributor truck shall be equipped with an agitator, which keeps the lime and water in a uniform mixture. b) It is anticipated that the rate of application of lime shall not be less than four and one-half (4.5) pounds of lime per square yard per inch of depth of compacted subgrade. This is approximately a six (6%) percent mixture of lime by dry weight of the subgrade material, which may vary according to the laboratory tests, but in no case shall be less than five (5%) percent by weight be applied. 2. MIXING a) Thoroughly mix material and lime by approved road mixers or other approved equipment, and continue mixing until a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free from clods or lumps. Materials containing plastic clay or other materials which will not readily mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of the lime application, brought to the proper moisture content, and left to cure one (1) to four (4) days as directed by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer. Keep the material moist during the curing period. b) After the required curing time, uniformly mix the material by approved methods. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, reduce the clods in size by raking, blading, discing, harrowing, scarifying, or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that when all non-slaking aggregates obtained on the No.4 sieve are removed, the remainder of the material meets the following requirements when tested dry by laboratory sieves: Minimum passing 1" sieve: 100% Minimum passing No. 4 sieve: 60% c) During the interval of time between application and mixing, hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of six (6) hours or more, or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing, will not be accepted for payment. 3. COMPACTION The lime stabilized clay should be placed in maximum nine inch loose lifts and compacted at a moisture content not less than optimum, nor more than four percent above the optimum as defined by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor). Begin compaction of the mixture immediately after final mixing and in no case later than three (3) calendar days after final mixing. Aerate or sprinkle the material as necessary to provide optimum moisture. Begin compaction at the bottom and continue until the entire depth of the mixture is uniformly compacted as indicated or specified by the Engineer. The compacted mixture shall have a uniform density of not less than ninety- eight (98) percent of Standard Proctor Density. After each lift is completed, such tests as are necessary shall be made by the laboratory as required by the Engineer. If any portion fails to meet the density or depth specified, rework the portion as necessary to obtain the specified density and depth of lime treatment required. D. FINISHING, CURING AND PREPARATION FOR SURFACING After the mixture has been compacted, shape the surface to the required line, grades, and cross- sections, and then thoroughly roll as directed with a pneumatic or other suitable roller sufficiently City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 313213 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 light to prevent hair-cracking. The completed section shall then be moist-cured for a minimum of two (2) to seven (7) days before further courses are added or any traffic permitted, as directed by the Engineer. In cases where subgrade treatment or subbase sets up sufficiently to prevent objectionable damage from traffic, such layers may be opened to light traffic two (2) days after compaction. I the completed section has not been covered by other courses of material or pavement in seven (7) days, seal the completed section by an application of AC-20 asphalt at the rate of one-tenth (0.10) gallon per square yard. 3.03 MAINTENANCE Maintain the completed soil-lime base within the limits of the contract, in good condition, satisfactory to the Engineer as to grade, crown, and cross-section until such time as the surface course is constructed. Immediately repair irregularities or other defects that may occur at the Contractor’s own expense. Repairs are to be made in a manner to insure restoration of a uniform surface and durability of the portion repaired. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (Not Used) 3.05 CLEAN AND ADJUST (Not Used) 3.06 SCHEDULES (Not Used) END OF SECTION 313213 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TRENCH SHIELDING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 314133 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 31 41 33 - TRENCH SHIELDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This specification consists of the basic requirements which the Contractor must comply with in order to provide for the safety and health of workers in a trench. This specification is for the purpose of providing minimum performance specifications, and the Contractor shall develop, design, and implement the trench safety system. The Contractor shall bear the sole responsibility for the adequacy of the trench safety system and providing "a safe place to work" for the workman. B. Should the trench safety protection system require wider trenches than specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs associated with determining adequacy of pipe bedding and class, as well as, purchase and installation of alternate materials. 1.02 STANDARDS A. The following standard shall be the minimum governing requirement of this specification and is hereby made a part of this specification as if written in its entirety. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Excavations (29CFR Part 1926), U.S. Department of Labor, latest edition. B. Comply with the applicable Federal, State, and local rules, regulations, and ordinances. END OF SECTION 314133 (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 315000 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, performance properties, and dimensions of individual components and profiles, and calculations for excavation support and protection system. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of a geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by a geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection according to the performance requirements. 2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in Project Manual. B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide, design, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and superimposed and construction loads. 1. Contractor Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 4. Continuously monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements to ensure stability of excavations and constructed slopes and to ensure that damage to permanent structures is prevented. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with continuous interlocks. D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and strength required for application. E. Shotcrete: Comply with Section 033713 "Shotcrete" for shotcrete materials and mixes, reinforcement, and shotcrete application. F. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application. G. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. H. Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722/A 722M. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 315000 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that construction and finishing of other work is not impeded. 3.2 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inchesfrom a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact. C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles. 3.3 SHEET PILING A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock vertical edges to form a continuous barrier. B. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. C. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation. 3.4 TIEBACKS A. Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks. B. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks. 1. Have test loading observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of excavation support and protection system. C. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during installation of excavation support and protection systems, excavation progress, and for as long as excavation remains open. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. B. Promptly correct detected bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection system remains stable. C. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installation or faulty performance of excavation support and protection systems. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 315000 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.6 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and earth and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils and rock or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches below overlying construction and abandon remainder. 2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems. B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED PIERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 316329-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 31 63 29 DRILLED PIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Drilling and cleaning pier holes 2. De-watering of shafts and removal of spoil 3. Casing pier holes B. Products Installed, Not Furnished Under This Section 1. Concrete and reinforcing steel 2. Anchor bolts, templates and dowels C. BASIS FOR BIDS 1. Base Contract Price on number and base depth of piers as shown on Drawings. 2. Include temporary casing in Base Contract Sum for drilled piers. 3. Pay depth of straight shaft piers shall be calculated as the sum of the measured depth from ground surface to the top of the bearing stratum, plus the depth that casing is required to extend below the top of the bearing stratum, plus the required penetration into the bearing stratum. 4. No additional depth of drilling will be included in the pay depth unless required in writing by the inspecting agency. D. UNIT PRICES 1. Piers: provide add and deduct unit price per lineal foot shorter or longer than bid depth. a. Above bearing stratum. b. Within bearing stratum. 2. Casings: provide add and deduct unit price per lineal foot for installation and removal of temporary steel casings. Unit price shall be based upon actual length of temporary steel casing as measured from ground elevation to bottom of casing. 3. Unit prices shall be for complete unit of work including labor, materials, overhead, taxes and profit. 1.2 REFERENCES (Latest Edition) A. Specifications of the Association of Drilled Shaft Contractors. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 336.1: "Standard Specification for Construction of End Bearing Drilled Piers" 2. ACI 336.3: "Suggested Design and Construction Procedures for Pier Foundations" 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Pier Log: for each pier record the following: 1. Identification mark 2. Shaft diameter 3. Top of bearing stratum elevation 4. Bottom of pier elevation 5. Penetration of bearing stratum 6. Pier reinforcing (vertical bars and ties) 7. Steel cage length 8. Depth and diameter of casing, where casing required 9. Top of Pier Elevation 10. Concrete quantity 11. Date and time drilling completed 12. Date and time concrete placement begun and completed 13. Plumbness variation 14. Condition of drilled hole before placement of concrete City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED PIERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 316329-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Contractor: at least 3 years of experience in similar applications. a. Experience shall be relevant to anticipated subsurface materials, water conditions, shaft sizes and special techniques required. 2. Demonstrate to Architect dependability of equipment and techniques to be used, when requested. B. Drilled pier construction shall conform to requirements of ACI 336.1, except as modified by requirements of this Section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store reinforcing cages off of ground and protect from contamination of dirt, grease and corrosion. B. Deliver concrete to site in timely manner and in sufficient quantities to allow concreting of each pier as monolithic unit. C. Coordinate delivery of concrete to allow placement to begin within 8 hours of completion of drilling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - Refer to related sections for materials installed, not furnished under this section. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Prior to drilling pier holes, fabricate reinforcing cages in stock lengths suitable for cutting to required lengths. Bend reinforcing as detailed. 1. Do not splice vertical reinforcing within top 10feet of pier. 2. Except as otherwise required, vertical reinforcing may be spliced provided that no more than one half of bars are spliced within a 6-foot length and a minimum bar lap of 40 bar diameters is provided. Lap and tie bars at splices. 3. Where required, provide mechanical bar splices. 4. Do not use cross wire ties that would interfere with tremie pipe or concrete free falling down the center of the cage. 5. Spacers: provide steel band spacers or precast concrete spacers to maintain position of cages within pier holes. 6. End blocks: provide precast concrete end blocks to maintain required clearance at bases of cages. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to beginning installation, review the subsoil investigation report for site provided by Owner; become thoroughly familiar with anticipated subsoil conditions. B. Examine site for obstructions to drilling, such as power lines, utilities, material stockpiles, boulders and uneven surfaces. Report anticipated problems to Architect in timely manner so as not to delay schedule of Work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Have ready at site equipment anticipated to be necessary for successful installation of piers, including power augers, core barrels, belling tools, tremies, hoppers, chutes, and casing, as applicable. B. Maintain in ready condition dowels, templates, and anchor bolts required for pier installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Drilling Straight Shaft Pier Holes 1. Drill pier holes with power augers or core barrels suitable for subsoil conditions at site. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED PIERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 316329-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Drill pier holes of required diameters to bearing stratum and penetrate bearing stratum to required depths below top of stratum. 3. Where casing is required, increase pier hole diameter as necessary to accommodate casing having inside diameter not less than required shaft diameter to depth necessary to seal shaft. 4. Where casing is required, measure required depth of penetration into bearing stratum from top of stratum or from bottom of casing, whichever is deeper from ground surface. B. De-watering Pier Holes 1. Remove standing water from pier holes to within 3 inches of base of holes by bailing or pumping. 2. Where flowing water is encountered, or required water level cannot be maintained, use casing. C. Casing Pier Holes 1. Where flowing water or caving soil is encountered use temporary casings to seal sides of shaft. 2. Casings shall be steel, and of adequate strength to withstand handling stresses and concrete and earth pressures, and shall be watertight. 3. Extend casings only to depth required to seal off water or caving soil. 4. Extract casings in vertical lifts, maintaining adequate head of concrete to prevent caving of soils. Do not rotate casing during removal. D. Placing Reinforcing Cages, Dowels and Anchor Bolts 1. Place reinforcing steel cages accurately in shafts and hold in position during placement of concrete. 2. Place dowels and anchor bolts in position, and maintain proper location and elevation with templates. 3. Use steel bars and bands as required to maintain position of scheduled pier reinforcing within cage. 4. Use spacers to maintain position of cage within shaft and to maintain minimum 3 inches of concrete cover. 5. Use end blocks to support cage at required elevation maintaining proper clearance at base of pier. E. Placing and Consolidating Concrete 1. Clean pier shafts of accumulated loose material before concreting, and remove water to within 3 inches of base of shaft. 2. Place concrete within 8 hours of drilling. 3. Place concrete using a collection hopper with a steel outlet pipe to direct concrete down the center of the shaft. Placing concrete directly into the shaft from concrete truck chute is not allowed. 4. Extend tremie pipe as required to limit concrete free fall height as follows: a. Shaft diameter 18 inches or less: 10 feet max free fall b. Shaft diameter 20 to 30 inches: 30 feet max free fall c. Shaft diameter 32 inches or larger: 60 feet max free fall 5. Place concrete in one continuous operation for each pier. 6. Consolidate top 6 feet of each pier with concrete vibrator. 7. Where water rises to top of pier during placement, remove over-wetted concrete and replace with sound, dense material. 8. Remove and replace portions of concrete that become contaminated with mud or spoil material during placement. 9. Where tops of pier holes become mushroomed during drilling or installation procedures, use round forms to maintain constant diameter. F. Tolerances 1. Maximum lateral variation off centerlines: 3 inches 2. Plumbness of vertical piers within 1 ½ percent of shaft depth to bearing stratum. 3. Shaft diameter: plus 2 inches, minus 0 4. Top of pier elevation: plus one inch, minus 3 inches 5. Penetration of bearing stratum: minus 0, plus 1 foot. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED PIERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 316329-4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 6. Placement of vertical dowels at tops of piers: plus or minus 1 inch lateral, plus or minus 4 inches vertical. 7. Placement of anchor bolts: plus or minus 1/4 inch lateral, plus or minus 1 inch vertical. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Laboratory and Inspection Services 1. Inspect drilling of each pier hole. a. Determine location of required bearing stratum, measure depth from ground surface. b. Measure overlap of casing into the bearing stratum. c. Measure depth of penetration into stratum. d. Measure shaft diameter. Measure casing diameter where casing required. e. Inspect condition of base prior to concreting. 2. Inspect reinforcing cages a. Check bar sizes and quantity. b. Check tieing and splicing of cages. c. Monitor placement and securement techniques. 3. Monitor concrete placement a. Monitor time interval between drilling and placement. b. Inspect placement techniques and conditions. c. Inspect concrete quality at tops of shafts. 4. Material Tests: refer to sections for products installed, not furnished under this section. 5. Field Conditions: where un-anticipated subsurface conditions prevent proper installation of piers, do not proceed with work until directed by Architect. B. Adjusting 1. Piers for which time lapse between drilling and concreting exceeds maximum shall be reamed, or penetration re-drilled as determined by Architect at no additional cost to the contract. 2. Piers installed without required inspection shall be replaced as directed by Architect at no additional cost to the contract. 3. Pier installations suspect of deficient quality shall be tested and/or corrected as directed by Architect at no additional cost to Owner. 4. Pier shafts drilled deeper than required penetration into bearing stratum shall be filled with unreinforced concrete to the required penetration depth at no additional cost to the contract. 5. If pier shafts are larger than required diameter, except where casing is required, provide additional vertical reinforcing as may be instructed by Architect at no additional cost to the contract. 6. Remove mushrooms - before concrete cures, remove excess concrete from tops of piers so that pier shafts are of constant diameter. C. Clean-up 1. Remove spoil and debris from the site and legally dispose. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321243 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 321243 - POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Porous pavement system. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Grasspave2 porous pavement system provides vehicular and pedestrian load support for grass areas, while protecting grass roots from harmful effects of traffic. B. Major Components of the Complete System 1. Grasspave2 units, assembled in rolls. 2. Engineered sand and gravel base course. 3. Hydrogrow soil amendment and fertilizer, supplied with Grasspave2. 4. Sand fill or USGA greens mix. 5. Selected grass from seed, hydroseeding/hydro-mulching, or sod. 6. Selected topsoil (only for seeded installation). 7. Mulch (needed only for seeded or hydroseeded installations). C. TheGrasspave2 grass paving units, sand, and base course work together to support imposed loading. D. TheGrasspave2 grass paving units, Hydrogrow, and sand fill contribute to vegetation support. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0133000. B. Shop Drawings: Submit design detail showing proper cross-section. C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's sample of Grasspave2 10” x 10” section of Grasspave2 material. D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. Include methods for maintaining installed products. E. Certificates: 1. Manufacturer signed certificate stating the product is made in the USA. 2. Submit Material Certificates for base course and sand (or USGA mix) fill materials 3. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying material compliance of polyethylene used to make Grasspave2 units. 4. ISO Certificate certifying manufacturer’s quality management system is currently registered to ISO 9001:2008 quality standards. F. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the requirements of Credit will be met: 1. List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate post-consumer recycled content and pre- consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. 2. Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. 3. Description of Grasspave2 in stormwater design to limit the disruption of natural hydrology by reducing impervious cover, increasing on-site infiltration, reducing or eliminating pollution from stormwater runoff and eliminating contaminants. 4. Designing elements for Grasspave2 to limit the disruption and pollution of natural water flows by managing stormwater runoff. 5. Documenting the use of Grasspave2 to reduce heat islands to minimize the impact on microclimates and human and wildlife habitats. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321243 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 G. Substitutions: No material will be considered as an equivalent to the Grasspave2 unit specified herein unless it meets all areas of this specification without exception. Manufacturers seeking to supply what they represent as equivalent material must submit records, data, independent test results, samples, certifications, and documentation deemed necessary by the Specifier to prove equivalency. H. Manufacturer’sMaterial Certification: Product manufacturers shall provide certification of compliance with all applicable testing procedures and related specifications upon written request. Request for certification shall be submitted by the purchasing agency no later than the date of order placement. I. Product manufacturers shall also have a minimum of 30 years’ experience producing products for porous pavement systems. J. Manufacturer Quality Certification: ISO Certification certifyingmanufacturer’squality management system for its Grasspave2 system iscurrentlyregistered to ISO 9001:2008quality standards.Anyalternatematerialssubmittedshallprovide a certification thattheirporous pavement system manufacturingprocessis part of an ISO program and a certification willberequiredspecificallystatingthattheirtestingfacilityiscertified and in accordance with ISO. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Protect Grasspave2 units/rolls from damage during delivery and store rolls upright, under tarp, to protect from sunlight, when time for delivery to installation exceeds one week. C. Store Hydrogrow in a dark and dry location D. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage 1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Installer responsible for maintenance of grass plants – water/irrigation, fertilizing, mowing – for one growing season. DO NOT AERATE. See Grasspave2 Maintenance Guide from Invisible Structures B. System to be maintained by Owner after one growing season. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B. Do not begin installation of porous pavements until all hard surface paving adjacent to porous pavement areas, including concrete walks and asphalt paving, is completed. C. Install turf when ambient air temperatures is at least 55 degrees F (13 degrees C). D. In cold weather, do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost, and do not build on frozen base or wet, saturated or muddy subgrade. E. Protect partially completed paving against damage from other construction traffic when work is in progress. F. Adequately water sod or grass seed to assure germination of seed and growth of root system. G. Grass coverage on the sand-filled Grasspave2 rings must be completed within one week: See Part 3 Execution. H. DO NOT DRIVE, PARK ON, or use Grasspave2 system for two or three mowing cycles until grass root system has matured (about 3 to 4 weeks for sod or 6 to 8 weeks for seeded areas). Any barricades constructed must still be accessible by emergency and fire equipment during and after installation. 1.7 LIMITED WARRANTY A. Invisible Structures, Inc. (ISI) warrants to its purchasers that all products furnished by ISI will be free from defects in material and/or workmanship. B. This warranty shall be extended for a period of five (5) years following the date of shipment by ISI. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321243 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Providing a written claim is presented to ISI within the warranty period and after inspection by ISI showing the materials have failed under this warranty, all defective materials shall be refurnished under this warranty, at no charge, excluding re-installation costs. This in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied and is the sole warranty extended by ISI. D. Our liability under this warranty is limited to the refurnishing of materials and does not include any responsibility for incidental, consequential, or other damages of any nature. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Invisible Structures, Inc., which is located at: 1600 Jackson St. Suite 310 ; Golden, CO 80401; Toll Free Tel: 800-233-1510; Tel: 303-233-8383; Email: request info (sales@invisiblestructures.com); Web: www.invisiblestructures.com. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2GRASSPAVE2 A. Composition: 1. Manufactured in the USA. 2. High density polyethylene (HDPE): 100 percent recycled materials. 3. Color: black 4. Color Uniformity: Uniform color throughout all units rolls. 5. Carbon Black for ultraviolet light stabilization. 6. Hydrogrow soil amendment and fertilizer, provided by manufacturer with Grasspave2. B. Performance Properties: 1. Maximum Loading Capability: 5721 psi (39,273 kPA) when filled with sand. 2. Wheelchair Access testing for ADA Compliance: Passing ASTM F 1951-08. 3. Wheelchair Access testing for ADA Compliance: Passing Rotational Penetrometer testing. 4. Tensile strength, pull-apart testing: 458 lbf/in from ASTM D638 Modified. 5. System Permeability (Grasspave2, sand, base course): 2.63 to 38.55 inches of water per hour. 6. Effective Imperviousness (E.I.): 10%. C. Dimensions (individual units are assembled and distributed into rolls): 1. Roll area: From 108 sqft (10 sq m) to 538 sqft (50 sq m), in 108 sqft (10 sq m) increments 2. Roll Widths: From 3.3 ft (1 m) to 8.2 ft (2.5 m), in 1.6 ft (0.5 m) increments. 3. Roll Lengths: From 32.8 ft (10m) to 65.6 ft (20 m), in 3.3 ft (1 m) increments. 4. Roll Weights: From 41 lbs (19kg) to 205 lbs (93kg), in 41 lbs (19 kg) increments. 5. Unit Nominal Width by Length: 20 inches by 20 inches (0.5 m by 0.5 m) or 40 inches by 40 inches (1 m by 1 m). 6. Nominal Depth: 1 inch (2.5 cm) – for rolls and individual units. 7. Unit Weight: 18 oz (510 g) or 5 lbs. (2.27 kg). 8. Volume Solid: 8 percent. 2.3 SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Base Course: Sandy gravel material from local sources commonly used for road base construction (recycled materials such as crushed concrete or crushed asphalt are NOT acceptable). 1. Conforming to the following sieve analysis and requirements: a. 100 percent passing sieve size 1 inch (25 mm). b. 90-100 percent passing sieve size 3/4 inch (19 mm). c. 70-80 percent passing sieve size 3/8 inch (9 mm). d. 55-70 percent passing sieve size #4. e. 45-55 percent passing sieve size #10. f. 25-35 percent passing sieve size #40. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321243 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 g. 3-8 percent passing sieve size #200. 2. Provide a base course material nearly neutral in pH (range from 6.5 to 7.2) to provide adequate root zone development for turf. 3. Material may be either "pit run" or "crusher run." Avoid using clay based crusher run/pit run. Crusher run material will generally require coarse, well-draining sand conforming to AASHTO M6 or ASTM C 33 to be added to mixture (20 to 30 percent by volume) to ensure long-term porosity. 4. Alternative materials such as crushed shell, limerock, or crushed lava may be used for base course use, provided they are mixed with sharp sand (20 to 30 percent) to ensure long-term porosity, and are brought to proper compaction. Without added sand, crushed shell and limerock set up like concrete and become impervious. 5. Alternative size and/or composition of base course materials should be submitted to Invisible Structures, Inc. (Manufacturer) for approval. B. Sand Fill for Rings and Spaces Between Rings: Clean sharp sand (washed concrete sand). Choose one of the following: 1. Coarse, well-draining sand, such as washed concrete sand conforming to AASHTO M6 or ASTM C-33. 2. United States Golf Association (USGA) greens, section - sand mix “The Root Zone Mixture.” C. Turf Conditioner: 1. Hydrogrow a proprietary soil amendment manufactured by Invisible Structures, Inc. and provided with Grasspave2. 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. D. Grass – Choose either sod or seed: 1. Seed: Use seed materials, of the preferred species for local environmental and projected traffic conditions, from certified sources. Seed shall be provided in containers clearly labeled to show seed name, lot number, net weight, % weed seed content, and guaranteed % of purity and germination. Pure Live Seed types and amount shall be as shown on plans. a. Mulch – needed only for hydroseeding: Wood or paper cellulose commercial mulch materials compatible with hydroseeding operations. Mulch depth according to mulch manufacturers’ recommendation. DO NOT use mulch of straw, pine needles, etc., because of their low moisture holding capacity. b. Topsoil – needed only for seeding, recommended for hydroseeding: Obtain specified topsoilfor a light “dusting” (no more than ½” or 13mm) above rings filled with sand for seeding germination. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine subgrade and base course installed conditions. Do not start porous paving installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Check for improperly compacted trenches, debris, and improper gradients. B. For fire lane installations: prior to installing base course for turf paving, obtain approval of local fire authorities of sub-base. C. Start of installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance. If existing conditions are found unsatisfactory, contact Architect for resolution. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Subgrade Preparation: 1. Prepare subgrade as specified in Division 32. Verify subgrade in accordance with porous paving system manufacturer's instructions. 2. Proper subgrade preparation will enable the Grasspave2 rolls/units to connect properly and remain level and stationary after installation. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321243 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Excavate area allowing for unit thickness, the engineered base depth (where required), and 0.5 inch (1.25 cm) for depth of sod root zone or topsoil germination area (when applicable). 4. Provide adequate drainage from excavated area if area has potential to collect water, when working with in-place soils that have poor permeability. 5. Ensure in-place soil is relatively dry and free from standing water. 6. Uniformly grade base. 7. Level and clear base of large objects, such as rocks and pieces of wood. B. Base Preparation: 1. Install Base as specified in Section 321000. Verify engineered base (if required) is installed in accordance with porous paving system manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Coordinate base installation and preparation with subdrains specified in Section 334600. 3. If required, place a geotextile separation layer between the natural ground and the ‘engineered base’. 4. If required, install the specified sub-drain and outlet according to construction drawings. 5. Coordinate base installation and preparation with irrigation and drip irrigation lines specified in Section 32 80 00 and 32 84 13, respectively. 6. Place engineered base in lifts not to exceed 6 inches (150 mm), compacting each lift separately to 95 percent Modified Proctor. 7. Leave 1 inch (2.5 cm) of depth below final grade for porous paver unit and sand fill and 0.5 inch (1.25 cm) for depth of sod root zone or topsoil germination area (when applicable). 3.4 HYDROGROW INSTALLATION A. Spread all Hydrogrow mix provided (spreader rate = 4.53 kg per 100 m2 (10 lbs per 1076 ft2) evenly over the surface of the base course with a hand-held, or wheeled, rotary spreader. B. The Hydrogrow mix should be placed immediately before installing the Grasspave2. 3.5 GRASSPAVE2 INSTALLATION A. Install the Grasspave2 units by placing units with rings facing up, and using snap-fit connectors, pegs and holes, provided to maintain proper spacing and interlock the units. Units can be easily shaped with pruning shears or knife. Units placed on curves, slopes, and high traffic areas shall be anchored to the base course, using 40d common nails with fender washer, as required to secure units in place. Tops of rings shall be between 6 mm to 13 mm (0.25" to 0.5") below the surface of adjacent hard-surface pavements. B. Install sand in rings as they are laid in sections by "back-dumping" directly from a dump truck, or from buckets mounted on tractors, which then exit the site by driving over rings already filled with sand. The sand is then spread laterally from the pile using flat bottomed shovels and/or wide "asphalt rakes" to fill the rings. A stiff bristled broom should be used for final "finishing" of the sand. The sand must be "compacted" by using water from hose, irrigation heads, or rainfall, with the finish grade no less than the top of rings and no more than 6 mm (0.25") above top of rings. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF GRASS A. Grass coverage on the sand-filled rings must be completed within one week. Sand must be re-installed and leveled and Grasspave2 checked for integrity if rings become exposed due to wind, rain, traffic, or other factors. (Choose one paragraph below to meet grass installation method desired.) 1. Hydroseeding/hydro-mulching - A combination of water, seed and fertilizer are homogeneously mixed in a purpose-built, truck-mounted tank. The seed mixture is sprayed onto the site at rates shown on plans and per hydroseeding manufacturer's recommendations. Coverage must be uniform and complete. Following germination of the seed, areas lacking germination larger than 20 cm x 20 cm (8" x 8") must be reseeded immediately. Seeded areas must be fertilized and kept moist during development of the turf plants. ). DO NOT DRIVE ON SYSTEM: Hydroseeded/hydro-mulch areas must be protected from any traffic, other than emergency vehicles, for a period of 6 to 8 weeks, or until the root system has penetrated and established well below the Grasspave2 units. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas POROUS FLEXIBLE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321243 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Install grass seed at rates per grass type. A light "dusting" of commercial topsoil mix, not to exceed 1/2" (25 mm) will be placed above the rings and seed mix to aid germination rates. Seeded areas must be fertilized and kept moist during development of the turf plants. ). DO NOT DRIVE ON SYSTEM: Seeded areas must be protected from any traffic, other than emergency vehicles, for a period of 6 to 8 weeks, or until the root system has penetrated and established well below the Grasspave2 units. B. Adequately water grass seed to assure germination of seed and growth of root system. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Seeded areas must be protected from any traffic, other than emergency vehicles, for a period of 4 to 8 weeks, or until the grass is mature to handle traffic. B. Sodded areas must be protected from any traffic, other than emergency vehicles, for a period of 3 to 4 weeks, or until the root system has penetrated below the Grasspave2 units. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Remove and replace segments of Grasspave2 units where three or more adjacent rings are broken or damaged, reinstalling as specified, so no evidence of replacement is apparent. B. Perform cleaning during the installation of work and upon completion of the work. Remove all excess materials, debris, and equipment from site. Repair any damage to adjacent materials and surfaces resulting from installation of this work. 3.9 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain grass in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as specified in Section 329200 Manufacturers of Turfs and Grasses. B. Lawn Care: Normal turf care procedures should be followed, including de-thatching. C. DO NOT AERATE.Aerator will damage the Grasspave2 units. Aeration in not necessary in a sand root zone. D. When snow removal is required, keep a metal edged plow blade a minimum of ¾ inch (17 mm) above the surface during plowing operations to avoid causing damage to the Grasspave2 units, or 1. Use a plow blade with a flexible rubber edge, or 2. Use a plow blade with skids on the lower outside corners set so the plow blade does not come in contact with the units. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321313 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: New concrete walks, curbs and gutters, paving, approaches, and other concrete flatwork outside the building. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 310000 - Earthwork 2. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 3. Section 321373 - Sealants and Caulkings 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 3. ACI 305 - Recommended Practices for Hot Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 306 - Recommended Practices for Cold Weather Concreting. B. American National Standards Institute/American Society for Testing and Materials (ANSI/ASTM): 1. ANSI/ASTM D1752-84 - Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. C. NCTOG - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards: ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.” ACI 311 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection.” ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.” Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual for Standard Practice.” B. Workmanship: Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerance, and finishes. Correct deficient unsatisfactory concrete as directed by the Engineer. All pavement replacement shall be a minimum of ½ panel. C. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. D. Obtain materials from same source throughout. E. City Standards: Street sidewalks, curbs and gutters, and approaches shall be constructed to meet or exceed the requirements of the city standard specifications (or NCTCOG) where the city standards are applicable. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of SECTION 013323 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. And SECTION 012300 – Alternates. B. Include data on joint filler, admixtures and curing compounds. C. Submit manufacturer’s instructions under provisions of SECTION 013323 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and SECTION 012300 - Alternates D. Provide field samples of surface textures specified for Engineer approval prior to beginning work. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321313 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place pavement when base surface or ambient temperature is less than 40°F, or if base surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Formwork shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 031100 - CONCRETE FORMING. B. Reinforcement shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING. ASTM A 615, Grade 60. C. Concrete shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I Domestic manufacturer. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project. Minimum compressive strength shall be 3,500 psi at 28 days. Provide entrained air of 5% (±1%) ASTM C260 with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.50. D. Expansion Joints: 1. Redwood expansion for joints to be caulked with sealant and joints in architectural concrete flatwork. E. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 1. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps, or other deleterious substances. 2. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter, as follows: a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bankrun gravel is not permitted. c. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1½". F. Water: Clean, fresh, free from oil, acid, organic matter or other deleterious substances. G. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. H. Fly ash and calcium chloride or admixture containing more than 0.1% chloride ions are not permitted. I. Supports for reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement-plastic chairs and fastening reinforcing in place. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2.02 RELATED MATERIAL A. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I. B. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Weldcrete; Larsen Products EucoWeld; Euclid Chemical Co. Sonocrete; Sonneborn-Contech Acrylic Bondcrete; The Burke Co. 2.03 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mix for concrete, to produce a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,500 psi, as indicated on Contract Documents. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. B. Proportion mixes by laboratory trial batch, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. D. Admixtures: 1. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content of 5% (±1%) with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.50. E. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement of not less than 3" and not more than 5". City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321313 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2.04 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein specified. No additional water to be added to the batch for material with insufficient slump with approval of Architect/Engineer. 1. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required. When the air temperature is between 85° F and 90° F, reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90° F, reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support paving and imposed loads, free of frost, smooth and properly compacted. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct, and proper drainage has been provided so that water does not stand in the area to receive paving. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify subgrade meets specified moisture, density and composition specified no longer than two days before concrete placement. B. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. C. Notify Architect, Owner, and testing laboratory, minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. D. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the lines and grades for concrete site work items by means of lines and grade stakes. Complete any fine grading required to prepare the subgrade. Maintain the finished subgrade cushions in a satisfactory condition. E. Ensure all irrigation and electrical sleeves are installed prior to concrete placement. 3.03 INSERTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Make provisions for installation of inserts, accessories, anchors, and sleeves. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Forming: Set forms to lines and grades, and brace and secure to withstand wet concrete without deflection or leakage. Stake forms securely in position with joints keyed to prevent relative displacement. Clean and oil forms each time they are used. Refer to SECTION 031100 - CONCRETE FORMING for additional installation requirements. Place concrete in thicknesses scheduled below: 1. Walks: As shown on paving plan; as detailed. 2. Curbs and Gutters: As detailed. 3. Drive Approaches and Drive Pavement as detailed. 4. Miscellaneous: Catch basins and other miscellaneous items of concrete shall be constructed to detail. B. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing to meet the requirements of SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING. Where reinforcement is not specifically detailed, reinforce paving and walks with #4 rebar at 12" o.c. each way. 1. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute’s recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars,” for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports. 2. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. 3. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete-placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321313 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverage for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. C. Concrete: Place concrete to meet the requirements of SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and 304. Deposit concrete so that specified slab thickness will be obtained after vibrating and finishing operations. Minimize handling to prevent honeycombs. Exercise care to prevent disturbance of forms and reinforcing and damage to vapor retarder. Place concrete to lines and levels shown, properly sloped to drain into adjacent yard areas or drainage structures. 2. Hot Weather Placement: ACI 305. 3. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 306. 4. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. 5. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. D. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints around fixed objects within or abutting concrete, and at intervals of not more than 30 ft. o.c. along walks and curbs and max of 90 ft. o.c. along all other paving. 1. Install preformed filler with the top edge approximately 1/4" below the finished concrete surface to leave a neat, straight joint. 2. Joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool. 3. There shall be no connection by reinforcement or keyway across expansion joints. Joints shall be held in alignment with sleeved, smooth dowels. 4. Install expansion joints at all point of curvatures, point of tangency, structuring and point of inflections. E. Scoring: Provide all tooled joints on all sidewalks and flatwork. 1. Saw cut, approaches, and paving using an abrasive or diamond blade. Cut joint width shall be 1/8" and depth shall be 1/4" deep at walks and 1/4 slab thickness at approaches and paving. Cutting of joints must be done as soon as concrete surface is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by the blade (within 4 to 12 hours), and before random shrinkage cracks can form in the concrete slab. a. Tool joint walks at max 5 foot intervals each way. b. Score curbs and gutters at approximately 5 foot intervals. c. Score approaches and paving at max 12 foot intervals each way or as shown. F. Standard Finishing: Strike slabs off true by double screeding to the required level at or below the elevations and grades shown on the drawings. Set edge forms and screed strips accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours. 1. Standard Walks: Float with wood floats to true planes with no coarse aggregate visible. Hand trowel to produce smooth surfaces. Brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a uniformly striated finish. Edge concrete surfaces with a rounded edging tool. 2. Curbs and gutters: Finish the curb and flow lines of gutters with a steel “S” shaped trowel to the contour of the curb and gutter and then cross brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a fine brush finish. 3. Approaches: Screed and float to a monolithic medium float finish and belt with a canvas belt to produce a herringbone texture finish. 4. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. G. Curing: 1. Cure concrete 7 days as specified in SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Coat exposed surfaces with curing compound and protect surfaces from pedestrian and vehicular traffic during the curing period. Damaged areas shall be re-sprayed. 2. Concrete surfaces designated to receive chemical stain must be free of curing compound. Accordingly, finished concrete shall be “water-cured” or shall be completely sandblasted if cured with a curing compound membrane. 3. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by application of curing compound. Provide membrane curing by applying membrane-forming curing compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as water film has disappeared. Apply uniformly in 2-coat continuous operation by power-spray equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Apply second coat City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321313 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 at right angle to first coat. H. Removing Forms: Forms shall remain in place for a least 12 hours after concrete has been placed and finished. Remove forms without damaging the concrete. Bars and heavy tools shall not be used to pry against the concrete in removing the forms. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Grade and Smoothness Tests: 1. Plan Grade: Finished surface of the flatwork shall not vary more than 0.02 ft. above or below the plan grade or elevation. Finished surfaces of abutting pavement and walks shall coincide at their juncture. Where a new pavement or walk abuts an existing surface, transition pavement or walk strip shall be installed. 2. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of the flatwork shall have no abrupt changes or more than 1/8" and shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 12 ft. straight edge more than 1/4" plus or minus tolerance. Flow line of gutters shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 10 ft. straight edge more than 1/8" plus or minus tolerance. 3. Concrete shall be sampled and tested for quality control during the placement of concrete, as follows: a. Slump: ASTM C 143: One test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. b. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens. c. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. Yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any day or for each 5,000 sq. Ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days and the remaining specimen held for future testing, if required. Report test results in writing to the Architect and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of contractor, name of concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day test and 28-day tests. B. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained. Test to determine adequacy of concrete will be by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42. Contractor shall pay for such test conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. C. Concrete shall meet the compressive strength as shown on the plans and specifications regardless of ACI 318. ACI 318 shall have no bearing on pass/fail of all site concrete. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove debris, scraps, surplus materials, tools and equipment from the premises upon completion of the work. Clean concrete droppings from walks and curbs. Leave the graded areas free of debris and rubble. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete under provisions of SECTION 01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 3.08 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Remove and replace damaged concrete as directed by Engineer. B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over ½” diameter, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edge of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE PAVING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321313 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 brush-coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION 321313 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321373 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 32 13 73 - SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sealing and caulking of joints. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 321313 - Concrete Paving 2. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/American Society for Testing and Materials (ANSI/ASTM): 1. ANSI/ASTM D 1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 2. ANSI/ASTM D 1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam). 3. ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds. 4. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent - Release Type Sealants. 5. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing compounds. 6. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 7. ASTM C962 - Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealers. B. Federal Specification (FS): 1. FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type. 2. FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, solvent Release Type. 3. FS TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component. 4. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component. 5. FS TT-S-001543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base. C. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 012300 Alternates and 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, color availability and application instructions. C. Submit two samples 1/4 inch diameter x 4 inches in size illustrating color selections available. D. Submit manufacturer’s certificate under provisions of Section 012300 Alternates and 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by sealant manufacturer. C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. 1.06 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 012300 Alternates and 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. B. Construct one field sample joint, 5 feet long, illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface. C. Locate where directed. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321373 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: No caulking shall be done at temperatures below 40°F. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Furnish to the Owner a written warranty that the caulking shall remain watertight for a period of 2 years from the date of acceptance of the project. Joints which prove defective by leaking, cracking, melting or shrinking of the sealant shall be re-sealed without additional expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Polyurethane (Type 2 Sealant): 1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type I (self-leveling) and ASTM-920. 2. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect. 3. Acceptable products a. Urexpan NR-00, Pecora Corp. b. Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant, Sonneborn-Contech. c. THC 900 (Self leveling) or 901 (low sag), Tremco. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Refer to Section 321313 Concrete Paving for expansion joint filler. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Joint surfaces shall be clean and dry. Remove loose mortar and other material completely with compressed air or by brushing. 1. Joints to be caulked shall be at least 1/4" wide. At any point where the width of the joint is appreciably less, cut or grind out the joint to that width to assure an adequate volume of sealant along the length of the joint. 2. Pack with backing material the voids and recesses around metal frames which are deeper than the depth required for caulking. Leave the proper depth for the sealant. 3. Particular attention shall be paid to the preparation of horizontal joints in war surfaces to be filled with sealant. Adjust joint depth to comply with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations by malleting down the joint filler or filling in with rod stock as may be required. 4. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants, C790 for latex base sealants, and C962 for elastomeric sealants 3.03 APPLICATION A. Priming: prime porous joint surfaces, particularly concrete. Test the primer to make sure it causes no staining of the material on which it is applied. B. Depth of sealant: Seal joints to a depth of approximately 2” the joint width, but never less than 1/4" deep. Follow the sealant manufacturer’s recommendations where possible. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321373 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Force the sealant into joints with enough pressure to expel all air and provide a solid filling. Correct any flowing or sagging before final inspection is made. 2. Where adjacent surfaces permit, use masking tape to obtain straight, even lines. Remove tape immediately after the joints have been sealed. 3. Fill joints flush with adjacent surfaces except where a recessed joint is specifically detailed. Tool beads with a sled runner or similar tool to insure full contact with joint faces. 4. For caulking horizontal joints in wear surfaces, use a gun with a narrow nozzle. Apple the flow type sealant with the nozzle riding along the bottoms so that the sealant is forced up to completely fill the slot without cavities. Provide and use a portable vacuum cleaner to remove loose dirt from the joints just ahead of the caulking gun. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sage. E. Tool joins concave. Sealant shall achieve a firm skin before surface coating is applied. 3.04 CLEANING/REPAIRING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of soiling due to caulking operations. This applicator shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of replacing any material damaged or discolored due to caulking operations. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 3.05 SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Locations specified below for sealant required under this section are general and shall not be considered as affecting the required use of sealing compounds specified under other sections of the specifications. 3.06 SEALANT TYPE APPLICATION A. Horizontal control and expansion joints in concrete paving and at junctures between this material and other adjacent materials. END OF SECTION 321373 (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PARKING BUMPERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321713 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 321713 - PARKING BUMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes wheel stops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PARKING BUMPERS A. Concrete Wheel Stops: Precast, steel-reinforced, air-entrained concrete, 4000-psi minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2 incheshigh by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners, transverse drainage slots on underside, and a minimum of two factory-formed or -drilled vertical holes through wheel stop for anchoring to substrate. 1. Surface Appearance: Free of pockets, sand streaks, honeycombs, and other obvious defects. Corners shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. 2. Mounting Hardware: Galvanized-steel spike or dowel, 1/2-inchdiameter, 10-inch minimum length. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that pavement is in suitable condition to begin installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install wheel stops according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. B. Securely anchor wheel stops to pavement with hardware in each preformed vertical hole in wheel stop as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Recess head of hardware beneath top of wheel stop. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321723 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 32 17 23 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary to paint all parking stripes as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein on concrete or asphalt paving. 1.02 PROTECTION The Contractor shall protect his own work and adjacent surfaces from damage or splatters with suitable coverings. Take every precaution to avoid danger of fire. Remove oily rags, waste, and empty cans from site every night. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Store materials and equipment in an approved area. Store rags, paint, and solvents in closed metal containers located in designated area. Use adequate means and precautions to prevent fire, explosions and other damage caused by paint materials. 1.04 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within the General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.05 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Pavement marking on concrete paving. 1.06 REFERENCES A. Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.) Fed Spec. TT-P-115E Paint, Traffic, Highway, White, and per City requirements, color for fire lanes. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Apply paint when ambient temperature is 50°F or above, and relative humidity is below 85%. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in the layout and striping of parking lots. B. Job Conditions: Do not apply marking paint when weather is foggy or rainy, or ambient or pavement temperatures are below 40°F, nor when such conditions are anticipated during eight hours after application. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with of Section 012300 Alternates and 013323 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Traffic Paint: Fed. Spec. TT-P-115E, Type III alkyd-chlorinated rubber-chlorinated paraffin marking paint. Fire lane stripes shall be per City requirements. Provide Premium Chlorinated Rubber Base Paint as manufactured by Highway Signs & Paint, Inc. Phone (214) 878-9505. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 321723 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Paint Schedule is as follows, see plans for locations and if required: Parking Stall Stripes: Handicap Parking Stripes and Crosswalks: Fire Lane Striping: Lettering on yellow or white stripes: Lettering on red or blue ACR-Stripe (White) ACR-Stripe (White) ACR-Stripe (Red) ACR-Stripe (Black) ACR-Stripe (White) C. Cleaning Solvent: VM & P Naphtha. D. When striping must be removed from existing concrete paving (see Site Plan for possible locations), striping shall be water or sandblasted to expose the concrete beneath. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Applicators: Hand-operated push type marking machine or conventional airless spray equipment with guide lines and templates. 2.03 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be done by experienced, skilled craftsmen. All finishes shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s printed directions. All finishes shall be applied evenly and be free from runs, skips or other defects. B. Do not apply paint during extremely hot weather or when air and/or surface temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit or if rain is imminent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Conditions: Clean and dry free from dirt, loose paint, oil, grease, wax, and other contaminants. B. Concrete Surfaces: Allow concrete to cure a minimum of 90 days prior to application of marking paint. C. Existing Concrete and Asphalt Surfaces: Shall be swept clean of all debris, including grease. D. Equipment Condition: Clean previously used paint and solvent from application equipment, using VM & P Naphtha. E. Paint: Stir contents thoroughly from bottom of container. Do not thin paint. F. Locate markings as indicated on Drawings. Provide qualified technician to supervise equipment and application of markings. Lay out markings using guide lines, templates and forms. G. Allow paving to cure before painting as required by manufacturer of traffic paint. H. Apply primer for all locations to receive paint. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Three (3) coats minimum at the rate of 8.0 mils dry film thickness. B. Fire Lane Striping: Stripe fire lanes as shown on the plans and as required to meet City requirements. C. Directional Striping and Painting: Stripe and paint all directional stripes pavement markings. D. Stripes shall be 4” wide unless shown otherwise. E. Apply striping as shown on the drawings by power spray or other approved method. 3.03 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the work, remove all spatterings, spots and blemishes caused by this work. Remove all extra materials from the job site and leave buildings and grounds in neat, clean and finished condition. END OF SECTION 321723 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ENCLOSED TRACK INDUSTRIAL ALUMINUM CANTILEVER GATE SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 323100 - ENCLOSED TRACK INDUSTRIAL ALUMINUM CANTILEVER GATE SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED The contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and appurtenances necessary for installation of the industrial cantilever gate system defined herein at (City of Denton Fire Station). 1.02 RELATED WORK Section 310000 - Earthwork Sections 031100, 032000, 033000 - Concrete 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The manufacturer shall supply a total industrial ornamental aluminum cantilever gate system of the Ameristar® TransPort II design, (Genesis) style. The system shall include all components (i.e., tracks, uprights, bracing, pickets, hardware, fittings and fasteners) required. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. 1.05 REFERENCES ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss. ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. ASTM F1184 – Industrial & Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates 1.06 SUBMITTAL The manufacturer’s submittal package consisting of gate elevations, hardware details, and installation details, shall be submitted prior to installation. 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism, and theft. PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.01 MANUFACTURER All industrial ornamental aluminum cantilever gates shall conform to the Ameristar® TransPort II gate system, (Genesis) style, manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma. The project gate schedule shall include the following additional information for each cantilever gate included in the project scope: (24’-27’) opening, and (4-inch square) gate posts. For questions, please contact Emily Sullivan at 888-333-3422. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ENCLOSED TRACK INDUSTRIAL ALUMINUM CANTILEVER GATE SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2.02 MATERIAL A. The materials used for cantilever gate framing (i.e., uprights, diagonal braces and pickets or pales) shall be manufactured from ASTM B221 aluminum (designation 6063-T-6) with a yield strength of 25,000 PSI, a tensile strength of 30,000 PSI and a standard mill finish. The TransPort® Fast- Trak™ rails shall be manufactured from ASTM B221 aluminum (designation 6063-T-6) with minimum yield strength of 25,000 PSI, a tensile strength of 30,000 PSI and a standard mill finish. B. Material for diagonal bracing and uprights shall be 2” sq. x ¼” aluminum. The design of the top and bottom enclosed track shall conform to the manufacturers 5” x 2” Fast-Trak system. Material for pickets shall be 1” x 1/8” wall aluminum. C. Internal roller truck assembly shall be self-aligning swivel ball-and-socket type running on four bearing wheels. Internal roller truck assembly shall be affixed to the hanger bracket by means of a 5/8” diameter industrial-grade rod end/center bolt, with a minimum static load rating of 10,000 pounds. Attachment of the center bolt to the truck body shall be by means of a swivel joint to ensure equivalent and consistent loading on all bearing wheels and internal track surfaces throughout the travel of the gate. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Pickets, enclosed track, uprights and diagonal bracing shall be pre-drilled and labeled for easy assembly. All components shall be precut to specified lengths. B. Top and bottom rail extrusions shall be mechanically fastened to vertical uprights and reinforced with diagonal braces, as required by drawing. C. The manufactured components shall be subjected to the Ameristar thermal stratification coating process (high-temperature, in-line, multi-stage, and multi-layer) including, as a minimum, a six- stage pretreatment/wash and an electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The topcoat shall be a “no-mar” TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be (Black). The stratification-coated framework shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 1. Table 1 – Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test). Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 3,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters). Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625” ball). Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60˚ Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta- E color units). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. All new gate installations shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans. B. All hardware shall be installed in accordance with the Transport installation instructions. Transport cantilever gates shall be installed so they comply with current ASTM F2200 & UL325 standards. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ENCLOSED TRACK INDUSTRIAL ALUMINUM CANTILEVER GATE SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323100 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Gate stops shall be installed on each track in a way that conforms to current ASTM F2200 standards. 3.02 GATE INSTALLATION Gate post shall be spaced according to specified gate elevation. Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 48” with a minimum diameter of 12” (Note: In some cases, local restrictions of freezing weather conditions may require a greater depth). The “Earthwork” and “Concrete” sections of this specification shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core-drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended application. 3.03 CLEANING The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts. END OF SECTION 323100 (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE SYSTEM-FUSION WELDED AND RACKABLE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323119 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 323119 - STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE SYSTEM – FUSION WELDED AND RACKABLE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the welded ornamental steel fence system defined herein at City of Denton Fire Station. 1.02 RELATED WORK Section 310000 - Earthwork Sections 031100, 032000, 033000 - Concrete 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The manufacturer shall supply a total fence system of Montage Industrial® Welded and Rackable (ATF – All Terrain Flexibility) Ornamental Steel (Genesis™) design. The system shall include all components (i.e., panels, posts, gates and hardware) required. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. 1.05 REFERENCES  ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.  ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus.  ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.  ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint.  ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus.  ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments.  ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.  ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).  ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.  ASTM F2408 – Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets. 1.06 SUBMITTAL The manufacturer’s literature shall be submitted prior to installation. 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft. 1.08 PRODUCT WARRANTY A. All structural fence components (i.e. rails, pickets, and posts) shall be warranted within specified limitations, by the manufacturer for a period of 20 years from date of original purchase. Warranty shall cover any defects in material finish, including cracking, peeling, chipping, blistering or corroding. B. Reimbursement for labor necessary to restore or replace components that have been found to be defective under the terms of manufactures warranty shall be guaranteed for five (5) years from date of original purchase. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE SYSTEM-FUSION WELDED AND RACKABLE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323119 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 MANUFACTURER The fence system shall conform to Montage Industrial Welded and Rackable (ATF – All Terrain Flexibility) Ornamental Steel, (Genesis) design, (extended picket) bottom rail treatment, (2-Rail) style manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma. For questions, please contact Emily Sullivan at 888-333- 3422. 2.02 MATERIAL A. Steel material for fence panels and posts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (344 MPa) and a minimum zinc (hot-dip galvanized) coating weight of 0.60 oz/ft2 (184 g/m2), Coating Designation G-60. A minimum of 62% of the steel material shall be derived from recycled scrap metal. B. Material for pickets shall be 1” square x 16 Ga. tubing. The rails shall be steel channel, 1.75” x 1. 75” x .105”. Picket holes in the rail shall be spaced 4.715” o.c. For fence systems up to and including 6 feet tall, posts shall be a minimum of 2-1/2” square x 14 Ga. For fence systems 7 feet tall and 8’ tall, posts shall be a minimum of 2-1/2” square x 12 Ga. Gate posts shall meet the minimum requirements of Table 1. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Pickets, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. Rails shall be pre-punched to accept pickets. B. Pickets shall be inserted into the pre-punched holes in the rails and shall be aligned to standard spacing using a specially calibrated alignment fixture. The aligned pickets and rails shall be joined at each picket-to-rail intersection by Ameristar’s proprietary fusion welding process, thus completing the rigid panel assembly (Note: The process produces a virtually seamless, spatter-free good-neighbor appearance, equally attractive from either side of the panel). C. The manufactured panels and posts shall be subjected to an inline electrode position coating (E-Coat) process consisting of a multi-stage pretreatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), followed by a duplex application of an epoxy primer and an acrylic topcoat. The minimum cumulative coating thickness of epoxy and acrylic shall be 2 mils (0.058 mm). The color shall be (Black). The coated panels and posts shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 2 (Note: The requirements in Table 2 meet or exceed the coating performance criteria of ASTM F2408). D. The manufactured fence system shall be capable of meeting the vertical load, horizontal load, and infill performance requirements for Industrial weight fences under ASTM F2408. E. Swing gates shall be fabricated using 1.75” x 14ga Forerunner double channel rail, 2” sq. x 11ga. gate ends, and 1” sq. x 14ga. pickets. Gates that exceed 6’ in width will have a 1.75” sq. x 14ga. intermediate upright. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All picket and rail intersections shall also be joined by welding. Gusset plates will be welded at each upright to rail intersection. Cable kits will be provided for additional trussing for all gates leaves over 6’. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION All new installation shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans. 3.02 FENCE INSTALLATION Fence post shall be spaced according to Table 3, plus or minus ½”. For installations that must be raked to follow sloping grades, the post spacing dimension must be measured along the grade. Fence panels shall be attached to posts with brackets supplied by the manufacturer. Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 36” (Note: In some cases, local restrictions of freezing weather conditions may require a greater depth). The “Earthwork” and “Concrete” sections of this specification shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core- drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended application. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE SYSTEM-FUSION WELDED AND RACKABLE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323119 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.03 FENCE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE When cutting/drilling rails or posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel surfaces; 1) remove all metal shavings from cut area. 2) Apply zinc-rich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry. 3) Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. Failure to seal exposed surfaces per steps 1-3 above will negate warranty. Ameristar spray cans or paint pens shall be used to prime and finish exposed surfaces; it is recommended that paint pens be used to prevent overspray. Use of non-Ameristar parts or components will negate the manufactures’ warranty. 3.04 GATE INSTALLATION Gate posts shall be spaced according to the manufacturers’ gate drawings, dependent on standard out-to-out gate leaf dimensions and gate hardware selected. Type and quantity of gate hinges shall be based on the application; weight, height, and number of gate cycles. The manufacturers’ gate drawings shall identify the necessary gate hardware required for the application. Gate hardware shall be provided by the manufacturer of the gate and shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.05 CLEANING The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts. Table 1 – Minimum Sizes for Montage Industrial Posts Fence Posts Panel Height 2-1/2” x 14 Ga. Up to & Including 6’ Height 2-1/2” x 12 Ga. Over 6’ Up to & Including 8’ Height Gate Leaf Gate Height Up to & Including 4’ Over 4’ Up to & Including 6’ Over 6’ Up to & Including 8’ Up to 4’ 2-1/2” x 12 Ga. 3” x 12 Ga. 3” x 12 Ga. 4’1” to 6’ 3” x 12Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 6’1” to 8’ 3” x 12 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 8’1” to 10’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 10’1” to 12’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 12’1” to 14’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 14’1” to 16’ 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” Table 2 – Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test). Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 1,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters). Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625” ball). Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60˚ Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units). Table 3 – Montage Industrial –Post Spacing By Bracket Type Span For INVINCIBLE® 8’ Nominal (91-1/2” Rail) For CLASSIC, GENESIS, & MAJESTIC 8’ Nominal (92-5/8” Rail) Post Size 2-1/2” 3” 2-1/2” 3” 2-1/2” 3” 2-1/2” 3” 2-1/2” 3” Bracket Type Industrial Flat Mount (BB301)* Industrial Line 2-1/2” (BB319) 3” (BB320) Industrial Universal 2.5” (BB302) 3” (BB303) Industrial Flat Mount (BB301) Industrial Swivel (BB304)* Post Settings 94-1/2” 95” 94-1/2” 95” 96” 96-1/2” 96” 96-1/2” *96” *96-1/2” City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STEEL ORNAMENTAL FENCE SYSTEM-FUSION WELDED AND RACKABLE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323119 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 ± ½” O.C. *Note: When using BB304 swivel brackets on either or both ends of a panel installation, care must be taken to ensure the spacing between post and adjoining pickets meets applicable codes. This will require trimming one or both ends of the panel. When using the BB301 flat mount bracket for Invincible style, rail may need to be drilled to accommodate rail to bracket attachment. END OF SECTION 323119 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 WOOD FENCES AND GATES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323129 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 323129 - WOOD FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Screening framework and accessories. B. Excavation for post bases. C. Concrete anchorage for posts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Wood Rails and Pickets: 1. Screening at Patio Area: Ipe,Brazilian Walnut No. 1 clear grade, smooth finish. 2.2 CONCRETE MIX A. Concrete: ASTM C 94; normal Portland Cement; 2,500 psi at 28 days; 3 inch slump; 3/4 inch maximum sized aggregate. 2.3 COMPONENTS (Patio wood screening) A. Ipe Brazilian Walnut supplied by AdvantageLumber.com 1-877-232-3915 or approved equal. 1. Nominal 4 x 4 posts 2. Nominal 1 x 4 slats B. Pre-drill all screw holes. Attach with #8 x 2” type 305 stainless steel screws. C. End Grain Sealant – Advantage Trim & Lumber Co. End Grain Sealant (stain all wood prior to installation) D. Stain – Ipe Oil Hardwood Deck Finish, color as selected from manufacturer’s full available range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide screening height as indicated on Drawings. B. Space posts at intervals as indicated on Drawings. C. Set posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above and 6 inches below finish grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff. D. Footing depth below finish grade: 36 inches. Excavate deeper as required for adequate support in soft and loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FENCES AND VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323132 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 32 31 32 FENCES AND VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATORS DoorKing Model 9150 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a complete microprocessor based vehicular slide gate operator system, with a solid-state board to control all functions of the slide gate operator, as described herein and shown on the plans. Include all necessary control boards, power supplies, loop detectors, connectors, and accessories for a complete operational system. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. All equipment and work specified in this section shall comply, with all the General Conditions of the specifications, contract documents, and drawings as indicated. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Parking control / gate operator systems contractor shall coordinate all work with other contractors and trades where necessary. B. All necessary conduit, raceways and pull boxes shall be installed by the electrical contractor. C. Installation of the vehicular slide gate operator system shall be coordinated with the installation of other parking control related systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation shall comply with all applicable codes. B. All equipment shall be new, in current production, and the standard products of a manufacturer of vehicular gate operator equipment. C. Manufacturer shall guarantee availability of parts, for a minimum of seven (7) years from date of shipment. D. If required, manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate features, functions and operating characteristics to the Owner. E. System shall be installed by a factory authorized contractor, with technicians specifically trained in this system. F. On-site maintenance and repair service shall be available locally and within four (4) hours of notification for emergency condition. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Vehicular Slide Gate Operator shall be in compliance with Underwriter Laboratories Inc. (UL) Standard for Safety - Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators and Systems, UL 325 Fourth Edition; and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Standard for Safety - Tests for Safety- Related Controls Employing Solid-State Devices, UL 991 Second Edition. B. Vehicular Slide Gate Operator shall be tested for compliance to UL 325 and UL 991 and shall be LISTED by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). C. Vehicular slide gate fabrication, construction and installation shall conform to ASTM F2200; Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Provisions: Comply with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS. B. Shall include an equipment list, data sheet(s), system description, block diagrams on equipment to be furnished and electrical wiring diagrams for installation. C. Shall include all data necessary to evaluate design, quality and configuration of proposed equipment and system(s). City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FENCES AND VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323132 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.07 WARRANTY A. Products shall include a factory warranty that equipment is free from defects in design, material, manufacturing and operation. Factory warranty period shall be for five (5) years parts and workmanship; 60-months from date of shipment. B. Manufacturer shall not be responsible for improper use, handling, or installation of the product. C. Installing contractor shall guarantee the equipment, wire and installation for 12-months from date of acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The system as described herein is based on the 9150 series vehicular slide gate operator system, manufactured by DoorKing, Inc., Inglewood, California. The vehicular slide gate system specified meets requirements of the specifications and shall be considered as the acceptable Base Bid. B. Substitutions must meet requirements of Prior Approval, as outlined in the contract documents. Substitutions that meet Prior Approval requirements must be listed as alternates by addendum, and shall be shown separately on the bid forms. Consideration will be based on ability to comply with all aspects of the specifications, the desired functional operation, quality, reliability, design, size, and appearance of the equipment, and the support capabilities of the manufacturer. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Slide Gate Operator: 1. The slide gate operator shall use a microprocessor based solid-state control board that controls all functions of the slide gate operator. Operator shall be rated for continuous duty for use in residential, commercial and industrial applications. 2. Primary reduction system shall employ an adjustable clutch and power transfer shall be provided by single cog belt drive train. 3. Operator shall employ magnetic sensing to set open and close limit adjustment. Mechanical type limit switches shall not be allowed. 4. Operator shall automatically set both open and close limit adjustments upon power-up and activation in the open direction. Operator shall automatically sense for any gate coasting to insure true limit settings. 5. Pulling medium shall provide a positive mechanical connection to the gate system. Friction driven rail type pulling mediums shall not be allowed. Roller chain pulling medium shall be minimum size #40. 6. A positive dead bolt shall activate only when the gate is forced open, to reduce solenoid lock wear and failure. 7. Operator shall be capable of being mounted at the front, center or rear of the gate system, shall be designed for either left or right hand mount and shall be designed for pad or post mounting. 8. Operator frame shall use 12-gauge G90 galvanized steel to avoid rusting and shall be painted charcoal gray. 9. Operator shall have two 115 VAC convenience outlets available for accessory transformer power and shall have a built-in lockable power disconnect and reset switch. B. Control Circuit: 1. Control board shall have connections for optional Gate Tracker board. Gate tracker shall record operator cycles (x100), input errors, loop detector errors, obstruction hits, and power up events. Record shall be time and date stamped. 2. Control board shall allow a stop or a stop and reverse function (settable) from a safety related input. 3. Control board shall have two ports for plug in of vehicular loop detectors, (DoorKing, Models 9409 or 9410). 4. A dry set of relay contacts shall be available for external use, and shall have four programmable functions. 5. A special input shall allow the gate to be partially opened. 6. A timer override function shall cause an opening gate to stop and then reverse direction when the reverse loop(s) or reverse input is clear even if the gate has not reached the full open position, to help reduce tailgating. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FENCES AND VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323132 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 7. Control board shall have separate inputs for external contact and non-contact entrapment protection devices. 8. Functions will be user programmable by DIP-switches located on the control board. C. Fail-Safe Operation 1. To prioritize safety over security, operator shall assume a fail-safe mode in the event of a power loss or if an entrapment is sensed (entrapment alarm activated). a. Operator shall revert to a fail-safe mode allowing the gate to be pushed open without any special knowledge or use of any special cranks, keys or other devices. D. Entrapment Prevention 1. Non-contact sensors, or contact sensors, or combination thereof, shall be utilized to prevent persons from becoming entrapped in the gate system. 2. Warning signs shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and UL 325 guidelines. E. Convenience Open Drive System: 1. A battery powered convenience open DC drive system shall be available as a factory installed option. 2. The DC drive system shall monitor the primary power source and shall power the gate open upon command, or automatically, if power to the operator is interrupted. 3. When power is restored, the DC drive system shall automatically set the operator to return to normal operation and disengage. 4. The system shall provide a trickle charge to the batteries to maintain nominal battery power levels. a. LIMITATIONS: This convenience open DC drive system is not intended to operate the vehicular gate operator continuously during a power interruption. Its sole purpose is to provide a convenient method to open the gate should a power interruption occur. For applications that require continuous back-up power, refer to the DoorKing Model 2000 Power Inverter System. F. Electronic Reverse 1. The vehicular gate operator shall be equipped with an inherent electronic obstruction sensing system. The electronic sensing system shall automatically cause the gate operator to stop and reverse if an obstruction is sensed during the open or close cycle. 2. For enhanced safety, the control circuit shall check the obstruction sensing system circuit prior to the start of each cycle of operation. Should the control circuit detect a fault in the obstruction sensing system, the motor shall not be allowed to start. G. A complete operational system shall be provided. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Model 9150 Vehicular Slide Gate Operator 1. Single cog belt drive train with adjustable clutch. 2. Automatic limit / coast magnetic adjustment system. 3. Solid-state control circuit and motor control. 5. Partial open limit feature. 6. UL Class of Operation: I, II, III and IV. 7. #40 roller chain. 8. 1/2 HP a. 1000 Lb maximum gate weight, 800 Lb if convenience open option is installed. b. 30-ft maximum gate length, approximately 1-ft/sec gate speed. c. Operates at 115 VAC; 230 or 460 volt operation is available utilizing factory installed step down transformer. d. Typical current draw is 5.4 amps at 115 V; 2.7 amps at 230 V; 1.35 amps at 460 V. e. Dimensions: 24 inches high, 15 inches wide, 16.5 inches deep. 9. 1 HP a. 1500 Lb maximum gate weight, 1300 Lb if convenience open option is installed. b. 45-ft maximum gate length, approximately 1-ft/sec. c. Operates at 115 VAC; 230 or 460 volt operation is available utilizing factory installed step down transformer. d. Typical current draw is 9.7 amps at 115 V; 4.9 amps at 230 V; 2.5 amps at 460 V. e. Dimensions: 27.5 inches high, 28.5 inches wide, 16.5 inches deep. B. Entrapment Prevention 1. Non-contact sensors (photo-cells). a. P/N 8080-010 Infrared thru-beam, 165 foot sensing distance. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FENCES AND VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323132 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 b. P/N 8080-011 Photo-reflective beam, 30 foot sensing distance. 2. Contact sensors a. P/N 8080-015 Single-sided sensitivity with mounting channel. b. P/N 8080-020 Three-sided sensitivity with mounting channel. c. P/N 8080-021 Sensor designed to mount on 2 inch round post. d. P/N 8080-022 Sensor designed to mount on 2 inch square post. C. Options 1. Vehicle Loop Detectors a. P/N 9410-010 Single channel detector. b. P/N 9409-010 Two channel detector. 2. Environmental Control a. P/N 1601-154 Heater kit. 3. Drive Chain a. P/N 2600-444 Nickel plated drive chain, #40. 4. Post Mount Base Plate a. P/N 2600-495 Use to post mount the 9150 operator (mounting post are not included). 5. Gate Tracker: The vehicular slide gate operator shall have output for connection to Gate Tracker control board (P/N 2351-010). Gate Tracker shall maintain a detailed electronic record of cycles, input errors, loop detector errors, obstruction hits, and each time power is applied to the operator. This record shall be time and date stamped and shall be analyzed using the DoorKing Remote Account Manager for Windows software. a. DoorKing 1830 series telephone entry or access control system is required for Gate Tracker operations. 6. Convenience open (battery backup) drive system. 7. Opticom Gate Opener a. Model 500632 Gate Opener Panel (powered off the gate operator and mounted within the enclosure) b. Model 762 Phase Selector (plugs into 500632 Gate Opener Panel) c. Model 138 cable d. Model 721 optical detector D. A complete operational system shall be provided. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Shall be installed by qualified technicians who have been factory trained and certified. B. Model 9150 shall be post or pad mounted, as required. 1. Post mount (Requires DoorKing P/N 2600-495 base plate). a. Mounting posts shall be welded to base plate and mounted in concrete, firmly secured, plumb and level. 2. Pad mount. a. Mounted directly to a concrete pad, firmly secured, plumb and level. C. Wiring shall be uniform and in accordance with national electric codes and manufacturers instructions. D. All splices shall be in easily accessible junction boxes or on terminal boards. E. All cable runs in all junction boxes shall be tagged and identified. F. Coordinate all work with other effected trades and contractors. 3.02 SYSTEM INITIALIZING AND PROGRAMMING A. System shall be turned on and adjustment made to meet requirements of specifications and on-site conditions. B. System shall function as specified. 3.03 SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES A. System shall be completely tested to assure that all components and accessories are hooked-up and in working order. B. System shall be pre-tested by contractor and certified to function in accordance with plans and specifications. C. System shall be tested in presence of owner's representative. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FENCES AND VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 323132 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.04 OWNER INSTRUCTIONS A. Installation contractor shall conduct up to (1) hour of instruction in use and operation of the system to designated owner representatives, within (30) days of acceptance. B. Installation contractor shall conduct up to (1) hour of technical training, in troubleshooting and service of the system, to designated owner representatives within (90) days of system acceptance. 3.05 MANUALS AND DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) copies of standard factory prepared operation, installation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall include typical wiring diagrams. B. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) copies of any risers, layouts, and special wiring diagrams showing any changes to standard drawings, if required on project. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. The manufacturer recommends periodic maintenance at three month intervals as described in the installation and maintenance manual. B. External reversing devices should be checked at least once a month. END OF SECTION 323132 (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 328400 – LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS Applicable requirements of the General Conditions and other sections of the Project Manual apply to this section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide a complete and operable landscape irrigation system including all equipment not specifically specified herein or on drawings to meet requirements of all governing authorities. B. Provide a complete and operating lawn sprinkler installation as shown on the plans, including, but not limited to, the following items: 1. Tap, water meter, and double check valve. 2. Pipe and fittings. 3. Sprinkler heads. 4. Control system and connection to electrical supply. 5. Trenching, installation of system, connection to water source, testing, and backfilling. 6. Permits and Impact Fees (if required). 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 32 92 00 - Turf Establishment (Hydromulch) B. Section 32 93 00 - Landscaping C. Perform work in accordance with requirements of conditions of the contract and Division 01 - General Requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations. D. Conform to requirements of reference information listed below except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified in Contract Documents. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Specifications and Test Methods specifically referenced in this Section. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Wires and Cables. 1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS ASTM Sections: D2241 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) D2464 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Threaded, Schedule 40 D2466 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Socket Type, Schedule 40 D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings STANDARD RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR: D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings 1.5 GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIFICALLY FOR LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION A. The Contractor will flag the location of all heads, electric valves, quick coupler valves, gate valves, automatic controllers, backflow preventers, etc., prior to construction for the Landscape Architect or Owner's approval. The Contractor shall report to the Landscape Architect any deviations between the irrigation plan, specifications, and the site. Failure to do so prior to the installation of the equipment (which subsequently requires replacement or relocation of the equipment) will result in the work being done at the Contractor's expense. B. All local, municipal, and state laws, ordinances, codes and regulations relating to, or governing of, any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications and will be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor must carry sufficient insurance coverage, and must be active in irrigation installation for a minimum of 5 years. C. Any permits needed for construction of the work included in this contract, which is required by any legally constituted authority having jurisdiction, shall be obtained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall pay for all costs in connection with any inspections or examinations required by these authorities. The Landscape Architect or Owner's Representative will be notified when these inspections are required. Any necessary work needed to be done by the Contractor as a result of these inspections will be performed at the Contractor's expense. Copies of all permits and inspection reports shall be forwarded to the Owner's Representative. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.6 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE A. Material and workmanship shall be fully guaranteed for one year after the Date of Substantial Completion; replacement of defective material or repair of work shall be done at no expense to the Owner during the first year, except for repairs or replacements necessitated by damage of any kind not of the Contractor's making. Any reimbursement for repairs must have prior approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Raising and lowering heads to proper height, adjusting arc and radius, filling trenches that have settled, packing the earth firmly around the heads and quick couplers will all be considered part of warranty work and done at no charge to the Owner for one year after acceptance of system. C. The Contractor will extend to the Owner all of the warranties and guarantees provided by the manufacturer on all equipment used. Printed copies of such warranties and guarantees will be provided the Owner with final payment. D. Contractor will provide four (4) copies of service and maintenance manuals on all major items in the installation along with the request for final payment. E. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of three (3) hours of operating instructions to the Owner's designated representative. The Owner's representative will be notified at least one week in advance with a date for such instruction. Demonstrate the proper operation of each and every head, each electric valve, and each controller. F. Maintenance and guarantee as stated above does not include alterations necessitated by re-landscaping, addition of trees, regrading, or the addition and changes in walks, walls, driveways, or the like. Further, maintenance does not include trimming grass around heads or any service required due to lack of the Owner's maintenance of lawns and plants. It is also expressly understood that the guarantee and maintenance, after final acceptance, does not cover any mechanical damage (breakage) or any repairs or service needed for causes beyond the control of this Contractor. G. Provide schedule indicating length of time each valve is required to be open to provide determined amount of water. H. Expenses due to vandalism or damage before substantial completion shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS Sprinkler material shall be as specified. The sprinkler system has been designed according to the operating characteristics of the specified equipment. Therefore, no substitutions of equipment will be allowed except under provisions of Section 01630. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS The Contractor is to provide record drawings on reproducible mylars as provided by the Owner. Information to be included will be the dimensional location of major components from permanent fixed points, such as buildings, walls, corners, sidewalks, curbs, etc. At least two actual measurement dimensions will be shown with a minimum of 75 degrees between the lines of measurement to each major item of the system, such as electric valves, quick couplers, main line shut-off valves, or wire splice boxes, etc. Single dimensions will be shown at appropriate intervals from permanent features to the main line piping and to the wire routing. Dimensions are to be recorded on the drawings so that maintenance personnel can locate and service these items. Since pipe routing shown on the plan is schematic by nature, actual routing shall be clearly indicated on the record drawing. 1.9 DEVIATION FROM PLANS The Irrigation Contractor is cautioned to defend the hydraulics of this system by following the plans and specifications carefully. Particular attention should be given to operating controllers in alternate sequence, by not operating the system until flow controls or section valves have been adjusted to proper operating pressure, by not installing additional tees or elbows unless approved by the Landscape Architect or Owner's representative by following the manufacturer's recommendations for installation of all items, etc. Prior to start of construction, the Contractor will confirm the static water pressure in writing to the Owner's representative. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions stated elsewhere. B. Include piping layout to water source, list of fittings to be used, control system, and wiring diagrams and data. C. Provide one sprinkler head of each type, complete with housing. Accepted samples may be used in work. D. Controller charts - Do not prepare charts until record (as-built) drawings have been approved by Landscape Architect. 1. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. a. Chart may be same size reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting inside controller door without folding drawing. If photo reduction prints are required keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility. b. Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as-built" system, showing area covered by that controller valve, using a City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 distinctly different pastel color for each zone. Highlight heads, lateral piping, and control valve. 2. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color for each zone. Highlight heads, lateral piping, and control valves. 3. Following review of charts by Landscape Architect, hermetically seal each chart between two layers of 20 mm thick clear plastic. 4. Charts shall be completed and approved by Landscape Architect prior to final completion walk-through of irrigation system. 5. Attach approved chart to inside of each controller door. E. Operation Manual: Submit 3 sets of operation manuals to Consultant for approval prior to scheduling final completion walk-through. Manual to include the following in 1"-3" ring binder: 1. Index sheet stating project name, and listing company, address, phone number and contact person of Owner, Consultant and Contractor, including Primary Sub-Contractors. 2. Written instructions for operation and maintenance of pumping equipment, fertilizer/chemical injectors (if applicable). 3. Manufacturer Technical Manual for controllers. 4. Manufacturer cut sheets for all heads, control valves, quick coupling valves, gate valves, controllers, drip irrigation components, and valve boxes. 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS A. Installer Qualifications - Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrate ability in the installation of irrigation system(s) of specific type(s) in a neat, orderly, and responsible manner in accordance with recognized standards of workmanship. To demonstrate ability and experience necessary for this project, and financial stability, submit, prior to contract award the following: 1. List of 3 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this project. Description of projects shall include: a. Name of project b. Location c. Owner d. Brief description of work and project budget City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Special Requirements: 1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping, backflow preventer(s), and related Work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumber(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours prior to start of installation. 2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, refilling, recompaction, and repair of finish grade treatment. 3. Coordination with Other Contracts - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section. 4. Damage to Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner. C. Pre-Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a conference to review in detail quality control and construction requirements for equipment, materials, and systems used to perform the Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties required to be in attendance shall be notified no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor shall notify qualified representatives of each party concerned with that portion of Work to attend conference, including but not limited to Landscape Architect, Contractor's superintendent, and installer. 1. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all parties in attendance within five days of conference. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Deliver, unload, store, and handle materials, packaging, bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, waterproof condition in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packaging containers prominently displaying manufacturer name, volume, quantity, contents, instructions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement weather, snow, ice, temperature extremes, fire, or jobsite damage. A. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing of PVC pipe. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, shall be removed and replaced with new piping. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.13 JOBSITE CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Property: 1. Preserve and protect all trees, plants, monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner. All injury to living plants shall be repaired by Owner, and all costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor. 2. Protect buildings, walks, walls, and other property from damage. Flag and barricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, or other building material surfaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition. B. Existing Trees (if required): 1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any and all evergreens or low branching deciduous materials shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs or branches. 2. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2 inch and larger roots occur, shall be done by hand. Roots 2 inches or larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe or conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in diameter, wall of trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots. Roots 2 inches and larger in diameter shall be painted with two coats of "Tree Seal." Trenches adjacent to trees shall be closed within 24 hours, and when this is not possible, side of trench adjacent to tree shall be kept shaded with moistened burlap or canvas. C. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines: 1. Request proper utility company to stake exact location (including depth) of all underground electric, gas, or telephone lines. Take whatever precautions are necessary to protect these underground lines from damage. If damage does occur, all damage shall be repaired by Contractor, and all costs of such repairs shall be paid by Contractor unless other arrangements have been made. D. Replacement of Paving and Curb - Where trenches and lines cross existing roadways, paths, curbing, etc., damage to these shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to original condition. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. "Sprinkler Mains" are that portion of piping from water source to operating valves. This portion of the piping is under constant pressure. B. "Lateral Piping" is that portion of the piping from operating valves to the sprinkler heads. This portion of the piping is under pressure during operation of the system. C. "Quick Coupling Valve Lines" are considered a part of the sprinkler main. 2.2 GENERAL PIPING A. Pressure Supply Line (from point of connection through backflow prevention unit) - Type 'K' Hard Copper. B. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream of backflow prevention units) - Schedule 40 PVC (1" - 2-1/2"). C. Non-Pressure Lines - Class 200 PVC BE. D. Drip Tubing - Agriculture Products, Inc. - Standard IPS flexible vinyl pipe. E. Emitter Tubing - by emitter manufacturer. 2.3 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Pipe - Type K, hard tempered. B. Fittings - Wrought copper, solder joint type. C. Joints - Soldered with solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, and 24% cadmium and solidus at 1125 F and liquids at 1145 F. 2.4 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Brass Pipe - 85% red brass, ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe. B. Fittings - Medium brass, screwed 125-pound class. 2.5 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 9 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 Polyvinyl chloride pipe (hereinafter referred to as PVC pipe) shall have been manufactured in accordance with the Product Standards as follows: A. Product Standard PS-22-70 shall apply and be the governing authority as applicable to main line piping and shall be SDR-21 (Class 200) specification. B. Product Standard PS 22-70 shall apply and be the governing authority, as applicable to PVC lateral piping, shall be per SDR-21 (Class 200) specification. 2 1/2" and smaller main line and lateral line piping will be solvent-weld joints. C. Marking and Identification: All PVC pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the following information: manufacturer's name, pipe size, type of pipe and material, SDR number, Commercial Standard Number and NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) Seal. 2.6 PIPE FITTINGS A. 2 1/2" and smaller pipefittings shall be PVC Schedule 40, as manufactured by the LASCO COMPANY, or equal. B. All PVC fittings shall be of the same material as the PVC pipe specified and shall be compatible with the PVC pipe furnished. C. Only solvent recommended by the manufacturer of the PVC pipe and the manufacturer of the PVC fittings shall be used. 2.7 LOW PRESSURE/VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Drip Tubing - Manufactured of flexible vinyl chloride compound conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 4, P14 and ASTM D3350 for PE 122111C. B. Fittings - Type and make recommended by tubing manufacturer. C. Drip Valve Assembly - Type and size shown on Drawings. 1. Wye Stainer - Plastic construction with 120 mesh nylon screen and 1/2 inch blowout assembly. Pepco "Y" Filter. 2. Control Valve - 2 way, solenoid pilot operated type made of synthetic, non-corrosive material; diaphragm activated and slow closing. Include freely pivoted seat seal; retained (mounted) without attachment to diaphragm. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 10 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Emitters - O1-PC series, single port, pressure compensating, press on type. 2.8 QUICK COUPLING VALVES Brass two-piece body designed for working pressure of 150 psi; operable with quick coupler. Equip coupler with locking rubber cover. #44 LVC manufactured by Rainbird or approved equal. 2.9 VALVE BOXES A. Gate Valves, Drip Line Blowout Stubs, Quick Coupling Valves, and Wire Stubs - Carson #910-12 or approved equal. B. 3/4 inch through 2 inch Control Valves - Carson #1419B-13B or approved equal. C. Drip Valve Assemblies - Carson #1419B-13B or approved equal. D. Control Wiring Splices - Carson #910-12 or approved equal. 2.10 ELECTRICAL CONTROL WIRING A. Low Voltage: 1. Electrical Control Wire - AWG UF UL approved No. direct burial copper wire for control wire and No. 12 for common wire - or larger if required to operate system as designed. 2. Wire Colors: a. Control Wires - Red b. Common Wires - White c. Spare Wires - Black (labeled at terminators) 3. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wire paths of different controllers cross each other, both common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Landscape Architect. 4. Control wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M direct bury slice, Rainbird Pentite connectors, or similar dry splice method. B. High Voltage - Type required by local codes and ordinances, of proper size to accommodate needs of equipment serviced. ALL WIRE SPLICES SHALL BE IN VALVE BOXES, AND NO DIRECTLY BURIED OR UNDERGROUND SPLICES WILL BE ACCEPTED. 2.11 EXPANSION COILS City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 11 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 Expansion coils, which are to consist of approximately 10 wraps of wire around 1" pipe, will be provided on each wire approximately every 100 feet. Wires are to be bundled and taped together every 10 feet. Provide expansion coil at each electric valve inside the valve box. 2.12 MAIN LINE SHUT-OFF VALVES All main line shut-off valves 2 1/2" and smaller shall be bronze bodied, bronze fitted gate valves with threaded connections and a 150# W.O.G. rating. Valve stems shall be equipped with a heavy cast bronze wheel handle. NIBCO #T113 or approved equal. 2.13 DRAIN VALVES (if applicable) A. All mainline drain shall be installed as per the detail on the plan using a bronze bodied globe valve with a wheel handle. NIBCO #T211 or approved equal. B. Automatic drains shall be brass bodied, spring-loaded valves that open with less than 3PSI. Automatic drains shall be located after the manual drain valves. 2.14 SPRINKLER HEADS As indicated on Drawings. Fabricated riser units in accordance with details on Drawings - with riser nipples of same size as riser opening in sprinkler body. 2.15 SLEEVES A. All sleeve piping shall be Class 200 PVC with solvent weld joints. Sleeves shall extend at least 2'-0" past the edge of pavement. B. Bores, if necessary, shall be completed by a commercial boring company approved by the Landscape Architect and/or Owner's representative. C. Bore holes, if necessary, are to be made with a minimum 12" clearance between the top of the sleeve piping and the bottom of the concrete paving. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 12 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Before installation is started, the Contractor shall place a stake where each sprinkler head, quick coupler valve, and electric valves are to be located in accordance with the plans. The staking shall be approved by the Landscape Architect or Owner's representative before the installation is started. Should a discrepancy in the plans become apparent at this time, such discrepancy shall be pointed out to the Landscape Architect or Owner's representative. Work must not proceed until the Owner's representative approves any design changes made necessary by such discrepancy. Should such changes create extra cost to the Contractor, approval for extra compensation shall be obtained in writing from the Owner's representative before commencing work. Should such changes create a savings in cost to the Contractor, a written reduction in the contract price shall be approved by the Owner's representative in writing before commencing work. B. The Contractor is cautioned to provide adequate protection to those using the site. Provide barricades as necessary. C. All material shall be installed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's installation specifications which shall be considered a supplement to these specifications. D. Piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Route piping to avoid plants and structures. Provide full and complete coverage. E. Review layout requirements with other effected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves (under paving) to accommodate system. 3.2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND PROTECTION OF SHRUBBERY, GENERAL A. All excavation in this contract shall be unclassified and is to include earth, loose rock, rock, or any combination thereof, in wet or dry state. B. All trenches shall be backfilled with the material removed, except that no rock or debris, which can damage the pipe, shall be used as backfill. In this case, the special backfill specifications shall take precedence over this general specification. (See 3.7) C. All trench backfill shall be water settled and compacted in order to prevent after-settling. Use only the minimum amount of water necessary to settle ditches. Flooding of ditches without compaction will not be permitted. D. All trenches and adjoining areas shall be hand-raked to finish grade. Remove rocks, excess dirt, and debris from the site. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 13 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 E. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concreting and paving operations, to accommodate piping and wiring. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95% Modified Proctor Density within 2% of optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D1557. F. Boring will be permitted only where pipe must pass under obstruction(s) which cannot be removed. In backfilling bore, final density of backfill shall match that of surrounding soil. It is acceptable to use sleeves of suitable diameter installed first by jacking or boring, and pipe laid through sleeves. Observe same precautions as though pipe were installed in open trench. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION Note: All pipe is to be inspected prior to the installation. Pay particular attention to mechanical damage resulting from shipment and storage and to defects that occur during extrusion. Such defective pipe shall be removed from the site at the end of each workday. The Owner's representative shall have the option to accept or reject pipe that does not appear to be of good and uniform quality. A. Main Line Piping: Pipe shall be installed in a 4" wide (minimum) trench with a minimum of 18" of cover. B. Lateral Piping: All PVC lateral line piping shall be solvent-weld type. Install in 4-inch wide (minimum) trench deep enough to allow for installation of sprinkler heads and valves, but in no case with less than 12 inches of cover for rotary and/or spray zone laterals. C. PVC Pipe Installation: 1. All lumber, rubbish and large rocks (over 2" diameter) shall be removed from the trenches. Pipe shall have a firm, uniform bearing for the entire length of each pipeline to prevent uneven settlement. Wedging or blocking of pipe will not be permitted. Pad the trenches with sand if the trench is rocky. See 3.7 2. Never lay PVC pipe when there is water in the trench. Never lay PVC pipe when the temperature is 32 degrees F. or below. Pipe shall be snaked from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction. 3. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from inside of the pipe before welding and piping and shall be kept clean by approved means during and after laying of pipe. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 14 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Backfilling of Trenches: Because of the expansion and contraction of PVC pipe, backfilling shall be done in the cool part of the day. If this is not possible or practical, water settling of trenches is necessary before and during backfill. Selected fill dirt or sand shall be used if soil condition is rocky or contains large clods. 5. After pipe installation is completed, flush system completely to remove any and all debris from piping prior to installation of adapters and sprinkler heads. 6. Replace and/or repair plant material, structures, and installations by others, damaged by work of this Section. D. PVC Pipe and Fitting Assembly: Contractor shall use only the solvent supplied and recommended by the manufacturer of the PVC pipe to be installed on this project site to make any solvent-welded joints. The pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust and moisture before applying solvent. PVC pipe and fittings shall be cleaned with PVC primer or sanded with plumber's cloth before solvent welding. The Contractor shall make solvent welds with a non-synthetic bristly brush in the following sequence: 1. Apply an even coat of solvent to the outside of the pipe. Then, apply solvent to the inside of the pipe, making sure that coated area on the pipe is equal to the depth of the fitting socket. 2. Insert pipe quickly into the fitting and turn the pipe approximately 1/4 turn to distribute the solvent and remove air bubbles. Check all tees and ells for correct position; then hold joint for approximately 15 seconds so that pipe does not push out from the fitting. Wipe off any excess solvent with a clean rag. 3. Allow at least fifteen (15) minutes set-up time for each welded joint before moving. 4. On PVC to metal connection, the Contractor shall work the metal connections first. A non-hardening pipe dope such as Permatex #2, or equal, shall be used on all threaded PVC to metal joints, and light wrench pressure is all that should be used. Teflon tape or a liquid Teflon paste can also be used on all threaded PVC to metal joints, and light wrench pressure is all that should be used. 5. Where threaded PVC connections are required, use threaded PVC adapters into which the pipe may be welded. Teflon tape will be used on threads. E. Drip Tubing: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 15 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Make all fitting connections per manufacturer recommendations. 2. Use only manufacturer provided or recommended hole punch when making penetrations in drip tubing for insert fittings. Use of any other hole punch shall be cause for immediate removal and replacement of all installed drip tubing. 3. Install drip line blowout stubs at all dead ends of drip tubing. 3.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS/PEDESTALS A. Automatic controllers shall be supplied in accordance with the materials list and shall be located as shown on the plan. B. Owner will provide 120 volt, 20-amp service to within 5 ft. of controller location(s). Contractor shall provide service into the controllers as part of this contract. C. All electric work shall conform to local codes, ordinance, and authorities having jurisdiction. All high voltage electrical work shall be performed by a licensed electrician. 3.5 ELECTRIC VALVES A. Electric remote valves shall be supplied in accordance with the specifications and sized according to the plan. 1. Valves shall be installed in a level position. Valves shall be installed deep enough so that there will be at least 10" of cover over the valve. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the valve supplied shall become a part of these specifications. 3. A plastic valve box (with extension if necessary) shall be installed over the valve with the stem centered in the box to enable flow adjustment to be easily operated. A green plastic top shall be installed on the valve box flush with the final grade. 3.6 QUICK VALVE ASSEMBLIES Install quick couplers on double swing-joint assemblies of Schedule 80 PVC pipe; flush to grade. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more than 45 and no less than 10 . Install quick coupling valves as detailed. 3.7 DRIP VALVE ASSEMBLIES City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 16 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 Install drip valve assembly as detailed. 3.8 DRIP EMITTERS Stake all surface emitters as detailed and staked with acceptable tubing stakes. 3.9 HEAD INSTALLATION A. IMPORTANT: Backfill shall be specially tamped under the head flange and around the head for a distance of one foot by a suitable means, after trench backfill has dried from water settling. The purpose is to eliminate loose heads in the ground that would move when run over with mowers thereby creating a possible source of damage. B. CAUTION: Refer to Guarantee and Maintenance (1.6) regarding importance of backfill. C. ALL SPRINKLERS 1. All sprinklers shall be located 4" from back of curb and checked for proper operation and proper alignment for direction of throw. 2. After system is thoroughly flushed and ready for operation, each section of sprinklers must be adjusted to control pressure at heads. Use the following method, one section per time: Remove last head on section and install a temporary riser above grade. Install tee with pressure gauge attached on top and reinstall head with nipple onto tee. Correct operating pressure at last head of each section - 40 lbs. for rotary heads and 20 to 25 lbs. for spray heads. 3. The system shall be flushed free of all dirt and debris prior to the installation of the heads. D. ROTARY HEADS 1. All rotary heads shall be installed 4" from back of vehicular curb using a full swing joint with schedule 40 PVC threaded fittings and Schedule 80 PVC nipples. The top of the head shall be no more than 1/4" above finished grade. Adjust part-circle arcs as required to complete coverage. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 17 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 E. SECTION VALVE WIRING 1. Section valve wiring shall be supplied in accordance with the specifications. Valve wires shall be bundled with plastic electrical tape every 10 feet. Wiring shall be inspected during installation to avoid any wiring with faulty insulation. All wire splices shall be made with mechanical connectors, which are then waterproofed, and a 10" valve box is to be installed over all splices. F. QUICK COUPLER VALVES 1. Provide quick coupler valves (whether shown on plans or not) so that no limit of proposed landscaping cannot be reached with a maximum 100’ long hose. 3.10 SPECIAL BACKFILL SPECIFICATIONS A. If rock in encountered, the Contractor will remove the rock to a depth 2" below the bottom of the pipe. A minimum of 2" of sand bedding will then be installed completely around the pipe. The next 4" of trench will then be backfilled with a select backfill free from rocks and debris and water settled. The remaining backfill will then be completed with the material remaining on site. No rocks larger than 2" in diameter will be allowed in this remaining backfill material. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flushing - After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush piping system under full head of water pressure from dead end fittings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers after flushing. B. Testing - Conduct tests in presence of Owner. Arrange for presence of Owner 48 hours in advance of testing. Supply force pump and all other test equipment. 1. After backfilling, and installation of all control valves, fill pressure supply line with water, and pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI, whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours. 2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no leakage or loss of pressure is evident during test period. 3. Leaks - Detect and repair leaks. 4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of tests. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 18 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours. C. Walk Through for Substantial Completion: 1. Arrange for Owner's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Entire system shall be completely installed and operational prior to scheduling of walk-through. 3. Operate each zone in its entirety for Owner at time of walk-through and open all valve boxes if directed. 4. Generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion. 5. Furnish all materials and perform all Work required to correct all inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from Contract Documents. 6. During walk-through, expose all drip emitters under operations for observation by Owner to demonstrate that they are performing and installed as designed; prior to placing of all mulch material. Schedule separate walk-through if necessary. D. Walk-Through for Final Completion: 1. Arrange for Owner's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Show evidence to Owner that Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before Final Completion walk-through is scheduled. 3. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Owner at time of walk-through to ensure correction of all incomplete items. 4. Items deemed not acceptable by Owner shall be reworked to complete satisfaction of Owner. 5. If after request to Owner for walk-through for Final Completion of irrigation system, Owner finds items during walk-through which have not been properly adjusted, reworked, or replaced as indicated on list of uncompleted items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk-throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Contractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Owner to conduct and document further walk-throughs as deemed necessary to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 328400- 19 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.12 ADJUSTING Upon completion of installation, "fine-tune" entire system by regulating valves, adjusting patterns and break-up arms, and setting pressure reducing valves at proper pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure ±7%. A. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper and more adequate coverage, make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no additional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling. B. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise designated. C. Areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.13 CLEANING Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of Work. Dispose of, off- site at no additional cost to Owner, all trash or debris generated by installation of irrigation system. 3.14 FINAL CLEAN-UP Upon completion of the work and before acceptance and final payment will be made, the Contractor shall clean and remove from the site of the work, his surplus and discarded materials, temporary structures and discarded materials and debris of every kind. He shall leave the site of the work in a neat and orderly condition equal to that which originally existed. Surplus and waste materials removed from the site of the work shall be disposed of at locations satisfactory to the Owner's representative. 3.15 SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system, including adjusting of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for demonstration. (See 1.6/Guarantee and Maintenance) END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FINISH GRADING FOR LANDSCAPE AREAS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329119 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 32 91 19 FINISH GRADING FOR LANDSCAPE AREAS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Perform topsoil grading work as shown and specified. The work includes: 1. Topsoil Placement: 2. Site fine grading (raking and bed preparation of new shrub, groundcover, and grass areas) of topsoil. 3. Removing debris and waste materials. B. Related Work. 1. Section 32 93 00 - Landscaping 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with applicable city, state and federal requirements regarding materials and methods of work and disposal of waste materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit topsoil material sample (on-site stockpile and/or imported topsoil) for Landscape Architect's approval. B. Provide and pay for material testing. Testing agency shall be acceptable by the Owner. Provide the following data: 1. Test representative material sample proposed for use. a. pH factor (range of 6 to 8). b. Mechanical analysis (Plastic Index of 7 to 20. Minimum laboratory dry weight at optimum moisture content of 110 lbs./cu. ft.). c. Percentage of organic content. d. Recommendation on type and quantity of additives required to establish satisfactory pH factor and supply of nutrients to bring nutrients to satisfactory level for planting. 1.4 WORK SCHEDULE A. General: Work continuously on the site with the exception of bad weather delays until the work is complete. B. The Contractor shall be ready to tentatively begin work within seven (7) working days of notice to proceed from Owner. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FINISH GRADING FOR LANDSCAPE AREAS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329119 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 A. Protect existing utilities, pavement and other facilities from damage caused by earthwork operations. Verify utility locations prior to start up of project. B. Locate, protect, and maintain benchmarks, monuments, control points and project engineering reference points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil (on-site stockpile and/or imported): Fertile, friable, natural topsoil of sandy loam character, without admixture of subsoil material, obtained from a well-drained, arable site, reasonably free from clay clods, stones, plants, roots and other foreign materials. 1. Provide imported topsoil free of substances harmful to the plants which will be grown in the soil. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Contractor to rough grade site prior to landscaping with ±1" tolerance according to the following as applicable: • Hydromulched Grassed areas = 1/10" of finished grade • Solid Sod Grassed areas = 1" of finished grade • Shrub and groundcover beds = -6" of finished grade (6” topsoil to be placed 6” below finished grade) B. Examine proposed rough grading area and conditions of installation prior to landscape construction. Do not start grading work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. C. Notify the Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions. D. Establish extent of grading by area and elevation. 3.2 FINE GRADING A. Fine grade topsoil eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive drainage. B. Remove stones, roots, weeds, and debris while spreading topsoil materials. Rake surface clean of stones 1" or larger in any dimension and all debris. Provide surfaces suitable for soil preparation provided under lawn and planting work. C. Leave all graded areas approximately 1/2" below finished paved surfaces at edges only. 3.3 MAINTENANCE A. Protect graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded and damaged areas. B. Where completed areas are disturbed by construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 FINISH GRADING FOR LANDSCAPE AREAS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329119 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.4 WASTE MATERIALS Haul from site and legally dispose of waste materials, including excess topsoil used for this project, rock, trash and debris. 3.5 CLEAN UP Upon completion of filling and grading work, remove equipment and tools. Leave site clear, clean, free of debris and ready for landscaping work. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329200 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 329200 - TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION Work Included - This work involves various operations necessary to provide and establish a turf-bed in accordance with the plans and specification contained herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 32 91 19: Finish Grading for Landscape Areas B. Section 32 93 00: Landscaping 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen - Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the proper materials and methods for their installation, and who shall direct all work performed under this section. B. Equipment - Hydromulching equipment shall be suitable for the project and in good repair. C. Inspection - Provide for inspection by Landscape Architect of materials used. Materials shall be delivered to project in standard sealed container. Keep empty packages to verify quantities used, then dispose as directed. D. Standards - All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal, State and County laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. E. Materials Lists - Within 10 days after award of the Contract, submit a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this section, demonstrating complete conformance with the requirements specified. F. Certificates - Deliver all certificates to the Landscape Architect. G. Deliver Receipts and Invoices - All delivery receipts and copies of invoices for materials used for this work shall be subject to checking by the Owner or his representative and shall be subsequently delivered to the office of the Owner. H. Samples and Producers' Specifications - Various samples, certificates, and specifications of seed, fertilizer, sand, compost, other soil amendments, and other materials shall be submitted for approval as required by subsequent sections of this specification. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver and Storage 1. Deliver all items to the job site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Landscape Architect's inspection. 2. Use all means necessary to protect materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329200 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Immediately remove from the site all materials that do not comply with the specified requirements. B. Replacements - In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Bermudagrass hydromulch shall not be applied prior to May 15 nor after August 15 nor at any time the soil temperature is less than 70EF. Contractor shall guarantee a full stand of grass. B. Contractor shall initially provide a grassing of perennial Ryegrass as Base Bid. C. As an alternate, Contractor shall provide a bid price to return Spring 1998, scalp the Ryegrass, and overseed with Bermuda to establish a permanent turfgrass. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. Coverage will be complete; areas of ungerminated seed 12" square and larger will be rehydromulched. B. Repair any damage made during reshooting immediately. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Ryegrass Seed - “SOUTHWEST EAGLE BLEND” as supplied by Lesco Industries (phone:972-424-8007) composed of 34% “Legacy II” 34% “Linedrive”, and 29% “Buccaneer” or approved equal. B. Bermudagrass Seed - Turfgrass seed shall be "Cynodon dactylon" (Common Bermudagrass). The seed shall be harvested within one (1) year prior to planting, free of Johnsongrass, field bind weed, dodder seed, and free of other weed seed to the limits allowable under the Federal Seed Act and applicable seed laws. The seed shall not be a mixture. The seed shall be hulled, extra fancy grade, treated with fungicide, and have a germination and purity that will produce, after allowance for Federal Seed Act tolerances, a pure live seed content not less than 85%. Seed shall be labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations. 1. Certificate Submittal - Prior to planting, provide the Landscape Architect with the State Certificate stating analysis of purity and germination of seed. 2.2 MULCH Conwed Regular wood fiber mulch, or approved equal. 2.3 FERTILIZER Mississippi Chemical 18-18-5, water soluble, or an approved equal. Delivered to the site in bags labeled with the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. If stored at the site, protect fertilizer from the elements at all times. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329200 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2.4 HERBICIDE Monsanto Roundup applied at 3 ounces active ingredient per 1,000 square feet or other approved post-emergent herbicide. 2.5 Apply Fiber Tack with hydromulch on all slopes and berms at the rate of one and one-half (1- 1/2) pounds of Fiber Tack per one thousand (1,000) square feet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Contractor shall inspect existing automatic irrigation systems with Owner prior to commencing the work. Any problems with the system shall be noted by the Landscape Architect and repaired by Contractor prior to proceeding with the turfgrass operations. C. After soil preparation and prior to planting, Contractor shall re-inspect irrigation system to ensure system is operating properly in every respect. Contractor shall raise, lower and make all head adjustments as necessary prior to planting. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Herbicide - Two weeks prior to planting, the area to be hydromulched is to be treated with post-emergent herbicide at a rate of 3 ounces active ingredient per 1,000 square feet of planted area. B. Contractor shall inspect treated areas with Landscape Architect for approval prior to tillage and planting. C. Any treated areas which are deemed unacceptable shall be re-treated by Contractor at no additional expense to Owner. D. Tillage - Tillage shall be accomplished to loosen the soil, destroy existing vegetation, and prepare an acceptable seed bed. All areas shall be tilled to a depth of two inches. E. Cleaning - Soil shall be further prepared by the removal of debris, building materials, rubbish, weeds, and stones larger than one and one-half (1-1/2") inches in diameter. F. Fine Grading - After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be leveled, fine graded, and drug with a weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the elimination of ruts, depressions, humps, and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil preparation step to be completed before the commencement of fertilizing and planting. G. Rock Removal - During the soil preparation process, a "Rock Pick" or "Rock Rake" shall be used to gather surface stones as small as one and one-half (1-1/2) inch in diameter. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of collected materials. 3.3 HYDROMULCHING A. Application City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329200 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Typical mix for 800-gallon tank with coverage not to exceed 6,000 s.f. shall consist of 15 lbs. of grass seed, 360 lbs. of Conwed mulch, and 150 lbs. of 18-18-5 fertilizer. Add tackifier at manufacturer's recommended rate. 2. Apply in a uniform manner over all areas to be hydromulched. B. Protection 1. No heavy equipment shall be moved over the planted lawn areas unless the soil is again prepared, graded, leveled, and replanted. It will be the responsibility of this Contractor to protect all paving surfaces, curbs, utilities, plant materials, and any other existing improvements from damage. Any damages shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner. Contractor will also locate and stake all irrigation heads, valve risers, etc., prior to beginning any soil preparation work. C. Establishment and Acceptance 1. Regardless of unseasonable climatic conditions and other adverse conditions affecting planting operations and the growth of the turfgrass, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to establish a uniform stand of turfgrass as herein specified. When adverse conditions such as drought, cold weather, high winds, excessive precipitation, or other factors prevail to such an extent that satisfactory results are unlikely, the Owner may, at his own discretion, stop any phase of work until conditions change to favor the establishment of turfgrass. 2. Uniform Stand of Turfgrass - A uniform stand with complete coverage of the specified grass shall be defined as not less than one hundred fifty (150) growing plants per square foot for seeded areas. Growing plants shall be defined as healthy grass plants of two blades or more at least 1-1/2 inches tall. 3. Block Sodding (if applicable) - At locations shown on plans or where directed, soft blocks shall be carefully placed on the prepared areas. When sufficiently dry, the sodded area shall be rolled or tamped to form a thoroughly compacted, solid mat. Any voids left in the block sodding shall be filled with additional sod and tamped. Surfaces of block sod, which in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, may slide due to the height and slope of the surface or nature of the soil, shall upon direction of the Landscape Architect driven through the sod blocks into firm earth sufficiently close to hold the block sod firmly in place. 3.4 POST-PLANTING MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each portion of grass area is planted. All planted areas will be protected and maintained by watering, weed control, and replanting as necessary after initial planting and for as much longer as necessary to establish a UNIFORM STAND WITH COMPLETE COVERAGE. Upon receipt of Substantial Completion from the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall maintain the turf (including regular mowing and edging) for a period of 90 days. B. Watering - Use the automatic irrigation system to apply at least one-half (1/2") inch of water over the entire planted area every three days. If necessary, watering equipment (other than the automatic irrigation system) required to establish and maintain a uniform stand of grass will be furnished by the Contractor. Contractor shall water thoroughly and infrequently once grass is established to encourage deep root growth. C. Mowing of Grass: 1. It is anticipated that a minimum of one (1) mowing will occur before the grass areas are accepted by the Owner. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TURF ESTABLISHMENT (HYDROMULCH) Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329200 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Once grass is established the planted area shall be mowed at least once a week during the growing season. Grass shall be mowed to a height of one (1") inch. Mowing during dormant season will be done as necessary (if Contractor has not received Final Acceptance). D. Weed Control - Keep seeded areas free of weeds by "pulling" weeds until grass has been established. 3.7 EROSION CONTROL A. Throughout the project and the maintenance period for turfgrass, it is the Contractor's responsibility to maintain the topsoil in place at specified grades. Topsoil and turfgrass losses due to erosion will be replaced by the Contractor until establishment and acceptance is achieved. 3.8 CLEANUP A. Contractor shall remove any excess material or debris brought onto the site or unearthed as a result of his turfgrass operations. 3.9 GUARANTEE A. Contractor shall guarantee all materials used for this work to be the type, quality, and quantity specified. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 32 93 00 LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS The requirements of the "General Conditions of the Agreement" shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to provide all landscape planting, and related items complete in place, as shown on the Drawings and specified, herein. A. Work Specified in this Section: Rock excavation (for tree planting) if required, topsoil placement (if required), fine grading, soil preparation, planting, clean-up, and all other miscellaneous items related to landscaping as shown on the drawings. B. Rock excavation for trees is included as part of work. Contractor shall examine Geotechnical Report to determine what, if any, trees may need rock excavation. If rock is encountered, Contractor to follow procedure for “Tree Hole Water Retention” as outlined under Planting Installation in this section. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 32 91 19: Finish Grading for Landscape Areas B. Section 32 84 00: Landscape Irrigation System 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. “Grades and Standards” latest edition. Texas Association of Nurserymen Specifications. Austin, Texas 78704. 2. Standardized Plant Names, 1942 Edition, American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature. 3. American Standards for Nursery Stock, Latest Edition, American Association of Nurserymen. B. Source Quality Control: 1. Submit documentation to Landscape Architect within ten (10) days after award of Contract that all plant material to be supplied by Landscape Contractor is available. Landscape Contractor to submit pay application for stored materials confirming plant materials are being held at the grower’s. Any and all substitutions due to unavailability must be requested in writing prior to confirmation of ordering. All materials shall be subject to inspection by Landscape Architect at any time after confirmation of ordering. 2. Plants to be supplied by Landscape Contractor shall be subject to inspection and approval of Landscape Architect at place of growth or upon delivery for City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 conformity to Specifications. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during progress of the work. Inspection and tagging of plant material by the Landscape Architect is for design intent only and does not constitute the Landscape Architect's approval of the plant materials in regards to their health and vigor. The health and vigor of the plant material is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Submit written request for inspection of plant material at place of growth to Landscape Architect. Written request shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. Landscape Architect reserves the right to refuse inspection at this time if, in their judgment, a sufficient quantity of plants is not available for inspection. 3. All plants approved at the nursery by the Landscape Architect shall be tagged with numbered self-locking tags approved by the Landscape Architect and furnished by the contractor. Trees delivered to the site without these tags or with broken tags shall be rejected. 4. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted unless authorized in writing by Landscape Architect. If proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract Price. Such proof shall be substantiated and submitted in writing to Owner at least twenty (20) days prior to start of Work under this Section. These provisions shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility of obtaining specified materials in advance if special growing conditions or other arrangements must be made in order to supply specified materials. 5. Plants identified as “specimen” shall be approved and tagged at place of growth by Landscape Architect. Photographs shall be submitted for preliminary approval. 6. The Contractor shall submit specifications of any item being used on site upon the request of the Landscape Architect. 7. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of three (3) photographs of each tree species specified on drawings if Landscape Architect does not tag trees at nursery. Each of the three photographs should be of a different tree within that species. Photographs should be representative of remainder of trees in that species to be planted. Approval of photographs does not constitute approval of all trees to be planted. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver packaged materials to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trademark, and conformance to State Law. 2. Deliver all plants with legible identification labels. a. Label trees, evergreens, bundles of containers of like shrubs, or groundcover plants. b. State correct plant name and size indicated on plant list. c. Use durable waterproof labels with water-resistant ink, which will remain legible for at least 60 days. City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Protect plant material during and after delivery to prevent damage to root ball or desiccation of leaves. B. Storage: 1. Store plant material in shade and protect from weather. 2. Storage at the site is allowed, however, Contractor accepts full responsibility for damage, theft, or vandalism. 3. Any plant material balled or burlapped, not installed within 24 hours of delivery shall be healed in until such time as it is installed. 4. Maintain and protect plant material not to be planted within four (4) hours in a healthy, vigorous condition. C. Handling: The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading and storing of plant materials. Plant materials that have been damaged in any way will be discarded and if installed, shall be replaced with undamaged materials at the Contractor's expense. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted practice. B. Scheduling: Install trees, shrubs, and liner stock plant material before grassing is commenced. C. Landscape Contractor shall note that rock may be encountered on some areas of the site. Rock excavation shall be included as part of bid. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the proper materials and methods for their installation, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. 1.8 SAMPLES AND TESTS Landscape Architect reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by Landscape Architect. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site at Contractor's expense. Cost of testing of materials not meeting Specifications shall be paid by Contractor. 1.9 PLANT GUARANTEE A. All trees, shrubs, vines, and groundcovers will be guaranteed for a twelve (12) month period after Final Acceptance (including trees supplied by Owner). The Contractor will replace all dead or defective materials upon notification (weather permitting) with plants of the same kind and size as those originally planted. Plants, including trees, which have partially died so that shape, size, or symmetry has been damaged, shall be considered subject to replacement, and the opinion of the Landscape Architect will be final. At the direction of the Landscape Architect, plants may be replaced at the start of City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 the next planting or digging season, but in such cases, Contractor will remove dead plants within two (2) working days. B. Contractor to make monthly visits to the site and submit a written statement as to his opinion of maintenance and items in need of correction that the contractor, in his opinion, feels if uncorrected would void warranty conditions. Reports shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect by the last working day of the month. C. All replacement work (including materials, labor and equipment) will be done at no cost to the Owner. Any damage, such as ruts in lawn or bed areas, that occurs when Contractor makes replacements, will be repaired immediately by the Contractor. D. The guarantee will not apply where plants die after Final Acceptance because of injury by storms, drowning, drought, hail, freeze, insects, disease, mechanical injury by humans or machines, and theft. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be of standard, approved and first-grade quality and shall be in prime condition when installed and accepted. Any commercially processed or packaged material shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened container bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Contractor shall supply Landscape Architect with a sample of all supplied materials accompanied by analytical data from an approved laboratory source illustrating compliance or bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. B. Product Manufacturer's name(s) and/or model numbers are used herein to set a standard of quality and are not intended to be a restraint of trade or prevent submittals of other manufacturer's products of equal quality. C. Soil Amendment: 1. Compost Mix: "A Professional Bedding Soil" as produced by Living Earth Technologies, Inc., 1808 W. Northwest Highway, Dallas, Texas (phone: 214/869-4332) or “Natural T. L. Compost” as produced by Soil Building Systems, Inc. 1770 “Y” Street, Dallas, Texas (phone: 972-831-8181), or approved equal. D. Tree Backfill Fertilizer: 13.13.13 analysis bulk fertilizer. E. Shrub, Groundcover, and Seasonal Color Fertilizer: Provide commercial balanced slow release fertilizer, delivered to the site in bags labeled with the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. If stored on the site, protect fertilizer from the elements at all times. Osmocote or approved equal. F. Tree, Shrub, and Groundcover Planting Tablets: a. Shall be slow-released type (such as Agriform or approved equal) with potential acidity of not more than 5% by weight containing the following percentages of nutrients by weight: City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 20% nitrogen 10% phosphoric acid 5% potash G. Plant Material: 1. Plant names indicated, comply with "Standardized Plant Names" as adopted by the latest edition of the American Joint Committee of Horticultural Nomenclature. Names of varieties not listed conform generally with names accepted by the nursery trade. Provide stock true to botanical name and legibly tagged. 2. Plant material shall meet and/or exceed grades and standards set forth by the Texas Association of Nurserymen. All plants shall have a normal habit of growth and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous and free of insect infestations, plant diseases, sunscalds, fresh abrasions of the bark, excessive abrasions, or other objectionable disfigurements. Tree trunks shall be sturdy and have well "hardened" systems and vigorous and fibrous root systems which are not root or pot-bound. In the event of disagreement as to condition of root system, the root conditions of the plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will be determined by removal of earth from the roots of not less than two plants or more than two percent of the total number of plants of each species or variety where container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than two plants of each species or the variety from each source will be inspected. In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples. Any plants rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as samples and will be provided at the expense of the Contractor. 3. Trees, which have damaged or crooked leaders, or multiple leaders, unless specified, will be rejected. Trees with abrasions of the bark, sun scalds, disfiguring knots will be rejected. Trees with low forking will be rejected unless specifically approved by Landscape Architect. 4. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to main body of plant and not branch tip to tip. Caliper measurement shall be taken at a point on the trunk six (6”) inches above the crown at natural grade of trees up to four (4”) inches in caliper and at a point twelve (12”) inches above the crown at natural grade for trees over four (4”) inches in caliper. The measurements specified are the measurements specified and possess a normal balance between height and spread. 5. The size of the plants will correspond with that normally expected for species and variety of commercially available nursery stock or as specified on Drawings. The minimum acceptable size of all plants measured before pruning with the branches in normal position, shall conform with the measurements, if any, specified on the drawings in the list of plants to be furnished. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the Landscape Architect, but the use of larger plants will make no change in Contract price. If the use of larger plants is approved, the ball of earth, container size, or spread of roots for each plant will be increased proportionately. 6. Provide "specimen" plants with a special height, shape, or character of growth. Tag specimen trees or shrubs at the source of supply. Plants may be inspected by the Landscape Architect and reviewed at the place of growth, for compliance City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 with specification requirement for quality, size, and variety. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection upon delivery at the site or during the progress of the work. 7. Field-selected or Nursery Grown Balled and Burlapped Tree Stock (B&B): Dig balled and burlapped plants with, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Balled and Burlapped trees shall have a root ball size of ten (10) times the caliper up to 4” caliper and eight (8) times the caliper above 4” caliper. If a tree is of multi-trunk variety, the caliper of the tree is the size of the largest trunk plus 1/2 of all the other trunks combined. Cracked or mushroomed balls are not acceptable. Selectively remove 1/2 to 2/3 of twig growth. 8. Container-grown Stock (General): Grown in a container for sufficient length of time for the root system to have developed to hold the soil together, firm and whole. a. Container stock shall have been grown continuously in the containers, and in the container in which delivered, for at least six (6) months, but not over two (2) years. Container stock shall not be pruned before delivery. b. No plants shall be loose in the container. c. Container stock shall not be pot bound. d. Stock shall not have cracked or broken balls when removed from the container. 9. Container-grown Tree Stock: Grown in a container from seedling stage and complies with Paragraph 2.1 - G-6, Container-grown Stock requirements. 10. Containerized Tree Stock: Grown in a container for not less than one (1) year and complies with Paragraph 2.1 - G-6, Container-grown Stock requirements. 11. Plants planted in rows shall be matched in form, height and overall character. 12. Shrubs and small plants shall meet the requirements for spread and height indicated in the plant list. a. The measurements for height shall be taken from the ground level to the average height of the top of the plant and not the longest branch. b. Single stemmed or thin plants will not be accepted. (1) Side branches shall be generous, well-twigged, and the plant as a whole well-bushed to the ground. c. Plants shall be in a moist, vigorous condition, free from dead wood, bruises, or other root or branch injuries. 13. Pruning: At no time shall trees or plant materials be pruned, trimmed or topped prior to delivery and any alteration of their shape shall be conducted only with the approval and when in the presence of the Landscape Architect. 14. All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified, shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected and immediately removed from the site of the work and replaced with new plants at the Contractor's expense. The plants shall be of the species, City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 variety, size and conditions specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. Under no conditions will there be any substitutions of plants or sizes listed on the accompanying plans, except with the express consent of the Landscape Architect. H. Tree Paint: Morrison Tree Seal, Cabort Tree Paint, or equal. I. Water: Furnished by Landscape Contractor; transport as required. J. Mulch Topdressing: Shall be shredded, fine textured, pinebark mulch. Minimum 2" layer spread uniformly. K. Steel Edging and Stakes: 1/8" x 4" Ryerson 'Estate' edging, as manufactured by Joseph Ryerson Co., Inc., Houston, Texas (phone 713-675-6111), or approved equal. Used as designated on drawings only. L. Soil Saver/Jute Mesh (if required): Heavy weight (green) jute mesh as manufactured by Jim Walls Company, 12820 Hillcrest Road, Dallas, Texas 75230, or approved equal. Install on all slopes, groundcover or shrub bed slopes greater than 3:1 slope. M. Guying and Staking Materials: 1. Metal "T" Posts: 6' length minimum metal stakes used for fencing. Painted green. Minimum two per tree in north/south axis. 2. Guying Hardware: a. Wire: Pliable and galvanized at the following sizes: Ornamental Trees 16 gauge Shade Trees 14 gauge b. Hose: 1/2" new rubber hose (black). c. Turnbuckles: Galvanized or dip-painted, size as required. Turnbuckle openings shall be at least 3". N. Soil Separator: “Trivera Spunbound” as manufactured by Contech Construction Products or approved equal. O. Gravel Mulch (if applicable): 3/4" - 1-1/2" crushed granite (gray / pink color). Install 3" layer over layer of polypropylene filter fabric. Provide sample of gravel mulch and filter fabric for Landscape Architect's approval. P. Other Materials: All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Obtain Landscape Architect's certification that final grades to +0.10' have been established prior to commencing planting operations. Provide for inclusion of all amendments, settling, etc. Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for shaping all planting areas as indicated on Plans or as directed by Landscape Architect. B. Inspect trees, shrubs and groundcover plant material for injury, insect infestation and trees and shrubs for improper pruning. C. Do not begin planting of trees until deficiencies are corrected or plants replaced. 3.2 PLANTING PREPARATION A. Soil Preparation for Groundcover, Shrub, and Seasonal Color Beds: 1. Excavate existing soil, if necessary, and add to shrub, groundcover, and seasonal color areas the following: 4” layer of Compost Mix 14-14-14 slow release fertilizer (Osmacote) at a rate of 5 lbs. / 100 s.f. 2. Spread materials uniformly and cultivate thoroughly by means of a mechanical tiller. Till to a minimum depth of 8". 3. Pocket planting of shrub, groundcover, and seasonal color is not allowed. B. Final Grades: 1. Minor modifications to grade may be required to establish the final grade. 2. Finish grading shall ensure proper drainage of the site as determined on Drawings. 3. All areas shall be graded so that the final grades will be 1" below adjacent paved areas, curbs, valve boxes, edging, clean-outs, drains, manholes, etc., or as indicated on Plans. 4. At time of planting, the top 6" of all areas to be planted shall be free of stones, stumps, or other deleterious matter 1" in diameter or larger, and shall be free from all wire, plaster, or similar objects that would be a hindrance to planting or maintenance. C. Disposal of Excess Soil: Disposal of any unacceptable or excess soil shall be the sole responsibility of the Landscape Contractor. Excess soil may be spoiled on-site per direction of Owner. 3.3 PLANTING INSTALLATION A. General: City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 9 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally accepted practice, as approved by the Landscape Architect. 2. Only as many plants as can be planted and watered on that same day shall be distributed in a planting area. 3. Containers shall be opened and plants shall be removed in such a manner that the ball of earth surrounding the roots is not broken and they shall be planted and watered as herein specified immediately after removal from the containers. Containers shall not be opened prior to placing the plants in the planting area. B. Layout of Major Plantings: Locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted shall be marked on the ground by the Contractor before any plant pits are dug. All such locations shall be approved by the Landscape Architect. If underground construction or utility line is encountered in the excavation of planting areas, other locations for planting may be selected by the Landscape Architect. Layout shall be accomplished by flagged grade stakes indicating plant names and specified container size on each stake. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to confirm with the Landscape Architect's superintendent and governing agencies the location and depth of all underground utilities, and obstructions. C. Excavation: 1. Excavation for planting shall include the stripping and stacking of all acceptable topsoil encountered within the areas to be excavated for trenches, tree holes, plant pits and planting beds. 2. Excess soil generated from the planting holes and not used as backfill, or in establishing the final grades may be spoiled on-site per direction of Owner. 3. Protect all areas from excessive compaction when trucking plants or other material to the planting site. 4. Tree and shrub pits shall be excavated to allow the root ball to set on undisturbed soil and excavated to the following diameters: Plant Size Pit Diameter Up to 5 gallon 14" greater than container root ball diameter 5 gallon container 24” greater than and greater root ball diameter (including trees) 5. All excavated holes shall have vertical sides with roughened surfaces. 6. All holes for trees and large shrubs shall be tested for water retention prior to tree or shrub installation. After hole is excavated, it is to be filled with water to the top of the excavation. If, after 24 hours, the hole still holds water, the Landscape Contractor shall excavate an additional 6" from the bottom of hole. The Landscape Contractor shall then install 6" of native washed gravel covered on the top (and up a minimum of 12" on the sides of the hole) with filter fabric. The Landscape Contractor shall also install a capped 3" diameter PVC sump which will City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 10 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 extend from near the bottom of the rock layer to 3" above the proposed finish grade so the hole can be evacuated through mechanical means. D. Planting Trees: 1. Container Removal: a. Remove tree from plastic container or box carefully so container can be re- used. b. Do not injure root ball. 2. Center tree in pit. 3. Face plants with fullest growth into prevailing wind. 4. Set plant plumb and hold rigidly in position until soil has been tamped firmly around ball. 5. Tree Pit Backfill: a. Tree backfill should be composed of 5 parts existing of soil excavated from the hole to one part Soil Amendment, thoroughly mixed with 5 lbs. per cubic yard tree backfill fertilizer. Tree backfill to be mechanically mixed prior to backfill operations. 6. Set tree in upright position in the center of the hole and compact the backfill mixture around the ball or roots. Thoroughly water each plant after backfilling. After planting trees not in beds, surround the pits with a 3" height berm. 7. Plant Tablets: a. After the water has completely drained from the plant pit, planting tablets shall be placed in the top 3" of the plant pit as indicated below: • Four tablets per every foot of rootball diameter per tree. b. Planting tablets shall be set with each plant on the top of the rootball while the plants are still in their containers so the required number of tablets to be used in each hole can be easily verified by the Landscape Architect. 8. Pruning: Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches or to limb-up trees as directed by the Landscape Architect. Pruning may not be done prior to delivery of plants. Cuts over 3/4" in diameter shall be painted with tree paint. 9. Guying and Staking Removal: At no charge to the Owner, the Contractor shall return to the site at the end of the one-year guarantee period and remove all guying and/or staking materials. E. Planting Shrubs: 1. Container Removal: a. Cut cans on two sides with an acceptable can cutter. Do not cut cans with spade or ax. City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 11 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 b. Do not injure root system. 2. Center plant in pit or trench. 3. Face plants with fullest growth into prevailing wind. 4. Set plant plumb and hold rigidly in position until soil has been tamped firmly around ball or roots. 5. Fill holes with backfill composed of 50% soil taken from the hole and 50% Soil Amendment, thoroughly mixed. 6. Set plant in upright position in the center of the hole and compact the backfill mixture around the ball or roots. Thoroughly water each plant after backfilling. After shrubs not in beds, surround the pits with a 3" height berm. 7. Plant Tablets: a. After the water has completely drained from plant pit, planting tablets shall be placed in the top 3" of the plant pit as indicated below: • One tablet per one-gallon container and two-gallon container • Two tablets per five-gallon container b. Planting tablets shall be set with each tablet on the top of the rootball while the plants are still in their containers so the required number of tablets to be used in each hole can be easily verified by the Landscape Architect. 8. Pruning: Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches. Pruning may not be done prior to delivery of plants. Cuts over 3/4" in diameter shall be painted with tree paint. F. Planting Groundcover: 1. Space the plants evenly as indicated on the Drawings, staggering. 2. After planting is completed, cover the bed uniformly with a minimum 2" layer of mulch topdressing. 3. Thoroughly water entire planting bed. 3.4 CLEAN-UP A. After all planting operations have been completed, remove all trash, excess soil, empty plant containers and rubbish from the property. All scars, ruts or other marks in the ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a neat and orderly condition throughout the site. Contractor shall pick up all trash resulting from this work no less frequently than each Friday before leaving the site, once a week, and/or the last working day of each week. All trash shall be removed completely from the site. B. The Contractor shall leave the site area broom-clean and shall wash down all paved areas within the Contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition. 3.5 MAINTENANCE City of Denton Fire Station No.4 LANDSCAPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 329300 - 12 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 A. Maintain the trees, shrubs and groundcovers until Final Completion and Acceptance of the entire project. B. Maintenance shall include pruning, cultivating, weeding, watering, and application of appropriate insecticides and fungicides necessary to maintain plant free of insects and disease. 1. Re-set settled plants to proper grade and position. Restore planting saucer and adjacent material and remove deal material. 2. Tighten and repair guy wires and stakes as required. 3. Correct defective work as soon as possible after deficiencies become apparent and weather and season permit. 4. Deep-water trees, plants, and groundcover beds within the first 24 hours of initial planting, and not less than twice per week until final acceptance. 3.6 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE A. When observations are conducted by someone other than the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall show evidence in writing of when and by whom these observations were made. B. No site visits shall commence without all items noted in previous Observation Reports either completed or remedied unless such compliance has been waived by the Owner and/or Landscape Architect. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 334100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 334100 – STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Section Includes: Furnishing high density corrugated and corrugated smooth lined Polyethylene storm sewer tube and fittings for gravity flow sewers, including all clearing and grubbing, excavation, sheetings, shoring, dewatering, pipe laying, jointing. backfilling, and any other work that is required or necessary to complete the installation as shown on the plans and as specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. This item shall govern for the furnishing and installing of all High Density Corrugated Polyethylene (HDPE) Smooth Lined Pipe and / or materials for constructing of culverts, side road pipes, storm sewers, stubs, and all related connections and fittings, all of which shall conform to ASTM F 2306, latest edition. The pipes shall be of the sizes, types, and dimensions shown on the plans, and contained in this specification. In addition, it shall include all connections and joints to new or existing pipes, storm sewer manholes, inlets, headwalls, and other appurtenances as may be required to complete the work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall furnish an affidavit that the tubing, specials, fittings, and appurtenances furnished comply with all provisions of this and the ASTM specifications as shown herein. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 310000 - Earthwork B. Section 312333 - Trenching and Backfilling PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the plans or herein, thermoplastic pipe and joint fittings shall conform to the following: A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Corrugated and Smooth Lined Pipe & Fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with requirements of ASTM F 2306, latest edition. Type S: This pipe shall have a full circular cross section, with an outer corrugated pipe wall and a smooth inner wall. B. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Corrugated and Smooth Lined Pipe shall be manufactured from virgin PE compounds which conform with the requirements of cell class 335400C as defined and described in ASTM D 3350. C. Minimum Pipe Stiffness (PS) at five percent deflection shall be as described in ASTM F 2306, Section 6.3 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2412. D. All HDPE Corrugated and Smooth Lined Pipe shall be certified through the Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI) Third Party Certification program. All HDPE pipe delivered and used shall bear the Third Party Administered PPI seal. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 334100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2321, “Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications”. Figure 1: Definitions of Terms for Backfill in Trench Condition: A. General Installation Requirements: Thermoplastic pipe shall be unloaded and handled with reasonable care. Pipe shall be placed in the bed starting at the downstream end. Trenches must be excavated in such a manner as to insure that the sides will be stable under all working conditions. Trench walls shall be sloped or supported in conformance with all standards of safety. Only as much trench as can be safely maintained shall be opened. All trenches shall be backfilled as soon as practicable, but no later than the end of each working day. Trench details, including foundation, bedding, haunching, initial backfill, final backfill, pipe zone, and trench width are shown in Figure 1. B. Trench Widths: Trench width shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and shall be sufficient to ensure working room to properly and safely place and compact haunching and other backfill materials. Minimum trench width shall not be less than 1.25 times the pipe outside diameter plus 12 inches. (1.25 x O.D. + 12”) Note: On multiple pipe barrel runs the clear distance between pipes is as follows: 12”-24” Diameters: Clear span =12” 24” & Greater Diameter: Clear span = ½ x Diameter C. Outside the Right-of-Way Bedding and Backfill: Bedding material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321 Class I material. A minimum of 6” of bedding shall be provided prior to placement and shall be loosely compacted. Bedding material size shall be 1½” granular material and shall extend to the springline of the pipe. Initial backfill material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321 Class I material and shall extend from the springline to 6” over the top of the pipe. Backfill material shall be placed in 6 inch lifts and compacted to 90% Std. Proctor Density. D. Inside the Right-of-Way Bedding and Backfill: Bedding material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321 Class I material. A minimum of 6” of bedding shall be provided prior to placement and shall be loosely compacted. Bedding material size shall be 1½” maximum granular material. Initial backfill material shall meet the same requirements as the bedding material and shall extend to 6 inches above the top of the pipe. Final backfill material shall meet the requirements of ASTM City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 334100 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 D2321 Class I material. All initial and final backfill material shall be placed in 6 inch lifts and compacted to 90% SPD. E. Minimum Cover: The minimum cover is one foot (1.0’) for HS-25 Live Loads (4”-42” Diameters) and two feet for (2.0’) for larger diameter structures (48”- 60” Diameter); however, care should be taken when heavy construction equipment loads cross the pipe trench during construction. If the passage of construction equipment over an installed pipeline is necessary during project construction, compacted fill in the form of a ramp shall be constructed to a minimum elevation of three (3.0’) feet over the top of the pipe. Any damaged pipe shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. F. Installation Deflection: At the Engineer’s discretion, all pipe exceeding 5% deflection may require replacement at the contractor’s expense when measured or inspected not less than 60 days following completion of installation or prior to paving operations. Deflection is defined per ASTM D 2321. All pipe shall be video inspected (CCTV) at the contractor’s expense prior to acceptance. G. Joints: Joints shall be installed that the connection of pipe sections will form a continuous line free from irregularities in the flow line. Joints shall meet one of the following: 1. Soil tight joints shall be as specified in ASTM F2306. 2. Watertight joints must meet a 74kPa (10.8 psi) laboratory test per ASTM D3212 and utilize a bell and spigot design with a gasket meeting ASTM F477. H. High Groundwater Table: In installations where a high groundwater table is encountered, a soil filter fabric as per manufacturer’s recommendations shall be installed around the initial backfill material. In flowable fill or high groundwater installations, pipe shall be restrained as per manufacturer’s recommendations. I. Measurement and Payment: This item shall be measured for payment by the linear foot. Such measurements shall be made between the ends of the barrel along its flow line. For multiple pipes, the measured length shall be the sum of the lengths of the barrels, measured as described above. Pipe shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot, complete in place, as provided by the proposal and contract. The contract price per linear foot shall be the total compensation for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work including excavation, backfill, and disposal of surplus materials in accordance with the plans and these specifications. J. Comply with requirement in 3.02 A. 3.02 LAYING AND JOINTING A. Installation: Installed tube produced to these specifications shall be installed according to the standard practice of ASTM Designation F 449 except where installations are under proposed or existing paving. Such installations must utilize an envelope of standard crushed rock bedding materials to a minimum of 6 inches above the crown of the pipe. In either case, the internal diameter of the installed barrel of the tube must not be reduced by more than 5% of its base inside diameter when measured not less than 30 days following completion of installment. B. Assembly of Joints: All joints shall be assembled in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. 3.03 BACKFILL A. After the bedding has been prepared and the pipes installed as required, backfill shall be placed in accordance with SECTION 32 18 23. If the material, when tested. fails to meet the density requirements, the backfill shall be required to be removed and replaced to meet the proper density. B. The backfill shall not be placed until the Architect/Engineer or his representative has observed the trench and authorized the placing of backfill. All debris shall be removed from the trench prior to beginning the backfilling operations. Sheet, shoring and bracing shall be pulled and removed during the progress of the backfilling in such a manner to protect the trench and the pipe. C. Backfilling shall then be brought up to an elevation slightly above the original ground level to allow for subsequent settlement. The top surface of slopes of all backfill shall be neatly graded off in a workmanlike manner, and where select topsoil, sod, or other material is removed and piled separately, such material shall be carefully replaced in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. The top 1' of backfill material shall be of as good quality as the original topsoil which was removed. 3.04 TESTING A. Testing: All polyethylene tubing shall be tested for elongation, brittleness, joint separation, quality City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 334100 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 and ring stiffness as specified in the applicable ASTM Designations. B. Rejection: This pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification, and may be retested to establish conformity in accordance with agreement between the Owner and the Contractor. END OF SECTION 334100